SAFETY and HEALTH HANDBOOK Crosstex Energy Services, L.P.

2006 Edition

LETTER TO EMPLOYEES Welcome to the new Crosstex Safety and Health Handbook. This handbook was designed to provide a solid foundation for the protection of the health and safety of our employees. We believe it will complement other initiatives designed to make Crosstex a premier company and a safe place to work. The responsibility for the protection of the safety and health of our employees and contractors lies with each one of us. This responsibility is not that of only the Safety Managers, professionals and specialists who serve as advisors, consultants, team members and mentors. If Crosstex is to effectively address safety and health issues, it must be a team effort beginning at the most senior level of Crosstex and embraced by every manager, supervisor and employee. Effective health and safety programs require commitment. Commitment means that when a hazard is discovered and reported, it is addressed and/or corrected as soon as is practical. Commitment is shown when supervisors are given time to conduct the necessary number of audits and inspections each year. Commitment is shown when employees are commended for reporting hazards, given time to attend training and safety meetings and involved in safety programs in a meaningful way. Managements commitment means providing resources for and participation in planning, organizing, leading and controlling. In other words, commitment to safety and health is an everyday requirement, a condition of employment with Crosstex and a way of life. Crosstex recognizes that safety and health are also an investment with a financial return. The loss control programs as outlined in the policy statement and in the sections of this handbook become strategic tools to protect our profitability as well as our quality of life. To ensure the overall success of this stewardship, Crosstex requires that you become familiar with the contents of this handbook, avail yourself of the applicable training programs and protective equipment, and make these policies and procedures a way of life. Safety is a Value Barry Davis President and CEO

ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY Crosstex Energy Services, L.P. (Crosstex) will provide for comprehensive employee health and safety and environmental stewardship by establishing and maintaining: Health, safety, and environmental work procedures and practices with the accompanying means of communications, education, training and enforcement that emphasize individual as well as corporate responsibility for compliance. Operations conducted with respect for the quality of the environment, and facilities and equipment meeting environmental standards consistent with available and applicable technology. Industrial hygiene, personal protection, environmental and medical monitoring programs to control harmful and toxic agents and conditions affecting employee health and welfare and the environment. Audit, analysis, monitoring and review programs to detect, eliminate o control, in advance, the r sources of personal injury, property damage, and harmful environmental releases in our operations. Loss control, accident, spill and release reporting procedures that provide a means to analyze past experience and prevent future occurrence. Effective and timely response to environmental incidents involving our facilities and equipment, or commodities and products under our control. Compliance programs that meet or exceed the regulatory requirements of the applicable governmental authority and achieve leadership in accident prevention, health protection and environmental management.

ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY (continued) Cooperation with federal, state and local governments in addressing environmental issues and developing cost -effective, scientifically-based solutions to environmental problems. Employee participation programs that provide effective and meaningful methods for employees to participate in the audits, educational opportunities and the development of progr ams designed to protect their health, safety and environment. Accountability of management, at all levels, to provide for the safety of their employees and contractors and actively participate in and support the Companys safety and environmental programs in parity with their operational responsibilities.

TABLE OF CONTENTS HANDBOOK CROSSTEX COMMITMENT Introduction...............................................................2 Employee Responsibilities .........................................3 Supervisor Responsibilities ........................................4 Safety Department Responsibilities ............................6 Contractors Responsibilities......................................7 Safety Rules ..............................................................9 New Employee Orientation......................................12 Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA .......................13 Visitor Safety...........................................................14 INCIDENT MANAGEMENT Accident and Incident Reporting .............................18 Accident and Incident Investigation..........................24 Emergency Response (HAZWOPER).......................27 Fire Protection.........................................................28 Near Miss/Potentially Serious Incident Reporting.....30 FIELD REVIEW Field and Contractor Safety Review .........................34 OSHA Notices and Inspections................................37 HUMAN PROTECTION Benzene Compliance ...............................................40 Bloodborne Pathogen Exposure Control...................41 Fall Protection and Elevated Working Surfaces ........43 Hearing Conservation ..............................................46 PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS HANDBOOK HUMAN PROTECTION (continued) Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Control.........................51 Lead Management ...................................................57 Mercury Handling....................................................59 Personal Protective Equipment .................................61 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Handling..............64 Respiratory Protection..............................................68 OPERA TIONS Blinding and Equipment Isolation ............................74 Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and Handling..................................................................76 Compressed Gas and Sample Cylinder Safety, Storage, and Transportation......................................77 Confined Space Entry ..............................................78 Cranes, Chain Hoist, and Sling Rope........................88 Electrical Safety.......................................................92 Excavation Safety....................................................98 Forklifts and Industrial Truck Safety ......................101 Hazard Communication Plan..................................102 Hazardous Material Transportation.........................106 Hot Work ..............................................................108 Lighting Gas Fired Vessels ....................................116 Lockout/Tagout Control of Hazardous Energy .....117 Machine Guarding .................................................123 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM)124 PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS HANDBOOK OPERATIONS (continued) Office Safety .........................................................127 Pressure Safety Valves and Rupture Disks..............128 Process Safety Management (PSM) ........................129 Small Boat Safety..................................................132 Vehicle Safety .......................................................133 DEFINITIONS Glossary ................................................................136 PROCEDURES (on CD) Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records Accident and Incident Investigation Accident and Incident Reporting Benzene Compliance Blinding and Equipment Isolation Bloodborne Pathogen Exposure Control Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and Handling Compressed Gas and Sample Cylinder Safety, Storage, and Transportation Confined Space Entry Cranes, Chain Hoist and Sling Rope Electrical Safety Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) Excavation Safety Fall Protection and Elevated Work ing Surfaces PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCEDURES (on CD) (continued) Field and Contractor Safety Review Fire Protection Forklifts and Industrial Truck Safety Hazard Communication Plan Hazardous Material Transportation Hearing Conservation Hot Oiling Hot Work Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Control Lead Management Lighting Gas Fired Vessels Lockout/Tagout Control of Hazardous Energy Machine Guarding Mercury Handling Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) Near Miss/Potentially Serious Incident Report New Employee Orientation Office Safety OSHA Notices and Inspections Personal Protective Equipment Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Handling Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA Pressure Safety Valves and Rupture Disks Respiratory Protection

TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCEDURES (on CD) (continued) Safety Handbook Revision Safety Meeting Requirements Safety and Warning Signs Small Boat Safety Vehicle Safety Visitor Safety FORMS (on CD) Alternative (Non-Permitted) Entry Certification Atmospheric Monitoring Auto Accident Report Boat and Trailer Checklist Chain Hoist and Sling Inspection Confined Space Entry Permit Contractor Safety Review Crane Inspection Monthly/Annual Critical Lift Plan Excavation Safety Checklist Facility Noise Survey Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist Field Safety Review General/Cold Work Permit Hazard Assessment Form Hazardous Material Shipping Paper Hepatitis B Vaccine Declination

TABLE OF CONTENTS FORMS (on CD) (continued) Hot Work Permit Ladder Inspection Checklist Ladder Inspection Tag (Portable) Liberty Mutual First Report of Injury or Illness LO/TO Isolation Verification LO/TO Master Isolation List LO/TO Periodic/Annual Inspection NORM Survey Safety Handbook Revision Request Safety Meeting Report (Plant Operations) Scaffold Permit Sign-In Roster (Field Operations) Supplemental Incident/Near Miss Investigation Form Vehicle Safety Inspection Checklist PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (on CD) TRAINING MATRIX (on CD)

CROSSTEX COMMITMENT

Page 1 of 161

INTRODUCTION This Safety and Health Handbook is being furnished to all Crosstex employees and Contractors in an effort to develop safety and health awareness and thereby prevent personal injury and damage to property both on and off the job. It covers many situations you may encounter and provides safe and environmentally -sound principles for you to follow, but it cannot cover every situation that arises, nor can every proper practice be listed. By following the guidelines set forth in this handbook, using good judgment, and always being mindful of safety and health issues, all facilities can be operated in a safe and environmentally -sound manner. Federal, state, and local laws from which much of this material was derived, are by extension, to be considered a part of this handbook and must be followed. It is the responsibility of each employee to protect themselves, their fellow workers, and the public. You are urged to become familiar with this handbook, refer to it frequently, and to comply with all the principles contained herein. Keep in mind that the material in this handbook was current as of the time it was prepared, and policies and procedures may have changed. For the most current information, always obtain the latest procedure or form from the EH&S Document Section on the Crosstex web page. Unless specifically stated in the handbook, all programs and procedures apply to all Crosstex employees, as well as to full-time and part-time consultant, agency, contract and subcontra ct personnel that work at any Crosstex facility or installation. If you have any questions regarding this handbook or the means necessary to operate safely, please discuss them with your supervisor, manager, or the Safety Department.

Page 2 of 161

EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITIES 1. Attend scheduled safety meetings and training sessions unless prior arrangements have been made. Your active participation in these meetings, sharing your thoughts and knowledge, could prevent injuries to yourself and others. Alternative arrangements for re-scheduling shall be made by your supervisor. Report to work in fit condition to perform your job in a safe manner. If additional help is needed to do a specific job, you should get it prior to doing the job. If you have any doubts or questions about any part of your job, you should discuss them with your supervisor before proceeding. Immediately report all injuries, accidents, incidents, and damage to Company property, as required, to your supervisor or to the Safety Compliance Specialist if your supervisor is unavailable. Report all oil, condensate, chemical, waste water, and natural gas spills/leaks as soon as possible to your supervisor or to the Safety Department if your supervisor is unavailable. Always perform your duties in a safe and environmentally -sound manner. Follow proper procedures and use the proper tools and equipment in your daily work. If you need additional equipment or information, contact your supervisor. Read, understand, and adhere to the procedures and programs described in this handbook.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

Page 3 of 161

EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 8. Never bypass or otherwise make inoperable any safety device unless prescribed by operating or maintenance procedures or specifically permitted in writing by a supervisor. Report all safety malfunctions to your supervisor as soon as possible and flag the device immediately to warn others of the hazard. Report any observed unsafe practices or conditions to your immediate supervisor. However, if you see an act that is immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH), correct the situation as soon as possible prior to reporting to your supervisor, if you can do so safely.

9.

10. Use required personal protective equipment. 11. Observe all safety rules and work procedures as a condition of your employment. 12. Develop safe work habits and attitudes and encourage safe behavior and attitudes in fellow employees. 13. If you work in a safety-sensitive position, inform your supervisor of prescribed medications being taken while on the job and disclose possible side effects detailed in the information provided by the pharmacist. Employees name, date and prescription number must be on the prescription container and no more than one kind of medication should be in each container. SUPERVISOR/FOREMAN/PERSON-IN-CHARGE RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. 3. Observe and support Crosstex Safety Policy. Set a safe and environmentally -sound example for employees to follow. Be knowledgeable of the hazards associated with each operation.
Page 4 of 161

SUPERVISOR/FOREMAN/PERSON-IN-CHARGE RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Communicate safe and environmentally -sound working procedures to each employee. Enforce all safety rules and regulations. Facilitate regular safety meetings with employees. Attend scheduled safety meetings and training sessions. Report all accidents/incidents t o the Safety Department in a timely manner, by telephone, and by using properly completed forms. Investigate all accidents/incidents and recommend corrective actions. Complete and distribute all safety reports, including proper permits for all hazardous work procedures in a timely manner.

9.

10. Perform safety evaluations and audits as frequently as necessary to ensure that physical and mechanical hazards or unsafe work practices are prevented or properly controlled. 11. Ensure that emergency safety equipment is in good working condition. 12. Document formal audits, evaluations and corrective actions. 13. When new or hazardous work is being undertaken, hold pre-job safety briefings. 14. Brief contractors on applicable Company environmental, health and safety policy and procedures. Obtain information on hazardous procedures or chemicals to be stored or used at the location by the contractor and supply this information to the contractor on behalf of Crosstex.

Page 5 of 161

SUPERVISOR/FOREMAN/PERSON-IN-CHARGE RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 15. Where inherent hazards exist and cannot be eliminated, familiarize the work group with the situation and develop a safe method for controlling hazards. 16. Review all design and operational revisions in your area with the Engineering and Safety Departments as necessary during the design and construction phase of the project to ensure they are in accordance with all approved standards and codes. More formal procedures to deal with management of change are prescribed by PSM Standards for certain processing operations. 17. Contact the Safety Department to obtain appropriate safety training for employees when there is a change in their employees job functions or new employees are hired. SAFETY DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. Provide/facilitate safety and health training to employees. Maintain records of training, accident/incident investigations, medical monitoring, health and safety audits/reviews, equipment history, etc. as required by Crosstex Safety and Health policy and procedures. Manage health and safety audit/review program. Periodically review the effectiveness of all safety and health programs and procedures and revise as needed. Conduct Due Diligence on proposed acquisitions. Provide technical support for field operations safety and health activities.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Page 6 of 161

SAFETY DEPARTMENT RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 7. Facilitate incident investigations and related follow-up on preventative measures or action items. Develop and communicate Safety and Health policies and procedures and assist operations to facilitate implementation. Work with Operations management to set safety and health goals, measures, and targets.

8.

9.

10. Compile safety and health-related incident statistics and trend data for recommendations for improvements. 11. Set an example by working safely. 12. Stop/shutdown unsafe work by employees or contractors and promptly facilitate corrective actions to unsafe acts/conditions. 13. Assist operations as appropriate with pre-job safety meetings and orientation of new personnel/contractors. 14. Facilitate Drug and Alcohol testing program with assistance from HR. 15. Facilitate DOT Operator Qualification and DOT Public Awareness programs with applicable operations. 16. Facilitate Process Safety Management programs with applicable operations. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 1. 2. Comply with all applicable Company policies, procedures and programs. Comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, regulations and standards.

Page 7 of 161

CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 3. Ensure their employees are properly trained and knowledgeable of applicable health and safety regulations, requirements and procedures. Conduct pre-job safety briefings prior to the days work/job/task. When requested, provide documentation of employee qualifications, certifications and/or required training. When requested, provide proof of adequate/required insurance coverage and indemnification of Crosstex and/or documentation of environmental, health and safety programs. Provide and maintain required safety equipment. Enforce the use of safety, monitoring and personal protective equipment by their employees. Advise Crosstex supervisor of any chemicals to be stored or used, and hazardous procedures to be used at the location by their employees. If appropriate, request the same information from Crosstex with regard to the Companys chemicals and procedures. Never operate Company valves or equipment without Company approval.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10. Never bypass or otherwise make inoperable any safety device unless prescribed by operating or maintenance procedures or specifically permitted in writing by a Crosstex supervisor. Report all safety device malfunctions to a Crosstex supervisor as soon as possible and flag the device immediately to warn others of the hazard.

Page 8 of 161

CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES (continued) 11. Report any observed unsafe practices or conditions to a Crosstex supervisor. However, if you see an act that is immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH), take appropriate actions to correct the situation as soon as possible. 12. Report all accidents, injuries, spills or releases to a Crosstex supervisor or representative immediately. 13. Provide a representative on-site who can communicate with all contract and Company personnel at all times. SAFETY RULES The Company will enforce compliance of its safety policies and practices. 1. Report all injuries, vehicle collisions, near misses, fires, and any unsafe condition or practice, no matter how slight, to your supervisor. Hold a pre-job safety meeting to review procedures, equipment locations, and emergency plans. Seat belts are required for all occupants during the operat ion of Company vehicles or any vehicle being used for Company business. It is the drivers responsibility to ensure everyone has the seatbelt fastened before the vehicle is placed in motion. When lifting or moving loads, assess the weight, bulkiness of the item and the route of travel. Use proper lifting techniques. When the load is too heavy for one person to lift, ask for assistance or use a mechanical lifting device. Use handrails when ascending or descending stairways.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Page 9 of 161

SAFETY RULES (continued) 6. The use, possession and distribution of illegal drugs, deadly weapons or unauthorized explosives while on Company premises, in Company vehicles, or rental/personal vehicles while on company business is prohibited. Operation of equipment having a DANGER, DO NOT OPERATE tag is prohibited. Under normal operations, all operating machinery and electrical switchgear is required to have all safety guards, switches and alarms in place and functional. All block valves under pressure relief valves must be locked or sealed open.

7. 8.

9.

10. Finger rings, loose clothing, unsecured long hair (below collar), watches, and other loose accessories shall not be worn when within arms length of operating machinery or electrical switchgear. 11. Always use proper tools and equipment for the job. Do not use a damaged or an incorrect tool to perform your task. Damaged tools are to be replaced, repaired, or discarded. 12. Erect barricades, flags or barricade tape around areas of hazardous work, holes, floor openings, overhead work zones, and exposed energized circuits. Overhead protection may also be utilized when applicable. Excavations must be flagged or fenced when in populated areas. 13. Emergency safety equipment such as fire extinguishers, eyewash stations, AEDs and selfcontained breathing apparatus shall be inspected monthly. Alarm boxes, fire doors, first aid kits and all other emergency equipment must be well maintained and readily accessible. 14. Smoking on Company premises is restricted to designated areas only.
Page 10 of 161

SAFETY RULES (continued) 15. Whenever a safety device is removed from service and/or defeated, the appropriate supervisor and affected parties shall be notified, the device tagged, the proper remedial action taken, and the action properly documented. For PSM facilities, a Management of Change Form is required. 16. A supervisors approval is required before going on top of a production tank. The integrity of the tank shall be carefully checked and proper fall protection must be in place before going on top of a tank. 17. Do not walk or stand on storage tanks or piping unless they are equipped with properly designed walkways. 18. Do not stand in front of the opening when opening equipment (i.e. pig launcher/receiver, bull plug, valve, etc.). 19. Non-intrinsically safe equipment such as cell phones, pagers, cameras, and laptop computers, etc. are not to be operated in classified areas unless cleared by the Hot Work Permitting process.

Page 11 of 161

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION Policy Safety and environmental awareness is of prime importance at all Crosstex locations. The purpose of this orientation program is to highlight some of the more significant portions of our EH&S policies and programs. Description The ingredients for a safe working environment are management's commitment, a knowledgeable supervisory staff and a conscientious work force where each individual is dedicated to the principle that accident prevention is an essential part of planning and efficient execution of every job. Safety rules by themselves cannot prevent accidents. Crosstex employees and contract employees, as well as all visitors, are considered to be important parts of our safety team and it takes all of us to work safely. Cooperation with Crosstex safety and environmental policies will help ensure the safety of all employees, contractors and visit ors. It is everyones responsibility to comply with all Crosstex policies and procedures, and to work in such a manner as to prevent injury to themselves and to those working around them. All accidents can be prevented. Training Required prior to beginnin g work. Includes basic safety training.

Documentation Record Employee Training Records Custodian Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation

Procedures (See CD)

Page 12 of 161

PRE-JOB/TAILGATE SAFETY MEETING/JSA Policy Crosstex will identify and mitigate w orkplace hazards through the use of Pre-job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA. Hazards shall be eliminated or controlled to the extent feasible in order to ensure the safety of personnel performing work. The Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA shall be documented on the Cold Work Permit Form. Exception: This Program does not apply to work completed under the provisions of the Crosstex Hot Work Permitting Standard. Training Initial training during new employee orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA Report Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA Program Custodian Field/Facility Office Retention

5 years 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Safety Department

Page 13 of 161

VISITOR SAFETY Policy Crosstex will minimize visitor exposures to hazards through the use of safety orientations, industrial hygiene assessments, engineering and workplace controls, safe work procedures, and personal protective equipment. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. b. c. Observe safe work practices. Inform their supervisor if any visitors will be on Company premises. Inform their supervisor of any hazards that they feel are not adequately addressed in this program.

2.

Supervisors shall: a. b. Ensure that employees understand the requirements of t his program. Ensure the availability and proper use of safety eyewear, hard hats and hearing protection. Ensure all unaccompanied visitors and/or contractors at PSM facilities and other facilities requiring evacuation plans receive a brief safety orientation covering the following, at a minimum: Crosstex Smoking and Drug and Alcohol Policies; facility alarms and emergency/evacuation procedures; hazardous locations and substances that may be encountered; MSDSs for hazardous substances that may be encountered; personal protective equipment requirements; and reporting requirements for accidents/incidents and near misses.

c.

Page 14 of 161

VISITOR SAFETY (continued) 3. Safety Department shall: a. Assist in conducting or providing orientations and ensuring that safe work practices are understood and followed. Ensure that the program is fully implemented. Evaluate the program and updating the written plan as necessary.

b. c. Training

Safety orientations for visitors entering plant or process areas conducted annually and when hazards change. Orientations conducted prior to visitor entry into Crosstex facilities, unless escorted by company personnel.

Documentation Record Visitor Orientation Sign-In Sheet Visitor Safety Program Custodian Field Office/Plant Safety Department Retention 1 year 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 15 of 161

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 16 of 161

INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

Page 17 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING Policy All accidents and incidents must be reported in a timely manner to the appropriate safety compliance specialist, using standardized reporting procedures. Auto Accident Guidelines Use these guidelines, if practical, when you have an auto accident: 1. 2. Call for help. Utilize a cell phone or have someone assist you by using a landline. Secure the area. Take preventative measures to reduce risk of additional vehicle incidents or injures due to the location of the vehicles to the flow of traffic or risk to injured occupants. Administer First Aid if qualified and applicable. Notify your family or o thers that you were involved in vehicle accident. Cooperate with local officials as necessary in the investigation, but do not admit fault. Gather witness statements or information and photos of the accident if you have a camera. Exchange auto insurance information with the other parties. Contact your Supervisor as soon as practical and give him the facts of the incident. If anyone is transported by ambulance, or is hospitalized, immediately report the accident to your Safety Compliance Specialist.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. Report automotive accidents resulting only in first aid or property damage, to the Safety Compliance Specialist by the next business day.

Page 18 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING (continued) 11. The First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual) shall be utilized in all Company vehicle accidents and must be completed and forwarded (faxed) to your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of an accident. Covered Person Injuries 1. All Covered Person injuries occurring on the job must be reported to your direct supervisor or manager. Injuries requiring a visit to a doctor or an emergency clinic, or loss of consciousness must be reported to your supervisor immediately. Injuries resulting in hospitalization or death must be reported immediately to your supervisor, and then to your Safety Compliance Specialist. NOTE: Certain hospitalizations and all fatalities must be reported to OSHA (US Occupational Safety and Health Administration) within 8 hours, so your timely report is critical. 4. First aid injuries, or overexertion/strain must be reported to your supervisor by the end of your shift and to your Safety Compliance Specialist by the next business day. In emergencies, the Initial Emergency Response Report shall be completed and forwarded (e-mail or fax) to the Safety Department. The First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual) (see Forms section on CD) must be completed and forwarded to your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of an injury.

2.

3.

5.

Page 19 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING (continued) Spills or Releases 1. 2. Immediately report all spills, leaks and releases to your supervisor. Immediately report spills of hydrocarbons such as oil or condensate, that produce a sheen on water, to your direct supervisor and in turn, to your Safety Compliance Specialist, if they reach a creek, river, pond, lake, bay, the ocean or a tributary leading to a body of water such as the above. Some chemicals have very low reporting thresholds for spills or leaks. If in doubt, call your Safety Compliance Specialist. Immediately report spills, leaks and releases resulting in injury requiring medical treatment or fatality, third party property damage, response by fire, law enforcement or medical personnel, or clean-up beyond what an individual Covered Person can handle within their shift to your direct supervisor, and turn in a Initial Emergency Response Report to your Environmental Compliance Specialist . If Covered Person injuries have occurred, fill out First Report of Injury Form.

3.

4.

Page 20 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING (continued) 5. Any incident or loss on a DOT jurisdictional facility requires that an Incident/Loss Report as provided in Section 2.11 of the Crosstex Operation, Maintenance and Construction Manual be completed in each case and forwarded to local management and the Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of the incident. If required, the Pipeline Leak Report (Section 2.11) and the Federal DOT Incident Report Gas Transmission and Gathering Systems as found in Section 2.12 of the Crosstex Operation, Maintenance and Co nstruction Manual must be completed (if only tentatively) and forwarded to local management and your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of the incident.

Incident Reporting Incidents other than those listed above would include for example: property damage such as loads lost from cranes while suspended, catastrophic equipment failure not resulting in injury or spills, and security-related incidents such as vandalism/theft, workplace harassment/violence, or suspected drug activity. Generally, reporting of these incidents to your Safety Compliance Specialist the next business day is acceptable. If law enforcement, fire protection, public evacuation or other extraordinary assistance is required, these incidents must be reported to your Safety Compliance Specialist immediately. Use the Supplemental Incident/Near Miss Investigation Form for these types of incidents.

Page 21 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING (continued) Drug and Alcohol Testing Drug and/or alcohol testing is required: 1. 2. Following an on-the-job injury requiring professional medical attention. Following a first aid injury if the supervisor believes that the incident was or could have been catastrophic for a PSM facility or significant for a DOT facility. Following a serious or potentially serious accident or incident, including near misses, in which safety precautions were violated. When unsafe instructions or orders were given. When boats, company vehicles, rental equipment or property were damaged, except that drug/alcohol testing is not required for incidents of vehicle damage when the vehicle was unoccupied and legally parked. When unusually careless acts were performed. Where the accident or incident was caused by the failure to wear prescribed personal protective equipment. Where supervisor has reasonable suspicion to believe that drugs or alcohol may have been involved. NOTE: If testing was not performed, the supervisor or manager shall provide an explanation for not testing.

3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8.

Page 22 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING (continued) All persons involved in and within the immediate vicinity of the accident or incident may be subjected to urine testing or evidential breath testing, or other method. 1. If a Covered Person is unconscious or seriously injured and will be taken to a medical facility for treatment, a urine specimen for testing will be collected if possible. If urine is collected, it will be analyzed for drugs, alcohol, and other prohibited substances. If a Covered Person is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent to the procedure, the medical facility shall collect the specimen.

2. 3.

Drug testing shall not be required if an individual sustains an injury due to the deliberate actions of another individual that could constitute criminal conduct or due to being bitten or attacked by an animal. For additional details on drug testing and for information on how it applies to DOT pipelines, see procedure on CD. Training Drug and alcohol awareness training is provided to all employees, as part of New Employee Orientation, and as needed thereafter. Additional training on the recognition of drug and alcohol problems is provided for supervisors. Procedures (see CD)

Page 23 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION Policy All accidents/incidents are important, regardless of the severity of the consequences. Investigation shall be conducted for employee injuries, accidents in company vehicles, leaks/spills/releases, near misses, equipment failures and property damage. Responsibilities 1. 2. Employees shall report all accidents and incidents to their supervisor. Person in Charge (PIC) and Supervisors shall: a. Immediately notify the Safety Department of any accident, incident, spill/leak, or near miss. Follow required reporting procedures. Conduct accident/incident investigation. Document investigation on appropriate form.

b. c. d. 3.

For facilities covered under Process Safety Management (PSM), 29 CFR 1910.119(m), the following procedures shall be utilized to investigate each incident which resulted in, or could reasonably have resulted in a catastrophic release of highly hazardous chemical in the work place: a. Local Operations Management shall assemble an investigation team within 48 hours of the time of the incident. The team shall include the necessary disciplines to complete a thorough investigation of the circumstances leading to the accident/incident.

b.

Page 24 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION (continued) c. Upon conclusion of the investigation, local management shall communicate the information in a report to the affected Company or contractor employees. The accident/incident investigation must be documented using the Process Safety Management (PSM) Incident Investigation Form (located in the PSM Program folder of the CD) and any of the following that apply:

d.

First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual) Spill/Release Report Supplemental Incident/Near Miss Investigation Report

e.

The report shall contain the following:

Date of the accident/incident Date the investigation began Description of the accident/incident Description of the contributing factors Recommended solutions to avoid recurrence.

f.

The report shall include a time-table that outlines the implementation schedule for initiation of recommended corrective actions. The report will be maintained on file for a minimum of five (5) years.

g.

Page 25 of 161

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION (continued) Training

Initial training at new employee orientation. Refresher training as needed thereafter.

Documentation Record Accident and Incident Investigations Accident/Incident Investigation Program Custodian Field Office and Safety Department Safety Department Retention 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 26 of 161

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) Policy Crosstex will provide a safe workplace to guard against employee exposures or the reasonable possibility of employee exposures to s afety and health hazards which may occur during the control and clean-up of a spill or release. This section applies to DOT operations where hazardous materials are present or handled. Training Employees will receive training specific to their duties in emergency response and hazardous waste operations. Details of the training program are on the Procedure section of the CD. Documentation Record Employee Training Records Custodian Safety Department Field Office, Safety Department Retention 30 years after separation Current plan; 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Emergency Response Plans Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Program Procedure (See CD)

Safety Department

Page 27 of 161

FIRE PROTECTION Policy Only employees who have been adequately trained on the use of fire extinguishers or small hose systems are authorized to fight incipient stage fires (see Glossary). Crosstex employees are not authorized to attempt to extinguish any fire that has progressed beyond the incipient stage. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Become familiar with the facility emergency action plan, understand the actions to be taken, and ensure that fire emergency actions are initiated promptly. Know whether or not th ey are authorized and trained to attempt extinguishment of incipient stage fires. Understand that injury prevention is Crosstex highest priority, and that fighting incipient stage fires, when authorized, should only be undertaken when it can be done safely.

b.

c.

2.

The Safety Department shall: a. b. Ensure that personnel understand their responsibilities under this policy. Ensure that personnel are trained in the facility emergency action plans and in fire extinguisher use and maintenance.

Training Personnel who are aut horized to respond to incipient stage fires shall receive initial hands-on training and annual refresher training.

Page 28 of 161

FIRE PROTECTION (continued) Documentation Record Training Records Fire Fighting Policy (HES Standard) Procedures (see CD) Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 29 of 161

NEAR MISS/POTENTIALLY SERIOUS INCIDENT REPORTING Policy Crosstex will provide a safe workplace for all personnel. One way to accomplish a safe workplace is to develop proactive programs, such as Near Miss Reporting in order to prevent future occurrences that may result in injuries to personnel or damage to the environment and/or Company property. Description A near miss is an unplanned occurrence that interferes with or interrupts the orderly progress of work, which under slightly different circumstances, could have resulted in personal injury, damage to Company property or the environment, but where no actual loss occurred. Crosstex has developed a valuable asset protection strategy by using a near miss incident reporting, analysis, and documentation system in order to prevent a future occurrence. Training Initial training on the definition of a Near Miss and the importance of reporting near misses and potentially serious incidents is provided for new employees during orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Page 30 of 161

NEAR MISS/POTENTIALLY SERIOUS INCIDENT REPORTING (Continued) Documentation Record Employee Training Records Near Miss/Potentially Serious Incident Program Procedure (see CD) Custodian Safety Depart ment Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation or employment 5 years

Page 31 of 161

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 32 of 161

FIELD REVIEW

Page 33 of 161

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW Policy Crosstex will periodically review its field operations and that of selected independent contractors to ensure that systems are in place to review, measure, and improve conformance with safety regulations and industry standards. The reviews are intended to identify strengths and deficiencies. Higher risk facilities and/or frequently used contractors performing higher risk work will be prioritized for review. Pre-notification of the review will be provided. Description This program establishes a protocol for the review of Crosstex Safety management programs. A review is defined as the evaluation of compliance with Company policies and Government Regulations and associated management systems. The protocol also addresses the requirements of Crosstex Safety Policy Statement, Minimum Loss Prevention Requirements, Master Service Policy and Companys Code of Business Conduct. Types of reviews include: 1. Field Safety Review Periodic review conducted in each area by Safety Department and area operating (field) supervisors/managers to selfmonitor their Safety performance. Contractor Safety Review Review typically conducted by the Safety Department and area operating (field) supervisors/ managers to provide an assessment of the contractors overall Safety compliance status.

2.

This program applies to all Crosstex Divisional Operations and applicable independent contractors working on Crosstex facilities.

Page 34 of 161

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW (continued) Responsibilities 1. Crosstex Operations, Construction and Engineering employees shall: a. b. 2. Understand the provisions of this program. Participate in Field/Contractor Safety Reviews as requested.

Review Team Members shall supply their notes and individual findings to the Review Team Leader. Review Team Leaders shall compile findings from the review team and issue a final report. Divisional Operations Supervisors/Managers shall: a. b. c. d. Select and make available employees to conduct Field/Contractor Safety Reviews. Assist Safety Department in setting review schedule. Address the review findings and ensure all issues identified are resolved. Assist the Safety Department in tracking all reviews conducted in their area until all issues have been resolved.

3. 4.

5.

Safety Department shall: a. Develop Field/Contractor Safety Review questionnaires using the standardized formats found on the Excel review program (See Forms section on CD). Select facilities/sites and set the quarterly review schedule in conjunction with the Operations Supervisors/ Managers.
Page 35 of 161

b.

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW (continued) c. Maintain the review documentation and assist the Supervisor(s) in tracking the action items to closure.

6.

Divisional Management shall: a. b. Provide leadership, support and necessary resources to perform reviews. Support review process and provide resources to mitigate items to closure.

Training Review Team members are not required to receive formal training. However, members of the team will be provided with adequate resources to fulfill assigned review duties. In addition, a brief orientation will be conducted prior to the review. Documentation Record Completed Review Action Item List Completed Review Action Item List Custodian Field/Plant Office Safety Department Retention 6 Months* 6 Months*

* Review reports may be retained longer if the review action items have not been closed out or if a successive review has been requested. Procedures (See CD)

Page 36 of 161

OSHA NOTICES AND INSPECTIONS Policy Crosstex will furnish employees with a place of employment that is free from recognized hazards with the potential to cause death or serious physical harm. Crosstex will comply with occupational safety and health standards and ensure that employees comply with standards, rules, regulations and orders issued under the OSHA Act which are applicable to their own actions and conduct. Training Initial training as part of the new employee orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Employee Training Records OSHA Inspection Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 37 of 161

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 38 of 161

HUMAN PROTECTION

Page 39 of 161

BENZENE COMPLIANCE Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures to be followed at locations where benzene is routinely produced, reacted, used, stored, or handled in the work environment. At Crosstex, these include pipeline product tanks, pigging, treating equipment, and maintenance activities. This program is designed to prevent or minimize personnel exposure to benzene and provide for protection through education in safe work practices, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment. Training

Prior to initial assignment for employees covered under OSHA Benzene Standard. Annually if exposures are above the Action Level.

Documentation Record Employee Exposure Monitoring Medical Surveillance Records Employee Training Records Benzene Compliance Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 40 of 161

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL Policy Crosstex will maintain a written exposure control plan for the protection of personnel against HBV (Hepatitis B) and HIV (Aids), along with any pathogenic microorganism that is present in human blood and can infect and cause disease in persons who are e xposed to blood containing the pathogen. Other examples include Hepatitis C, Malaria, Syphilis, Babesiosis, Brucellosis, Leptospirosis, Arboviral infections, relapsing fever, Crueutzfeld-Jakob disease, Human T -Lymphotrophic Virus Type 1, and Viral Hemorrhagic Fever. Description The purpose of this program is to provide control measures and procedures to be followed to prevent occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens and other potentially infectious materials. This program covers all Crosstex employees who are required to render medical assistance as part of their job duties. This primarily includes doctors, nurses, and employees designated by the Company. Although employees are generally expected to voluntarily render first aid, Crosstex will apply t e h provisions of this program to all employees trained in first aid and those who render aid to fellow employees. A written control plan for occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens is maintained in the facility safety records. Crosstex employees are not required to render first aid or CPR, unless the performance of first aid is a part of an employees designated job duty or the employee is participating in a special emergency medical response organization.

Page 41 of 161

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued) Crosstex trains many employees in first aid and CPR as part of the Companys ongoing safety program. Understanding the seriousness of injuries and illnesses and the associated first aid procedures instills a positive attitude toward working safely. When emergency situations occur, the Company wants employees to have all the skills necessary to handle the situation, but under no circumstances will any employee be forced to perform first aid or CPR against their personal judgment. If employees have questions regarding the performance of first aid or CPR, they should contact their supervisor, their safety compliance specialist, or the Safety Department. Training At initial assignment for affected employees. Annually thereafter.

Documentation Record Employee Medical and/or Exposure Records Employee Training Records Bloodborne Pathogen Control Program Procedures (See CD) Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 30 years after separation 3 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Page 42 of 161

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES Policy All installations and facilities will provide adequate protection for personnel from the risk of falling by determining fall hazards and establishing bas ic practices and procedures to protect against those fall hazards. Description The purpose of this program is to ensure that fall hazards are assessed and that personnel are protected from injury. This procedure ensures that the proper precautions are taken while working on or from scaffolding, ladders, fixed industrial stairs, unguarded edges, floor openings, aerial lifts, etc. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. b. Recognize fall hazards. Discuss any uncertainties about identification of a fall hazard with the Competent Person. Use the appropriate fall protecting equipment when needed.

c. 2.

Competent Persons shall: a. b. Assist with the selection of personal fall arrest systems and anchorage points. Inspect fall protection equipment and complete the Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist Form. Inspect ladders and document with ladder tags. Supervise the erection, moving, dismantling, or altering of scaffolding.
Page 43 of 161

c. d.

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES (continued) 3. Person-In-Charge shall: a. b. c. 4. Recognize fall hazards. Answer questions about the components of a personal fall arrest system. Make or seek determinations about the strength and integrity of anchor points.

Supervisors shall: a. b. Ensure all employees are trained, and adhere to fall protection procedures. Ensure that inspections of fall protection equipment are performed and any deficiencies addressed and corrected.

5.

The Safety Department shall assist with the development and design of fall protection plans when requested by field personnel.

Training Provided initially and periodically for employees who may work on an elevated surface. Retraining when job assignment involves new hazards or equipment. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation 1. Ladder Inspection Checklist Form: This checklist is documented by punching and signing the Portable Ladder Inspection Tag; therefore, no paper record is generated.

Page 44 of 161

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES (continued) 2. Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist Form: Once the Competent Person completes the form, it is routed through the facilitys PIC (if different than the competent person) and the supervisor responsible for the facility, to the Safety Department. Copies of these forms are on the CD. Record Employee Training Records Ladder Inspection Tags Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist Fall Protection and Elevated Working Surfaces Program Definitions Competent Person A person who has been trained as a Competent Person in accordance with this Safety Program and who is capable of identifying existing and predictable workplace hazards or working conditio ns that may be hazardous or dangerous to employees. A competent person has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate these hazards and conditions. NOTE: Different qualifications are required for Competent Persons in the areas of ladders, scaffolds and fall protection systems. Procedures (See CD)
Page 45 of 161

Custodian Safety Department Attached to ladder Safety Department

Retention Length of employment plus 3 years Current

7 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Safety Department

HEARING CONSERVATION Policy Crosstex will control employee exposure to excessive noise using engineering controls where feasible, and through the use of administrative controls and/or work practices including appropriate hearing protective equipment, when noise reduction methods are not feasible. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. b. Wear appropriate hearing protection in areas identified as high noise areas. Perform their job duties in a normal and routine manner when requested to wear an audiodosimeter. Wear the audiodosimeter during the time period requested unless removal is absolutely necessary to safely perform a task. Avoid the following while being monitored for noise exposure:

c.

d.

Shouting into the audiodosimeter microphone. Covering it with an outer garment. Unnecessarily placing it next to a high noise source. Purposely taking any other action that will cause inaccurate or incorrect readings.

e.

Report daily work activities and abnormal tasks at the end of the test period to the Safety Compliance Specialist conducting the personal noise monitoring.
Page 46 of 161

HEARING CONSERVATION (continued) 2. Local Program Administrator (Safety Compliance Specialist) shall: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Identify work areas and tasks that require workers to wear hearing protection. Identify covered employees subject to the provisions of this program. Administer the medical surveillance portion of this Program. Select appropriate hearing protection equipment for use by personnel. Ensure that hearing protection is used properly. Arrange for and/or conduct training. Maintain required documentation. Record OSHA recordable incidents identified in this program on the OSHA record-keeping log.

3.

Supervisors shall: a. Notify the Safety Department if any significant changes occur to equipment, processes or facilities that affect noise levels. Coordinate with the Local Program Administrator to assure that employees receive appropriate training and medical evaluations in accordance with this Program. Consider noise level impacts associated with new or modified equipment or facilities.

b.

c. 4.

Safety Department shall: a. Act as the Local Program Administrator for this Program or select a designee.
Page 47 of 161

HEARING CONSERVATION (continued) b. Evaluate engineering controls for equipment and facilities to limit employee noise exposures where feasible. Provide employee exposure notifications and summaries from any noise monitoring that was conducted. Conduct monitoring for any incident(s) identified from medical monitoring of covered employees that meet the OSHA criteria as being recordable.

c.

d.

Training When initially included in the program. Annually thereafter. A copy of the OSHA Hearing Conservation Amendment to the Noise Standard will be posted at each facility with covered employees.

Page 48 of 161

HEARING CONSER VATION (continued) Documentation Record Facility Noise Surveys Employee Exposure Monitoring Noise Sample Data Sheets Exposure Notification Reports Covered Employees List Audiometric Report Audiometric Summaries/ Correspondence Employee Training Records Hearing Conservation Program Definitions 1. Covered Employee - An employee whose timeweighted average (TWA) exposure to noise exceeds the Action Level (85 dBA) and, therefore, requires annual audiometric t esting and training.
Page 49 of 161

Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department

Retention 6 months after revised, superseded or obsolete 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 30 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

HEARING CONSERVATION (continued) 2. Facility Noise Survey Measurements collected by the Safety Compliance Specialist using a sound level meter to characterize the noise levels at a facility or area.

Procedure (See CD)

Page 50 of 161

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL Policy Crosstex will minimize personnel exposures to hydrogen sulfide gas through a combination of industrial hygiene assessments, engineering and workplace controls, safe work procedures, personal protective equipment, and exposure monitoring. Exemption: Facilities where it has been confirmed that H2 S is either not present (via surveys, gas samples, etc), or where periodic atmospheric testing has confirmed that the maximum ambient breathing zone concentrations cannot reach or exceed 10 ppm, including inside confined spaces such as tank head spaces, pressure vessels, etc., are exempt from this program. Toxicity of Hydrogen Sulfide Data presented in the table on the next page represents breathing zone exposures and are based on experiments with dogs, which have susceptibility similar to humans.

Page 51 of 161

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued)

H2 S ppm 50 to 100 02 minutes 0 - 15 minutes 15 30 minutes

100 to 150

Coughing; irritation of eyes; loss of sense of smell

Disturbed respiration; pain in eyes; sleepiness

150 to 200 250 to 350 Irritation of eyes; loss of sense of smell

Loss of sense of smell

Throat & eye irritation

Irritation of eyes

Painful secretion of tears; weariness Difficult respiration coughing; irritation of eyes

350

Irritation of eyes; loss of sense of smell

500

Coughing; collapse; unconsciousness

Respiratory disturbances; irritation of eyes; collapse

Serious eye irritation; palpitation of heart; possible death

600 to 1500

Collapse; unconsciousness; death

Collapse; unconsciousness; death

Page 52 of 161

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued)

30 mins to 1 hour Mild Conjunctivitis; respiratory tract irritation Throat irritation 1- 4 hours 48 hours 8 - 48 hours

Throat & eye irritation

Nasal irritation; pain in eyes; difficulty breathing Increased irritation of eyes and nasal tract; dull head pain; weariness

Salivation & mucous discharge; sharp pain in eyes; coughing Difficulty breathing; blurred vision Hemorrhage; death

Increased symptoms

Hemorrhage; death

Serious irritating effects

Hemorrhage; death

Dizziness weakness; increased eye and nasal irritation; death

Death

Severe pain in eyes and head; dizziness; trembling of extremities; great weakness; death

Page 53 of 161

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued) Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Levels Breathing zone concentration at which it is believed that most workers may repeatedly be exposed on a daily basis, for 8 hours per day without adverse effect. Breathing zone exposure for 1 hour may cause death. Breathing zone exposure will cause death within a short time.

Threshold

10 ppm

Hazardous Lethal

250 ppm 600 ppm

Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Observe safe work practices, including the use of respirators, gloves, goggles and chemical protective clothing when necessary. Complete medical evaluation(s) required by this program. Complete training required by this program. Inspect, clean, disinfect and store respirators in accordance with this program. Serve as a standby person when required by safe work practices. Inform their supervisor if any respirator fit or use problems are encountered. Immediately remove defective respirators or equipment from service upon discovery of any defect.

b. c. d. e. f. g.

Page 54 of 161

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued) h. Inform their supervisor of any hazards that they feel are not adequately addressed in this program.

2.

Supervisors shall: a. Ensure that employees receive appropriate training, fit testing, and medical evaluations in accordance with this Program. Ensure that personnel properly utilize and calibrate personal and portable toxic gas detectors (personal monitors). Ensure the availability and proper use of appropriate respiratory equipment. Be aware of tasks requiring respiratory protection. Ensure that respirators are worn properly and that standby personnel/rescue personnel are provided/utilized as needed. Ensure that engineering controls are maintained in working condition (where applicable).

b.

c. d. e.

f.

3.

Safety Department shall: a. b. Identify work areas, processes and tasks that require the use of engineering controls. Designate tasks and facilities where workers must observe specialized work practices for hydrogen sulfide by conducting appropriate hazard analyses. Select appropriate respiratory equipment for use by personnel. Arrange for and/or conduct training for working in hydrogen sulfide environments.
Page 55 of 161

c. d.

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued) e. f. g. Training Initial training provided to each affected person. Card issued to certify training completed. Training annually. Ensure that the program is fully implemented. Evaluate the program bi-annually and update the written plan as necessary. Maintain required records.

Documentation Record Covered Employee List Facility Atmospheric Monitoring Data Employee Exposure Monitoring Summaries Employee Exposure Notifications Monitor Calibration Records (Fixed and Portable) Procedures (See CD) Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation 30 years

30 years after separation 30 years after separation

Facility

Current + 1 year

Page 56 of 161

LEAD MANAGEMENT Policy Crosstex will stress the use of engineering controls and good work practices and will not use respirators as the sole means of protection when engineering controls are feasible. Crosstex will also ensure that the applicable OSHA lead standard, depending upon the work activity, is followed when working with any paint or coating found to contain lead. Description Lead exposures can arise from certain work activities, including removing paint from surfaces coated with leadcontaining paint. Operations that can potentially generate lead dust and fumes include flame-torch cutting, welding, the use of heat guns, sanding, scraping, and grinding of lead painted surfaces in repair, reconstruction, dismantling, demolition, remodeling, or lead-abatement work. Maintaining process equipment or exhaust duct work and other operations such as lead soldering, etc. can also result in lead exposures. The purpose of this program is to establish procedures to prevent personnel exposure to lead concentrations greater than 50 micrograms per cubic meter of air during an 8hour work period. Training Prior to initial assignment. Annually thereafter.

Page 57 of 161

LEAD MANAGEMENT (continued) Documentation Record Training Records Monitoring Records Medical Removal Record Lead Management Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 5 years 40 years (or for the duration of employment plus 20 years) Duration of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Safety Department Safety Department

Procedures (See CD)

Page 58 of 161

MERCURY HANDLING Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures to be followed at locations where mercury metal, its vapors, fumes, mists, or solutions, or inorganic mercury compound dusts, mists, solutions or vapors are routinely produced, reacted, used, stored, or handled in the work environment. Description The purpose of this program is to prevent or minimize personnel exposure to mercury in the work environment. Where the possibility exists for exceeding the permissible exposure limit, this program is designed to provide protection from exposure by educating employees in proper safe work practices, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment. Mercury Types and Potential Exposure 1. In some operations, the potential exists for isolated exposures to mercury. The type of mercury most likely to be encountered is elemental mercury, also known as quicksilver or instrument grade mercury. Elevated mercury concentrations may be encountered in, but are not limited to, the following equipment and/or operations: a. Work within enclosed areas where manometers using mercury are, or have been used. This may involve witnessing meter provings or changing gas charts within meter houses. Work using portable mercury manometers, such as when balancing carburetors on gas engines. Rebuilding dump valves that contain mercury.
Page 59 of 161

2.

b.

c.

MERCURY HANDLING (continued) d. In laboratories, when conducting some routine types of tests with core samples, within valves of some sample cylinders, broken thermometers, etc. In electrical work when encountering broken or damaged mercury switches. In facilities where mercury is a by-product of the reservoir and collects in processing equipment.

e. f.

Training Annually if exposures are present. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Employee Exposure Monitoring Employee Training Records Mercury Handling Program Procedures (See CD) Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 30 years after separation of employment 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 60 of 161

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Policy Crosstex will provide for the proper selection, use, and care of personal protective equipment (PPE) for Crosstex personnel in the workplace in accordance with accepted industrial hygiene practice and government regulations. Contractors shall provide all necessary PPE for their personnel. Description The purpose of this program is to ensure that adequate protective measures are established to protect workers from recognized hazards in the workplace and that personal protective equipment is available and worn when necessary. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Properly use and care for personal protective equipment. Report any damaged or lost PPE to their supervisor. Observe fellow workers to ensure the proper use of PPE. Report any hazards encountered that require a change in PPE. Participate in training as required by this program.

Person-In-Charge (PIC) and Supervisors shall: a. b. Ensure that all personnel are trained in the proper care and use of PPE. Ensure that all personnel use PPE consistently and properly.

Page 61 of 161

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIP MENT (continued) c. Ensure that all personnel have the PPE necessary to perform their work. Contractors shall be responsible for providing their own PPE. Report any defective PPE to the Safety Department and take it out of service. Forward requests for assistance in selecting proper PPE to the Safety Department.

d. e. 3.

Safety Department shall: a. Ensure that PPE Hazard Assessments are completed for all types of hazards encountered in the work environment. Certify all PPE Assessments. Ensure that appropriate PPE is identified for protection of workers. Ensure that training is provided to Crosstex personnel for PPE that they are expected to use. Observe the workplace to assure that PPE is worn, used and cared for properly.

b. c. d.

e. Training

Provided to all personnel required to use PPE. Initially prior to assignment requiring PPE. Additional training as needed.

Page 62 of 161

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (continued) Documentation Record Training Records PPE Inspection Records Personal Protective Equipment Program Procedures (See CD) Custodian Safety Department Field/Facility Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation of employment 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 63 of 161

POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCB) HANDLING Policy Crosstex will provide PCB Handling Procedures in order to protect personnel and the environment from the risks associated with handling PCBs. Description Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) have been in use since 1929 as dielectric and heat transfer fluids. Because of the human health and environmental risks associated with PCBs, on May 31, 1979, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) published final regulations defining disposal, labeling, and recordkeeping requirements for PCBs under the Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA). In order to protect personnel and the environment from the risks associated with PCBs, Crosstex has developed this PCB Handling Procedures Program. General The potential adverse health effects of PCBs are: 1. Prolonged exposure to PCB vapors or direct contact with the liquid m lead to a form of ay dermatitis known as chlor-acne. Inhalation of PCB vapors at high concentrations may result in nose and throat irritation. Absorption of PCBs into the body may cause liver damage. PCBs are readily absorbed through the digestive tract and the lungs.

2. 3. 4.

Page 64 of 161

PCB HANDLING (continued) 5. PCB absorption through intact skin is not significant unless exposure is prolonged and repeated. However, the presence of PCBs on the skin greatly increases the possibilities of accidental ingestion, and of absorption through broken skin, such as an open cut, which is much more rapid and serious than absorption through intact skin.

Training Initial training as part of the new employee orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Page 65 of 161

PCB HANDLING (continued) Documentation Record Annual Document Log (Leaking transformers/ Capacitors and Serial Numbers) Annual Records (Manifests and Certificates of Disposal) Testing Records (to determine if PCBs are contained in transformers/ capacitors) Correspondence concerning PCBs In-service Transformer/Capacitor Records Letters from utility company (owner of transformer/capacitor) indicating PCBs Training Records Custodian Local field office or facility Retention 3 years after facility ceases using/storing PCBs 3 years after facility ceases using/storing PCBs 3 years after facility ceases using/storing PCBs 3 years after facility ceases using/storing PCBs Life of the equipment Life of the equipment 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Local field office or facility

Local field office or facility

Local field office or facility Local field office or facility Local field office or facility Safety Department Safety Department

PCB Handling Procedures Program

Page 66 of 161

PCB HANDLING (continued) Definitions 1. Annual Document Log - The detailed information maintained at the facility on PCB waste handling at the facility.

Page 67 of 161

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION Policy Crosstex will assess respiratory hazards in the workplace and provide engineering controls, workplace practices and, as necessary, selected respirators to protect personnel from airborne contaminants and oxygendeficient atmospheres. This program is intended to assure compliance with the OSHA Respiratory Protection Standards. Responsibilities 1. All employees shall: a. b. Wear respirators as instructed. Clean, care for, and maintain respirators as instructed, and store them in a clean and sanitary location. Serve as a standby person when required by safe work practices. Inform their supervisor if the respirator no longer fits well or if any problems are detected in the condition of the respirator. Remove defective respirators from service immediately upon discovery of any defect. Inform their supervisor or the Local Program Administrator of any respiratory hazards that they feel are not adequately addressed, and of any concerns they have regarding the program or respirator use.

c. d.

e. f.

2.

The Local Program Administrator (Safety Compliance Specialist) shall: a. Identify work areas, processes and tasks that require workers to wear respirators, and evaluate the associated hazards.

Page 68 of 161

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (continued) b. Estimate employee exposures utilizing the Chemical Exposure Hazard Assessment form. Select appropriate respiratory equipment for use by personnel. Ensure respirators are used in accordance with their certifications. Arrange for and/or conduct training. Ensure proper storage and maintenance of respiratory protection equipment. Assure that fit tests are conducted utilizing one of the quantitative or qualitative protocols approved for use. Administer the medical surveillance program for employees that wear respirators. Maintain required records. Review various elements of the program with employees who wear respirators and communicate needed changes or improvements to the Safety Manager. Confer with the Safety Manager regarding the overall administration of all program elements.

c. d. e. f. g.

h. i. j.

k.

3.

Supervisors shall: a. Coordinate with the Local Program Administrator to ensure that employees receive appropriate training, fit testing, and medical evaluations in accordance with this program. Ensure availability and proper use of appropriate respiratory equipment.

b.

Page 69 of 161

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (continued) c. Be aware of tasks requiring respiratory protection, and ensure that respirators are worn properly and that standby personnel are utilized when needed. Ensure that respirators are cleaned, maintained and stored in accordance with this program. Monitor work areas and operations to identify respiratory hazards. Communicate with the Local Program Administrator regarding respiratory hazards or other concerns about the program.

d.

e. f.

4.

The Safety Manager shall: a. Designate a Local Program Administrator and ensure that the resources necessary to fulfill the outlined responsibilities are available. Ensure that the program is fully implemented. Work with the Local Program Administrator regarding revisions to the plan when justified. Assist the Local Program Administrator to identify work areas, processes and tasks that require workers to wear respirators, and evaluate the associated hazards. Assist in the selection of respirator options. Assist the Local Program Administrator in assuring that respirators are used in accordance with their certifications. Assist the Local Program Administrator with training resources.

b. c.

d.

e. f.

g.

Page 70 of 161

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (continued) h. Training Prior to being assigned to job requiring respirator use. Annually thereafter. Retraining when changes occur or when needed for safe respirator use. Provide assistance regarding fit testing issues or concerns.

Page 71 of 161

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION (continued) Documentation Record Respiratory Protection Standard Covered Employees Employee Medical Records Employee Fit Test Records Employee Training Records Hazard Assessments Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete 30 years after separation 30 years after separation 30 years after separation 3 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete 7 years 3 years 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Respirator Inspection Reports Respirator Maintenance Records Program Audits/Reviews Breathing Air Quality Certifications Breathing Air Compressor Maintenance Records (Company Owned) Procedures (See CD)

Designated Field Office

Designated Field Office Safety Department Designated Field Office

Designated Field Office

Page 72 of 161

OPERATIONS

Page 73 of 161

BLINDING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION Policy All blinding and equipment isolation shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures listed below and procedures found in the Lockout/Tagout Program. General Requirements 1. Blinding or double-block and bleed shall be used to effectively isolate equipment, vessels, and piping from other parts of operating areas so repairs, maintenance, or cleaning can be conducted in a safe manner. Exceptions to blinding must be approved in writing by the supervisor in charge at that location.

2.

All Blinds Shall Be Installed with the Following Considerations In Mind 1. 2. Will the blind effectively accomplish its purpose in the selected location? Can the blind be removed safely when required? The precautions taken during the installations of the blind shall be followed when removing the blind. Is the selected location accessible to personnel and equipment? Is the blind located at the flange closest to the equipment, tank or vessel? Is the blind the correct size and pressure rating? Consult the facility engineer responsible for the location if you are unsure. Has the line, vessel or equipment contained toxic or corrosive material? Have provisions been made to eliminate or reduce spills or prevent pollution and for cleanup of any spills?
Page 74 of 161

3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

BLINDING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION (continued) Training At initial assignment As needed thereafter

Documentation Record Training Records Blinding and Equipment Isolation Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Departmen t Retention 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Procedures (see CD)

Page 75 of 161

COMBUSTIBLE AND FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE AND HANDLING Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures and training for the handling and storage of combustible and flammable liquids. Training Initial training for personnel who work with combustible and flammable liquids Refresher training every three (3) years or as needed

Documentation Record Training Records Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and Handling Program Procedures (see CD) Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 76 of 161

COMPRESSED GAS AND SAMPLE CYLINDER SAFETY, STORAGE, AND TRANSPORTATION Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures concerning the handling and storage of compressed air and gas cylinders. Training Initial training for personnel who work with compressed air, gas and sample cylinders. Refresher training every three (3) years or as needed.

Documentation Record Training Records Compressed Gas and Sample Cylinder Safety, Storage, and Transportation Program Procedures (see CD) See also Hazardous Material Transportation Procedure (on CD) and Handbook Section. Custodian Safety Department Retention 5 years

Safety Department

1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 77 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY Policy Crosstex will identify permit -required confined spaces and personnel shall follow the safe work practices and procedures outlined in this Confined Space Entry Standard. A Confined Space Entry Permit shall be utilized to evaluate and document hazards associated with entering a confined space, and hazards shall be eliminated or control measures implemented to ensure the Safety of personnel entering confined spaces. The program complies with the provisions of the OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.146 Permit -Required Confined Spaces. The provisions of this program apply to permit-required confined spaces . Contact the designated Competent Person or Safety Department for non-permit confined space work procedures. Responsibilities 1. All Employees shall: a. b. c. Perform assigned duties based on their role in confined space entry operations. Adhere to the procedures outlined in this program. Participate in post -entry communications with the Entry Supervisor to determine or note any program deficiencies or hazards confronted or created during the entry.

2.

Person-In-Charge shall: a. Ensure all employees are trained and adhere to Permit Required Confined Space Entry Procedures. Ensure contractors are properly informed of Crosstex confined space entry procedures and adhere to the established procedures. Assign the duties and responsibilities for confined space operations.
Page 78 of 161

b.

c.

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) 3. Entry Supervisor shall: a. Identify each potential hazard that could be encountered during the entry, including exposure mode (skin contact, inhalation, etc.), exposure symptoms or signs, and the consequences of an exposure. Verify that the appropriate entries have been made on the confined space permit, that all tests specified on the permit have been conducted, and that all precautions, procedures and equipment specified on the permit are in place before signing the permit and allowing entry to begin. Terminate the entry, documenting any occurrence of a non-authorized condition on the confined space entry permit, and ensuring the permit is cancelled properly. Determine if non-entry rescue is feasible or if a rescue service will be utilized (See Rescue section of procedure). If non-entry rescue is feasible, ensure entrants are properly equipped with rescue equipment and adequate retrieval systems are in place. If a rescue service is utilized, confirm that the rescue service is onsite and that the means for summoning them are operable.

b.

c.

d.

e.

Remove unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space during entry operations.

Page 79 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) f. Complete the following whenever responsibility for a permit -required confined space entry operation is transferred to a relieving entry supervisor: Determine the frequency for reevaluation of the space as dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the permit space. Ensure that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the Confined Space Entry Permit. Ensure that acceptable entry conditions are maintained.

g.

Coordinate entry operations and provide the necessary information to contract personnel concerning the elements and identified hazards relative to the space in question. Ensure proper precautions and procedures have been implemented for the protection of employees working in or near the permit required confined space. Communicate tasks and entry procedures to all employees and contractors involved in the job in a pre-entry meeting. Sign the completed Confined Space Entry Permit at the time of assuming the Entry Supervisor responsibilities. Conduct post -entry communications with Crosstex and contract employees involved in the permit -required confined space entry to determine if there were any program deficiencies or hazards confronted or created during the entry and document such hazards or deficiencies on the Entry Permit.
Page 80 of 161

h.

i.

j.

k.

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) 4. Authorized Entrant(s) shall: a. Know the hazards that could be encountered during this entry including information on each potential hazard including exposure mode (skin contact, inhalation, etc.), exposure symptoms or signs, and the consequences of an exposure. Know how to properly use all equipment necessary to perform the entry and complete the task safely (i.e. rescue/retrieval equipment, lighting, monitoring, communication, etc.). Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant(s) status and to enable the attendant to alert entrant(s) of the need to evacuate the permit space if necessary. Alert the attendant when warning signs or symptoms of exposure to a dangerous situation are recognized or whenever a prohibited condition is detected. Immediately exit from the permit space when instructed to do so by either the attendant or the entry supervisor, when any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation has been recognized, upon detection of a prohibited condition, or upon the activation of an evacuat ion alarm.

b.

c.

d.

e.

5.

Attendant shall: a. Know the hazards that could be encountered during this entry including information on each potential hazard including exposure mode (skin contact, inhalation, etc.), exposure symptoms or signs, and the consequences of an exposure.
Page 81 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) b. c. Be aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrant(s). Communicate with the authorized entrant(s) as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert entrant(s) of the need to evacuate the space if necessary. Continuously maintain an accurate count of authorized entrant(s) in the permit space and ensure that the means used to identify authorized entrant(s) accurately identifies who is in the permit space. Remain immediately outside of the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another attendant. Observe activities inside and outside of the permit space to determine if it is safe for entrant(s) to remain in the space and order authorized entrant(s) to evacuate the permit space immediately if: A prohibited condition is detected. Behavioral effects of hazard exposure in the authorized entrant(s) are detected. A situation outside the space that could endanger the authorized entrant(s) is detected. The attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all of the required and delegated duties.

d.

e.

f.

g. h.

Perform non-entry rescues utilizing retrieval lines, whenever possible. Summon rescue and emergency services as soon as it is determined that entrants may need assistance to evacuate from the space.
Page 82 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) i. Take the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space while entry is underway: Warn the unauthorized person(s) that they must stay away from the permit space. Advise the unauthorized perso n(s) to leave immediately if they have entered the permit space. Inform the authorized entrant(s) and the supervisor(s) if unauthorized person(s) enter the permit space.

j.

Perform no other duties that might interfere with monitoring and protecting the authorized entrants.

6.

Permit Issuer shall: a. Issue the Confined Space Entry Permit and ensure the accuracy of all information contained on the permit. Know the hazards that could be encountered during this entry including information on each potential hazard including exposure mode (skin contact, inhalation, etc.), exposure symptoms or signs, and the consequences of an exposure. Terminate the entry if an emergency arises or when hazardous conditions exist. Cancel the permit if indicated (See Entry Permit Cancellation section of procedure). Verify that non-entry rescue is feasible or if a rescue service is utilized, confirm that the rescue service is readily available and the means for summoning them are operable.
Page 83 of 161

b.

c. d. e.

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) f. If the Permit Issuer is also the Entry Supervisor, then all responsibilities under Entry Supervisor shall also be performed.

7.

Tester shall: a. Be competent (by virtue of training and/or experience) in the field calibration and use of the instrumentation to be utilized. Perform required atmospheric monitoring for permit-required confined space entry (see Atmospheric Monitoring Form in Forms section of CD) and advise entry personnel of monitoring results. Ensure that monitoring results are accurately documented on the Confined Space Entry Permit.

b.

c.

8.

Rescue Team (either internal or external) shall: a. Evaluate permit spaces and develop appropriate plans for rescuing entrants from inside the space in the event that a rescue is required. Perform rescue operations, some of which may require entry into the permit space. Properly use the personal protective equipment and rescue equipment necessary for making rescues from permit spaces. Maintain proficiency in the rescue of personnel by practicing simulated rescues at least once every twelve (12) m onths and from spaces with configurations representative of spaces from which rescues will be performed.

b. c.

d.

Page 84 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) e. Receive basic first-aid and CPR training and ensure at least one member of each rescue team holds current certificat ion in first-aid and CPR.

9.

Supervisors shall: a. b. Identify all permit -required confined spaces in their operating area(s). Effectively communicate the existence of confined spaces to all exposed employees including contract employees. Signs and labels are the preferred method for marking permit-required confined spaces. The wording should be as follows:

DANGER
CONFINED SPACE ENTER BY PERMIT ONLY

c. d.

Ensure employees receive adequate training for the job duties they perform. Ensure that necessary steps are taken to comply with the established requirements for entering and performing work within confined spaces. Ensure that effective communication and job planning occurs in their respective areas of responsibility.

e.

Page 85 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) f. Conduct periodic audits of Confined Space Entry procedures and Confined Space Entry Permits and correct any deficiencies that are noted.

10. The Safety Department shall: a. Assist in the identification of permit required confined spaces and non-permit spaces. Provide employee training on these procedures and maintain training documentation. Conduct annual inspections of Confined Space Entry Permit procedures and ensure inspection records are maintained for record retention. Provide periodic review of the Confined Space Entry Program and revise as necessary

b.

c.

d.

Training Provided for each person affected. Before assignment to confined space duties. When assignment/duties change. Rescue Team (internal or external) shall be trained to comply with OSHA requirements for rescue. Periodic refresher training for all affected personnel. Additional training provided for Competent Person.

Page 86 of 161

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY (continued) Documentation Record Confined Space Entry Permit and Attachments Employee Training Records Annual Inspection Reports/Information Confined Space Entry Program Custodian Facility Safety Department Safety Department Safety Department Retention 1 year 3 years after separation 7 years 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Procedure (See CD)

Page 87 of 161

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE Policy Crosstex will operate cranes and hoists in accordance with written procedures. Established criteria for periodic crane and hoist inspections will be followed to ensure the safety of all personnel. Description This policy and procedure applies to all operations of Crosstex that involve the use of cranes and/or hoists, whether fixed, mobile, or portable, and to all Crosstex employees, supplemental labor, and subcontractor personnel who use such devices. Its purpose is to provide guidance in the safe operation and maintenance of these devices. Responsibilities 1. 2. Employees shall be familiar and comply with the requirements of this program. The Safety Department shall: a. b. Ensure that personnel understand their responsibilities under this policy. Ensure that personnel are trained in the proper use and inspection procedures required for cranes, chain hoists, and slings. Maintain, periodically review, and, when necessary, modify this policy.

c. 3.

Supervisors shall: a. Ensure that employees under their supervision receive the training necessary to properly operate the cranes and/or hoists in their areas. Provide training for prospective crane and hoist operators.

b.

Page 88 of 161

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE (continued) c. Ensure that hoisting equipment is inspected and tested monthly by a responsible individual, and that annual maintenance and inspection of all cranes and/or hoists is performed. Ensure that rigging equipment is inspected annually. Conduct load tests of cranes and/or hoists to meet regulatory requirements. Maintain written records of inspections and tests. Inspect and load test cranes and/or hoists following modification or extensive repairs (e.g., a replaced cable or hook, or structural modification). Ensure testing and inspections are conducted before use of new replacement hooks and/or other hooks suspected of having been overloaded. Maintain all manuals for cranes and/or hoists in a central file for reference.

d. e. f. g.

h.

i. 4.

Crane and Hoist Operators shall: a. b. c. d. e. Operate hoisting equipment safely. Conduct functional tests prior to using the equipment. Select and use rigging equipment appropriately. Attend and understand training sessions on the equipment and its safe operation. Fill out the Crosstex Critical Lift Plan.

Page 89 of 161

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE (continued) General Safety Rules Operators shall comply with the following rules while operating the cranes and/or hoists: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not engage in any practice or activity that will divert your attention while operating the crane. Respond to signals only from the person who is directing the lift or any appointed signal person. Obey a stop signal at all times. Do not move a load over people. Also, do not allow personnel to work under a suspended load unless blocks, jacks, or a solid footing that will safely hold the entire weight, supports the load. Have a crane or hoist operator remain at the controls or lock open and tag the main electrical disconnect switch. Ensure that the rated load capacity of a cranes bridge, individual hoist, and any sling or fitting is not exceeded. Know the weight of the object being lifted or use a dynamometer or load cell to determine the weight. Ensure that all controls are in the OFF position before closing the main line disconnect switch. If spring-loaded reels are provided to lift pendant lines clear of the work area, gently ease the pendant into the stop position to prevent damaging the control wires.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

10. Avoid side pulls. These can cause the hoist rope to slip out of the drum groove, damaging the rope, or destabilizing the crane or hoist.

Page 90 of 161

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE (continued) 11. T o prevent shock loading, avoid sudden stops or starts. Shock loading can occur when a suspended load is accelerated or decelerated, and can overload the crane or hoist. When completing an upward or downward motion, ease the load slowly to a stop. Training Employees who will work with cranes, chain hoists and slings will be trained on the proper use and inspection procedures prior to working with such equipment. Some areas may require bilingual training to meet regulatory requirements. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Crane and Hoist Safety Program Monthly Inspection Report Annual Inspection Reports Load Test Records Employee Training Records Custodian Safety Department Retention 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete 6 months after revised, superseded or obsolete 6 months after revised, superseded or obsolete 6 years after revised, superseded or obsolete 3 years after separation of employment
Page 91 of 161

Field Office

Field Office

Field Office

Safety Department

ELECTRICAL SAFETY Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures to be followed when personnel work with or near electrical equipment. Description This program is designed to prevent or minimize injury to personnel, and provide for the protection of property by educating employees in proper safe electrical work practices, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment. This program is further intended to provide work practice guidelines and expectations for conformance with applicable codes, regulations and industry safety practices for electrical installations. Safe Work Practices 1. Safe work practices must be utilized to safeguard personnel from injury while repairing, modifying, or performing maintenance on or near equipment or circuits that may or may not be de -energized. Before beginning work, all live parts to which personnel may be exposed shall be de-energized and locked and tagged out, unless it can be demonstrated that de -energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Some examples of these instances are: a. b. c. d. Deactivation of emergency alarms or fire protection systems. Shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment. Removal of illumination from an area. Testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized.
Page 92 of 161

2.

ELECTRICAL SAFETY (continued) 3. Qualified Persons are permitted to de-energize and lockout/tagout electrical equipment and circuits for the purpose of elect rical repair or maintenance. After de -energization, the Qualified Person must verify that the equipment cannot be restarted by attempting to operate the equipment controls and by using testing equipment to measure circuit properties. NOTE: This applies to circuits or equipment that have been de-energized for the purpose of repair or maintenance to exposed electrical circuits. 4. Only Qualified Persons are permitted to remove lockout/tagout devices and re-energize electrical circuits. Conductors and parts of equipment that have been de-energized but have not been locked/tagged out shall be treated as energized parts. The following safe work practices shall be used to prevent contact of energized parts directly with any part of the body or indirectly with conductive tools or materials. a. b. c. d. Use required PPE as described in procedure on CD. Only Qualified Persons may work on or near energized electrical equipment. All employees shall be alert when working near exposed energized equipment. No employee shall be allo wed to enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless adequate illumination is provided. Employees must not reach blindly into any areas where they could contact energized equipment.

5.

6.

Page 93 of 161

ELECTRICAL SAFETY (continued) e. When work is to be performed in a confined or enclosed space that contains exposed energized parts, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used, as necessary, to avoid accidental contact with the exposed energized parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into someone, causing contact with exposed energized parts. Conductive apparel such as metal eye glasses, rings, bracelets, watch bands, necklaces, and key chains shall not be worn while working if they might contact exposed energized parts. Conductive Materials and Equipment such as ladders, pipes, ducts, or chains that are in contact with any part of the body must be handled so as to prevent contact with exposed energized parts. Long objects should be protect ed by insulation or guarding, or handled in a manner that will minimize the hazard. Portable ladders must have nonconductive side rails, such as fiberglass. Housekeeping and janitorial duties are not to be performed adjacent to live parts where such parts present an electrical contact hazard unless adequate safeguards such as barriers or insulating equipment are provided. Conductive cleaning materials such as water, steam, fluids, steel wool, etc., shall not be used unless procedures are followed which will prevent an inadvertent electrical contact.

f.

g.

h. i.

Page 94 of 161

ELECTRICAL SAFETY (continued) j. Insulated tools and handling equipment are required to be used while working on or near exposed energized parts if the tools/equipment can come into contact with the exposed part s. Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used for protection from electrical hazards while working on or near exposed energized parts and shall be dielectrically tested at least every two years. Alerting techniques, such as signs and barricades, shall be used to warn and protect personnel from hazards that could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts. Only qualified Level II or Level III personnel may work on any electrical equipment below 600 volts nominal. Only Level III personnel may work on greater than 600 volts. Two persons (one Level III and a buddy) must be present at all times when working on greater than 600 volts. A job briefing/tailgate safety meeting shall be conducted by all personnel involved in each electrical job before it is started. If the work or operations to be performed during the workday or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one job briefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of each day or shift. Additional briefings shall be held if significant changes, which may affect the safety of the employees, occur during the course of the work.

k.

l.

m.

n.

o.

Page 95 of 161

ELECTRICAL SAFETY (continued) Training 1. Employees shall be trained in the safe work practices and procedures and other personnel safety requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments. Employees shall not be permitted to work in an area where they are likely to encounter electrical hazards unless they have been trained to recognize and avoid the electrical hazards to which they will be exposed. Training, conducted by an experienced Qualified Person, may be on-the-job or in the classroom (preferably a combination of both) and shall establish employee proficiency in the work practice. The degree of training will be based on the classification (Level I, II, or III) and risk to the individual (e.g., greater risk/higher classification requires more detailed training and additional experience). It shall be determined, through regular supervision and periodic inspections that each Qualified Person is complying with the safe work practices and procedures required by this section. Additional training or retraining is required unde r any of the following conditions: Supervision or periodic inspections reveal non-compliance with this program. When new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures modify normal work practices. Changes in job assignments require new or different safe work practices. As required to maintain license certification.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Page 96 of 161

ELECTRICAL SAFETY (continued) See Procedure on CD for additional details on training. Training records shall be kept in accordance with the documentation section of this program. Documentation Record Employee Training Records Electrical Protective Equipment Log Electrical Tool Test Records Level Qualification Documentation Procedures (See CD) Custodian Safety Department Facility Facility Facility Retention 3 years after separation Current + 1 year Life of Tool 3 years after separation

Page 97 of 161

EXC AVATION SAFETY Policy Crosstex will ensure the safety of all personnel by providing safe work procedures to be followed when personnel enter or work around excavations and trenches. Description This program applies to all man-made excavations in the earths surface and complies with the requirements of OSHAs excavation standards. In particular, this program targets pipeline and/or other utility trenches, pit excavations, deep holes for underground tanks, vessels, footings or foundations. Exemption : Large surface area excavations with slopes meeting the regulatory requirements for the excavations soil type, and that can be safely entered with vehicles, are not intended to be covered by this program. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall be knowledgeable of the provisions of the Confined Space Entry Program and requirements for entering an excavation classified as a permit-required confined space. Competent Person shall: a. b. Attend training and remain proficient in the responsibilities outlined in this program. Determine protective systems and the means of personnel access and egress for each excavation that personnel will enter. Determine the appropriate slope of ramps used for personnel access and egress if ramps are utilized.

2.

c.

Page 98 of 161

EXCAVATION SAFETY (continued) d. Conduct initial and daily inspection of excavations, adjacent areas, and protective systems when personnel entry into an excavation is required. The inspection must be conducted prior to the start of work and as needed throughout the shift using the Competent Person Excavation Inspection Checklist form. Conduct inspections after every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing occurrence. Determine suitable means to prevent surface water from entering an excavation and provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. Monitor water removal equipment used to dewater an excavation. Determine when warning vests are required to be worn by personnel to protect from vehicle traffic. Complete the Competent Person Excavation Inspection Checklist for all excav ations four (4) or more feet deep that personnel will enter.

e. f.

g. h.

i.

3.

Person-In-Charge shall: a. Ensure that all employees have had the proper training prior to any assignment requiring personnel entry into excavations. Ensure personnel are knowledgeable and understand the requirements of Crosstex Confined Space Entry Program and requirements for personnel entry into an excavation classified as a permit -required confined space.

b.

Page 99 of 161

EXCAVATION SAFETY (continued) c. Ensure that personnel performing excavation inspections hav e received Competent Person training. Ensure contractors are properly informed of Crosstex excavation procedures and adhere to the established procedures.

d.

Training Initially and periodically for all employees who may enter an excavation. Initial training for each Competent Person. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Excavation Inspection Checklist Custodian Retention 7 years 1 year for Confined Space Entries 7 years 1 year for Confined Space Entries 3 years after Separation 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Facility

Hot Work Permit

Facility

Employee Training Records Excavation Safety Program

Safety Department Safety Department

Procedures (See CD)

Page 100 of 161

FORKLIFTS AND INDUSTRIAL TRUCK SAFETY Policy Crosstex will provide appropriate safe operation training for employees who operate forklifts and/or industrial trucks. Training Employees shall participate in a forklift and/or industrial truck training class before they are authorized to operate a forklift or industrial truck. Docu mentation Record Training Records Forklifts and Industrial Trucks Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (see CD)

Page 101 of 161

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN Poli cy Crosstex will inform personnel about the hazards of chemical substances and hazardous physical agents which may be encountered at company locations, and the protective measures for working safely with these substances and agents. The program sets fort h procedures for communication of hazards associated with chemicals in the workplace, and meets the requirements of the Federal OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Review hazard information on labels and MSDSs for chemicals and products used in the workplace. Follow the safety precautions provided on MSDSs and labels when handling hazardous chemicals. Ensure all containers are labeled as per this program. Ensure that all incoming shipments of hazardous chemicals are properly labeled and a MSDS is available. Request MSDSs for review prior to ordering new or different chemicals. Inform their supervisor of new chemicals MSDSs received.

b.

c. d.

e. f. 2.

Person in Charge (PIC) and Supervisors shall: a. Ensure that the facilitys/areas Chemical Substance and Products List is current and that all required MSDSs are available for reference.

Page 102 of 161

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN (continued) b. c. d. e. Ensure that all hazardous materials currently on location are properly labeled. Contact the appropriate parties to obtain the required MSDS, when necessary. Ensure that personnel do not remove or deface existing labels on containers. Ensure that job briefing/site orientations covering hazard communication requirements (access to MSDSs, labeling requirements, etc.) or other workplace hazards are conducted. Obtain a chemical list and MSDSs from all Contractors who provide hazardous chemicals to the facility/area. Ensure that all personnel have proper training. Inform personnel of the hazards associated with new chemicals introduced into the work area. Inform personnel of special precautions, training or equipment required when a contractor is performing a non-routine operation that introduces new hazards to the work area.

f.

g. h.

i.

3.

The Safety Department shall: a. Ensure that employee training is provided for these procedures and maintain training documentation. Periodically review Chemical Substance Lists for accuracy.

b.

Page 103 of 161

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN (continued) Labels and Hazard Warnings All containers of hazardous substance shall be labeled to identify the substance and provide an appropriate hazard warning, including any applicable target organ warning to employees. Labels shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment in which they are placed. An example label is shown below.
Typical NFPA Container Label with Target Organ Hazard Warning

NATURAL GAS
HEALTH HAZARDS:
4 3 2 1 0 Deadly Extremely Hazardous Hazardou s Slightly Hazardous Normal Material

FIRE HAZARDS:
Flash Points 4 Below 73 oF * 3 Below 100 oF * 2 Below 200 oF * 1 Above 200 oF * 0 Will Not Burn

0
REACTIVITY:
4 May Detonate 3 Shock & Heat may Detonate 2 Violent Chemical Reaction 1 Unstable if Heated 0 - Stable

DANGER - FLAMMABLE GAS TARGET ORGAN: LUNGS LARGE CONCENTRATIONS MAY CAUSE ASPHYXIATION DUE TO OXYGEN DISPLACEMENT. REMOVE VICTIM TO FRESH AIR. QUICKLY RESTORE AND/OR SUPPORT BREATHING AS REQUIRED. HAVE TRAINED PERSON ADMINISTER OXYGEN IF AVAILABLE. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION SHOULD BE USED IMMEDIATELY IF BREATHING STOPPED. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

Page 104 of 161

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN (continued) Training Initially and periodically for employees whose work assignment may cause them to encounter chemical substances or hazardous physical agents. Retraining upon change in hazards or as needed.

Documentation Record Material Safety Data Sheets Facilitys/Areas List of Chemicals Employee Training Records Procedure (See CD) Custodian Facility/Field Office Facility/Field Office Safety Department Retention 30 years after last use 30 years after revised 3 years aft er separation

Page 105 of 161

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION Policy Crosstex will reduce the probability of occurrence of, and mitigate the consequences from, transportation mishaps involving hazardous materials and reduce the likelihood of regulatory non-compliance in hazardous materials transportation. Description This program establishes procedures for personnel involved in all facets of hazardous materials transportation and provides guidance for compliance with the Department of Transportat ions Hazardous Materials Regulations and other applicable standards or practices concerned with transportation of hazardous materials (e.g., International Civil Aviation Organization/ International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Regulations). Training Hazardous Material employees are trained in General Awareness/Familiarization and Safety. Others complete Function -Specific and/or Driver training. Initial training is required within ninety (90) days for new Hazardous Material employees. Recertification every three years.

Documentation Record Training Records Hazardous Material Transportation Program Custodian Safety Department EH&S Department Retention 5 years 30 years after revised, superseded or obsolete
Page 106 of 161

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTA TION (continued) Procedures (See CD) See also Compressed Gas and Sample Cylinder Safety, Storage and Transportation Procedure (on CD) and Handbook section.

Page 107 of 161

HOT WORK Policy Crosstex will identify and provide safe work practices and procedures to ensure safe welding, burning, hot tapping and use of spark-producing equipment. Implementation of these practices and procedures will be through the use of Hot Work Permits. Hazards shall be eliminated or controlled to the extent feasible in order to ensure the s afety of personnel performing the permitted work. Description This program covers all welding, cutting, brazing, burning, hot tapping and/or other forms of hot work which can produce a spark, a flame, or a hot surface (in excess of 500F), in an area (within 100 feet) or on equipment which contains or has the potential to contain flammable or hazardous materials. The purpose of this program is to prevent unnecessary exposure of personnel to the hazards associated with hot work (such as: welding, cutting, and brazing) thereby avoiding potential injury to personnel and/or damage to facilities. Of particular importance is the prevention of an accidental ignition of explosive, flammable or combustible materials. Essential to this goal is the proper use of a Hot Work Permit system which ensures that hazards are identified and evaluated prior to starting the job and that adequate precautions are implemented for personnel safety before and during permitted work. NOTE: PERMIT REQUIRED FOR VEHICLE ENTRY INTO CLASSIFIED AREA, OR WHERE POSTED. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Contact a Permit Issuer prior to the commencement of any hot work.

Page 108 of 161

HOT WORK (continued) b. c. Perform assigned duties based on their role. Participate in post -work communications with the Crosstex Supervisor to determine or note any program deficiencies or hazards confronted or created during the permitted work.

2.

Person-In-Charge shall: a. Ensure all employees are trained and adhere to the requirements contained in this standard and on any approved Hot Work Permit. Ensure contractors are properly informed of Crosstex Hot Work Permitting procedures and adhere to the established procedures. Assign the duties and responsibilities for permitted work operations. When practical, require that all welding be done in a designated safe welding and burning area. Verify the qualifications of welder(s) (See welder qualifications in procedure on CD). Inspect work area(s) for potential fire and explosion hazards. Thoroughly review the nature and scope of the proposed work and follow all appropriate procedures in the issuance of hot work permits. Ensure that the fire watch has the proper fire suppression equipment, is knowledgeable in its use, understands his/her duties, and knows alarm locations. Ensure the welding/burning equipment is in good working condition.
Page 109 of 161

b.

c. d.

e. f. g.

h.

i.

HOT WORK (continued) j. Ensure Hot Work Permit is issued. NOTE: A Crosstex person-in-charge may deny or revoke a Permit at any time he/she feels the hot work is not being performed properly. This shall include instances when a welder and/or fire watch does not appear competent or is not in conformance with safe work practices. 3. Task Supervisor shall: a. Ensure the safe handling of the cutting or welding equipment and the safe use of the cutting or welding process. Identify the combustible materials and hazardous areas present or likely to be present in the work location. Protect combustibles from ignition by: Moving the work to a location free from dangerous combustibles. Moving combustibles to a safe distance from the work or having the combustibles properly shielded against ignition. Scheduling plant operations so that operations that might expose combustibles to ignition are not started during cutting or welding activities.

b.

c.

d. e.

Secure authorization for the hot work operat ions from the Permit Issuer. Determine that fire protection and extinguishing equipment is properly located at the site. Verify that fire watches are available at the site when required.
Page 110 of 161

f.

HOT WORK (continued) g. Fully understand and comply with all precautionary measures and conditions listed on the Hot Work Permit. Suspend work when any condition of the permit changes or when the permit expires.

h. 4.

Permit Issuer shall: a. Issue the Hot Work Permit and ensure the accuracy of all information contained on the permit. Know the hazards that could be encountered during the permitted work, including information on each potential hazard including exposure mode (skin contact, inhalation, etc.), exposure symptoms or signs, and the consequences of an exposure. Ensure the hot work operations remain consistent with terms of the work permit. Be competent (by virtue of training and/or experience) in the field calibration and use of the instrumentation to be utilized (or by delegating this responsibility to such a competent person). Perform required atmospheric monitoring for permitted work (or delegate this responsibility to a competent person) and advise all personnel of monitoring results. Ensure that monitoring results are accurately documented on the Hot Work Permit. Verify that all needed entries have been made on the permit, that all tests specified have been conducted and are within acceptable limits, and that all procedures and equipment specified are in place before signing the permit and allowing hot work to begin.
Page 111 of 161

b.

c. d.

e.

f. g.

HOT WO RK (continued) h. Determine the time intervals in which atmospheric monitoring should occur as dictated by the hazards and operations performed. Terminate and cancel the hot work operations if an emergency arises or when conditions change from those under which approval was granted. Cancel the permit upon the completion of the permitted work. If the Permit Issuer is also the Task Supervisor, then all responsibilities under Task Supervisor shall also be performed.

i.

j. k.

5.

Welders/Burners shall: a. Provide personal welder qualifications to the PIC or designee as per instructions of this program. Obtain a Hot Work Permit prior to welding and burning in all areas other than designated safe welding areas. Burn or weld only when conditions are safe and in the presence of a fire watch. Discontinue job if conditions are unsafe or if fire watch notifies him that there is a problem. Ensure that equipment is in good working condition. Not require fire watch to perform activities other than the fire watch duties.

b.

c. d.

e. f.

Page 112 of 161

HOT WORK (continued) g. Wear all required Personal Protective Equipment such as, but not limited to, hard hat, steel toe boots, protective face shield with proper tinted lens, and gloves. Consideration should be given to the use of other PPE such as flame resistant clothing or respiratory protection, as needed.

6.

Fire Watch personnel shall: a. Perform only the duties of the fire watch while actual welding or burning operations are in progress and for 30 minutes after the hot work ends. Be familiar with the assigned responsibilities of the fire watch and all conditions noted on the Hot Work Permit. Have appropriate, properly maintained fire extinguishing equipment readily available at the hot work location and be trained in its use. Returning the fire fighting equipment to the proper location upon completion of the hot work. Know the location of the nearest fire alarm station and be familiar with procedures for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. Remain in the most suspect areas for a fire to occur while the hot work is be ing performed. Remain in the hot work area at all times while the hot work is in progress. Maintain general awareness of the surrounding area.

b.

c.

d.

e.

f.

g. h.

Page 113 of 161

HOT WORK (continued) i. Immediately notify the welder of any hazardous or emergency conditions near the welding site and stopping all welding and burning operations when necessary. Watch for fires in all exposed areas and extinguish fires or immediately sounding the alarm in accordance with training provided. Maintain a watch for 30 minutes after the hot work has been completed to detect and extinguish smoldering fires.

j.

k.

7.

Supervisors (and those who plan hot work activities) shall: a. b. Ensure employees receive adequate training for the job duties that they perform. Ensure that effective communication and job planning occurs in their respective areas of responsibility. Assist the facility PIC in ensuring that all requirements of this plan are met.

c. Training

Initially and periodically for all employees whose assignment may involve hot work. Additional training for Permit Issuer, Task Supervisor, or Fire Watch. Refresher training at least every 2 years.

Page 114 of 161

HOT WORK (continued) Documentation Record Hot Work Permit Custodian Facility Retention 7 years 1 year for Confined Space Entries 7 years 1 year for Confined Space Entries 3 years After Separation

Hot Tapping Permits1 Employee Training Records

1

Facility

Safety Department

Additional documentation may be required for the facility files (PSM, DOT, etc.) and must be maintained per applicable regulations. Procedures (See CD)

Page 115 of 161

LIGHTING GAS FIRED VESSELS Policy All gas-fired vessels shall be lighted in accordance with the procedures and instructions of the original or upgraded equipment manufacturer, or according to an approved written procedure. Training At initial job assignment. Thereafter, as deemed necessary by supervisor.

Documentation Record Training Records Lighting Fired Vessels Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 116 of 161

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY Policy All sources of hazardous energy will be controlled prior to performing service or maintenance on machines or equipment and prior to opening lines or vessels, to assure employee protection from hazardous energy. Description This program establishes procedures and training to prevent personnel injury and equipment damage from the unexpected energization, startup or release of stored energy. This program is intended to comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy and establishes the minimum requirements for the isolation of all energy sources during maintenance or servicing of equipment and machinery and for line breaking or vessel opening operations, by affixing appropriate lockouttagout devices. The procedures of this program apply to all forms of energy, including electrical, steam, pneumatic, hydraulic, mechanical, thermal, chemical, pressure and gravity. This program does not cover the following: 1. Work on cord and plug-connected electrical equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization or startup of equipment is controlled by the unplugging of equipment from the energy source AND the plug is under the exclusive control of the employee performing the maintenance or service. Hot tap or Stopple Fitting operations involving transmission and distribution systems for substances such as gas, steam, water, or petroleum when they are performed on pressurized pipelines, provided that: a. b. Continuity of service is essential, Shutdown of the system is impractical, and
Page 117 of 161

2.

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (continued) c. Documented procedures are followed (Hot Tapping or Stopple Fitting Procedures), and special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for employees.

3.

Operations where the controlled release of potentially hazardous energy sources is intended (e.g., sandblasting, well blowdown).

Any temporary deviations from this program shall be approved by the Area Manager or Safety Department. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall be aware of work performed in their areas and whether they are affected employees as defined by this Program. Affected employees shall: a. Be familiar with the lockout/tagout, line breaking, and vessel opening procedures and recognize all lock/tag and blind devices. Apply personal locks and tags when involved in the servicing of machines or equipment (if also an authorized employee).

2.

b.

3.

Authorized employees shall: a. b. c. d. Be trained and knowledgeable in all aspects of the Lockout/Tagout Procedure. Understand the necessary precautions to be taken. Possess the expertise to properly isolate the machinery and equipment. Apply personal locks and tags when involved in the servicing of machinery or equipment.
Page 118 of 161

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL O F HAZARDOUS ENERGY (continued) 4. Person-in-Charge shall: a. b. c. Coordinate maintenance and/or servicing work. Ensure that all personnel working on the job are aware of their responsibilities. Select the authorized employee to lockout and tagout equipment and machin ery for servicing or maintenance. Review equipment isolation and Lockout/Tagout procedures before work proceeds. Ensure authorized employees place personal locks and tags on each locking device or lockbox when involved in the servicing or maintenance of equipment or machinery. Control the key to the job-lock on each shift. Ensure all employees are trained and adhere to Lockout/Tagout Procedures. Ensure contractors are informed of and adhere to Crosstex LO/TO procedures. Ensure all employees are trained and adhere to Lockout/Tagout Procedures. Ensure contract personnel adhere to the Lockout/Tagout Procedures. Ensure that inspections of lockout/tagout procedures are performed and documented by an authorized employee and any deficiencies addressed and corrected. Ensure all newly installed, renovated, and/or modified equipment is capable of being locked out.
Page 119 of 161

d.

e.

f. g. h. i. j. k.

l.

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (continued) Training Initially for all employees who may work where energy control procedures may be used. Annually thereafter. Retraining upon changes in job or equipment, or if needed.

Documentation Record Periodic Inspection Reports Annual Inspection Reports Isolation Logs Equipment Isolation Procedures Employee Training Records The Control of Hazardous Energy Program Definitions 1. Affected Employee - An employee whose job involves the operation or use of a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout/tagout or whose job requires work in an area where such servicing or maint enance is being performed.
Page 120 of 161

Custodian Facility

Retention 7 years

Safety Department Facility

7 years 7 years 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete 3 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Facility

Safety Department

Safety Department

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (continued) 2. Authorized Employee - A person who isolates machines or equipment and implements a lockout/tagout procedure to perform servicing or maintenance. An authorized employee must understand the necessary precautions to be taken and possess the necessary expertise to properly isolate the equipment or system. An authorized employee and an affected employee may be the same person when the affected employee's duties also include maintenance or service work on a machine or equipment that must be locked and/or tagged out. Keyed Alike Locks - A group of locks consisting of two or more locks that are keyed alike and have a common key (master key). Keyed alike locks may be equipment locks or personal locks. In either case, ONLY one key is available for keyed alike locks and must be under the exclusive control of the individual or located inside a lockbox during group lockout/tagout procedures. Personal Lock - An employees uniquely keyed lock placed on a lockbox or isolation device(s) by the individual for personal protection from hazardous energy. Person -In-Charge (PIC) - The lead Crosstex Representative on-site who has the overall responsibility for a facility, project, work crew or work area. Qualified Person - A person who, by training and/or experience, is knowledgeable with the construction and operation of the equipment and hazards involved, and is knowledgeable with the requirements of this standard.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Page 121 of 161

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (continued) 7. Task Supervisor - A person designated by the Supervisor or Person-In-Charge (PIC) to lead or coordinate the work to be performed. For the purpose of this standard, the Task Supervisor must be an authorized employee.

Procedure s (See CD)

Page 122 of 161

MACHINE GUARDING Policy Crosstex has developed this machine guarding program to protect employees from the hazards created from portable and fixed machinery, such as those created by point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, and flying chips and sparks. Training During New Employee Orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Employee Training Records Machine Guarding Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 123 of 161

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) Policy Crosstex is concerned primarily with the radioactive isotopes radium-226, radium-228, radon-222, and their radioactive decay daughters, which occur naturally in the earths crust, soil, plants, and many living organisms. Radium-228 is a product of a naturally occurring radioactive decay scheme whose parent is thorium -232. Radium-226 is the daughter product of the naturally occurring uranium-238 decay scheme. Radium -226 will in turn decay into radon-222. These isotopes are all naturally occurring; hence they are referred to as Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material, (NORM). Production of gas and water can transport these materials to the surface where they may be deposited in pipes, vessels, and other equipment. These radioactive materials can be encountered in heater treaters, separators, tubing, pipe lines, pumps, filters, storage tanks, strippers and scrubbers, cutting boxes, equipment storage yards, evaporation ponds, and inside short sections of process pipe downstream from elbows or transitions. This program presents procedures for the safe identification and handling of NORM by company employees. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. b. Wear appropriate protective equipment when working in NORM restricted areas. Wash hands and face upon exit from restricted areas and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing or applying lip balm. Eat, drink, smoke, chew or apply lip balm only in designated break areas. Survey and decontaminate themselves as needed when exiting restricted areas.
Page 124 of 161

c. d.

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) (continued) 2. Supervisors shall: a. Determine whether or not equipment is contaminated with NORM, prior to:

Equipment purchase/sale. Conducting handling and maintenance/repair activities that might expose employees to NORM dusts, scales, sands, or sludges. Such activities include (but are not limited to): vessel opening for inspection or entry, cutting, grinding, drilling, polishing, and welding.

b.

Obtain approval of the Division Vice President and the Safety Department before purchasing NORM-contaminated land or equipment. Ensure that NORM-contaminated equipment or land is not sold for unrest ricted use. Enforce the use of appropriate industrial hygiene and personal protective equipment for activities involving NORM. Add labeling where required (see example below).

c. d.

e.

Training Upon initial assignment. Annual refresher training in radiation safety and environmental protection.
Page 125 of 161

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) (continued) Additional training when needed for regulations, employee performance, etc. new

Documentation Record Employee Radiation Exposures (Thermoluminescent Dosimeter Readings) Air Sampling Information and Data Surveying Data of Equipment and Land Survey Instrument Calibration Lab Analytical Data Volumes, Dates, and Locations of NORM Waste Generated Volumes, Dates, and Locations/Facilities of NORM Waste Disposal NORM Transfers and Shipments Employee Training Records (Basic and Surveyor) NORM Program Custodian Safety Department Facility Facility Facility Facility Facility Retention

30 years

5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years 5 years

Facility

5 years

Facility Safety Department Safety Department

5 years 5 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 126 of 161

OFFICE SAFETY Policy Crosstex will provide safe work procedures for working in office settings to protect personnel from injury. Description This program sets forth procedures for the safe operation of office machines and electrical office equipment. Compliance with this program will assure employee protection during operations in the office. Training Initial training orientation. during the new employee

Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Employee Training Records Office Safety Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 127 of 161

PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES AND RUPTURE DISKS Policy Crosstex will provide inspection practices for pressure safety valves and rupture disks in order to protect personnel, the general public and the environment. Training Initial training during new employee orientation. Refresher training as needed.

Documentation Record Relief Valve Test Report PSV Specifications Sheets Training Records PSVs & Rupture Disks Program Custodian Field office, plant or facility Field office, plant or facility Safety Department Safety Department Retention Life of the valve Life of the valve 3 years after separation of employment 1 year after revised, superseded, or obsolete

Procedures (see CD)

Page 128 of 161

PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT (PSM) Policy Crosstex will manage hazards associated with highly hazardous chemicals by establishing a comprehensive management program that integrates technologies, procedures, and management practices. Description The purpose of this program is to prevent or minimize the incidence and/or mitigate the consequences of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or explosive chemicals that may result in explosions, fires and toxic releases. The PSM Standard contains fourteen (14) elements pertaining to process safety -related matters. Those elements are: employee participation, process safety information, process hazard analysis, operating procedures, training, contractors, pre-startup safety review, mechanical integrity, hot work permitting; management of change, incident investigation, emergency planning and response, compliance audits, and trade secrets. The PSM Standard applies to the following: 1. A process which involves a chemical at or above the specified threshold quantities listed in Appendix A of 29CFR 1910.119 (PSM). A process which involves a flammable liquid or gas on site in one location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds or more, except for: a. Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g. propane used for comfort heating, gasoline for vehicle refueling, etc.) if such fuels are not part of a process containing another highly hazardous chemical covered by the PSM Standard.

2.

Page 129 of 161

PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT (PSM) (continued) b. Flammable liquids, stored in atmospheric tanks or transferred, which are kept below their normal boiling point without benefit of chilling or refrigeration.

The PSM Standard does not apply to: 1. 2. 3. Retail facilities. Oil or gas well drilling or servicing operations. Normally unoccupied remote facilit ies.

Areas of Responsibility Engineering Process Safety Information (PSI) Process Hazard Analysis (PHA) Mechanical Integrity (MI) Management of Change (MOC) Operations Employee Participation Operating Procedures Training Contractors Pre Start -up Safety Review Incident Investigation Hot Work Permits Emergency Planning and Response Trade Secrets Policy and Compliance Compliance Audits (available when requested to assist in any area of Process Safety Management)

Page 130 of 161

PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT (PSM) (continue d) Training Initial training in overview of process prior to assignment. Refresher training at least every 3 years.

Documentation Record Training Records Process Hazard Analyses and Updates Annual Operating Procedures Certifications Incident Investigation Reports Compliance Audit Reports Process Safety Management Program Custodian Safety Department Field Office Retention 5 years Life of the Process Life of the Process 5 years Two (2) most recent reports 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Field Office

Field Office Safety Department Safety Department

See CD for PSM Program details.

Page 131 of 161

SMALL BOAT SAFETY Policy Crosstex has many activities that are conducted offshore and recognizes that marine vessels pose special hazards to personnel. To min imize the potential for accidents and incidents, U.S. Coast Guard and other applicable marine safety laws and regulations will be followed. Training On initial assignment. As needed thereafter.

Procedures (see CD for guidelines)

Page 132 of 161

VEHICLE SAFETY Policy Employees are more likely to be injured from trafficrelated motor vehicle crashes than from any other hazard on the job, including workplace violence and machinerelated injuries. Three workers are killed every day (more than a thousand each year) while driv ing, riding in, or working around motor vehicles in traffic. Crosstex will take practical steps to reduce this risk by promoting safe driving habits and preventive maintenance practices in employees who operate motor vehicles. General 1. Safety belts shall be worn at all times by driver and all occupants while a Company vehicle is in use. The following forms shall be carried in the glove compartment of Company vehicles: a. b. c. 3. Registration Insurance information Crosstex Auto Accident Report Form.

2.

If applicable, the DOT-required Bill of Lading (hazardous chemicals) shall be carried on the front seat of the Company vehicle or in the side pocket of the door. All drivers of Company vehicles shall abide by Federal, State, and Local traffic regulations. Vehicle capacity is limited to the number of safety belts available inside the vehicle. Personnel shall not ride in the bed of any truck on public roads. All operators of Company vehicles must have a valid, appropriate drivers license.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Page 133 of 161

VEHICLE SAFETY (continued) 8. Equipment on all Company vehicles must conform to Federal, State, and Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations. Drivers shall look around the entire vehicle for hazards before entering, starting, and driving.

9.

10. Approved First Aid Kits and Fire Extinguishers shall be carried in Company vehicles. Training Defensive driver training provided to employees who drive on Company business. all

Refresher training every three (3) years, following a preventable accident, and when investigation of moving traffic violations indicates a need.

Documentation Record Employee Training Records Vehicle Inspection Reports Vehicle Safety Program Custodian Safety Department Field/Facility Office Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation 5 years 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Procedures (See CD)

Page 134 of 161

DEFINITIONS

Page 135 of 161

GLOSSARY 1. Action Level (AL) (Noise) An eight-hour time weighted average (TWA) noise exposure of 85 dBA or for a twelve-hour work shift, a TWA of 82 dBA. The Action Level is based on a 50% dose of the Permissible Exposure Limit. Air-line Respirator - An atmospheresupplying respirator for which the atmosphere is supplied to the respirator through a hose from a source not carried by the wearer. An emergency egress bottle with a minimum 5 minute emergency air supply must be integral with the respirator. Air-lines for respirators shall not exceed 100 feet in length unless approved by NIOSH in accordance with the manufacturers certification for the respirator. Atmosphere -Supplying Respirator - A respirator that supplies the user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere. Area Typically a grouping of sites that have been designated by management as an individual operating component (e.g. Pandale, Jonesville, etc.). Audiometric Testing Testing conducted to measure a persons ability to hear. Authorized Person - Any person specifically authorized by the employer whose duties require the person to enter a regulated area, or any person entering such an area as a designated representative of employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe monitoring and measuring procedures. Automotive Accident Any occurrence in which a Company vehicle is damaged due to a collision with another vehicle or an imal or produces damages to a person or property.
Page 136 of 161

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

GLOSSARY (continued) 8. Benzene (C(6)H(6)) (CAS Registry No. 71-43-2) - Liquefied or gaseous benzene. It includes benzene contained in liquid mixtures and the benzene vapors released by these liquids. It does not include trace amounts of unreacted benzene contained in solid materials. Blanking or Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a blind flange, spectacle or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and is designed to withstand the maximum pressure of the pipe, line or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. Blood - Human blood, human blood components, and products made from human blood. Bloodborne Pathogens - Pathogenic microorganisms that are present in human blood and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but are not limited to, hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). Bonding - The joining of metallic parts with an adequately sized conductor to form an electrically conductive path, which will ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to safely conduct any current likely to be imposed. Bridge That part of a crane consisting of one or more girders, trucks, end ties, foot -walks, and drive mechanism, which carries the trolley(s).

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Page 137 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 14. Buddy System - A system of organizing employees into work groups in such a manner that each employee of the work group is designated to be observed by at least one other employee in the work group. The purpose of the buddy system is to provide rapid assistance to employees in the event of an emergency. Capacitor - A device for accumulating and holding a charge of electricity and consisting of conducting surfaces separated by a dielectric. Carcin ogenic Producing or tending to produce cancer. Casual Visitor - Any visitor (Crosstex employee or outside personnel) who is unfamiliar with the area or facility and is there for purposes other than performing work (e.g. tour groups, executive management, etc.). Facility supervisors should approve field visits by casual visitors. Casual visitors should receive a general site-specific safety briefing. Personnel such as salespersons, delivery persons and similar persons are typically not covered as casual visitors. Chemical Protective Clothing (CPC) Clothing specially designed to protect the wearer from contact with chemicals. This clothing must be specifically selected for compatibility with the properties of the chemical(s) present. Classified Area An area (within 100 feet) which contains or has the potential to contain flammable or hazardous materials. NOTE: Electrical Classified Areas are defined in the National Electric Code (NEC).

15.

16. 17.

18.

19.

Page 138 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 20. Clinical Laboratory - A workplace where diagnostic or other screening procedures are performed on blood or other potentially infectious materials. Closure Occurs when all issues identified in the review report have been resolved. Combustible Liquid - A liquid having a flash point below 100F (37.8C) and having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia at 100F (37.8C). Liquids meeting this definition are known as Class 1 liquids and are subdivided as follows: a. Class 1A liquids have a flash point below 73F (22.8C) and a boiling point below 100F (37.8C); for example, gasoline. Class 1B liquids have a flash point below 73F (22.8C) and a boiling point at or above 100F (37.8C); for example, methanol. Class 1C liquids having a flash point at or above 73F (22.8C) and below 100F (37.8C); for example, xylene.

21. 22.

b.

c.

23.

Competent Person An individual possessing the skills, knowledge, experience, training, and judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as determined by the employer. Conductor A material capable of transmitting electricity. Confined Space - Refers to a space that: a. Is large enough and so configured that a person can bodily enter and perform assigned work;

24. 25.

Page 139 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) b. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, columns and separators, piping, storage bins, vaults, excavations deeper than four feet, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry); and Is not designed for continuous human occupancy.

c. 26.

Container - Any barrel, bottle, can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, storage tank, or the like, but does not include piping systems. Controlled Release - Releases that are contained by in-place facilities or safeguards, do not go off property, can be stopped by closing valve(s), or absorbed/neutralized and promptly contained at the time of release. Covered Employee - An employee who is covered under a criteria defined in an EH&S Program that requires the employee to have medical surveillance. Typical criteria may include exposures that exceed the occupational exposure limit , the Action Level, or other criteria. Critical Lift A lift which involves one or more of the following: 1) lifts exceeding a safety factor of 75%; 2) lifts over pressurized vessels and/or piping; 3) lifts over buildings with energized electrical equipment; 4) personnel lifts; or 5) lifts designated as critical by the Crosstex representative. Damage Any property or vehicle damage that exceeds $500. Day - Any part of a calendar day.

27.

28.

29.

30. 31.

Page 140 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 32. Decontamination - The removal of hazardous substances from employees and their equipment to the extent necessary to preclude the occurrence of foreseeable adverse health effects. De-energized Absent of electrical energy. Double Block and Bleed - The closure of a line, duct or pipe by closing and lockin g and/or tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking and/or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves. Electrical Equipment That part of any equipment utilizing electric energy (i.e. controllers, motors, etc.) Electrical Hazard - For the purpose of this safety program, an electrical hazard is a dangerous electrical condition. Electrical conditions such as exposed energized parts or unguarded electrical equipment that may become energized, are examples of electrical hazards. Emergency An event that requires emergency responders, may require response from different regulating agencies, results in an actual or potential uncontrolled release, and/or causes danger or potential danger to the public, employees or requiring immediate medical attention.

33. 34.

35.

36.

37.

Page 141 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 38. Emergency Response - A response effort by employees from outside the immediate release area or by other designated responders (i.e., local fire departments, mutual aid groups, designated HAZMAT teams, etc.) to an occurrence, which results in or is likely to result in, an uncontrolled release of a hazardous substance, regardless of the location of the release. Responses to hazardous releases that are controlled at the time of the release by employees in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel, are not considered to be emergency responses within the scope of the standard. Emergency Response Plan A plan developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies prior to the commencement of emergency response operations. Emergency-Use Respirator - A respirator placed in or near the work area for use in an emergency. Employer - A current employer, a former employer, or a successor employer. Energized Containing electrical energy. Energy Isolation Device - A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to the following: A manually operated electrical circuit breaker, a disconnect switch, a slide gate, a blind, a line valve, a block, and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. The term does not include a push button, selector switch or other control circuit type devices.

39.

40.

41. 42. 43.

Page 142 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 44. Energy Source - Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumat ic, chemical, thermal or other energy. Common types of energy include: a. Mechanical Energy can be linear translation or rotation, or it can produce work, which in turn, produces changes in temperature and pressure. This type of energy can be controlled by switching it ON or OFF. Potential Energy can be due to pressure (above or below atmospheric) as in hydraulic, pneumatic or vacuum systems, or it can be due to springs or gravity. Potential energy can be dissipated, controlled or blocked; it cannot be turned on or off. Electrical Energy refers to generated electrical power or static electricity. In the case of generated electricity, the electrical power can be turned off or the path from the source to the destination can be interrupted and capacitor charge s dissipated. Static electricity can only be dissipated or controlled. Thermal Energy is manifested by high or low temperature. This type of energy is the result of mechanical work, radiation, chemical reaction or electrical resistance. It is controlled by isolating the source of the temperature differential.

b.

c.

d.

45. 46.

EPA Environmental Protection Agency. Equipment Lock A lock used to secure an individual energy isolation or lockout device.

Page 143 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 47. Escape-Only Respirator - A respirator that is acceptable for use only for emergency escape from a developing hazardous atmosphere. Exposed - Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. Applies to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. Exposure or Exposed - An employee is subjected to a toxic substance or harmful physical agent in the course of employment through any route of entry (inhalation, ingestion, skin contact or absorption, etc.), and includes past exposure and potential (e.g., accidental or possible) exposure, but does not include situations where the employer can demonstrate that the toxic substance or harmful physical agent is not used, handled, stored, generated, or present in the workplace in any manner different from typical non -occupational situations. First Responder Awareness Level Individuals who are likely to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who have been trained to initiate an emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the release. These individuals would take no further action beyond notification and have sufficient training to objectively demonstrate the ability to recognize emergencies involving hazardous substances and the risks and potential outcomes involved, understand their limited role in an emergency, and recognize when help is needed and whom to notify.

48.

49.

50.

Page 144 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 51. First Responder Operations Level Individuals who are trained to respond to releases or potential releases of hazardous substances in a defensive fashion, without actually trying to stop the release, as part of the initial response to the site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the environment from the effects of the release. Their function is to secure, control, and contain the release from a safe distance. They may operate valves or other controls to stop the release if they are trained to do so under normal operating conditions. These individuals require a minimum of 8 (eight) hours training. Fit Test - The use of an approved protocol to evaluate the effectiveness of the seal of a respirator to the face of an individual. Flammable Liquid - A liquid having a flash point at or above 100F (37.8C). Combustible liquids are subdivided as: a. Class II liquids have flash points at or above 100o F (37.8C) and below 140F (60C); for example, diesel fuel oil. Class IIIA liquids have flash points at or above 140o F (60C) and below 200F (93C); for example, phenol. Class IIIB liquids have flash points at or above 200o F (93C); for example, ethylene glycol.

52.

53.

b.

c.

54.

Flash Point - The lowest temperature at which a liquid will give off sufficient flammable vapor for an ignition to occur. GC/MS - Gas Chromatography Mass Spectrometry.
Page 145 of 161

55.

GLOSSARY (continued) 56. GFCI - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter A device whose function is to interrupt the electrical circuit to the load when the fault current to ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit. Ground - A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. H 2 S Area - An area or other facility capable of having ambient breathing zone H2 S concentrations reaching or exceeding 10 ppm. Hazardous Material - A substance or material, including a hazardous substance, which has been determined by the Secretary of Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and property when transported in commerce, and which has been so designated. Hazardous Material Incident An event that can be controlled at the time of the incident by the employees in the immediate area and not an immediate hazard to the safety of the environment, public or personnel.

57.

58.

59.

60.

Page 146 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 61. Hazardous Materials Specialist - Those who respond with and provide support to hazardous material technicians. These individuals have more direct knowledge of the materials that may be handled. They also act as a technical liaison with various agencies. They require a minimum of 24 hours training equivalent to Technician Level plus more in-depth training in same areas as well as knowledge of the local/state emergency response plans and site health and safety plan. Hazardous Materials Technician - Those who respond to the incident for the purpose of stopping the release, e.g., plug or patch. They are more highly trained and experienced than First Responder Operations Level personnel. They require a minimum of 24 hours training plus additional training on implementation of emergency response plan, use of field survey instruments, specialized PPE, incident command system, hazard/risk assessment techniques, advance control/containment operations, decontamination, and chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior. Hazardous Substance - Any substance, naturally-occurring or man-made which, due to its physical and chemical properties, can cause the deterioration of other materials or can be injurious to living things. Hazard Warning Any words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof appearing on a label or other appropriate form of warning which convey the hazard(s) of the chemical(s) in the container(s).

62.

63.

64.

Page 147 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 65. HAZWOPER Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response/Operations involving hazardous waste at certain treatment, storage, and disposal facilities and/or emergency response operations for releases, or substantial threats of releases, of hazardous substances. HBV - Hepatitis B virus. Health Professional - A physician, occupational health nurse, industrial hygienist, toxicologist, or epidemiologist, providing medical or other occupational health services to exposed employees. HEPA High efficiency particulate air filter. High H2 S Area - A situation where the ambient breathing zone concentration of hydrogen sulfide is known or anticipated to reach or exceed 100 ppm during the performance of work or during an emergency. High Voltage Over 600 volts, nominal. HIV - Human immunodeficiency virus. Immediate Release Area - The assigned work area of the responding employee. In most cases, this will include gas plants, platforms, and field offices. Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) - An atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individuals ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere (e.g. a concentration of H2 S at 300 ppm or above (OSHA) or 100 ppm (NIOSH) or a concentration of oxygen at less than 19.5%).

66. 67.

68. 69.

70. 71. 72.

73.

Page 148 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 74. Immediately (pertaining to injuries) The first thing following the visit to the medical professional and treatment. Immediately (pertaining to spills and releases) The first thing after ensuring your safety, calling for any necessary emergency assistance from fire or law enforcement authorities and providing necessary emergency medical assistance. If the reporting threshold for a particular chemical is unknown, call your supervisor. Immunoassay - A laboratory analysis to determine the presence of a prohibited substance in a body fluid. ICS Incident Command System Incipient Stage Fire A fire which is in the initial or beginning stage and which can be controlled or extinguished by portable fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe systems or small hose systems without the need for protective clothing or breathing apparatus. Insulated - A conductor encased within a material of composition and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation. Insulating materials are designed to keep electricity on its intended path. Job Lock A lock used to ensure the continuity of energy isolation during multishift operation. A job-lock is typically placed on a lockbox. The key to the job-lock is controlled by the Task Supervisor from each shift. A job-lock is an additional (optional) lock and is not a substitute for applying personal locks. The job-lock is not a substitute for the Task Supervisors personal lock.

75.

76.

77. 78.

79.

80.

Page 149 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 81. Label Any written, printed, or graphic material, displayed on or affixed to containers of hazardous chemicals. Lead - Metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are all other organic lead compounds. Level A Protective Clothing - Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or positive pressure airline system (PPAS) with escape SCBA and a totally encapsulating chemical protective suit, gloves (double layer), chemical resistant boots and other safety equipment. Level B Protective Clothing - Same respirator as level A and hooded chemical resistant suit, gloves (double layer), chemical resistant boots and other safety equipment. Level C Protective Clothing - Full face or half-mask air purifying respirator and protective clothing as in level B and other safety equipment. Level D Protective Clothing No respiratory protection required and work attire that may include: coveralls, gloves, boots, boot coverings, eye and face protection, and other safety equipment. LHCP Licensed health care professional. Limit S witch - A device that is actuated by the motion of a part of a power-driven machine or equipment to alter or disconnect the electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic circuit associated with the machine or equipment. Line Breaking - Act of separating piping, lines or ducts that would allow the contents or residual contents of the pipe, line or duct to be exposed to the atmosphere.
Page 150 of 161

82.

83.

84.

85.

86.

87. 88.

89.

GLOSSARY (continued) 90. 91. Load Total superimposed weight on the load block or hook. Lockbox A device used to secure the keys to the locks on isolation devices during a group lockout to which each authorized employee affixes his/her personal lock. Lockout Device - A key lock or hasp/key lock combination to hold an energy -isolating device in the safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) Written or printed material concerning a hazardous chemical, which is prepared in accordance with the Hazardous Communication Standard. Near Miss An unplanned occurrence that interferes with or interrupts the orderly progress of work, which under slightly different circumstances, could have resulted in personal injury, damage to Company property, or the environment, but, where no actual loss occurred. Noise Exposure Monitoring - A measurement obtained, typically using an audiodosimeter, to evaluate an employees noise dose received during a work period. NORM - Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials - Materials of the 238-Uranium and 232-Thorium decay chains found in nature and which emit ionizing radiation spontaneously.

92.

93.

94.

95.

96.

Page 151 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 97. On-Scene Incident Commander - The person(s) who organizes and controls the complete spill response. Requires a minimum of 40 hours training equivalent to First Responder Operations Level, plus additional training in decision-making process required of the position. Operations Lock A lock used in a facility for security or operational control and is not to be used as an energy isolation lock for lockout/tagout purposes. Operations locks can be any size, shape or color and MUST be different than locks used for lockout/tagout purposes. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Other Potentially Infectious Materials (OPIM) - (1) The following human body fluids: semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, amniotic fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids; (2) Any unfixed tissue or organ (other than intact skin) from a human (living or dead); and (3) HIVcontaining cell or tissue cultures, organ cultures, and HIV- or HBV-containing culture medium or other solutions; and blood, organs, or other tissues from experimental animals infected with HIV or HBV. Overload - Any load greater than the rated load.

98.

99. 100.

101.

Page 152 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 102. Overhead Hoists a. Manually-operated hoists actuated by a hand chain and utilizing chain as the lifting medium; and Electric and air-powered hoists using either chain or wire rope as the lifting medium. Ratchet operated hoists, such as comealongs, are not included in this program.

b.

c. 103.

PEL Permissible Exposure Limit - The maximum amount or concentration of a chemical that a worker may be exposed to under OSHA regulations. PPM Parts per million. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) An eight-hour TWA noise exposure of 90 dBA or a twelve-hour TWA of 87 dBA. Person -in-Charge Authorized individual that meets applicable regulatory qualification requirements and has the necessary knowledge and skills to oversee the work. Personal Fall Arrest System A system used to arrest a worker in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage point, connectors, body harness, and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combination of these. Personal Floatation Device Type II A type II PFD, or near-shore buoyancy vest is intended for calm, inland water or where there is a good chance of quick rescue. Inherent buoyant PFDs of this type will turn some unconscious wearers to a face-up position in the water. This type of inflatable turns as well as a Type I foam PFD.
Page 153 of 161

104. 105.

106.

107.

108.

GLO SSARY (continued) 109. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Specialized equipment or clothing worn by personnel for protection against a hazard. General work clothes (e.g., uniforms, pants, shirts or blouses) not intended to function as protection against a h azard are not considered to be personal protective equipment. Personnel Monitoring Equipment Devices designed to be worn or carried by an individual for the purpose of measuring the dose received (e.g., film badges, pocket chambers, pocket dosimeters, film rings, etc.). Positive -Pressure Respirator - A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) - A pass/fail test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individuals response to the test agent. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) - An assessment of the adequacy of the respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator. Radiation Includes alpha rays, beta rays, gamma rays, X-rays, neutrons, high speed electrons, high speed protons, and other atomic particles. This term does not include sound or radio waves, or visible light, or infrared or ultraviolet light. Radioactive Material Any material that emit s, by spontaneous nuclear disintegration, corpuscular or electromagnetic emanations.

110.

111.

112.

113.

114.

115.

Page 154 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 116. Rescue Personnel - Personnel that are designated and trained in the rescue of personnel who are unable to exit unaided from a hazardous environment. Respirator Use Area - A designated work area where respiratory protection is required to protect employees from a hazardous atmosphere. Review Team Leader The person selected to organize the review, compile the results, and issue a final report. Review Team Member A person who has been selected by Crosstex Management to participate in a Safety Field or Contractor Review. Scaffold Any temporary elevated platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workmen, materials, or both. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) - An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is designed to be carried by the wearer. Side Pull The portion of the hoist pull acting horizontally. Site A breakdown within an operating area to an individual tank battery, compressor station, gas plant, warehouse, garage, etc. Site Supervisor/Foreman Authorized individual that meets applicable regulatory qualification requirements and has the necessary knowledge and skills to oversee the work.

117.

118.

119.

120.

121.

122. 123.

124.

Page 155 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 125. Small Hose System A system of hoses ranging in diameter from ?" (1.6 cm) to 1" (3.8 cm), which is for the use of employees and which provides a means for the control and extinguishment of incipient stage fires. Standard Threshold Shift (STS) A loss of hearing, either temporary or permanent, of an average of ten decibels or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 hertz. Stand-by Personnel - A person(s) outside of the respirator use area who has been trained and is responsible for monitoring the activity of personnel inside the respirator use area and the status of the air supply for air line respirators. Standpipe Systems a. Class I Standpipe System A 2" (6.3cm) hose connection for use by fire departments and those trained in handling heavy fire streams. Class II Standpipe System A 1" (3.8 cm) hose system that provides a means for the control or extinguishment of incipient stage fires. Class III Standpipe System A combined system of hoses used by employees trained in hose operations, and which is capable of furnishing effective water discharge during the more advanced stages of fire (beyond incipient stage) in the interior of workplaces. Hose outlets are available for both 1" (3.8 cm) and 2" (6.3 cm) hose.

126.

127.

128.

b.

c.

Page 156 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 129. STEL Short-term Exposure Limit The concentration to which workers can be exposed continuously for a short period of time (15 minutes) without causing irritation, chronic or irreversible tissue damage, narcosis of sufficient degree to increase the likelihood of accidental injury, impaired ability to selfrescue, or materially reduction in work efficiency. Sterilize - The use of a physical or chemical procedure to destroy all microbial life including highly resistant bacterial endospores. Supervisor Authorized individual that meets applicable regulatory qualification requirements and has the necessary knowledge and skills to oversee the work. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) - A selfcontained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or airline respirator. Tagout Device - A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, (e.g., nylon cable tie) which can be securely fastened to an energy -isolating device in accordance with the established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed. Tagout devices shall be designed to withstand the environment to which they are exposed, and the attachment means (e.g., nylon cable tie) shall be selflocking, non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength no less than 50 pounds to prevent removal without the use of excessive force.

130.

131.

132.

133.

Page 157 of 161

GLOSSARY (continued) 134. Toxic substance or harmful physical agent Any chemical substance, biological agent (bacteria, virus, fungus, etc.), or physical stress (noise, heat, cold, vibration, repetitive motion, ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, hypo - or hyperbaric pressure, etc.) which: a. Is listed in the latest printed edition of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances (RTECS) which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec. 1910.6; or Has yielded positive evidence of an acute or chronic health hazard in testing conducted by, or known to, the employer; or Is the subject of a material safety data sheet kept by or known to the employer indicating that the material may pose a hazard to human health.

b.

c.

135.

Trade secret - Any confidential formula, pattern, process, device, or information or compilation of information that is used in an employer's business and that gives the employer an opportunity to obtain an advantage over competitors who do not know or use it. Trolley - The unit that travels on the bridge rails and supports the load block. TWA Time-weighted Average - An average value of exposure over the course of an 8 ho ur work shift. An employee's exposure to any substance listed in Table Z-2 of 29 CFR 1910.1000, in any 8 -hour work shift of a 40hour workweek, shall not exceed the 8-hour time weighted average limit given for that substance in Table Z-2.
Page 158 of 161

136. 137.

GLOSSARY (contin ued) 138. Unrestricted Use - Use by unlicensed (general or specific) persons or companies. Selling NORM equipment to junk dealers or returning NORM-contaminated land to landowners are examples of improper release for unrestricted use. User Seal Check - An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face and to verify proper valve operation. Vapor control system - Any equipment used for containing the total vapors displaced during the loading of gasoline, motor fuel or other fuel-tank trucks, and the displacing of these vapors through a vapor processing system or balancing the vapor with the storage tank. This equipment also includes systems containing the vapors displaced from the storage tank during the unlo ading of the tank truck, which balance the vapors back to the tank truck.

139.

140.

Page 159 of 161

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 160 of 161

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT PAGE I _____________________________________________

(Print Name)

acknowledge that I received, read and understood the contents of this 2006 Safety and Health Handbook, which also contains a CD with safety and health procedures and forms associated to the handbook. I also acknowledge that the handbook serves as a reference for the minimum safety and health rules and standards for Crosstex Energy Services and that this handbook is not intended to be a stand-alone document. For a complete and current version the reader should obtain a copy of the policy/procedure or form from the EH&S Document section of Crosstex Energy Services web page.

Signature______________________________________ Date Signed_____________

Page 161 of 161

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE General 1. Safety belts shall be used at all times by driver and all occupants while a Company vehicle is in use. 2. The following forms shall be carried in the glove compartment of Company vehicles: a. Registration b. Insurance information c. Crosstex Auto Accident Report Form. 3. If applicable, the DOT-required Bill of Lading (hazardous chemicals) shall be carried on the front seat of the Company vehicle or in the side pocket of the door. 4. All drivers of Company vehicles shall abide by Federal, State, and Local traffic regulations. 5. Vehicle capacity is limited to the number of safety belts available inside the vehicle. 6. Personnel shall not ride in the bed of any truck on public roads. 7. All operators of Company vehicles must have a valid, appropriate drivers license. 8. Equipment on all Company vehicles must conform to Federal, State, and Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations. 9. Drivers shall look around the entire vehicle for hazards before entering, starting, and driving. 10. Approved First Aid Kits and Fire Extinguishers shall be carried in Company vehicles. Vehicle Operation in Classified or Hazardous Areas 1. Vehicles may be operated or driven within a classified area of a plant or lease as determined safe and appropriate by the supervisor. 2. The supervisor shall restrict or barricade any area within a plant or facility where a hazard (including the potential for accumulation of gas/vapor(s) or other hazardous atmospheres) is known, or frequently exists. 3. Where such a hazard exists and it becomes necessary for a vehicle to enter, Hot or Cold Permitting procedures must be followed. a. The Vehicle Operator shall notify the Permit Issuer in advance when a vehicle or piece of equipment needs to gain access to a classified area. b. Caution should always be observed when operating a motor vehicle in close proximity to equipment containing hydrocarbons. c. Under no circumstances shall a vehicle or equipment be allowed to run unattended in the classified area of a plant, inside a tank dike, or any area where an immediate hazard exists due to accumulation of hydrocarbon.

Page 1 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Under no circumstances shall a vehicle be left unattended with the motor running in the vicinity of an area where the potential for accumulations of gas/vapors may exist. (Classified area) Unattended Vehicles 1. Vehicles may be left running unattended only for the purpose of operating auxiliary equipment or lights, and then only when the driver can ensure the vehicle is secure with transmission in park and the parking brake set, or if manual transmission, the parking brake is set. 2. Winch trucks or similar large vehicles are subject to the same precautions as smaller vehicles when required to operate unattended. NOTE: A vehicle is unattended anytime the driver is away from the controls. Vehicle Parking 1. It is the responsibility of every driver to not only operate his/her vehicle in a safe manner, but to also ensure it is parked such that it will not be exposed to damage when left near certain field work locations. 2. Vehicles shall be parked a minimum of 100 feet upwind of pipeline repair job sites or spill cleanup sites. Only those vehicles engaged in the actual line repair or cleanup are permitted within the minimum distance if determined safe and appropriate by the supervisor. 3. Vehicles shall be parked a minimum of 100 feet from any excavation to avoid the possibility of a cave- in. Vehicle Backing 1. Avoid backing a vehicle, if at all possible. 2. When possible, vehicles should be parked in a manner that will eliminate the need to back up upon departure (pull-through parking). 3. Do not park a vehicle by backing up, if a greater hazard is imposed by backing into a space rather than driving forward. Vehicular Equipment Safety 1. The GVWR of a vehicle shall not be exceeded. Equipment shall not be added to or carried in a vehicle without first determining whether it will exceed the remaining weight capacity (See APPENDIX 1). 2. A vehicle shall not be operated with defective or substandard safety belts, brake systems, tires, lights, horns, steering, or damaged suspension parts. 3. Defective or damaged vehicle parts, as listed above, shall be reported to the supervisor immediately and repaired as soon as possible.

Page 2 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Company Vehicle Safety Inspection Checklists (See Forms Section of CD) shall be reviewed by the supervisor to determine maintenance needs and then sent to the Safety Department. 5. Vehicle incidents shall be reported immediately to the supervisor and a report filed with the Safety Department on the Crosstex Auto Accident Report Form. NOTE: Any damage caused while a Company vehicle is in motion constitutes a vehicle accident and shall be reported as such. 6. Trailers shall be equipped with all applicable required lights, brakes, and safety chains. This equipment shall be maintained in an operable condition. 7. All vehicles and trailers shall be operated consistent with applicable State and Federal regulations. Definitions 1. Company Vehicles - Refers to company-owned vehicles, leased or rented vehicles and personal vehicles used on Company business. 2. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) - The value specified by the manufacturer as the loaded weight of a single vehicle. GVWR is identified on the manufacturer's certification label, which is usually located on the driver's door or door jam. GVWR is the combination of curb weight plus payload (including driver and fuel). 3. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) - The maximum allowable weight of a completely loaded vehicle and trailer, as designated by the manufacturer. References Occupational Safety & Health Act, Section 5 Duties General Duty Clause. National Institute of Occupation Safety and Health (NIOSH) Publication No. 98-142 NIOSH Alert: Preventing Worker Injuries & Deaths from Traffic-Related Motor Vehicle Crashes. Department of Transportation (DOT) - National Highway Transportation Safety Administration (NHTSA) Employers Safety Program.

Page 3 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 1 - HOW TO TELL IF YOUR VEHICLE EXCEEDS ITS GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING... Determine the GVWR by looking on the label located on the driver's door post of most vehicles. Enter that figure into the table below. Determine the NET WEIGHT by taking an unloaded vehicle to a public scale and getting it weighed. Enter the weight into the table below. GVWR (Minus) NET WEIGHT Maximum Allowable Load Load to be Carried Add all of the following items:

Weight of passengers carried Weight of all fuel, water, oil and equipment (tools, etc.) Weight of all after- market items installed Weight of any cargo Weight of other miscellaneous items to be carried

Enter the total of all items above to the table above in "Load to be Carried". Subtract the "Load to be Carried" from the "Maximum Allowable Load". If the "Maximum Allowable Load" will be exceeded, you must reduce the weight of the "Load to be Carried" in order to remain in compliance with your vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. For optimum results, reduce the "Maximum Allowable Load" to 75% of the maximum and stay within tha t limit to allow a margin of safety. When integrating a tow vehicle with a trailer, either a fiver or travel trailer, add the GVWR of the trailer with the GVWR of the tow vehicle. If they add up to more than the Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) of the tow vehicle, it's a bad match. The only solution is to pick a lighter trailer or a bigger tow vehicle. The same applies to a self-contained unit and a towed unit, either four wheels down or on a dolly.

Page 4 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 - CROSSTEX VEHICLE POLICY Policy Company vehicles are provided as necessary for use on Company business to employees whose job duties require automotive travel. The rules set out in this policy for employee use of assigned vehicles apply equally, whether the Company purchases, leases, rents vehicles, or provides reimbursement for the use of personal vehicles. Company vehicles are not provided to employees for personal use or convenience. Company vehicles are ordinarily provided for use only to employees whose jobs either, a) regularly involve travel to various locations (e.g. plant or pipeline operators, technicians, foreman) or b) frequently involve call outs and/or field trips at unpredictable times (e.g. operations engineers, superintendents, district operations managers, etc.) Where there is a conveniently situated Company facility in which Company vehicles may be safely parked overnight and call-outs are not a responsibility, employees with Company vehicles are requested to commute in their personal vehicles between their homes and work. Crosstex prohibits the use of company vehicles for personal benefit, except for commuting in those situations which qualify and except for very minor incidentals such as stopping by a restaurant to eat or to a store for a purchase on the way home. Employees must adhere to these rules. The use of a Company-owned vehicle for personal and/or vacation use is strictly prohibited. The consumption of alcoholic beverages or controlled substances without a prescription before driving a Company vehicle is also strictly prohibited. Insurance Crosstex maintains liability insurance coverage on its vehicles for the protection of the Company and its licensed employee drivers when operating a Company vehicle with authorization. Also, the Company policy protects the Company when employee-owned vehicles are used on Company business. Crosstex is self- insured for physical damage and hence assumes all risks for losses or damages to its own vehicles from collisions, theft, and other casualties. The Company liability insurance policy does not protect an employee when driving his or her personal vehicles on Company business. Hence, employees who may need to use their vehicles on Company business should make sure they have personal liability coverage for their vehicle and that the coverage protects the employee owner (not the Company) when using the vehicle on Company business. Such use of an employees personal vehicle should be pre-approved by the employees supervisor. Responsibility No employee under eighteen (18) years of age is authorized to drive on Company business. Drivers of Company vehicles are expected to: Operate the vehicle: 1. Lawfully and in accordance with the Vehicle Safety section of the Safety and Health Handbook. 2. Only for authorized purposes.
Page 5 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 (continued) 3. Only when not under the influence of alcohol, drugs or other substances that impair driving ability. See the Crosstex Drug and Alcohol Policy for specific information. 4. Provide proper servicing, care maintenance, and security for the vehicle and its contents. 5. Maintain a clean driving record and a currently valid driver or operators license of type required by the state for the class of vehicle involved. Moving traffic violations, even when driving personally-owned vehicles can adversely affect the Companys insurance coverage and create greater liability for the Company in the event of an accident. For this reason and due to the Companys safety responsibilities to the public, violations (especially those involving alcohol or drugs) may jeopardize an employees job. 6. Avoid, except in case of genuine emergency, allowing persons other than Company employees and authorized contractors to drive a Company vehicle. The Companys automotive liability insurance coverage does not protect such persons when driving Company vehicles. The Company remains protected, however. 7. Neither carry nor possess in a Company vehicle alcoholic beverages or illegal drugs, and in no case, allow others to do so. 8. Neither carry nor allow the carrying of firearms and explosives in a Company vehicle. 9. Observe both the applicable laws and Company rules governing steps to be taken in case of a vehicle accident. A copy of these rules and the accident reporting fo rm are to be retained in Company vehicles at all times. 10. Assume personal responsibility for any traffic tickets received and payment of any fines. Reimbursement of these fines for any reason is prohibited. 11. Make the Company vehicle available for other employees use while on vacation or other absence, or when otherwise needed and available. 12. Ensure state-required inspections are secured in a timely fashion for a regularly assigned Company vehicle. 13. Carrying hitchhikers in a Company vehicle is strictly prohibited. Visitors or contractors on Company business may be carried. 14. Ensure the required current insurance certificate and any state- issued registration sticker or copies of the current registration receipt are present in the vehicle at all times. 15. Keep the Company vehicle free from personal and unauthorized appendages (ornaments, accessories, etc.) and stickers. 16. Avoid unnecessary loose debris/items in the car. Likewise, when driving a personal or rental vehicle on Company business, applicable items from above should be observed.

Page 6 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 (continued) Vehicle Servicing and Maintenance 1. Employees with Company-assigned vehicles who are issued a credit card for use in servicing the vehicle with gasoline, oil, emergency repairs, etc may not use the company credit card for servicing personally-owned vehicles. Likewise, a Company gasoline credit card should not be used for snacks or other personal items except in emergencies or with approval of the direct supervisor. If this is done, such expenditures should be accounted for as provided in the Company Expense Reimbursement Policy. 2. At some locations, management may approve arrangements with local automotive repair shops, tire distributors, etc., for servicing Company vehicle needs through direct Company billings. Employees obtaining these services must obtain a copy of the invoices (or sales tickets), and, after signing them to evidence receipt of the indicated service, submit them to their supervisor with proper vehicle identifications. 3. Drivers of Company-assigned vehicles are to submit the vehicles odometer reading to their Supervisor immediately following the last day of use each month. Monthly vehicle condition inspections are also required and should be submitted at the same time. 4. Company vehicles needing major repairs should be taken for such repairs only with approval of the appropriate supervisor or other manager. In case of severe damage resulting from an accident, decision as to whether to repair or replace the vehicle should be made in consultation by the local manager based upon the vehicle mileage, repair costs, etc. Vehicle Registration Ordinarily, Company vehicles are purchased by the Vehicle Coordinator in the state in which the vehicles are to be utilized. The dealer applies to the state for the title certificate and registers the vehicle for licensing locally. The license plates and registration receipts or cards are issued locally. Annual registration fee notices thereafter are ordinarily forwarded to the local office for handling. Use of Personally-Owned or Rental Cars 1. When employees without access to a Company-assigned vehicle have occasion to drive on Company business, they are requested to utilize their own personal vehicles, with the company reimbursing them for the cost of such use. Reimbursement is based on the current federally-authorized rate. This reimbursement figure is calculated to include all costs of vehicle operation, including insurance and depreciation and is the rate allowed for income tax purposes. With approval of the employees supervisor, the employee may elect to rent a vehicle instead of using their personal vehicle. (See 4 below for additional information regarding insurance requirements.)

Page 7 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 (continued) NOTE: When using your personal vehicle while on Company business, your auto policy will be considered the primary policy in case of an automobile insurance claim. You will be responsible for the deductible and any increased rates. The Companys automobile policy will be secondary and pick up where your policy coverages end/ cease. 2. Should an employee who is traveling on a Company trip, which would ordinarily be by commercial airline, elect, as a preference (with supervisory approval), to travel instead by personal car, the reimbursement will be at the current authorized rate per mile. 3. When transportation by car is needed at a destination while away from ones headquarters on Company business, employees may choose between car rental and use of taxicabs or other public transportation. Normally, this decision should be made based upon the economics of the two alternatives; though other factors, such as the accessibility of taxicabs in the particular community, may also be considered. As such, the employee should consult with their supervisor for rental instructions prior to making arrangements. 4. As the Company self- insures its physical damage and its liability coverage extends to use of rental cars, employees should waive additional costly insurance offered by the car rental company. However, if a personal credit card is used for payment, the employees should hand-write Crosstex Energy under their signature on the rental agreement and carry a copy of their own personal insurance certificate in case they are involved in a vehicle accident. Drivers Licenses 1. Crosstex will reimburse employee drivers required by the Company to hold a commercial license for the fee paid to the state for such license and/or regular renewals. This is done because such fees are higher than those for a regular drivers license. 2. Employees in jobs which require, a) driving on Company business, and b) to maintain a current valid license of any type, must recognize that their jobs are at risk in a case of: Excessive traffic violations, Violations involving alcohol or drugs, In case the license is suspended, revoked or canceled, Violations of other Company Guidelines committed while driving on Company business.

3. Driving records may be checked with the employees release and failure to provide a release or notify the Company of the loss of a valid drivers license for any reason will subject the employee to disciplinary action.

Page 8 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 (continued) 4. Holders of commercial licenses are legally required to, a) notify their employer if a commercial license is suspended, canceled or revoked, b) notify their employer within thirty (30) days of a conviction for any traffic violation (except parking), and c) notify their state vehicle licensing agency within thirty (30) days if convicted in any other state of any traffic violation (except parking). NOTE: No person is legally allowed to have more than one vehicle operators license at any given time. Vehicle Accidents Employees involved in a vehicle accident, occurring while on Company business, should adhere to the following accident / incident reporting guidelines: 1. Follow local and/or state laws with respect to reporting accidents to police and cooperate with police officers investigating the accident. 2. Vehicle accidents that involve another vehicle, that cause personal injury, or third party property damage should be reported by phone to the appropriate supervisor, and to the Safety Department as soon as possible. 3. All vehicle incidents shall be reported immediately to the supervisor and a report filed with the Safety Department on the Crosstex Auto Accident Report Form. 4. Employees involved in a motor vehicle accident (including boat accidents), occurring while operating a Company-owned or leased vehicle or boat, or personal vehicles used on Company business, shall report the accident to their supervisor and to the Safety Department as soon as possible. Employees involved in such accidents are required to submit to drug/alcohol screening as soon as possible, but no later than eight (8) hours after the accident. NOTE: A vehicle accident is defined as an occurrence involving a Company vehicle (owned, rented, or personal vehicle used on Company business) that results in death, injury or property or vehicle damage (including the vehicle being driven). 5. The Company driver shall obtain personal and insurance information from the other driver via the accident-reporting packet, and, if available, obtain names and addresses of witnesses, police reports, and any other related information. 6. The Company driver should exercise caution to exchange only the necessary information with the other driver, (i.e. names, drivers license, insurance), but DO NOT make commitments or express responsibility for the accident. Simply state that you will report it to your Company; any liability will be determined by the Company and our insurance carrier. Do not assume any blame or responsibility. Do not express opinions or become involved in arguments.

Page 9 of 10

VEHICLE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) APPENDIX 2 (continued) 7. Gather witness statements with names and addresses/phone numbers. Note license numbers of the other parties vehicles at the scene. 8. The immediate supervisor shall thoroughly investigate the accident/incident; complete and sign the form for the rental vehicle or the Crosstex Auto Accident Report Form; and, if applicable, the First Report of Injury or Illness Form. 9. All appropriate accident/incident reports/ photos and investigation forms shall be received by the Safety and Health Department no later than the day after the accident/incident occurred. Facsimile/scanning transmittals are acceptable.

Page 10 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES General In order to be prepared for an emergency or survival situation, employees using small boats (small craft) need to be aware of and follow these safety guidelines. The reason for these guidelines is to help prevent accidents and prevent injury or death. You should not minimize the dangers or take lightly the possibility of a mishap on the water. Boating Navigational Safety Rules 1. Safe Boating (Navigational Rules Of The Road) The U.S. Coast Guard navigational rules establish actions to be taken by vessels to avoid collision. The rules are divided into two parts: INLAND and INTERNATIONAL. Inland rules apply to vessels operating inside the line of demarcation while International navigation rules apply outside the line of demarcation which is south of the intercoastal canal. Crosstex Energy Services adopts the following rules for its employees. These are the rules enforced by the various State Wildlife Departments and the U.S. Coast Guard. The purpose is to ensure the safety of company employees, their passengers and the public. a. The Sound Signals. Under the Inland Navigation rules, signals are used to indicate the maneuvers of a vessel. In the Inland waters, you signal your intentions and wait for the other vessels operator to reply. He can either reply with the same signal and you can pass as agreed, or give the danger signal. Under the international rules, sound signals are only used when the movement is being executed. One (1) short blast. Inland: I plan to pass with you on my port (left) side. International: I am changing course to the starboard(right). Two (2) short blasts. Inland: I plan to pass with you on my starboard (right) side. International: I am changing course to port (left). Three (2) short blasts. Both Inland and International: I have my engines in reverse. Five (5) or more short blasts. Indicates DANGER!!!

All vessels approaching each other at angles or directions that present a risk of collision shall exchange the above signals and direct themselves in the following manner. b. Crossing. When two vessels are approaching at perpendicular or oblique angles, the vessel which has the other on her starboard (right) side shall keep out of the way of the other vessel. The rules allow for either vessel to initiate the one blast in this situation, which should then be answered, by one blast from the other vessel. Remember: Just like when meeting a car at a street intersection, the one on the right has the right of way. Every boat has a danger zone from straight in front (the bow) to past the middle of the right side. You must yield to boats in your danger zone.

Page 1 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) c. Meeting head on. When two (2) vessels are approaching on reciprocal courses in a headon or nearly so situation, both vessels should exchange one blast and pass with safe room on each others port (left) side. This requires that both of you to stay to the right and as far apart as practical. d. The overtaking situation. When one vessel is overtaking another vessel from any direction two or more points abaft (to the rear of) the other vessels beam, that vessel is an overtaking vessel and thus required to keep clear of the other vessel. The overtaking vessel should indicate the intended side on which it desires to pass and wait until the overtaken vessel signals a similar signal before passing. NOTE: Keep these following points in mind: Most practical situations upon the water involve more than two vessels operating under less than ideal conditions. In such multiple vessels encounters, all mariners should exercise good seamanship, operate at a safe speed, and if ever in doubt as to the intentions of another vessel, immediately sound the danger signal, slacken speed, or stop the vessel until danger of collision passes. As a stand on or privileged vessel (vessel with the right of way) in any of the mentioned situations, you are required to hold course and speed until such time as it becomes apparent to you that action by the give way or burdened vessel (vessel that should yield) alone cannot avoid the collision. (Dont be stubborn, even if you are entitled to the right of way you may be dead right. Exercise prudent seamanship in all close quarters situations.) Again if you, at any time, are in doubt as to the intentions of another vessel, sound the danger signal and take necessary action to avoid the collision. Remember that there are a lot of operators on the water who dont know the first thing about boating, not to mention the rules of the road.

2. Who Has The Right Of Way There are established rules that dictate who has the right of way. In order to avoid problems or collisions, follow these rules. A power-driven vessel underway shall keep out of the way of: a. A vessel not under command (unable to maneuver) b. A vessel restricted in her ability to maneuver c. A vessel engaged in fishing

Page 2 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) 3. Rules For Restricted Visibility In situations where you encounter limited or restricted visibility, you are required to understand and abide by the following: a. When operating under conditions of reduced visibility such as fog, heavy rain, snow, etc., all vessels must travel at a safe speed, and, in addition, sound one blast of the horn or whistle every two minutes. b. Under reduced visibility conditions, always navigate with extreme caution and keep a sharp lookout for lights and signals from other vessels. c. When at anchor in reduced visibility, every vessel must ring the ships bell (or other device) for a period of five seconds, once every two minutes. This does not apply to vessels moored in approved anchorages or in close-in areas where other vessels dont normally navigate. Should you be anchored in a channel or in other frequently navigated waters, you must sound the bell (or other device) to alert others to your position. 4. Additional General Navigational Safety Rules All employees should be aware of and abide by these general safety rules: a. It is best to avoid hampering the progress of any large vessel even if you think you have the right of way. Keep in mind that large vessels can only operate in the navigable channels whereas a small craft can navigate in very little water. b. Large vessels even at slow speed may throw a large wake. Large deeply-laden vessels can take up to a half-mile to come to a complete stop. Never put your vessel in a position where a pilot has to execute an emergency maneuver to avoid running you down. Large vessels have extreme momentum. c. Never run between a towboat and her tow. The towline may only be submerged a few feet. Should the cable become taut, it could damage your vessel and endanger your life. Learn the signals displayed by tugboats and stay well clear of the tug, tow and cable. d. Stay well clear of a tugboat pushing a barge. The operator may not be able to see you as much as 1,000 feet ahead of the barge. If you break down, and the barge is 1,000 feet away, you only have one minute to get out of the way and the barge cannot stop. Safe Operating Procedures 1. Safe Procedures While Underway The following information gives safe practices that are to be utilized by all employees of Crosstex Energy Services while operating a boat for the company. A checklist for boat and trailer safety is in Appendix 1.

Page 3 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) U.S. Coast Guard Required Procedures: a. Personal Flotation Device: Each person traveling on a boat in in-land waters will have a U.S. Coast Guard approved Type I personal flotation device (life jacket). All personnel will wear their life jacket while underway. b. Lights: Any vessel that operates between sunset and sunrise must display their required navigational lights at all times between sunset to sunrise and during daylight periods of reduced visibility. Since any boat operated by Crosstex Energy Services could conceivably fall under these circumstances, especially reduced visibility during daylight hours, any boat operated by Crosstex Energy Services employees shall meet these lighting requirements. c. Required Lights (While Underway): Sidelights, Bow (front of boat) Green light on Starboard (right) side. Red light on Port (left) side. The Green and Red lights are to be visible in an arc of 112.5 degrees. Sternlights, Stern (rear of boat) White light is to be visible in an arc of 135 degrees. Masthe ad Lights, (above highest point of structure of boat) White light is to be visible in an arc of 225 degrees. Area of incomplete arc is to the rear. Anchor Lights, All motor boats anchored in navigable waterways of this state shall exhibit a white three hundred and sixty degree (360) stern light between the hours of sunset to sunrise. This light shall be the highest such light to be exhibited. NOTE REGARDING LIGHTS ON POLICE BOATS: Law enforcement vessels engaged in enforcement activities may display a flashing blue light. When you see such lights slacken speed, yield right of way, or if necessary stop your vessel. d. Avoiding Falling Overboard: Most boating fatalities occur because a person falls overboard. Capsizing and falls overboard account for 70% of small boating fatalities. While underway, all personnel are to remain seated. If it becomes necessary for one to move or change seats, stay low and near the centerline of a small boat. e. Crosstex Recommended Procedures For Assignment Of Personnel: Low light/poor weather may require additional personnel to be assigned to the job task to render assistance as necessary. A minimum of two employees shall be utilized for after dark operations.

Page 4 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) 2. Required Safety Equipment For Personnel Both the U.S. Coast Guard and the various State Wildlife Departments have requirements for individuals who are passengers of a small craft or boat. Those applying to a small craft used in commerce (business) are as follows: a. Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) are required for every person aboard. Every person (passenger) in a Crosstex Energy Services boat shall have and wear while underway a U.S. Coast Guard Type I PFD (life jacket). NOTE: A type I PFD has the greatest required buoyancy and is designed to turn an unconscious person in the water from a face down position to a vertical and slightly backward position (righting ability). b. All PFDs on board must be serviceable, readily accessible and of appropriate size for the intended wearer. c. All PFDs must be inspected to ensure they are serviceable. They are to be free of rot, tears, punctures and waterlogging. In addition, all straps and buckles must be attached and functional. d. Readily accessible means that the PFD can be immediately reached in an emergency situation. Never keep any PFD under lock and key. Crosstex Recommended Safety Equipment for Personnel: GPS device and Satellite phone or VHF radio: to give geographic reference to location and to provide reliable communication. 3. Hypothermia Exposure causes loss of body heat. This is called hypothermia. The best defense against hypothermia is to avoid going into the water. If you fall into the water, do not discard clothing, it will help trap heat. Avoid moving as much as possible. A life jacket helps in two ways: it reduces the need to move and it helps insulate against heat loss. When you draw your knees up into an H.E.L.P. (Heat Escape Lessening Position), you help conserve heat. If several persons are in the water, huddle together to conserve heat and stay alive. A person suffering hypothermia should be given assistance as soon as possible. Strip off all wet clothing and get person into a warm sleeping bag. Try to keep the person awake. Do not give the victim alcohol. Giving the person warm drinks or food is not a good idea. They dont help rewarm the person and they can pose a choking hazard.

Page 5 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) Hypothermia Chart If the water Temp. is (F) 32.5 32.5-40.0 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 Over 80 Time till Exhaustion is Under 15 min. 15-30 min. 30-60 min 1-2 hr. 2-7 hr. 3-12 hr. Indefinitely Expected time of Survival Under 15-45 min. 30-90 min 1-3 hr. 1-6 hr. 2-40 hr. 3 hr.-indefinitely

Information furnished by United Safe Boating Institute 4. Required Safety Equipment For Vessel The following equipment is required to be aboard every boat operated by Crosstex Energy Services employees. It is to be in serviceable and operational condition and is to be inspected on a regular basis to ensure this is the case. Any of the equipment that doesnt meet this criteria must be repaired or replaced. This equipment is required by the various State Wildlife Departments and the U.S. Coast Guard. They both have the jurisdiction to enforce these requirements and rules. a. VISUAL DISTRESS EQUIPMENT: All boats operated by Crosstex Energy Services will be equipped with visual distress signals. These will be: FLARE GUN KIT. A U.S. Coast Guard-approved flare gun kit will be acquired and kept aboard at all times that the boat is in the water. This is a launcher that fires aerial red meteors or parachute flares. These are suitable warning signals for both day and night operations. LARGE FLASHLIGHT. A large (9 volt) UL-approved flashlight will be kept aboard at all times that the boat is in the water. This will be used for emergency signaling and in the event a searchlight is needed. Note: An acceptable alternative would be a portable spot light with alligator clips, powered by the boats battery. EXTRA LINE & BAILER. It is advisable to have a length of line to secure the boat and equipment. This should be strong enough to be used as a towrope. Also a container that can be used to bail water from the boat. PADDLES. Two paddles should be kept in any boat used by Crosstex employees in the event that an engine failure occurs.

Page 6 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) b. AUDIBLE DISTRESS (ALARM) EQUIPMENT: All boats operated by Crosstex Energy Services will be equipped with audible distress (alarm) equipment. These will be: SIGNAL (AIR) HORNS. These air-horns powered by canned compressed air are ideal for all necessary signaling while underway. At least one additional can of compressed air must be kept aboard. All Crosstex Energy Services boats will be equipped with a signal (air) horn. SIGNAL BELL. Any vessel over 26 feet in length must carry a bell. WHISTLE. A whistle may be used for emergency signaling.

c. ANCHORS: All Crosstex Energy Services mechanically-propelled vessels must carry an anchor and anchor line of sufficient weight and strength to provide safe anchorage. The anchor chosen must be sufficient to hold a vessel when subjected to the worse conditions of wind and tide. The anchor cable should be between four and seven times the depth of water in which you are normally anchored. This is a company requirement. d. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: All Crosstex Energy Services mechanically-propelled vessels must carry one B U.S. Coast Guard-approved fire extinguisher. A five (5) pound UL-II rated ABC extinguisher meets this requirement. e. THROWABLE FLOTATION DEVICE: All boats owned, leased, rented or operated by Crosstex Energy Services employees shall have a Type IV PFD (Throwable Device) aboard. These should only be used upon protected waters where there is probability of quick rescue. These devices are intended to be thrown to a victim in the water rather than be worn by a passenger. Precautions Prior To Movement The following rules are to be complied with prior to getting underway. Following these common sense practices will ensure a safe outcome. 1. Fueling: Improper-fueling practices is the cause of most fires aboard vessels. Gasoline vapors are heavier than air and spread rapidly. Be careful not to allow any sources of ignition aboard the boat. Observe these precautions: a. Moor boat securely to dock. b. Dont allow passengers aboard during fueling operations c. Extinguish all fires, smoking materials and any other source of ignition. d. Shut off engines and electrical equipment. e. Fill only approved portable tanks on dock. f. Keep fuel nozzle in contact with the metal fill opening. This will prevent a spark caused by static electricity.

Page 7 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) g. Wipe up any spillage; check any bilges (if present) for any leakage. h. Put fuel container caps back on tightly; make sure they have a sealing gasket. i. Never start the engine(s) until all traces of fuel vapors are gone.

j. Secure all fuel tanks before leaving dock. k. Never store any portable tank(s) in an interior compartment. 2. Overloading: The boat is not to be overloaded. The rated capacity of the boat's data plate is to be followed in determining the number of people and weight of material carried. Weight is not to be placed upon the bow. Doing so incorrectly distributes the weight, making the boat less seaworthy and more likely to swamp and sink. 3. Boats With Enclosed Cabins: If the small craft has an enclosed cabin, the doors and/or escape windows will be open and pinned or locked into an open position while underway. This is to ensure an escape way in the event the boat swamps or capsizes. A door or escape way that opens outwardly will be impossible to open against the pressure of water if the boat sinks. Pollution Regulations Pollution regulations are enforced by the various State Wildlife Departments and the U.S. Coast Guard and should be closely observed by all Crosstex Energy Services employees, including those operating small craft. NOTE: The Marpol Treaty Agreement makes it illegal to dump the following materials in U.S. Lakes, Rivers, Bays, Sounds and within one mile offshore: Plastic- Garbage- Glass- Food- Paper- MetalDunnage- Rags- Crockery. Each violation of these requirements may result in a civil penalty up to $25,000, a fine of $50,000 and imprisonment up to 5 years. 1. It is a violation of the Federal Pollution Control Act to pump or discharge any kind of oil (or petroleum product) into navigable waters. Oil must be kept contained until it can be properly disposed of. 2. Dumping of garbage or refuse into any navigable waters is not allowed. 3. Plastic refuse of any kind is not to be disposed of in any navigable waters. 4. Discharge of untreated sewage is prohibited in Louisiana waters. The following steps should be taken in order to minimize pollution and keep our waters clean. 1. Carry a trash container on your boat and empty it into a garbage can onshore. 2. Stop in a restroom before going out to the water in order to prevent contamination of waters by E. coli bacteria.

Page 8 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) Administrative Requirements 1. Registration of Boat All boats with motors, including electric trolling motors, operating on the waters of the state of Louisiana must be registered and numbered. The following rules apply to registration. a. When registering a boat in Louisiana, you will be issued a certificate of number and two decals. Every certificate of number is valid for three (3) years. Your boat registration certificate must be kept onboard the vessel at all times. The U.S. Coast Guard requires that you have the original certificate. The various State Wildlife Departments will accept a photocopy of the registration. b. If a photocopy is kept onboard, the original must be kept on file in the event the boat is stopped or inspected by the Coast Guard. The original will have to be presented to them in order to avoid a fine. 2. Display of Number and Decals The numbers assigned (and no other) shall be painted on or attached to each side of the forward half of the vessels hull. The following applies: a. Numbers should be placed so they are clearly visible and legible. b. Letters and numbers must be of a plain block design and good size not less than 3 inches high. The color must contrast with the hull for maximum visibility. The numbers and letters must be plain (not slanted or script or varying in thickness) c. Between the prefix, the numerals, and the suffix, there must be a hyphen or space at least the width of the number (except 1 or I). d. Decals received from the various State Wildlife Departments must be attached to each side of the vessels bow within 6 inches of the numbers.

Page 9 of 10

SMALL BOAT SAFETY GUIDELINES (continued) Appendix 1 Boat and Trailer Checklist Trailer coupler Trailer lights & electrical connector Trailer tires Overall Condition Treads Air pressure Load arrangement License plate current License plate expiration date Winch Personal flotation devices Fire extinguisher First Aid kit complete First Aid kit accessible Flare gun Horn or whistle Running lights Boat registration Rope Paddle Gas cans Gas hoses Company radio COMMENTS:

Page 10 of 10

SAFETY MEETING REQUIREMENTS PROCEDURE Policy In an effort to conduct productive, informative, and consistent Safety Meetings, Crosstex will require adherence to guidelines for scheduling and conducting formal Safety meetings. Description The purpose of this program is to identify the minimum essential elements to be addressed at all monthly safety meetings. Structured safety meetings are an essential forum and communication tool used to make personnel aware of hazards in our workplace. They serve as an excellent venue for discussing hazards, recent injuries, near misses, safety alerts, and other important Safety topics. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Adhere to the requirements outlined in this program. b. Attend Safety meetings and sign roster. 2. Safety Department shall: a. Review Safety meeting minutes to ensure adherence to the provisions of this program. b. Conduct periodic review of this program and facilitate revisions as necessary. c. Communicate requirements, schedules, and attendance to management. Documentation Record Safety Meeting Minutes and Attendance Roster Custodian Safety Department Retention 5 years

Scheduling Safety Meetings 1. At a minimum, field and operational areas shall schedule and conduct monthly formal Safety meetings. 2. Meetings should be scheduled to maximize attendance by personnel. 3. Monthly Safety meetings shall be conducted in addition to the daily meetings required by the Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting/JSA Program. Required Attendance 1. Field/Plant personnel are required to attend all scheduled Safety meetings for their operational area unless off-duty or operational conditions prohibit (e.g. - gas plant or field upset condition or emergency). 2. Contractor attendance at Crosstex Energy Services Safety meetings is highly encouraged.

Page 1 of 2

SAFETY MEETING REQUIREMENTS PROCEDURE (continued) Attendance Roster 1. Attendance shall be documented for each meeting using the appropriate Crosstex Energy Services Safety Meeting Form (see Forms Section of CD). a. For Field Operations, use the Safety & Training Meeting form. b. For Plant Operations, use the Sign-In Roster of the Safety Meeting Report form. 2. The attendance record shall be attached to the Safety meeting minutes and forwarded through the management chain and to the Safety department for records retention. Meeting Minutes 1. All Safety meetings shall be documented through the completion of meeting minutes. 2. The minutes shall contain, at a minimum, the following elements: c. The meeting time, date and location d. The operational/field/plant area e. The name(s) of the meeting Presenter(s) f. A listing of new hazards reported g. Status of previously reported hazards/ concerns h. Topic(s) covered during meeting. 3. Safety meeting minutes shall be completed and submitted within 10 calendar days after the meeting. The meeting agenda shall be attached to the minutes and submitted/routed to the following personnel for review and approval: a. Area Supervisor(s) b. Safety Department (Records custodian). Safety Meeting Agenda In addition to the primary topic, and at a minimum, the Safety meeting agenda shall include the following: 1. Solicit new hazards and/or concerns. 2. List of topics to discuss/training subject(s). 3. Status of previously reported hazards. 4. Recent injuries/incidents/near-misses/Potentially Serious Incident.

Page 2 of 2

SAFETY HANDBOOK REVISION PROCEDURE When a revision, deletion, or addition to this handbook appears necessary, the "Safety Handbook Revision Request" form should be completed and forwarded to the Safety Department. Anyone may request a change; all employees are encouraged to review each policy and check them for accuracy and applicability. Handbook changes may only be implemented if approved by a review team, made up of Crosstex operations supervisors/managers and safety staff. If a change recommended by an employee is determined to not be necessary, the "Safety Handbook Revision Request" will be returned to the employee, stating the reason.

Page 1 of 1

SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS PROCEDURE Policy Crosstex will minimize personnel exposures to hazards through the use of safe work practices such as standardized safety and warning signs. Since some employees may be color-blind or not English-speaking, uniformity in color and design of safety signs is essential. The Safety and Warning Signs Program was developed to ensure that all personnel understand the hazard warnings posted at Crosstex facilities. Responsibilities 1. Employees shall: a. Review hazard information on signs and labels. b. Follow the safety warnings provided by the signs. c. Ensure all required signs are posted properly. d. Inform their supervisor when new signs are needed. e. Participate in training as required by this program. 2. Person-in-Charge (PIC) and Supervisors shall: a. Ensure that the appropriate safety signs and color coding are used. b. Ensure that all hazards currently on location are properly labeled with signs. c. Ensure that personnel do not remove or deface existing signs. d. Ensure that job briefing/site orientations covering hazard communication requirements (meaning of hazard warning signs, access to MSDSs, labeling requirements, etc.) or other workplace hazards are conducted. e. Ensure that all personnel have proper training Training Initial training shall be conducted during the new employee orientation process. Refresher training will be conducted as needed. Documentation Record Employee Training Records Safety and Warning Signs Program Custodian Safety Department Safety Department Retention 3 years after separation 1 year after revised, superseded or obsolete

Page 1 of 5

SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS PROCEDURE (continued) Safety Signs - General 1. Danger signs will be used where there is immediate and grave danger or peril. The sign color scheme depicts a red oval on the top portion of the panel and black or red lettering in the lower portion. 2. Caution signs will be used to warn against potential hazards or caution against unsafe practices. Essentially, these types of signs are used to identify a less hazardous situation than danger signs and are yellow and black. 3. Safety instruction signs will be used where there is a need for general instructions and relative to safety measures. The signs should have a green background on the upper panel with black or green lettering on the white background on the lower panel. 4. Fire and emergency signs utilize white letters on a red background. Optional for lower panel: red on white background. 5. Information signs, bulletin boards, and railroad flags for chocked cars utilize blue lettering on a white background. 6. Standard highway signs are utilized for in-plant vehicle traffic. 7. Replacement of existing signs is warranted if the sign does not conform to standards, contains misleading information or is damaged to the extent that it cannot be easily read. 8. If signs currently in place convey the same meaning as other required signs, they do not have to be replaced unless they are damaged or are not legible. 9. When it is impractical to immediately obtain permanent signs, the supervisor will ensure that temporary signs are installed in the appropriate place. The required information shall be entered on the sign with freehand lettering and a permanent sign should be ordered as soon as possible. 10. Signs shall have blunt or rounded corners and shall be free from sharp edges, splinters, burrs, or other sharp projections. Fastening devices need to be positioned so they dont constitute a hazard. Specific Sign Applications 1. Equipment that starts automatically and presents a hazard shall be designated by a sign with the wording EQUIPMENT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY AT ANY TIME, visible from the normal walking pattern around the equipment. 2. Exits shall be marked by a readily visible sign that is distinctive in color and provides contrast with surroundings. a. They shall be illuminated by a reliable light source providing not less than five (5) footcandles on the sign surface. b. The word EXIT shall be in legible letters at least six (6) inches high and inch wide. c. Passages that may be mistaken for exits shall be so designated by a sign with wording such as: NOT AN EXIT.

Page 2 of 5

SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Areas where noise levels exceed 82 dBA where employees work 12 hour shifts and 85 dBA where employees work 8 hour shifts shall be posted with HEARING PROTECTION REQUIRED signs. 4. Signs used for compliance with Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations shall conform to the applicable section of 49 CFR and the Hazardous Materials Shipping and Transportation section of this manual. 5. Biohazard signs shall be visib le on items used for the disposal of materials that may be contaminated with body fluids. 6. The slow moving vehicle emblem shall be placed on the rear of any vehicle with maximum speeds of 25 miles per hour or less on public roads. Typical Safety Signs 1. Hazard communication type signs that identify the contents of chemical containers, tanks, and process vessels. This requirement includes secondary containers (5 gallon containers filled from bulk tanks or drums). For further information and examples, refer to the Hazard Communication Program. 2. Hydrogen sulfide signs at the entrance to buildings of locations where hazardous concentrations of H2 S may be present. For further information and examples, refer to the Hazard Communication Program. 3. Signs requiring that trucks and tank cars are to be properly prepared for loading hydrocarbons. Suggested wording: CAUTION - CHOCK WHEELS - BOND AND GROUND BEFORE TRANSFERRING HYDROCARBONS. 4. Signs warning personnel that equipment may start automatically. Suggested wording: DANGER (red, black, white) - EQUIPMENT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY AT ANY TIME. 5. Signs warning personnel that smoking is prohibited in the area. Suggested wording: DANGER (red, black, white) - NO SMOKING, MATCHES OR OPEN LIGHTS. Definitions 1. Biohazard Sign A sign that signifies the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to identify equipment, containers, rooms, materials, experimental animals, or combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable hazardous agents. For the purpose of this program, the term "biological hazard," or "biohazard," shall include only those infectious agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the well-being of man. 2. Caution Signs Signs that indicate a possible hazard, against which proper precaution should be taken. 3. Danger Signs Signs that indicate immediate danger and that special precautions are necessary. 4. Safety Instruction Sign A sign that is used to convey general instructions and suggestions relative to safety measures.

Page 3 of 5

SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Signal Word - That portion of a tag's inscription that contains the word(s) that are intended to capture the employee's immediate attention. 6. Signs A prepared surface for the warning of, or safety instructions of, industrial workers or members of the public who may be exposed to hazards. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1200 Hazard Communication Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.37 Maintenance, Safeguards, and Operational Features for Exit Routes Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.145 Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags

Page 4 of 5

SAFETY AND WARNING SIGNS PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 Summary of OSHA and ANSI Safety Color Code Color code applications as specified in 29 CFR 1910 and the following are recommended to be used for painting and marking of Company facilities and equipment. Red - Red shall be the basic color for the identification of: 1. Fire - Fire protection equipment and apparatus, including fire alarm boxes, fire blanket boxes, fire extinguishers, fire exit signs, fire hose locations, fire hydrants, and fire pumps. 2. Danger - Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids, lights at barricades and at temporary obstructions, and danger signs. 3. Stop - Stop buttons and emergency stop bars on hazardous machines. Orange - Orange shall be the basic color for the identification of dangerous parts of machines or energized equipment which may cut, crush, shock, or otherwise injure. Yellow - Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and marking physical hazards such as: falling, stumbling, tripping, striking against, and caught between. Green and/or White - Green and/or white shall be the basic colors for designating safety and the location of first aid equipment. Blue - Blue shall be the basic color for designating caution and is limited to warning against starting, use of, or movement of equipment under repair or being worked upon. Blue is used on information signs and bulletin boards that are not of a safety nature. Black on Yellow Radiation Black, White, and Combinations of Black and White - In stripes and checks, are used for housekeeping and traffic markings. Black and white can signify boundaries of traffic aisles, stairways (risers, direction, and border limit lines), and directional signs. As a general rule, the following colors of warning beacon globes are suggested: Red - Fire or immediate danger, high level combustible gas, low level oxygen and hydrogen sulfide gas. Yellow - Low combustible gas or caution. Blue - Mechanical or operations problems (warning). Hose colors for use with compressed gases should be: Red - flammable gases Green - oxygen Black - breathing air Blue - inert gases The colors utilized by each facility must be specified in writing and communicated to all employees.

Page 5 of 5

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM Employee List The Local Program Administrator will coordinate with the Senior Safety Staff Member to assure that a current list of employees who are required to wear respirators is maintained in Crosstex Energy Services electronic database system. Respirator Selection 1. Exposure Hazard Assessments - Through the use of industrial hygiene surveys or other appropriate methods, work assignments and job tasks with potential exposures to atmospheric contaminants shall be identified for evaluation. The employee exposure shall be determined through air sampling, where possible, and estimated in other cases (if feasible). A chemical hazard exposure assessment form shall be used to document the assessment process. If the employee exposure cannot be reasonably estimated, it shall be assumed to be immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH) until the actual contaminant concentration can be confirmed. 2. Selection Criteria a. The Local Program Administrator (Safety Compliance Specialist) will determine the appropriate respiratory protection utilizing the general guidelines for selection of respirators provided in the American National Standard Z88.2-1992, Practices for Respiratory Protection, with consideration of the factors listed below: Adverse health effects of the hazard respiratory, ocular, and dermal Relevant hazardous exposure levels Potential exposure levels Measured exposure levels Chemical state and physical form of the substance Toxicity of the substance Warning properties (e.g. odor) Mechanical and functional characteristics of the respirator Specific conditions and activities involved in the respirator use Nature of the work, including: Operational processes Period of time the respirator is worn Employee work activities.

Page 1 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) b. Appropriate respirators are selected by the Local Program Administrator from those approved and certified by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). All filters, cartridges and canisters used in the workplace shall be labeled and color-coded with the NIOSH approval label, the label shall remain in place, and legible at all times. c. When air-purifying respirators are selected for gases and vapors, a warning system such as an end-of-service- life indicator (ESLI) or a cartridge change schedule (based upon reliable data) shall be used to ensure cartridges are changed out prior to the end of their service life. Medical Evaluations 1. The Local Program Administrator shall categorize employees requiring the use of a respirator into one of the categories listed below. Persons shall not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of respirators unless it has been determined that they are physically capable of doing so. Employees required to use respirators will receive a medical evaluation prior to being fit-tested, and some individuals will receive the medical evaluation periodically thereafter as long as they remain in the Respiratory Protection Program. 2. Medical evaluations will be conducted by a physician or other licensed health care professional (LHCP). 3. The requirements for medical evaluation may vary, depending on the nature and extent of anticipated respirator use. The following are the medical categories utilized by Crosstex Energy Services. a. Category A - For employees who are not required to use a respirator, but who still may have a need to do so on very rare occasions, the medical evaluation consists of a respiratory questionnaire. A follow-up medical examination is required if the health care professional reviewing the respiratory questionnaire determines such an examination is needed. No further medical evaluation is required unless: Employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to the ability to use a respirator LHCP, supervisor or the respirator Local Program Administrator informs the employer that an employee needs to be re-evaluated Information from the respiratory protection program including observations made during fit-testing and program evaluation indicates a need for employee reevaluation or a change occurs in workplace conditions.

Page 2 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) b. Category B For employees who wear any type of respirator as a function of their job duties, the medical evaluation consists of a respiratory questionnaire. A follow- up medical examination is required if the health care professional reviewing the respiratory questionnaire determines such an examination is needed. Periodic examinations follow the baseline examination and are identical in content. These exams should be performed every five years for employees under age 40 and every other year for employees age 40 and over. Upon completion of the examination, the LHCP will provide a written recommendation stating whether the employee has any detected medical condition which would place the employee's health at increased risk of material impairment from respirator use and any recommended limitations for the use of respirators. NOTE: Except when used voluntarily, disposable dust masks require that an employee be medically qualified before use. c. Category C Employees who participate in other health monitoring plans (e.g. asbestos), or who undergo other examinations for medical surveillance and/or fitnessfor-duty purposes (e.g. HAZMAT teams, etc.), may be members of the respiratory protection plan by virtue of their requirement to wear respirators while involved in these other activities. Medical evaluation for respirator use is determined in these individuals when they are examined by a licensed physician under these other health monitoring plans or for these other activities. These employees will still be required to have a completed respiratory questionnaire and a written LHCPs recommendation stating whether the employee has any detected medical conditions which would place the employee's health at increased risk of material impairment from respirator use and any recommended limitations upon the use of respirators. 4. Employees newly assigned to respirator use (new or transfer) who are required to have a medical evaluation, may use an existing medical evaluation or written recommendation from a LHCP, provided the medical examination or written recommendation is within one year prior to the date of beginning respirator use and contains the required information. 5. Additional medical evaluations will be provided if the employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to the ability to wear a respirator; if the LHCP, a supervisor, or the Plan Administrator informs management that an employee needs re-evaluation; if information from the respiratory protection program (e.g., observations from fit-testing or program evaluations) indicates a need for employee re-evaluation; or if a change occurs in workplace conditions that may result in substantial increase in the physiological burden placed on the employee. 6. Employees will be given an opportunity to discuss the questionnaire and examination results with the LHCP. 7. A written recommendation will be provided to Environmental, Health and Safety Department by the LHCP that addresses the employee's ability to wear a respirator. The recommendation will contain: a. Limitations on respirator use

Page 3 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) b. Need for follow- up medical evaluations (if needed) c. A statement that the LHCP has provided the employee with a copy of the HCP's recommendation. 8. In requesting the written medical recommendation following a medical examination, the following information is provided to the LHCP: a. Type and weight of respiratory protection to be used b. Substance(s) to which the employee will be exposed c. Description of the work effort required d. Duration and frequency of use e. Type of work performed, including any special responsibilities that affect the safety of others such as fire- fighting or rescue work f. Special environmental conditions (e.g., temperature, humidity, confined spaces, etc.) g. Additional requirements for protective clothing and equipment h. A copy of this respiratory protection program and a copy of the Medical Evaluation of the OSHA Respiratory Protection Standard. Fit Testing 1. Initial Each employee that is required to wear a respirator with a tight- fitting face piece must be fit-tested with the same make, model, style and size of respirator(s) that the employee will be expected to use, prior to initial use of the respirator. 2. Periodic - Fit tests will be required annually, unless a substance-specific requirement requires more frequent testing. Additional fit testing will be required if the employee changes to a new style or brand of respirator or if there is reason to believe that the respirator fit has changed due to physiological, workplace, or other factors. 3. Retesting - If the employer, LHCP, supervisor, or Local Program Administrator observes changes in an employees physical condition that could affect respirator fit, the employee must have a new fit test. If the employee finds the respirator fit to be unacceptable, the employee will be given the opportunity to choose another face piece and be retested. 4. A qualitative fit test may be used for air-purifying respirators that must achieve a fit factor of 100 or less. A quantitative fit test shall be performed for full face piece positive and negative pressure respirators. Detailed fit testing procedures are accessible in APPENDIX 1 of this Safety Program. Positive pressure respirators shall be fit-tested in a negative pressure mode. 5. Facial hair, facial characteristics, or corrective lenses which interfere with the face piece seal will disqualify an employee from wearing a respirator, unless the condition is corrected. Contact lenses are permissible for wearing with positive pressure respirators. 6. Fit tests will be documented and retained as specified in the Documentation Section.

Page 4 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Respirator Use 1. No employee is assigned work which requires the use of a respirator until that employee has: a. An approved medical evaluation b. Passed an appropriate fit test with the size and type of respirator to be used c. Been given adequate training on the proper use and maintenance of the respirator, including information on the hazards and effects of the contaminant, which the respirator is to protect against. 2. The respirator wearer must perform a user positive and negative pressure seal check and verify proper respirator valve function each time a respirator is donned (APPENDIX 2 User Seal Check Procedure). 3. Where IDLH atmospheres exist or potentially exist, worksite-specific procedures will include the items listed below. IDLH atmospheres include oxygen-deficient, unknown concentrations of one or more contaminants, and known or potential IDLH concentrations. For additional information regarding worksite-specific procedures for hydrogen sulfide (H2 S), see the Crosstex Energy Services Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Control Program. a. The use of positive pressure (pressure demand) self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), with a minimum service life of 30 minutes, or combination full face piece pressure demand supplied air respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply (airline respirator with escape bottle). b. In IDLH or potentially IDLH atmospheres where the employee could be overcome if the respiratory protection fails, one additional person (or more as needed) shall be located outside the hazardous atmosphere in communication and able to provide effective emergency assistance to the respirator wearer. Oxygen-deficient atmospheres (less than 19.5%) will be considered IDLH. c. Provisions to ensure that positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus are immediately available to emergency assistance personnel. d. Provisions for (1) training and equipping employees for rescue where employees enter IDLH atmospheres and (2) training employees to notify supervision when entering an IDLH area for rescue. e. Maintaining voice, visual or signal line communication between employees in the IDLH environment and those located outside the area. 4. Employees are required to leave the respirator use area: a. If they detect breakthrough of vapor or gas through the cartridge or canister, or heating of the air b. If a change in breathing resistance or leak in the face seal occurs c. If they experience symptoms of chemical exposure

Page 5 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) d. To replace the filter, cartridge, or canister elements e. To wash their face or respirator face piece as necessary to prevent irritation f. To take a rest break if experiencing heat stress or discomfort g. When instructed to do so by standby personnel or their supervisor. 5. Employees shall not return to the respirator use area until the respirator defect has been repaired or replaced. Voluntary Use Where respirator use is not required, due to chemical or physical agents in concentrations less than the established exposure limits, an employee who chooses to wear a respirator will be provided with the information contained in Appendix D of OSHAs Respiratory Protection Standard, a medical fitness evaluation, an appropriate respirator and training necessary for proper use and maintenance. EXCEPTION: The use of a dust mask where the entire respirator is a filter is not covered by this section. Supplied Air Quality 1. Formulated oxygen/nitrogen gas mixtures shall not be used for breathing air. 2. Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air or liquid oxygen used for respiration shall be of high purity and in accordance with the following specifications: a. Compressed and liquid oxygen meet the requirements of the United States Pharmacopoeia for medical or breathing oxygen. (Compressed oxygen is not used in atmosphere supplying respirators or in open circuit self-contained breathing apparatus that have previously used compressed air.) b. Compressed breathing air shall meet the specifications for Type 1 - Grade D breathing air as described in the Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification G-7.11989, in conformance with the parameters listed below:

Oxygen content of 19.5 - 23.5% by volume (atmosphere air) Hydrocarbon content of 5 mg/m3 of air or less Carbon monoxide content of 10 ppm or less Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less Moisture content of cylinder does not exceed a dewpoint of -50o F at one atmosphere Lack of noticeable odor.

Page 6 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) 3. Certifications - When breathing air cylinders are filled/refilled by vendors, a certification of air quality shall be obtained for each cylinder or batch of cylinders. These certifications shall be maintained in accordance with the records retention requirements and be available at each field or facility office. Where breathing air cylinders are refilled using company breathing air compressors, records of maintenance and air quality testing results shall be maintained. 4. Fittings - Couplings and fittings used for breathing air lines shall be incompatible with all other fittings used at field and plant facilities. Hansen fittings shall be provided on all breathing air hose lines and breathing air facilities (bottles, respirators, etc.). 5. Cylinders - Cylinders shall be tested and maintained in accordance with the Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR Parts 173 and 178). 6. Compressors When used, compressors shall be constructed and located to avoid the entry of contaminated air into the fresh air supply system and shall be equipped with suitable in- line sorbent beds and filters to assure that breathing air quality is met, and that the dewpoint at line pressure is 10o Celsius (18o Fahrenheit) below the ambient temperature. a. Sorbent beds shall be tagged indicating the change date and the person authorized to perform the change. b. A carbon monoxide alarm shall be used to monitor CO levels in air from compressors used to refill cylinders and/or to provide breathing air for personnel. Cleaning, Inspection and Storage 1. Cleaning and Disinfection Respirators shall be cleaned and disinfected in accordance with the procedure described in (APPENDIX 3) Inspection, Cleaning and Storage of Respirators or in accordance with the manufacturer-approved methods. If alternate cleaning procedures are requested, they shall be approved by the Safety Department. The mandatory cleaning schedules for respirators are as follows: a. Exclusive Use - Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an employee shall be cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition. b. Common Use - Respirators used by more than one employee shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use. If an employee is using a respirator for an extended period of time, it may be treated as an exclusive use respirator until the task(s) is completed. c. Emergency Respirators - Respirators maintained for emergency use shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use and additionally as needed to maintain them in a sanitary condition. d. Fit Testing and Training - Respirators used in fit testing and training shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
Page 7 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) 2. Inspection a. All respirators shall be inspected according to the following:

Routine use respirators shall be inspected before each use and during cleaning; if the respirator is also used as an emergency use respirator, it shall be inspected accordingly; Emergency use respirators shall be inspected at least monthly and checked for proper function before and after each use; and Emergency escape-only respirators shall be inspected before being carried into the workplace for use, or if stored in the work areas, shall be inspected as emergency use respirators.

b. Respirator inspections shall include the following:

A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and condition of the various parts (e.g. face piece, head strap, valves, cartridges, etc.) A check of elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of deterioration Verification that air cylinders are maintained full and shall be refilled when below 90% of the manufacturers recommended pressure leve l Verification that all filters, cartridges and canisters (where provided) are properly labeled and color-coded with the NIOSH approved label and that it is legible.

c. Emergency use respirator inspections shall be documented with the following information:

Date the inspection was performed Name of the person who inspected it Findings and remedial action, if any Serial number or other identifying means This information shall be attached to the respirator or shall be maintained in a paper or in an electronic file.

d. Respirators that cannot be repaired shall be taken out of service and discarded or permanently labeled as defective and used for instructional purposes only (e.g. examples of types of respirators). e. Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus shall receive a function test from an authorized testing facility when specified by the manufacturer to ensure that the regulator and other operating parts are working properly.

Page 8 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) 3. Storage a. Respirators shall be stored to protect them from physical and chemical damage, contamination, dust, sunlight, and excessive moisture. Face pieces shall be stored to prevent deformation of the seal or exhalation valves. b. Emergency respirators shall be:

Accessible to the work area Stored in clearly marked compartments or be provided to be worn by personnel Stored in accordance with any specific manufacturers instructions.

Respiratory Protection Program Review and Evaluation 1. This program shall be evaluated through audits as appropria te, and the implementation and effectiveness of the program shall be evaluated through consultation with employees required to use respirators. 2. Any problems identified during evaluations shall be corrected. Specific key factors to be reviewed include: a. Respirator fit b. Appropriate respirator selection c. Proper respirator use d. Proper respirator maintenance Training 1. Employees shall be trained prior to being assigned to perform a job that requires the use of a respirator. The training shall be comprehensive and understandable and shall recur annually. 2. Retraining is also provided when: a. Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training obsolete. b. Inadequacies in the employees knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the employee does not understand the respirator care and use information adequately. c. Any situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe respirator use. 3. Training will include: a. How to don and doff a respirator. b. How to position it properly. c. How to set the strap tension. d. How to achieve an acceptable fit.

Page 9 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) e. How to perform a positive and negative pressure seal check. f. An opportunity to become adequately familiar with each type of respirator to be worn prior to the fit test Definitions 1. Air-line Respirator - An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the atmosphere is supplied to the respirator through a hose from a source not carried by the wearer. An emergency egress bottle with a minimum 5 minute emergency air supply must be integral with the respirator. Air-lines for respirators shall not exceed 100 feet in length unless approved by NIOSH in accordance with the manufacturers certification for the respirator. 2. Air-Purifying Respirator - A respirator with a cartridge or a canister that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through an air-purifying element. 3. Atmosphere -Supplying Respirator - A respirator that supplies the user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere. 4. Common-Use Respirator - A respirator available for use by more than one employee. 5. Emergency - An unintentional incident that results in the disruption of normal activities and may include an actual or potential uncontrolled release of an airborne contaminant, fire, explosion, injuries and/or property damage. 6. Emergency-Use Respirator - A respirator placed in or near the work area for use in an emergency. 7. Employee Exposure - The level of exposure to an airborne contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection. 8. End-of-Service-Life Indicator - A system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection. 9. Engineering Controls - Control measures utilized to prevent or reduce atmospheric contamination at the source by confinement, enclosure, local ventilation, dilution ventilation and substitution of less toxic materials (or other acceptable methods). 10. Escape -Only Respirator - A respirator which is acceptable for use only for emergency escape from a developing hazardous atmosphere. 11. Exclusive-Use Respirator - A respirator assigned to and used by only one employee. 12. Fit Test - The use of an approved protocol to evaluate the effectiveness of the seal of a respirator to the face of an individual. 13. Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) - An atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects or would impair an individuals ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere (e.g. a concentration of oxygen of less than19.5%). 14. LHCP Licensed Health Care Professional.

Page 10 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Definitions (continued) 15. Negative-Pressure Respirator - A respirator in which the air pressure inside the face piece is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. 16. Oxygen-Deficient Atmosphere An atmosphere with less than 19.5% oxygen by volume. 17. Positive Pressure Respirator - A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. 18. Local Program Administrator - A designated individual who is responsible for the dayto-day administration and evaluation of this Program. These persons are qualified to recognize, evaluate and control hazards in the workplace. 19. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) - A pass/fail test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individuals response to the test agent. 20. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) - An assessment of the adequacy of the respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator. 21. Respirator Use Area - A designated work area where respiratory protection is required to protect employees from a hazardous atmosphere. 22. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) - An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is designed to be carried by the wearer. 23. Service Life - The period of time which a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory protective device provides adequate respiratory protection. 24. Standby Personnel - A person(s) outside of the respirator use area who has been trained and is responsible for monitoring the activity of personnel inside the respirator use area and the status of the air supply for air- line respirators. 25. Supplied-Air Respirator (SAR) - A self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or air- line respirator. 26. User Seal Check - An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face and to verify proper valve operation. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.134 Respiratory Protection Standard American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z88.2 1992 American National Standard for Respiratory Protection Occupational Safety and Health Administration - Small Entity Compliance Guide for the Revised Respiratory Protection Standard Code of Federal Regulations, Title 42, Part 84 NIOSH Respiratory Certification Requirements National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Flow Chart of Respirator Decision Logic Sequence

Page 11 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Fit Testing Procedures 1. The test subject will pick the most acceptable respirator from several available respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user. 2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown how to put on a respirator, how it should be positioned on the face, how to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be available to assist the subject in evaluating the fit and positioning of the respirator. This instruction may not constitute the subject's formal training on respirator use, because it is only a review. 3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to select the respirator that provides the most acceptable fit. Each respirator represents a different size and shape, and if fitted and used properly, will provide adequate protection. 4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen face piece up to the face and eliminate those that obviously do not give an acceptable fit. 5. The more acceptable face pieces are noted in case the one selected proves unacceptable; the most comfortable mask is donned and worn at least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort can be given by discussing the points in the following item (No. 6). If the test subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the test subject shall be directed to don the mask several times and to adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper tension on the straps. 6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following points with the test subject and to allow the test subject adequate time to determine the comfort of the respirator: a. Position of the mask on the nose b. Room for eye protection c. Room to talk d. Position of mask on face and cheeks 7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the adequacy of the respirator fit: a. Chin properly placed b. Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened c. Fit across nose bridge d. Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin e. Tendency of respirator to slip f. Self-observation in mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position.

Page 12 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Fit Testing Procedures (continued) 8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the negative and positive pressure seal checks. Before conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall be told to seat the mask on the face by moving the head from side-to-side and up and down slowly while taking in a few slow deep breaths. Another face piece shall be selected and retested if the test subject fails the user seal check tests. 9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth between the skin and the face piece sealing surface, such as stubble beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the respirator sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with a satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed. 10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, she or he shall be referred to a physician or other licensed health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his duties. 11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable, the test subject shall be given the opportunity to select a different respirator and to be retested. 12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the test subject shall be given a description of the fit test and the test subject's responsibilities during the test procedure. The description of the process shall include a description of the test exercises that the subject will be performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn for at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit test. 13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is wearing any applicable safety equipment, which could interfere with respirator fit, that may be worn during actual respirator use. 14. Test Exercises. The following test exercises are to be performed for fit testing. The test subject shall perform exercises in the test environment in the following manner: a. Normal Breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe normally. b. Deep Breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply, taking caution so as not to hyperventilate. c. Turning Head Side -To-Side . Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her head from side to side between the extreme positions on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. d. Moving Head Up and Down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his/her head up and down. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward the ceiling).

Page 13 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Fit Testing Procedures (Continued) e. Talking. The subject shall talk out- loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song. Rainbow Passage When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a prism and form a rainbow. The rainbow is a division of white light into many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long round arch, with its path high above, and its two ends apparently beyond the horizon. There is, according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People look, but no one ever finds it. When a man looks for something beyond reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the end of the rainbow. f. Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT) g. Bending Over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud type QNFT or QLFT units that do not permit bending over at the waist. h. Normal Breathing. Same as exercise (a). i. Each test exercise shall be performed for one minute except for the grimace exercise which shall be performed for 15 seconds. The test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the fit test must be repeated.

Page 14 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 2 - User Seal Check Procedures The individual who uses a tight- fitting respirator is to perform a user seal check to ensure that an adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive and negative pressure checks listed below or the respirator manufacturer's-recommended user seal check method shall be used. User seal checks are not substitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit tests. Face piece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks 1. Positive Pressure Check. Close off the exhalation valve and exhale gently into the face piece. The face fit is considered satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the face piece without any evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators, this method of leak-testing requires the wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before closing off the exhalation valve and then carefully replacing it after the test. 2. Negative Pressure Check. Close off the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or by replacing the filter seal(s); inhale gently so that the face piece collapses slightly; and hold the breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some cartridges cannot be effectively covered with the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by covering the inlet opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the face piece remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no inward leakage of air is detected, the tightness of the respirator is considered satisfactory. Manufacturer's Recommended User Seal Check Procedures The respirator manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that the manufacturer's procedures are equally effective.

Page 15 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 3 - Inspection, Cleaning and Storage of Respirators Inspection 1. All respirators shall be inspected before each use and during cleaning. 2. Emergency use respirators shall be inspected at least monthly and before/after each use, with the following documentation: a. Date of inspection b. Name of person performing inspection c. Findings and remedial action d. Serial number or other identifying means e. Attach information to respirator or maintain a paper or electronic file. 3. Respirator inspections shall include: a. Check of respirator function, tightness of connections and condition of various parts such as:

Face piece Headstrap Valves Cartridges Hoses Cylinders

b. Check elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of deterioration. c. Verify that air cylinders are maintained full and refilled when below 90% full. d. Verify that all filters, cartridges and canisters are properly labeled and color-coded. e. Fittings must be incompatible with all other fittings used in area. f. Ensure all gauges are readable. g. Verify regulator and warning devices function properly. 4. Positive pressure SCBAs shall receive a function test from an authorized testing facility when specified by the manufacturer. a. Check hydrostatic test date on cylinder of SCBA. b. Fiber wound cylinders should be hydrostatically- tested every 3 years. 5. Metal cylinders should be hydrostatically- tested every 5 years. 6. Respirators that cannot be repaired shall be taken out of service.

Page 16 of 17

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 3 - Inspection, Cleaning and Storage of Respirators (continued) Cleaning 1. Wash in warm water and a mild detergent or a sanitizer to clean/disinfect respirator after each use and when necessary. 2. A hypochlorite (bleach) solution may be used in place of a disinfectant. 3. Follow manufacturers recommendations for cleaning solutions. 4. Rinse parts in clean, warm, running water. 5. Allow respirators to air dry. 6. Reassemble respirator and store in a plastic bag. 7. Protect from cold, extreme heat, dust, moisture, and harmful chemicals. Storage 1. Respirators are to be kept accessible to the work area they serve. 2. They should be stored in compartments that are clearly marked.

Page 17 of 17

PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES & RUPTURE DISKS Pressure Safety Valve Testing 1. All relief valves shall be tested for proper operation at correct set pressures per applicable regulatory requirements. (A change in the schedule must be supported by Management of Change documentation as required by 29 CFR 1910.119, provided the facility is covered by the standard.) Refer to the O&M Manual, Sec. 2.14. 2. Trained Crosstex Energy Services personnel must ensure that PSVs relieve and reseat at the proper pressure. 3. Valve inspection and repair must be performed by personnel qualified to conduct maintenance. 4. If the safety valve fails to open fully at 110% of the set pressure or fails to close off tightly at 90% of the set pressure, the valve shall undergo full breakdown inspection and maintenance. 5. If valves become inoperative because of dirt, corrosion, or other environmental conditions, increase the testing frequency as necessary to assure that they are maintained in working condition. 6. Where testing is impossible without shutting down the unit or facility, the supervisor shall schedule the valve(s) for testing at the next scheduled shutdown or turnaround at the time of unit shutdown for the purpose of safety valve testing in the future. 7. Test all power boiler safety valves per State regulations. If no State regulations exist, the valves should be tested in accordance with the National Board Inspection Code or insurance requirements. 8. Where block valves have been installed to provide a means of temporarily isolating a pressure safety valve for testing, servicing, or exchange (for equipment where continuous service is required), the block valve must be sealed or locked in the open position at all times during normal operations. 9. Likewise, any block valves installed on the discharge piping of a safety relief valve shall be locked or sealed open during normal operations. 10. Only full port valves may be used upstream or downstream of a relief valve. 11. Safety relief valves in critical service where access is not controlled must be locked in the open position. 12. The temporary closure of block valves located upstream of a safety relief valve for testing purposes on equipment still in service shall be done only if the pressure on the equipment is monitored and a replacement relief valve is immediately available in the event the safety valve being tested fails. 13. In critical service, isolation of the relief valve from the flare header can be achieved by installation of full port block valves between the relief valve and the flare header. If a block valve is installed, it must be of full port configuration. These valves must be locked or sealed open.

Page 1 of 3

PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES & RUPTURE DISKS (continued) 14. The test performance shall be documented and kept on file at each field or plant location. All pressure relief devices in service shall be documented in accordance with the pressure safety valve (PSV) specification sheets supplied by the manufacturer for type, service, trim, and certificates. 15. If the service for which the vessel was designed has changed, the supervisor will verify with engineering assistance that the relief valve system volume is adequate for the protected equipment. A change in the installed valves relief capacity must be supported by Management of Change as required in 29 CFR 1910.119, provided the facility is covered by the standard. NOTE 1: Relief valve tests are documented on Relief Valve Test Report in the Forms section of this CD. Rupture Disks 1. The following specifications outline the use of rupture disks. Facilities where rupture disks are currently in use must be modified to comply with this specification: a. Townsite Operations i. Rupture disks shall not be used in any applications within a town site or residential area.

ii. Rupture disks may be allowed if the well or vessel is protected from uncontrolled release through automation with sufficient system redundancy or failsafe protection. b. Remote Operations i. Remote operations may utilize rupture disks with the following modifications: epoxy coat the unions and install a Teflon seal on the process side of the disk.

ii. If release of liquids could pose an environmental problem, the discharge side should be piped to a containment tank located 150 feet away from any fired vessel. iii. Existing safety relief valves will not be substituted with rupture disks unless protected from uncontrolled release by automation. c. Rupture disks shall not be installed upstream of relief valves unless there is a means of monitoring and relieving the pressure between the rupture disk and relief valve. Relief Valves - Vacuum Service 1. Equipment which is exposed to a vacuum condition must be designed to withstand the vacuum condition or be protected from the vacuum. This is in addition to any requirements for operation at positive pressure. 2. If the service for which the vessel was designed has changed, the supervisor will verify with engineering assistance, that the relief valve volume is adequate for the protected equipment. 3. A change in the installed valves relief capacity must be supported by Management of Change as required by 29 CFR 1910.119, provided the facility is covered by the standard.

Page 2 of 3

PRESSURE SAFETY VALVES & RUPTURE DISKS (continued) 4. The classification of vacuum relief valves should be determined as either Critical or NonCritical, based upon the requirements. 5. Inspections will be comprised of visual inspections followed by an in-place or bench vacuum test. Definitions 1. Critical service - Service where the likelihood of personal injury is high should the valve fail to function properly. Examples of critical service would be pressure relief devices within a manned facility or plant, or a facility within city limits or residential areas, or facilities in close proximity to wetlands or waterways. 2. Non-critical service - Service where the likelihood of personal injury is small should the pressure relief device fail to function properly. An example of non-critical service would be relief valves servicing field facilities where personnel are not permanently stationed (less than three (3) hours per day), located outside city limits or residential areas, is well outside the radius of exposure (ROE) for hydrogen sulfide, or not otherwise defined as critical service. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.110 Storage and Handling of Liquid Petroleum Gas. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 510-2000 Pressure Vessel Inspection Code Maintenance Inspections, Rating, Repair and Alterations. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 576-2000 Inspection of Pressure Relief Valves. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.119 Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals.

Page 3 of 3

PRE-JOB/TAILGATE SAFETY MEETING/JSA PROCEDURE 1. A Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting Report shall be completed and a meeting conducted daily, prior to commencement of any non-routine job or task involving more than one person. 2. Each person directly involved in the job or task must be present during the meeting. 3. Each person must sign the report form indicating attendance. 4. As additional personnel arrive at the jobsite, they must also be informed of the hazards identified and discussed during the pre-job/tailgate meeting and shall acknowledge the discussion by signing the report form. 5. Additional Pre-Job/Tail Gate Meetings shall be conducted or Cold Work permit revised any time that the scope of work changes and/or there are changes in the hazards present (i.e. changed task from laying pipeline to changing out a valve). 6. A Post-Job Debriefing should be completed and documented if any hazards were encountered that had not been previously identified and discussed during the Pre-job/Tail Gate Safety Meeting. 7. The Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting report form or Cold Work Permit (see Forms Section of CD) must be forwarded to the area/facility supervisor in a timely fashion (within 1 or 2 days). 8. The area/facility supervisor should audit each report. a. b. c. He/she will indicate that the audit is complete by affixing his/her signature in the appropriate area at the bottom of the report form. Any deficiencies must be noted and addressed in as timely a fashion as reasonable. The area/facility supervisor shall forward the Pre-Job/Tailgate Safety Meeting Report to the appropriate field office file.

Page 1 of 1

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE Hazard Assessments 1. Hazard assessments will be conducted for facilities to identify and characterize the hazards to which personnel may be exposed during the course of their work. 2. Assessments should include a walk-through survey of the work areas with consideration given to the following hazard types: a. Impact b. Penetration c. Compression (roll-over) d. Chemicals (including spills) e. Heat f. Harmful Dust g. Light (Optical) Radiation h. Ionizing Radiation i. Sources of Motion j. High Temperatures (Including Fires) k. Falling Objects l. Sharp Objects m. Electrical Hazards n. Workplace Layout/Worker Proximity 3. The data from the surveys shall be evaluated to determine where hazards exist. When feasible, hazards will be eliminated or reduced through the use of engineering controls or other hazard reduction methods. For hazards that are not readily controlled, personal protective equipment will be identified and selected to protect the employee from the hazard. Hazard assessments shall be completed using the PPE Hazard Assessment Form. Cleaning and Maintenance Personal protective equipment shall be inspected before each use and cleaned and maintained as necessary to ensure it provides adequate protection. PPE that cannot be decontaminated shall be removed from service and disposed of appropriately. The EH&S Department will provide assistance in determining the appropriate disposal method for the contaminated PPE. Work Attire 1. Tank top or sleeveless shirts and other apparel which leave the shoulder or upper chest exposed are unacceptable, as are loose or poorly fitting or torn clothing.

Page 1 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Jewelry, such as rings, chain bracelets, dangly earrings, etc. can cause injuries and are discouraged, especially when working around machinery or moving parts. Long hair (shoulder length or longer) shall be secured or retained underneath the head protection to prevent entanglement in machinery or moving equipment. Head Protection 1. Head protection (hard hats) meeting the requirements of American National Standard Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection, Z89.1-1997 shall be worn at all times when working in field or plant operations. Head protection is not required when in enclosed vehicles, doghouses, control rooms, office spaces, living quarters, warehouses, shops, and garages if no overhead impact hazards are present. 2. Crosstex Energy Services will pay the full cost of head protection for its employees. A limited supply of additional hard hats should be kept at field offices for visitors. 3. Metal head protection is not permitted. Eye and Face Protection 1. All eye and face protective equipment must meet the requirements of American National Standard Safety Requirements for Eye and Face Protection, ANSI Z87.1- (R 1998). 2. Safety glasses and side shields shall be worn by all employees, contractors and casual visitors at all times while in the field or at facilities, when there is a potential for injury to the eye or face from: a. Flying particles (e.g. blowing dust, etc.) b. Molten metal c. Liquid chemicals d. Acids or caustic liquids e. Chemical gases and vapors f. Light radiation 3. Eye and face protection is not required when in enclosed vehicles, doghouses, control rooms, office spaces, living quarters, warehouses, shops, and garages, if no hazards are present. 4. Splash-proof safety goggles (indirect or non- vented goggles) shall be worn when working with chemicals. 5. Impact resistant safety goggles or safety glasses with sideshields shall be worn with a fullface shield when the nature of the work is lik ely to produce flying projectiles that are an injury hazard to the face as well as the eyes. This may include but is not limited to the following types of tasks: grinding, chipping, chiseling, sanding, woodworking, buffing, etc. Refer to the Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart (EXHIBIT 1) for additional guidance.

Page 2 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Eye and face protection shall be utilized when working with or near equipment that produces light and/or radiation hazards such as those associated with welding and cutting operations. Some of the applicable protective devices include: welding hoods/helmets and infrared filtering lenses available in a variety of tints. Refer to the Filter Lenses for Protection from Radiant Energy Chart (EXHIBIT 2). 7. Crosstex Energy Services will provide limited reimbursement for the purchase of prescription safety glasses with side shields for those employees whose vision requires corrective lenses and that work in field operations and/or facilities as a portion of their job. Reimbursement is for one pair every two years, unless the employees prescription changes or the glasses are damaged in a reported company accident and are presented to a supervisor for approval of replacement. Contact the Safety Department for current reimbursement amounts. 8. Approved non-prescription safety glasses with sideshields shall be available at all field and facility locations for employee and visitor use. Protective Footwear 1. Protective footwear meeting the applicable requirements of the ANSI Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection - Protective Footwear. Appropriate protective footwear shall be selected and worn at all times when working in the field or at facilities and when the potential for foot injuries exists. a. Where liquid or chemical splash hazards exist, appropriate chemical- resistant safetytoed boots or other specialized protective footwear shall be worn. Specialized chemical safety protective boots will be made available for employee use when necessary. b. Protective footwear made of materials which may absorb hazardous substances or hydrocarbons shall not be worn in environments where splash or spill hazards exist. c. Employees whose duties require them to climb ladders must wear safety shoes or boots with at least a " external heel while climbing. 2. Employees who are unable to wear standard safety-toed footwear for medical reasons must provide a written medical statement from their physician. Options for providing adequate foot protection for these emplo yees will be determined by the Safety Department and the employees Supervisor. 3. Crosstex Energy Services will provide limited reimbursement for the purchase of safetytoed footwear for those employees who work in field operations and/or facilities as a portion of their job. Reimbursement is for one pair per year, unless damaged in a reported company accident or worn beyond service and presented to a supervisor for approval of replacement. Contact the Safety Department for current reimbursement amounts. Hand Protection 1. Hand protection shall be worn to protect from hazards including, but not limited to: contact with harmful substances, cuts, lacerations, abrasions, puncture wounds, chemical burns, and temperature extremes.

Page 3 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Protective impermeable gloves shall be used when working with chemicals or liquid hydrocarbons. Supervisors shall assist employees in selecting the appropriate hand protection based upon the hazard assessment, the material safety data sheet and the duration of use. The Safety Department will assist in the selection process. 3. Electricians shall wear dielectric gloves rated for at least the highest voltage that they may encounter while working on or near live energized electrical equipment. a. The gloves shall be equipped with outer protectors and shall be inspected and air leaktested prior to each use. The gloves shall be kept clean and free of defects. If, during pre-use inspection, any defect or flaw is discovered, the glove(s) shall be removed from service until such time as they may be tested for dielectric integrity. b. The dielectric gloves shall be inspected/tested for dielectric integrity in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines, but at least every six (6) months by a certified laboratory. The gloves shall be stamped with the most recent test date. c. Any dielectric glove with a stamped date older than six (6) months shall be immediately removed from service until tested or discarded. 4. Crosstex Energy Services will pay the full cost of hand protection for its employees. Chemical Protective Clothing (CPC) 1. Chemical resistant aprons, coveralls, or slicker suits and safety-toed chemical resistant boots will be worn whenever an employee is working with acids or other hazardous chemicals. Employees shall be familiar with the chemicals they are using by consulting the Material Safety Data Sheets. Chemical protective clothing for emergency response activities will be selected in accordance with the Emergency Response Plan and applicable MSDS. 2. Considerations to be included when evaluating CPC are: resistance to abrasion, cutting and puncturing, tear and tensile strength, flammability, resistance to the effects of heat and cold, closure strength, flexibility, weight, thermal insulation as well as rates of degradation, permeation, and penetration (breakthrough time). Flame Resistant Clothing (FRC) 1. Clothing made of synthetic material, such as polyester, has been shown to contribute to the severity of burns received from fires and, is therefore, discouraged or prohibited depending on the fire potential of the area. Clothing made of certain fabrics, such as 100% cotton, can provide additional burn protection in flash fires. 2. Flame-resistant clothing shall be required in designated areas or for a specific task to be undertaken where a reasonable potential exists for a flash fire to occur. Listed below are examples of tasks that would typically require the use of flame-resistant clothing. a. Loading/unloading or transferring of quantities of hydrocarbons where significant concentrations of vapors may be present in the atmosphere.

Page 4 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) b. The repairing of active hydrocarbon piping and/or equipment where there is a significant potential for a flash fire. c. Hot work activities on equipment or piping which contains or has previously contained hydrocarbons and has not been purged. d. While repairing non-purged hydrocarbon process equipment, piping, tanks, or other related equipment within active gas plant processing areas. e. Performing plant operations or related activities with a flash fire potential within a process area in a plant or treating facility. f. Working in a totally enclosed compressor, processing and/or production area where the nature and duration of work exposes the employee to a flash fire hazard. g. Servicing energized electrical equipment above 600V. NOTE: In cases when adequate measures have been taken to eliminate the potential for a flash fire, FRC may not be required. 3. All other tasks with a potential for a flash fire shall be evaluated by the supervisor during job planning. Any necessary flame resistant clothing shall be indicated on a hot work permit and available prior to work commencing. 4. Other personnel, vendors and visitors entering designated areas will wear appropriate flame resistant clothing as determined necessary by the supervisor onsite and in accordance with these requirements. 5. Contract employees working in designated areas or performing designated tasks that require FRC are required to wear flame-resistant clothing. The FRC shall be addressed in the pre-job or pre-bid meeting and, when applicable, included in each written contract. 6. When the wearing of FRC is required, Crosstex shall initially provide the FR Clothing to Crosstex employees. Articles of clothing covered by this program include items such as work pants, shirts, coveralls, liners, and jackets to be worn as an outer garment except when other personal protective clothing is more appropriate and required (e.g. welders leathers). All clothing must be made from materials that meet the flame resistance performance criteria as specified in the U.S. Test Methods Standard 191A, Method 5903, or the British Standard 6249. 7. The preferred material for flame resistant clothing is Nomex III A. When work involves hot or molten metal (welding), then other forms of FR Clothing (e.g. Endura Proban) may be more appropriate. 8. Flame resistant clothing (FRC) must cover the entire body (trunk, arms, legs, and waist). Shirt sleeves or coveralls must remain rolled down and buttoned while in designated areas and while performing designated tasks. Respiratory Protection Respirators will be selected, used, and maintained in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Plan.
Page 5 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) Hearing Protection 1. Hearing protection shall be worn in all work areas where the noise level reaches or exceeds 85 decibels and may include, but is not limited to, heavy equipment operations, compressor locations, gas plants/processing areas, and operations such as venting pressure from lines. 2. In areas where high noise levels are present, disposable ear plugs shall be available. 3. Crosstex Energy Services will provide hearing protection to company personnel. 4. Refer to the Crosstex Energy Services Hearing Conservation Program for additional information regarding hearing protection. Gas Detection Equipment 1. Toxic gas detectors (e.g. H2 S), combustible gas detectors and oxygen-deficiency detectors shall be used as specified in work procedures and shall serve as early warning to the presence of developing hazardous atmospheres. 2. These detectors/instruments shall be calibrated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and calibration/service logs shall be maintained. 3. All personnel working at locations where sour gas (contains H2 S) is present are required to wear a personal H2 S monitor. (Refer to Crosstex Energy Services Hydrogen Sulfide Exposure Control Program.) 4. Detectors/instruments utilized in high noise areas shall alarm by vibration and audible alert. Sunscreen Due to the concerns regarding skin cancer associated with exposure to ultraviolet rays from sunlight, it is recommended that all employees apply sunscreen to all exposed skin prior to working outdoors. It is advised to use a sunscreen with a minimum Sun Protection Factor (SPF) of 15. Fall Protection Fall protection shall be utilized in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services Fall Protection Program. Vehicle Passenger Restraint Systems (Safety Belts) Passenger restraint systems will be worn by all Crosstex Energy Services personnel when engaged in company business or when in a company vehicle including rental vehicles and when operating equipment (if provided). Personal Floatation Devices (PFD) 1. A personal flotation device shall be approved, the correct type and size for the individual, situation and service, and fastened while being worn.

Page 6 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 2. The following type of PFD is approved for use at Crosstex Energy Services. Life Preserver - Type II: a. Intended for calm, inland water or where there is a good chance of quick rescue. b. Inherent buoyant PFDs of this type will turn some unconscious wearers to a face- up position in the water. c. Kapok or Fibrous glass buoyant vest must provide a minimum buoyant force of 16 pounds (adult), 11 pounds (medium child), or 7 pounds (small child). d. A Unicellular plastic foam or unicellular polyethylene foam buoyant vest or any other buoyant device must provide a minimum buoyant force of 15 pounds (adult), 11 pounds (medium child), or 7 pounds (small child). This type is normally sized for ease of emergency donning. Training 1. Training shall be provided to all personnel required to use personal protective equipment. 2. Initial training shall be provided before employees are assigned to tasks requiring the use of PPE. Additional training will be provided when job conditions or PPE changes warrant or when deficiencies are noted in the use and care of PPE. 3. Training shall be specific to the type of PPE to be worn and shall cover the following topics: a. When PPE is necessary. b. What PPE is necessary. c. How to properly don, doff, adjust and wear PPE. d. Limitations of PPE. e. Proper care and maintenance of PPE. f. Useful life and disposal of PPE. Definitions 1. Chemical Protective Clothing (CPC) - Clothing specially designed to protect the wearer from contact with chemicals. This clothing must be specifically selected for compatibility with the properties of the chemical(s) present. 2. HAZWOPER - Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response the Federal regulations relating to incidents involving hazardous waste operations and response to chemical spills. HAZWOPER specifies protective clothing ensembles as Levels A, B, C, & D. 3. Head Protection - For this program, defined as a protective head covering with an approved suspension system that meets the requirements of ANSI Z89.1-1997.

Page 7 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Level A Protective Clothing - Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or positive pressure airline system (PPAS) with escape SCBA and a totally encapsulating chemical protective suit, gloves (double layer), chemical resistant boots and other safety equipment. 5. Level B Protective Clothing - Same respirator as level A and hooded chemical-resistant suit, gloves (double layer), chemical resistant boots and other safety equipment. 6. Level C Protective Clothing - Full face or half- mask air purifying respirator and protective clothing as in level B and other safety equipment. 7. Level D Protective Clothing No respiratory protection required, work attire that may include: coveralls, gloves, boots, boot coverings, eye and face protection, and other safety equipment. 8. Personal Floatation Device Type II A type II PFD, or near-shore buoyancy vest is intended for calm, inland water or where there is a good chance of quick rescue. Inherent buoyant PFDs of this type will turn some unconscious wearers to a face-up position in the water. This type of inflatable turns as well as a Type I foam PFD. 9. Personal Protective Equipment Specialized equipment or clothing worn by personnel for protection against a hazard. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Parts: 1910.132 General Requirements 1910.133 Eye and Face Protection 1910.135 Head Protection 1910.136 Foot Protection 1910.138 Hand Protection ANSI Z41-1991, American National Standard for Personal Protection Protective Footwear ANSI Z87.1-(R 1998) Practice for Occupational/Educational Eye and Face Protection ANSI Z89.1-1997 American National Standard for Personal Protection Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers U.S. Test Methods Standard 191A, Method 5903, Flame Resistance of Cloth, Vertical U.S. Coast Guard Office of Boating Safety

Page 8 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) Exhibit 1 Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart
Source IMPACT Chipping, grinding, machining, masonry work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, power fastening, riveting, and sanding. HEAT Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot dipping, and welding. Assessment Of Hazard Flying fragments, objects large chips, particles, sand, dirt, dust, etc. Hot sparks ? Splash from molten metals ? High temperature exposure ? Splash or irritating mists Protection Impact Resistant Goggles (Manual Operations) Full face shield with impact resistant goggles or safety glasses with sideshields. Face shields, impact resistant goggles Face shields, splash goggles Screens, reflective face shields Splash goggles, face shield and splash goggles for moderate exposure. Chemical protective clothing for severe exposure (e.g. hood) Safety glasses with sideshield; Goggles (impact resistant)

CHEMICALS Acid and chemicals handling, crude oil, etc.

DUST Woodworking, buffing, general dusty conditions (i.e., excavations) LIGHT and/or RADIATION Welding: Electric arc ? Welding: Gas ?

Nuisance dust

Optical Radiation ? Optical Radiation ?

Welding helmets or welding shields. Typical shades 10-14 Welding goggles or welding face shield. Shades: Gas Welding 4-8, Cutting 3-6, Brazing 3-4 Tinted safety glasses with sideshields, welding goggles or welding face shield. Typical shades 1.5 - 3.0 Tinted safety glasses with sideshields. Special purpose lenses as suitable.

Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering ?

Optical Radiation ?

Glare ?

Poor Vision ?

Notes to the Eye and Face Protection Table: 1. Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposures to a variety of hazards. Adequate protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited protection. Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. Face shields (when required) must be worn in conjunction with primary eye protection safety glasses with sideshields or goggles. As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet he requirements of 1910.133 (a)(5) for shade designations. Tinted/shaded lenses are not filtering unless they are marked and identified as such. Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard area. Welding helmets or welding face shields (when required) shall be used over primary eye protection-safety glasses with sideshields or goggles.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Page 9 of 10

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT PROCEDURE (continued) Exhibit 2 Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Operation Shield Metal Arc Welding Arc Current Less than 60........................... 60-160..................................... 160-250................................... 250-500................................... Gas metal arc welding and flux cored arc welding Less than 60........................... 60-160..................................... 160-250................................... 250-500................................... Less than 50......................... 50-150................................... 500-100................................. Light..................... Heavy .................. **Light................ **Medium.......... **Heavy .............. Less than 500....................... 500-1000.............................. Less than 300....................... 300-400................................. 400-800................................. ................................................. ................................................. ........................... PLATE THICKNESS INCHES Under 1/8 1/8 to Over Under 1 1 to 6 Over 6 ............................................... ............................................... ......................... ................................................. ................................................. ......................... *Minimum Shade 7 8 10 11 7 10 10 10 8 8 10 10 11 8 9 10 3 2 14 MINIMUM SHADE

Gas tungsten arc welding

Air Carbon Air Cutting Plasma arc cutting

Torch Brazing Torch Soldering Carbon Arc Welding OPERATIONS Gas Welding: Light Medium Heavy Oxygen Cutting: Light Medium Heavy

4 5 6 3 4 5

As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then, go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum protective shade. In oxy -fuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.

** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the work piece.

Page 10 of 10

POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCB) HANDLING PROCEDURE General The potential adverse health effects of PCBs are: 1. Prolonged exposure to PCB vapors or direct contact with the liquid may lead to a form of dermatitis known as chlor-acne. 2. Inhalation of PCB vapors at high concentrations may result in nose and throat irritation. 3. Absorption of PCBs into the body may cause liver damage. 4. PCBs can be absorbed through the digestive tract, the lungs, or the skin. a. Digestive tract - If ingested, PCBs are rapidly absorbed. b. Lungs - Inhaled PCBs are very readily absorbed. c. Skin - PCBs are absorbed through the skin, but the amount of absorption is not significant unless exposure is prolonged and repeated. However, the presence of PCBs on the skin greatly increases the possibilities of accidental ingestion, and of absorption through broken skin, such as an open cut, which is much more rapid and serious than absorption through intact skin. Handling PCBs, Equipment and Spills 1. No Crosstex Energy Services employee shall handle any PCB equipment without first being authorized to do so by the supervisor in charge. 2. Sampling of dielectric fluids to determine PCB content shall be performed by an approved contractor. 3. Spills or leakage of suspected PCB oil shall be reported to a supervisor immediately. 4. Supervisors must initiate cleanup of any PCB oil as soon as possible after discovery of the leak. This shall be coordinated through the EH&S Department. 5. The leaking transformer or capacitor shall be placed in an approved, specially- marked drum. 6. An Annual Document Log shall be made referencing the serial number prior to the equipment being sealed in the drum. 7. Any contaminated soil shall be placed in a separate, approved, specially- marked drum. 8. Contact your Environmental Compliance Specialist if any PCB-contaminated material is suspected. 9. Contact your Environmental Compliance Specialist to determine the proper disposal site and obtain the proper hazardous waste manifest.

Page 1 of 3

POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCB) HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) Working Around PCBs 1. Whenever the handling of PCB transformers or capacitors might result in physical contact with PCBs, disposable Tyvek coated coveralls or equivalent and neoprene rubber gloves shall be worn along with chemical goggles. 2. If PCBs have spilled and are at their boiling point, a self- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) must be worn. 3. If PCB oil is leaking from equipment and comes into contact with the clothing, the clothing must be placed in specially- marked drums for proper disposal. 4. If any PCB oil comes into physical contact with the skin, all skin areas that have contacted the oil shall be cleaned at once, using the following procedure: a. Remove contaminated clothing, including shoes, for proper disposal. b. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with soap and water. c. Discard contaminated water in a specially marked drum (i.e., drum with PCB label). Do not however, delay washing if such a container is not immediately available since removal of PCBs from the skin is more important than controlling the disposal of wash water. d. If the PCB oil comes into contact with the eyes, immediately flush with water for fifteen (15) minutes and obtain medical attention. Disposal of PCB Equipment Contact your Environmental Compliance Specialist to ensure that proper marking and disposal procedures are followed. Labeling of PCB Equipment 1. A PCB label must be placed on all transformers that contain 500 ppm or greater PCB in dielectric fluid. Please contact the EH&S Department for label specifications. 2. A PCB-Contaminated label should be placed on all equipment that contains 50 ppm or greater but less than 500 ppm of PCBs in dielectric fluid. 3. A Non-PCB label, plate or equivalent must be on all transformers that have been tested and determined to contain less than 50 ppm in dielectric fluid. Definitions 1. Annual Document Log - The detailed information maintained at the facility on the PCB waste handling at the facility. 2. Annual Report - The written document submitted each year by each disposer and commercial storer of PCB waste to the appropriate EPA Regional Administrator. The annual report is a brief summary of the information included in the annual document log.

Page 2 of 3

POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCB) HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Capacitor - A device for accumulating and holding a charge of electricity and consisting of conducting surfaces separated by a dielectric. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40 Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA), Part 761 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB) Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce and Use Prohibition

Page 3 of 3

OSHA NOTICES AND INSPECTIONS PROCEDURE Notices 1. Crosstex Energy Services shall post and keep posted a notice(s) furnished by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, informing employees of the protections and obligations provided for in the OSH Act, and that for assistance and information, including copies of the OSH Act and of specific safety and health standards, employees should contact the employer or the nearest office of the Department of Labor. 2. Crosstex Energy Services shall post these notices in each establishment in a conspicuous place(s) where notices to employees are customarily posted. 3. Steps shall be taken to insure that such notices are not altered, defaced, or covered by other material. Inspections 1. Verify the credentials of any individual who identifies themselves as an OSHA Compliance Safety and Health Officer by calling their office and talking to the Area Director, before allowing an inspection or visit at Company locations. a. Generally, a warrant shall not be required prior to allowing an OSHA Compliance Safety and Health Officer access to our facilities. b. A search warrant shall not be required for entry. However, if one is presented, keep the Company copy and attach it to the inspection report. 2. The employee or supervisor initially contacted shall notify the Division Manager and the Safety Department. 3. If possible, defer the inspection until the supervisor- in-charge or his designated representative arrives to accompany the officer. 4. A Company Safety Compliance Specialist shall accompany the inspection party during all inspections, whenever possible. 5. Supervisor- in-charge must provide notification (by telephone) in advance of any inspections or investigative-type interview to the Director, EH&S. 6. Determine the basis for what type of inspection is to be conducted. There are six (6) types of OSHA inspections: a. Employee Complaint: If the inspection was prompted by an employee complaint, acquire a copy of the registered complaint. b. Routine : If the inspection is referred to as routine, have the compliance officer explain the criteria used for selecting this particular location. c. Imminent Hazard: Inspection based on a hazard that is life threatening and is moments away from occurring. Verify how and when the hazard was observed. d. Accident Investigation: Inspections are allowed by statute following work-related accidents resulting in a fatality or the hospitalization of three (3) or more employees.

Page 1 of 3

OSHA NOTICES AND INSPECTIONS PROCEDURE (continued) e. Media Referral: Due to pub licity in media, OSHA may justify an inspection. f. Special Emphasis Program: OSHA has special emphasis programs from time to time in which they specifically target particular hazards. 7. Determine the scope of the inspection: safety, health or environmentally related. A qualified company representative shall be onsite for all health-related inspections. 8. Determine the limits of inspection: a. What facilities and areas will be subject to inspection? b. What employees or positions do they wish to speak to or review? c. What measurements, samples, or photographs do they wish to take? NOTE: A designated employee shall perform and/or take and record the same measurements, samples, or photographs as does the OSHA compliance officer. All items considered to be trade secrets and confidential material shall be marked accordingly. 9. OSHA Compliance Safety and Health Officer(s) shall comply with all employer safety and health rules and practices at the establishment being inspected. 10. OSHA Compliance Safety and Health Officer(s) shall be required to wear and use appropriate protective clothing and equipment. 11. OSHA Compliance Safety and Health Officer(s) shall be accompanied at all times. A designated employee shall maintain a detailed record of the officers/inspectors activities. Do not guess or speculate in answering questions. Tell the truth. 12. A review of documents that are relevant to the inspection shall be permitted. Review all documents before releasing them. Keep originals of any copies released and a complete copy of everything given to the officer/inspector. 13. A reasonable number of employees may be questioned by the Compliance Safety and Health Officer about local working conditions. Questioning or interviews may be conducted without a Company representative present as is frequently requested. 14. Upon the Compliance Officers request, allow one (1) employee to accompany him/her during the inspection. Additional employees may accompany the inspection team, if additional representation will further assist the inspection. 15. All employees shall be advised not to sign anything prepared by OSHA. However, they should verbally acknowledge the accuracy of any OSHA documents. 16. During the closing conference: a. Ask questions regarding any citations as to why they were issued and to what standard they apply. b. Take extensive notes. Assign one (1) individual to take notes. c. Never give an abatement date for any citation.

Page 2 of 3

OSHA NOTICES AND INSPECTIONS PROCEDURE (continued) 17. The facility supervisor and the Safety Manager shall prepare a comprehensive memorandum as soon as the closing conference has been completed and distribute to the appropriate Division Vice President. Definitions 1. Compliance Safety and Health Officer - A person authorized by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, to conduct inspections. 2. Inspection - Any inspection of an employer's factory, plant, establishment, construction site, or other area, workplace or environment where work is performed by an employee of an employer, and includes any inspection conducted pursuant to a complaint filed under 1903.11 (a) and (c), any reinspection, followup inspection, accident investigation or other inspection conducted under section 8(a) of the Act. 3. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 4. OSH Act - The Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1903 - Inspections, Citations and Proposed Penalties Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Parts 19 and 745 - Civil Monetary Penalty Inflation Adjustment Rule

Page 3 of 3

OFFICE SAFETY PROCEDURE General 1. Overhead Items a. Always use a ladder or step stool to reach articles high above the floor. b. Never use a swivel chair or other makeshift device to reach high places. c. Avoid storing heavy objects above eye level. 2. Wall Hangings. Pictures and wall hangings should be secured with the proper fasteners. 3. Staples, Staplers, and Paper Cutters a. Remove staples with a staple puller and dispose of used staples properly. b. Never overload or force staplers or paper cutters. c. Paper cutters must be left in the closed and latched position when not in use. 4. Paper Cuts a. Use a moistener to seal envelopes in order to avoid mouth cuts and germs. b. Avoid paper cuts by picking up individual sheets of paper at the corner. c. Exercise caution when turning book pages or going through files. 5. Scissors, Cutters, Sharp Objects a. Pass scissors handle first, blades together. b. Store them where they will not fall. c. Keep razor-type cutters (such as X-ACTO knives and box cutters) covered or shielded when not in use. d. When opening boxes with box cutters, always cut away from your body, not toward your body. e. Do not place pointed objects, such as pencils, pens, and letter openers with pointed ends upward in containers or pockets. f. Never throw loose glass pieces into a wastebasket. Dispose of broken glass in a marked container, such as a box. Printers, Copiers, Facsimiles 1. Avoid touching the heated parts of printers, copy machines and fax machines whenever adding or changing paper or removing paper jams. 2. Never stick a metal object, such as a letter opener, into a machine, including typewriters. 3. Do not allow paper or other materials to accumulate behind machinery. 4. When possible, close the cover of copy machines while copying. 5. Avoid looking directly at the intense light.
Page 1 of 3

OFFICE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Hearing protection may be required in some areas where many copiers, printers, etc. may be running simultaneously, creating a dangerous noise level. Obey the Hearing Protection Required signs. (Refer to the Hearing Conservation Program for further information.) Paper Shredders 1. Keep ties, dangling jewelry, and loose clothing away from the paper shredder by standing to the side of the machine while operating it. 2. Stand in a position which allows immediate access to the on/off switch. 3. If the shredder does not have an automatic shutoff, turn it off after each use. 4. Avoid overloading the machine. 5. If the machine becomes jammed, do not attempt to manually unjam the machine until: a. Power is turned off, and b. Machine is unplugged. (Refer to the Lockout/Tagout Program for further information.) Solvents and Cleaners 1. Check instructions on containers and Material Safety Data Sheets for pertinent information regarding personal protective equipment required. (Refer to the Hazard Communication Program and Personal Protective Equipment Program for further information.) 2. Solvents and cleaners should be properly stored, with larger volumes possibly requiring special cabinets. (Refer to the Hazard Communication Program for further information.) File Cabinets Arranging and using file cabinets: 1. Whenever possible, file cabinets should be arranged side by side and bolted together; 2. Do not overload the upper drawers of file cabinets; 3. Open only one file cabinet drawer at a time; 4. Never leave an open file drawer unattended; 5. Close desk and file cabinet drawers when they are not in use; 6. Do not position file cabinets and files so that open drawers block passageways; 7. Two-drawer file cabinets must not be stacked unless they are designed to be stacked and are fastened together; 8. File cabinets must not be stacked on top of tables or desks unless they are designed for such use. Even if they are bolted to the wall, they may fall if the table is moved because of excessive unsupported weight; 9. Tall or large file cabinets, bookcases, and cabinets should be bolted to the wall, particularly in libraries or file rooms.

Page 2 of 3

OFFICE SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) Electrical Equipment 1. Do not attempt any electrical repairs unless you are qualified to do the work. (Refer to the Electrical Safety Program and the Lockout/Tagout Program for further information.) 2. Worn electrical cords shall be replaced promptly by qualified personnel. 3. Keep walking areas clear of telephone and electrical cords. Temporary cords which cross walkways or work areas shall be securely taped down or placed under protective rubber strips. 4. Electrical outlets shall not be overloaded. 5. Use only properly grounded, 3-pronged plugs, or double insulated appliances approved by recognized testing laboratories. 6. Hands should be dry before plugging, unplugging, or operating electrical equipment. 7. Turn off coffee pot warmers when they are not in use. Be sure to check them everyday before leaving to be sure they are turned off. 8. Never block forced-air heater outlets. 9. Avoid overloading electrical circuits by contacting office maintenance personnel before utilizing an electric heater. 10. Avoid leaving microwave ovens unattended when in use. 11. Keep coffee and other beverages away from electrical equipment. 12. Unplug electric staplers and pencil sharpeners and any other electrical device before opening them for servicing. (Refer to the Lockout/Tagout Program section for further information.) Computer Workstations When using computers for long periods of time, you should: 1. Take breaks and look away from the screen periodically; 2. Stretch to reduce muscle tension; and 3. Utilize proper posture. References Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910.1200 Hazard Communication Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910, Subpart E Exit Routes, Emergency Action Plans and Fire Prevention Plans Code of Federal Regulations, Part 1910, Subpart I Personal Protective Equipment

Page 3 of 3

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE NORM Surveys 1. It is not always possible to predict which equipment, components, materials, facilities, or land will be or will not be NORM-contaminated. 2. The only way to definitely determine this is to survey each item, facility, or area for NORM contamination using appropriate radiation detection instruments. 3. Exemption levels and release criteria for unrestricted use: a. Equipment is exempt from NORM regulations if the maximum radiation exposure rate, measured at any accessible point, does not exceed:

AL 25 uR/hr above the local background radiation exposure rate LA 50 uR/hr above the local background radiation exposure rate MS 25 uR/hr above the local background radiation exposure rate NM 50 uR/hr including the local background radiation exposure rate OK 300 dpm/100 cm2 above local background counts per minute TX 50 uR/hr including the local background radiation exposure rate

b. Alabama - A site/equipment will be acceptable for unrestricted use if the residual radioactivity that is distinguishable from background radiation results in a TEDE that does not exceed 25 millirem per year, including that from groundwater sources of drinking water, and the residual radioactivity has been reduced to levels that are as low as reasonably achievable. c. Louisiana

Soils, sands, sludges, scales, and other wastes are exempt if they do not exceed 5 picocuries per gram (pCi/gram) radium-226 or radium-228 above background levels in soil, averaged over any 100 square meters and averaged over the first 15 centimeters of soil below the surface, provided the radon emanation is less than 20 picocuries per meter squared per second (pCi/m2/sec) is exempt. Out-of-service NORM pipe and/or vessels stored on a facility has to be registered with the Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ) and removed within ninety (90) days. Extensions to the 90 day removal may be granted by the DEQ by a written request from the general licensee.

d. Mississippi - Materials that contain or are contaminated at concentrations less than 5 picocuries per gram of radium226 or radium-228 above background, or concentrations less than 30 picocuries per gram (1.11 kBq/kg) of technologically-enhanced radium226 or radium-228, averaged over any 100 square meters, provided the radon emanation rate does not exceed 20 picocuries (740 mBq) per square meter per second, or 150 picocuries per gram (5.55 kBq/kg) of any other NORM radionuclide, provided that these concentrations are not exceeded at any time.

Page 1 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) e. New Mexico

NORM concentrations of 30 picocuries per gram (pCi/gram) or less radium-226, above background, or 150 picocuries per gram or less of any other NORM radio nuclide, above background, in soil, in 15 centimeter layers, averaged over 100 square meters is exempt. NORM pipe and/or vessels stored on a facility must be registered with the Environment Department (ED) on a yearly basis. NORM may be stored on a facility for up to ten (10) years.

f. Oklahoma

Measurements of average contamination level should not be averaged over more than one square meter. For objects of less surface area, the average should be derived for each object. The maximum contamination level applies to an area of not more than 100 cm2.

g. Texas

Soils, sands, sludges, scales, and other wastes are exempt if they do not exceed 5 picocuries per gram (pCi/gram) radium-226 or radium-228 above background levels in soil, averaged over any 100 square meters and averaged over the first 15 centimeters of soil below the surface, provided the radon emanation is less than 20 picocuries per meter squared per second (pCi/m2/sec) is exempt. In Texas, there is not an established NORM storage time restriction.

h. Regardless of the radon emanation rate, land may be released for unrestricted use if the soil concentrations of technologically enhanced Ra-226 or Ra-228, averaged over any 100 square meters, do not exceed:

5 pCi/gram, averaged over the first 15 centimeters of soil below the surface; and 15 pCi/gram, averaged over 15 cm thick layers of soil more than 15 cm below the surface.

i.

Land may be released for unrestricted use if the soil concentrations of technologically enhanced Ra-226 or Ra-228, averaged over any 100 square meters, do not exceed 30 pCi/gram and if the radon emanation rate does not exceed 20 pCi/square meter/second.

NORM Survey Instruments 1. Scinillators (or an equivalent) equipped with gamma detectors shall be used to conduct NORM surveys of oil and gas lines, plant equipment, components, materials, and land. These instruments may also be used to conduct investigative external surveys of operating gas processing plants. These instruments will provide radiation exposure readings in units of uR/hr and will be capable of measuring 1 uR/hr through at least 500 uR/hr.

Page 2 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Scinillators (or an equivalent) equipped with pancake detectors shall be used to conduct NORM contamination surveys. These instruments will provide radioactive material contamination readings in counts per minute (CPM) and will be capable of measuring 10 CPM through 10,000 CPM. 3. Each survey instrument shall be calibrated according to state regulations and after each instrument servicing/repair: a. AL every 12 months b. LA every 12 months c. MS every 12 months d. NM every 12 months e. OK every 12 months f. TX every 12 months 4. NORM surveyors shall perform operations checks of their survey instruments prior to each use; battery checks and proper responses to appropriate radioactive check sources shall be included in the check. NORM Surveying Instructions 1. NORM equipment surveys shall be performed on each piece of equipment, component, tubular string, flowline, vessel, tank, pit, waste container, scrap bin, etc., to be worked on or removed from the location. Such surveys are required to assure that NORMcontaminated equipment, materials, or land are not released for unrestricted use, and/or to provide basic information to facilitate implementation of proper worker protection precautions and procedures prior to initiation of maintenance operations. 2. In gas processing plants, common areas where NORM accumulations are found include: propane/ethane reflux pumps, liquid product pumps and storage tanks, and point of flow velocity of directional changes (particularly in piping in propane, ethane, and product service). 3. Soil NORM surveys are required at locations where the ground may have been NORMcontaminated due to past tank cleanouts, tubular descaling, or land spreading operations. Examples of locations to investigate include: vessel sludge disposal sites, scale removal sites, filter media disposal sites, produced water disposal pits, vessel blowdown locations, pig retrieval locations, and inside tank battery firewalls.

Page 3 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) NORM Surveying Techniques 1. Oil and Gas Field Equipment/Materials: a. Scintillators (or an equivalent) equipped with detectors shall be used to make these surveys. b. Radiation exposure rates shall be recorded in uR/hr. c. Assure that the survey instrument has been calibrated within the state-required time frame. d. Assure that the survey instrument is functioning properly by performing battery and source checks. e. Measure the local background radiation exposure rate (uR/hr). f. Where practical, survey all accessible parts of the equipment of interest. g. Hold the detector in contact with the equipment surface or as close to the surface as possible. h. Scan the equipment by moving the detector slowly along the length and around the circumference of the equipment. i. Record a reading for each separate piece of equipment/piping surveyed, even if at or below background.

j. Where levels vary for a given piece of equipment or pipe, the highest reading should be recorded unless different parts or components of the equipment or pipe can be identified and surveyed individually. 2. Operating Gas Processing Plants a. Scintillators (or an equivalent) equipped with detectors shall be used to make these surveys. b. Radiation exposure rates shall be recorded in uR/hr. c. Assure that the survey instrument has been calibrated within the state-required time frame. d. Assure that the survey instrument is functioning properly by performing battery and source checks. e. Measure the local background radiation exposure rate (uR/hr). f. Where practical, survey all accessible parts of the equipment of interest. g. Hold the detector in contact with the equipment surface or as close to the surface as possible. h. Scan the equipment by moving the detector slowly along the length and around the circumference of the equipment.

Page 4 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) i. Record a reading for each separate piece of equipment and piping surveyed, even if at or below background.

j. Where levels vary for a given piece of equipment or pipe, the highest reading should be recorded unless different parts or components of the equipment or pipe can be identified and surveyed individually. k. Such surveys will provide information on whether or not the gas flowing through the plant contains significant concentrations of NORM (radon), as well as where potential NORM accumulations are likely to be found. l. Before allowing work on individual components or pieces of equipment, internal equipment surveys shall be performed with survey instruments in accordance with the procedures described in the following sections.

3. Out-of-Service Processing Plants a. Gas processing plants that have been shut down for more than a few days cannot be surveyed for NORM using the instrumentation and procedures described above. b. At out-of-service gas processing plants, internal equipment surfaces will be surveyed as the equipment is opened, using a NORM scintillator, and survey results will be recorded in counts per minute (CPM). c. Assure that the survey instrument has been calibrated within the state required time frame. d. Assure that the survey instrument is functioning properly by performing battery and source checks. e. Measure the background radiation reading (CPM). f. If practical, components of the propane line shall be surveyed first; if no NORM is detected in the propane line, there is not likely to be any NORM in other areas of the plant. g. Equipment components will be disassembled carefully so as not to release, spill, spread, etc. NORM accumulations that may be on the internal surfaces, and surveys on the internal surfaces shall be performed as the equipment is disassembled. h. If NORM contamination is detected, both fixed and removable contamination surveys will be performed. 4. Land Land NORM surveys may be conducted either to identify NORM-contaminated areas or in order to assure that no NORM contamination exists prior to release of the land for unrestricted use.

Page 5 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) Land NORM contamination sur veys shall be performed as follows: a. Scintillators (or an equivalent) equipped with detectors shall be used to make land NORM-contaminated surveys; radiation exposure rates will be recorded in uR/hr. b. Assure that the survey instrument has been calibrated within the state-required time frame. c. Assure that the survey instrument is functioning properly by performing battery and source checks. d. Measure local background radiation exposure rate (uR/hr). e. The area to be surveyed shall be delineated with optimum grid spacing for the size of the area to be surveyed. However, in no case shall the grid spacing be greater than 30 feet. Further, in areas of known NORM contamination, the grid spacing shall be appropriately reduced (not to exceed 10 feet). f. Each grid line shall be surveyed from outside point to outside point and the maximum radiation exposure rate detected for each grid line will be recorded on an appropriate grid plot of the area being surveyed. g. The survey instrument detector shall be held at a height no greater than one (1) centimeter above the surface being surveyed and the meter response shall be continuously monitored while methodically traversing each grid line. h. Any area which exhibits a radiation exposure rate greater than two (2) times the local background radiation exposure rate shall be identified either for decontamination or as a potential soil sampling location. Types and Scopes of Activities Involving NORM 1. On-site maintenance on NORM-contaminated equipment, components, and facilities will be performed in accordance with the following procedures. 2. During normal operating conditions at sites, facilities, and plants containing NORMcontaminated equipment, potential radiation exposures are low enough to be of little concern; however, personnel should be aware of its existence and that certain precautions need to be taken and procedures adhered to when undertaking tasks directly involving NORM. 3. The types and scopes of activities involving NORM that may be undertaken by employees and/or contractors under Crosstex Energy Services general license and in accordance with these procedures include: a. Surveying equipment, components, materials and land for the purpose of identifying NORM-contaminated items.

Such surveys may include either external and/or internal equipment surveys. Such surveys may range in scope from surveying a small component in five (5) minutes to surveying an entire plant or site that may take days.

Page 6 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) b. Decontamination of equipment components for either on-site or off-site repair (as allowed by state rules).

These will normally be small jobs, taking an hour or so, and may involve scraping, chipping, sanding, washing, etc. Components or equipment requiring a major decontamination effort will normally be sent to a specific licensees facility.

c. Repair of equipment and components.

Such activities will normally require removal of any gross NORM-contaminated material prior to initiation of repair activities. However, it will not be necessary to completely decontaminate the equipment/components to be repaired onsite.

d. Vessel/tank cleanout (removal of NORM sand, sludge/scale from vessels and tanks in order to maintain operations).

Some vessels/tanks can be sufficiently cleaned without personnel entry; others will require personnel entry. Volumes of NORM waste removed will range from gallons to cubic yards and the time elements involved will range from a few hours to days.

e. NORM waste containerization

NORM waste generated during equipment and component decontamination and vessel/tank cleanout activities will be containerized at the jobsite. Associated volumes of NORM waste will range from a handful to cubic yards and associated time elements will range from minutes to days.

f. Interim storage of containerized NORM waste and NORM-contaminated equipment and components. Containerized NORM wastes and NORM-contaminated equipment removed from service are temporarily stored (accumulated) at individual field/plant locations awaiting shipment to specific licensees facilities for decontamination. g. Alternatively, NORM contaminated equipment may be shipped directly to a specific licensees facility for decontamination and the resultant NORM waste (containerized) shipped back to Crosstex Energy Services for interim storage and/or disposal. Handling times and shipment schedules will vary widely. h. Determine labeling requirements and ensure that all NORM is properly labeled.

Page 7 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) Personnel Protective Equipment The following personal protective equipment shall be provided and worn in NORM-restricted areas: 1. Protective work coveralls (tyvek). 2. Protective gloves. 3. Protective boots. 4. High efficiency particulate air-purifying (HEPA) respirators approved for use in atmospheres containing radioactive dusts, fumes, and/or mists shall be worn when dry, NORM-contaminated materials are being handled or worked on and when NORM particulates are generated by grinding, polishing, cutting, welding, or drilling. These cartridges have a magenta or hot pink color code. 5. Supplied air respirators shall be worn for tank/vessel entries. 6. Safety glasses, face shields, goggles as appropriate. 7. Thermoluminescent dosimeters (TLDs) as appropriate. Personnel Protective Procedures The following personnel protective procedures shall be implemented: 1. Personnel radiation exposures shall be maintained as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA). 2. Personnel skin contact with NORM shall be minimized. 3. Only authorized personnel shall be allowed in Crosstex Energy Services restricted areas. 4. Personnel shall wash hands and face upon exit from restricted areas and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, chewing, or applying lip balm. 5. Personnel shall eat, drink, smoke, chew or apply lip balm only in designated break areas. 6. Personnel are required to survey themselves for NORM contamination upon exit from restricted areas and to decontaminate themselves if contamination levels in excess of background are detected. a. A Ludlum Model 3 with a pancake probe shall be used. b. Readings exceeding 50 cpm indicates decontamination is necessary. 7. Restricted area work clothes and equipment shall be surveyed for NORM contamination prior to being removed from restricted areas. Contaminated work clothes and equipment shall remain in restricted areas until they are decontaminated or placed in NORM waste containers.

Page 8 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) 8. All tools and equipment shall be decontaminated and surveyed for NORM contamination prior to being removed from restricted areas. 9. To the extent necessary, NORM-contaminated soils and similar materials to be removed or handled shall be wetted-down in order to minimize potential airborne contamination. a. If NORM-contaminated concrete is broken-up, it shall be kept wetted-down during the breaking-up process. b. If wetting-down is necessary, it shall be accomplished by applying a mist-spray over the work area. 10. Personnel scheduled to work in areas exhibiting radiation exposure in excess of 1,000 uR/hr shall be advised of the fact and shall be directed to minimize occupancy times in such areas. 11. Areas in which radiation exposure rates in excess of 5,000 uR/hr are detected will be designated, posted, and controlled as radiation areas. Personnel access to such areas shall be restricted to a maximum of ten (10) hours per week per individual. 12. NORM-contaminated equipment, components, pipe, etc., will be wrapped in plastic, sealed, or otherwise closed or enclosed, as appropriate, prior to being removed from restricted areas. 13. Plastic ground/floor covers shall be utilized to the extent possible during equipment and component decontamination and vessel/tank cleanout activities in order to control the spread of contamination, minimize environmental contamination, and to facilitate cleanup. 14. NORM contamination of ground/floor areas, as well as external surfaces of equipment in the restricted areas where equipment decontamination has been done, shall be decontaminated to background levels (uR/hr) therefore releasing such areas from restricted status. NORM Labeling Materials identified as containing NORM shall be labeled in accordance with applicable state and federal regulatory requirements. An example label is shown below:

Page 9 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) NORM Transportation 1. When equipment and/or tubulars are going to be shipped to other leases or are scheduled to be taken out of service to be sold as scrap, a NORM survey shall be completed before the equipment/material may be moved. Company personnel in the Safety Department are familiar with the instruments (scinillators) that are required to survey equipment for NORM. 2. If NORM is detected above 25 micro roentgens per hour (uR/hr), the items or equipment (containers of NORM waste or NORM contaminated equipment) to be transported shall be sealed or contained so as to prevent the spread of NORM contamination during transport. Sealing can be accomplished with the use of flanges, thread protectors, plastic, and/or duct tape. 3. When selling equipment, a NORM Survey form shall be completed after a NORM survey is performed by Crosstex Energy Services personnel. 4. An appropriate bill of lading shall accompany each shipment of NORM and all applicable DOT regulations/requirements shall be complied with. A Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) shall be consulted when containers to be shipped have a uR/hr readings exceeding 5,000 uR/hr. Training 1. Basic NORM training shall include: a. Radiation fundamentals types of radiation and relative hazards. b. Basic principles of radiation protection. c. Required personal protective equipment. d. Units of radiation and radioactive material measurements. e. Natural background radiation exposures. f. General population radiation exposures. g. Oil & gas industry radiation exposures, hazards, and precautions. h. Origin, transport, and accumulation of oil field and gas plant NORM. i. NORM/radiation regulations, limits, and guides (Federal and State). j. Survey instruments and survey techniques for personnel and equipment. k. Decontamination materials and procedures for equipment and personnel. l. NORM transportation requirements. m. NORM waste disposal. 2. NORM Surveyor training shall include: a. Proper selection and use of survey instruments.

Page 10 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) b. Proper survey techniques. c. Precautions to be taken during surveys to prevent or minimize exposures to NORM. 3. Additional NORM training shall be provided as dictated by employee performance, new or revised regulations, change in operating conditions, unusual situations, etc. 4. Annual refresher training in radiation safety and environmental protection shall be provided. Definitions 1. CPM Counts per minute. 2. Curie (Ci) The basic unit of radioactivity nuclear transformations per second, (3.7 x 1010); or 2.22 x 1012 disintegrations per minute. 3. Dose The total quantity of ionizing radiation absorbed, per unit of mass, by the body or by any portion of the body. 4. DPM Disintegrations per minute; there are 2.2 dpm per pCi. 5. DPM/100 cm2 Disintegrations per minute per 100 square centimeters; the basic activity/area unit to express surface contamination levels and limits. 6. General Licensee Oil and gas companies who operate, process, use, store, or transfer NORM-contaminated equipment can obtain a general license from the State. The Company (Licensee) must comply with the General License rules. 7. High Radiation Area Any area, accessible to personnel, where radiation exists at such levels that a major portion of the body could receive a dose in excess of100 millirem in any one hour. 8. Microcurie (uCi) One-thousandth of a millicurie (mCi). 9. Microroentgen Per Hour (uR/Hr) The basic radiation level per unit of time measurement used to provide an indication of the amount/concentration of NORM present. 10. Millicurie (mCi) One-thousandth of a curie. 11. Millirem (mrem) One-thousandth of a rem (0.001 rem). 12. Milliroentgen (mR) Equals 1,000 uR. 13. Nanocurie (nCi) One-thousandth of a Microcurie (uCi). 14. Net CPM Gross counts per minute minus background cpm. 15. NORM Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials - Materials of the 238-Uranium and 232-Thorium decay chains found in nature and which emit ionizing radiation spontaneously.

Page 11 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) 16. Personnel Monitoring Equipment Devices designed to be worn or carried by an individual for the purpose of measuring the dose received (e.g., film badges, pocket chambers, pocket dosimeters, film rings, etc.). 17. Picocurie (pCi) One-thousandth of a Nanocurie (nCi), or one-trillionth of a curie. 18. Rad A measure of the dose of any ionizing radiation to body tissues in terms of the energy absorbed per unit of mass of the tissue. One rad is the dose corresponding to the absorption of 100 ergs per gray of tissue (1 millirad (mr ad) = 0.001 rad). 19. Radiation Includes alpha rays, beta rays, gamma rays, X-rays, neutrons, high speed electrons, high speed protons, and other atomic particles. This term does not include sound or radio waves, or visible light, or infrared or ultraviolet light. 20. Radiation Area Any area, accessible to personnel, where radiation exists at such levels that a major portion of the body could receive a dose in excess of 5 millirem in any 1 hour, or a dose of 100 millirem in any 5 consecutive days. 21. Radioactive Material Any material which emits, by spontaneous nuclear disintegration, corpuscular or electromagnetic emanations. 22. Roentgen Equivalent Man (rem) A measure of the dose of any ionizing radiation to body tissue in terms of its estimated biological effect relative to a dose of 1 roentgen (r) of X-rays (1 millirem (mrem) 0.001 rem). The relation of the rem to other dose units depends upon the biological effect under consideration and upon the conditions of irradiation. 23. Restricted Area Any area access which is controlled by the employer for purposes of protection of individuals from exposure to radiation or radioactive materials. 24. Roentgen A measurement of radiation level existing at any particular point in air where a radiation detector is positioned. 25. Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) Sum of the deep-dose equivalent (for external exposures) and the committed effective dose equivalent (for internal exposures). 26. Unrestricted Use Use by unlicensed (general or specific) persons or companies. Selling NORM equipment to junk dealers or returning NORM-contaminated land to landowners are examples of improper release for unrestricted use. 27. Survey An evaluation of the radiation hazards incident to the production, use, release, disposal, or presence of radioactive materials or other sources of radiation under a specific set of conditions. Such evaluation includes a physical survey of the location of materials and equipment and measurements of levels of radiation or concentrations of radioactive material present. 28. Unrestricted Area Any area access which is not controlled by the employer for purposes of protection of individuals from exposure to radiation or radioactive materials.

Page 12 of 13

NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL (NORM) PROCEDURE (continued) References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1096, Ionizing Radiation Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1926.53, Ionizing Radiation Code of Federal Regulations, Title 10, Part 20, Standards for Protection Against Radiation American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z53.1-1953 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards and the Identification of Certain Equipment LAC 33:XV.Chapter 14, Louisiana Radiation Texas Department of Health, 25 TAC 289.259 Texas Regulations for the Control of Radiation New Mexico Administrative Code, 20 NMAC 3.1, Part 14 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials in the Oil and Gas Industry Mississippi State Department of Health, Section N, Part 801 Requirements for the Control of Radiation in Mississippi Alabama Department of Public Health, 420-3-26-.03 Standards for Protection Against Radiation

Page 13 of 13

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE New Employee Orientation 1. Crosstex Energy Services has a New Employee Orientation program for Crosstex employees and Contract employees who are new or inexperienced in their current position. 2. It is everyones responsibility to ensure new employees are closely monitored for compliance with company policy and procedures. Drug, Alcohol, and Weapons Policy 1. Crosstex Energy Services requires compliance with our Drug, Alcohol, and Weapons Policy. 2. This policy prohibits the use, possession or transportation of unauthorized drugs, drug paraphernalia, alcoholic beverages, weapons, pyrotechnic or explosive devices, stolen items, drug or other contraband items on any company premise including: offices, work locations, or vehicles. 3. No one shall enter any Crosstex Energy Services work location if they are under the influence of alcohol or an illegal or improperly used drug. 4. As a safety precaution, entry onto a Crosstex Energy Services work location is conditional upon the company's right to search persons and personal effects for contraband items. Searches are conducted by authorized personnel in as discreet a manner as practical. 5. Possession or use of any of the mentioned contraband items or failure to consent to inspection of personal belongings is grounds for dismissal. 6. Consult with the Crosstex Energy Services supervisor in the event that a need exists for you to possess or use any items that would normally be considered contraband. 7. All prescription drugs that would affect our ability to conduct your job safely should be shown to a Crosstex Energy Services supervisor in order to register the user. 8. Details concerning the use of drugs and alcohol may be found in the Crosstex Energy Services Drug and Alcohol Policy. Personal Protective Equipment 1. It is mandatory when you enter a field location, that you wear the required personal protective equipment (PPE). 2. All PPE must conform to the American National Standards Institute (or ANSI) standards. 3. The minimum PPE for ALL Crosstex Energy Services work locations includes: a. A non-metal ANSI Class E hard hat (formerly class B). b. ANSI approved Z87 safety glasses or prescription safety glasses with protective side shields. c. ANSI approved Z41 safety toed footwear with non-skid, oil and chemical resistant soles.

Page 1 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) d. When handling chemicals requiring protection from absorption, safety toed chemical resistant boots should be worn. e. Personal hydrogen sulfide monitors in sour areas. 4. All PPE must be worn at ALL times in field locations, except when in vehicle cabs, meeting rooms, and field offices. 5. Contact lenses are permitted to be worn in conjunction with ANSI-approved protective eyewear. a. Wearing contact lenses in dusty or chemical environments, or while using supplied air, may present an additional hazard to the wearer. b. If you wear contact lenses, discuss their use with a Crosstex Energy Services supervisor and/or the Safety Department before beginning work. 6. Splash proof goggles are required to be worn when handling chemicals. 7. A face shield in conjunction with splash proof goggles is required when directly exposed to chemicals capable of injuring the skin. 8. Impact goggles or safety glasses with side shields and a face shield are required when operating power tools such as grinders, sanders and power saws. 9. All equipment must be used with appropriate machine guards in place to prevent injury to yourself or those around you. 10. Clothing plays an important part in employees safety. a. Torn or oil-soaked clothing is prohibited. b. Wearing at least 50% natural fiber clothes is suggested. c. Shirts (with sleeves) and long pants are required at all times. Sleeveless shirts and tank tops are prohibited. d. Suitable work gloves should also be worn while working. 11. Flame resistant clothing (FRC) is required to be worn when performing tasks or working in areas where the potential for a flash fire exists. a. Examples of tasks requiring FRC are loading/unloading or transferring of hydrocarbons and servicing energized electrical equipment above 600 volts. b. This list is not comprehensive, so consult with the Crosstex Energy Services supervisor in charge for information on specific job tasks which require the use of flame resistant clothing. 12. Hair longer than shoulder length must be tied back or confined to prevent entanglement when working around moving or rotating equipment. 13. Loose fitting clothing or jewelry is not allowed for the same reason.

Page 2 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 14. Certain work areas have been designated as high noise areas and require the wearing of hearing protection devices, such as ear plugs or muffs. Hearing protection must be worn at all times while in the high noise areas. 15. Tasks with specific hazards will require additional PPE. Examples are proper hand protection and special protective clothing when working with chemicals, radioactive materials, welding or live electrical circuits. 16. To protect personnel from falls, elevated work surfaces four (4) feet or more above ground or another work surface must be equipped with an approved guardrail or equivalent. Approved personal fall protection equipment consisting of a full body harness, appropriate lanyard with double locking snaps or a fall arresting system must be used at all times while personnel are working from unguarded surfaces greater than six (6) feet above ground or an adjacent platform or work surface. Safety belts are ONLY to be used as body positioning devices and NOT for fall protection. They must be worn in conjunction with the proper fall arrest equipment. 17. Some of Crosstex Energy Services locations are sour. This means that hydrogen sulfide, a poisonous gas, or H2 S as it is commonly called, may be present. For this reason, you are required to wear a personal H2 S monitor at all times while working in one of our sour areas. a. Monitors should be properly maintained and the alarm should be appropriate for the environment in which you will be working. At a minimum, it should have a visual and audible alarm. A motion or vibrating alarm should be used in High Noise areas.

b. The monitor shall be set to alarm if the H2 S gas reaches quantities of 10 parts per million or above. c. If the alarm sounds, immediately leave the area, contact the supervisor in charge, and do not re-enter the area until it has been cleared. d. Because of this risk, excessive facial hair is not allowed in sour gas areas. No facial hair is allowed below the top lip. Mustaches cannot extend below the corners of the mouth and sideburns cannot extend into the sealing area of a facemask. Details can be found in the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program.

Vehicle Safety 1. While in the field, drive at speeds the conditions allow and always slow down and steer to the right if possible when meeting opposing traffic on narrow roads, bridges or corners. 2. Be aware of natural hazards, such as deer and cattle, that may enter your path of travel.

Page 3 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 3. While working for Crosstex Energy Services, all personnel operating a vehicle are required to wear a safety belt any time it is in motion and to follow all company, State and Federal driving regulations. Back Safety 1. Back injury is one of the leading causes of injuries in the work place. 2. Do not try to lift anything that is too heavy or awkward; always get assistance. 3. If an object is too heavy to lift properly, use a mechanical lifting device, such as a forklift or a crane. 4. Always use the proper lifting technique, even for light loads. 5. Use your legs to lift, keep your back straight and head up, and shuffle your feet rather than twisting at the waist to turn the load. Tools 1. Use the proper tool for the job; a wrench is not meant to be used as a hammer. 2. If a tool is worn or broken, do not use it. 3. Improper use of tools can cause injury. Smoking Policy To protect our facilities from fire and to protect other personnel from secondary smoke inhalation, smoking is PROHIBITED at Crosstex Energy Services facilities except in designated Smoking Areas. Hot Work Permitting 1. Certain jobs with increased fire hazards require the use of a Hot Work Permit prior to performing the work. 2. A written and authorized Hot Work Permit is required for all jobs involving hot work in designated areas or hot tapping operations. In some cases, a Hot Work Permit may be required for confined space entry, trenching/excavating, vehicle access and other hazardous work. 3. Hot Work Permits must be re-evaluated or a new permit issued if the job is stopped or restarted, for any period of time. Examples would be taking a lunch break or leaving the site. 4. If your job requires any hot work (such as cutting, welding, or grinding), you are responsible for obtaining the proper written permit. No hot work can be performed without the proper written authorization. 5. All hot tapping operations must also be conducted under the hot work permit system. 6. All Hot Work Permits shall be issued by the Crosstex Energy Services person in charge prior to the work being started.
Page 4 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 7. A copy of the permit must remain at the job site during the course of your work. 8. For additional information, contact a Crosstex Energy Services supervisor or the Safety Department. Confined Space Entry Permitting 1. Work involving entry into a Permit-Required Confined Space requires a written Confined Space Entry Permit, approved by the Crosstex Energy Services person in charge. The permit must be completed prior to entering the confined space. 2. The permit outlines precautionary measures that must be taken to ensure the safety of all personnel entering the space. a. This includes isolating potential energy sources and securing the area prior to starting the job. b. The confined space must be evaluated for potential hazards and atmospheric testing performed to verify that acceptable atmospheric conditions exist for entering the space. c. Identification of hazards, results of atmospheric tests, and listing required personal protective equipment for entering the space, are all part of the permitting process and are documented on the written permit. 3. The Entry or Task Supervisor will assign specific job duties to personnel involved in the confined space entry and establish the acceptable conditions for the entry to proceed and the permit to remain active. 4. After all precautionary measures are performed and acceptable conditions for entry met, the Entry Supervisor will approve the permit and allow the entry to proceed. 5. The entry supervisor should also be consulted for other types of work permits (such as Hot Work) that may be required. 6. The Confined Space Entry Permit must be posted at the entrance into the confined space while work is in progress and until the job is completed. 7. Trained rescue personnel must be readily available and prepared to perform rescue operations before personnel are allowed to enter Permit-Required Confined Spaces. 8. For additional information, please see the Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program. Backhoe Operations 1. Backhoe operations are governed under Crosstex Energy Services Excavation Safety Program. 2. Backhoe operatio ns must be closely supervised by a representative trained as a competent person to insure that the trenches are properly shored or sloped and other safety precautions are in place.

Page 5 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Excavations exceeding four (4) feet in depth may be considered permit-required confined spaces and a written work permit approved by the job supervisor may be required before personnel can enter the excavation. 4. Crosstex Energy Services Supervisors in conjunction with designated competent personnel shall evaluate each excavation to determine if it is a permit required confined space. Lockout/Tagout Program 1. The purpose of the Lockout/Tagout Program is to prevent personal injury and property damage due to inadvertent start-up of machinery or release of ANY other form of hazardous energy, including electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical or thermal energy during maintenance or construction work activities. 2. The Lockout/Tagout Program applies to all forms of hazardous energy, not jus t electricity. 3. Valves also control energy and should be properly locked and tagged out prior to commencing work. Bonding, Grounding and Flammable Storage 1. Static electricity can be a potential fire and explosion hazard if equipment is not properly grounded. 2. The most frequent static electricity hazard involves the loading and unloading of transport trucks. 3. Always make sure the grounding cable is connected prior to loading or unloading flammable products. 4. Crosstex Energy Services has a Flammable and Combus tible Liquids Storage and Handling Program which requires the use of approved metal safety cans for the storage of flammable and combustible liquids. 5. Plastic gasoline cans are not acceptable due to their potential for fire due to static electricity. Fire Fighting 1. Only fight incipient stage fires or small fires in the beginning stages, which can easily be extinguished with a hand held extinguisher. 2. Do not fight any fire which you are not confident of your ability to safely extinguish. 3. Do not fight fires if you have not been trained to do so. Hazard Communication Program 1. To insure personnel are informed about potential dangers involving chemicals and other hazardous substances that may be encountered at Crosstex Energy Services facilities, a Hazard Communication Program has been established.

Page 6 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 2. This policy requires that all containers of hazardous substances and industrial waste be labeled. 3. Any chemicals brought/shipped to the work site must be accompanied by a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). 4. If contractors bring any chemical to a Crosstex Energy Services facility, they are required to contact the Crosstex Energy Services person in charge and provide the individual with the MSDS for their review. 5. Copies of all Material Safety Data Sheets are maintained at each facility. b. The purpose of these sheets is to provide information and protective measures for working safely with any chemical or hazardous substance. c. If you are unfamiliar with the potential hazards of any substance, contact the Crosstex Energy Services person in charge. d. Together, you will refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet and determine the proper handling procedures. e. The Hazard Communication Program is located in the Crosstex Energy Services EH&S Manual. f. In addition to the hazard presented by the chemicals, insulation on some vessels and piping may contain asbestos. All of these are clearly marked. No one may remove insulation containing asbestos without the proper training and certification. g. Natural gas is the predominant hazardous material found at our locations. These substances are not only flammable, but in some cases may also pose a health risk in the event of prolonged and repeated overexposure. Avoid contact with these materials by wearing personal protective clothing. Proper procedures such as washing your hands and clothes should prevent any health problems due to contact with these produced fluids.

h. Produced fluids may contain concentrations of benzene and hydrogen sulfide. i. Insure that you use the proper personal protective equipment, including an approved supplied air respirator if airborne levels exceed the PEL or if concentrations are unknown. All individuals need to be properly trained, fit-tested and medically approved before using this equipment. Trained backup personnel equipped with a separate supplied air respirator, (e.g. self contained breathing apparatus or SCBA), must also be present.

Page 7 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) The locations of available supplied air respirators for Crosstex Energy Services personnel and requirement for backup personnel should be discussed with the Crosstex Energy Services person- in-charge. Contractors must supply their own safety equipment.

Incident and Injury Reporting 1. First aid treatment must be obtained for any injury that you receive while working at a Crosstex Energy Services facility. 2. All injuries, no matter how minor, must be reported immediately to your Supervisor. 3. Additionally, you are required to report ALL vehicle accidents and incidents which could have resulted in injury or property damage. 4. Reporting Close-Calls or Near Misses will help us avoid recurrence of similar events. 5. Contact your Supervisor or the Safety Department for assistance in making these reports. 6. If an injury involves chemicals or other foreign substances in your eyes, go immediately to the nearest eye wash station and flush your eyes for 15 minutes. Hold your eyelids open and allow the water to completely rinse your eyes. 7. Chemical contact to your skin or clothing requires adequate flushing at the nearest safety shower to prevent skin irritation or chemical burns. Any clothing contaminated with chemicals must be removed to properly rinse the affected body area. Flushing for at least 15 minutes is recommended. There are various types and styles of showers in use. Insure you know the location of and the proper use of the one in your work area. Process Safety Management 1. We are required by OSHA to comply with the regulation pertaining to Process Safety Management (PSM). a. Crosstex Energy Services must know of all personnel that are working at our PSM facilities. Therefore, we require that all personnel sign- in and notify the operator-onduty of their purpose. b. When work has been completed and you are about to leave the facility, you are required to sign out. 2. In addition, you will need to be notified of the particular hazards at the location where you are working which will be done in a pre-job/tailgate safety meeting prior to the beginning of any work. 3. While working in the plant, all of Crosstex Energy Services Safety Procedures shall be followed.

Page 8 of 9

NEW EMPLOYEE ORIENTATION PROCEDURE (continued) Emergency Action Plans 1. Each area and/or Plant has an Emergency Action Plan (EAP) that defines everyo ne's responsibility in the event of an emergency. 2. Before working at any facility, familiarize yourself with the EAP and your responsibilities in the event of an emergency. 3. Each EAP is integrated with the corporate plan and outside hotline services. Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) 1. Some areas contain naturally occurring radioactive material, better known as NORM. 2. Vessels or tanks that are known to contain NORM are labeled as such. 3. Unless a vessel or tank has been surveyed and is known NOT to contain NORM, it should be considered as NORM-contaminated. 4. Some areas containing high NORM levels are labeled as Restricted Area. 5. Only certified personnel should enter these areas. 6. When working in vessels, tanks, or areas containing NORM, be sure that you use the proper safety-related equipment, including an air purifying respirator (APR) or a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Training 1. Training on the New Employee Orientation Program is required for new employees prior to performing work for Crosstex. 2. Crosstex employees and Contract employees must have the necessary training to perform their job duties safely. As a minimum, ALL personnel working at any Crosstex facility are required to receive basic safety training provided by a training facility in your area or by your employer, and possess documentation on your person verifying this training. (e.g. sticker or decal). Basic safety training includes: a. Hazard Communication b. Personal Protective Equipment c. Fire Protection and Extinguisher Use d. Confined Space and Hot Work Permits e. Hydrogen Sulfide (If applicable) f. CPR/First Aid g. Confined Space Entry h. Lockout/Tagout i. Hearing Conservation j. Process Safety Management (If applicable)

Page 9 of 9

NEAR MISS/POTENTIALLY SERIOUS INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURE NOTE: If the near miss or potentially serious incident occurs in a Process Safety Management covered facility and qualifies as a process safety management incident, the incident investigation must follow specific elements. More information can be found in Process Safety Management Program. 1. Employees are encouraged to submit a report of all Near Miss Incidents to their supervisor as soon as practical following an incident. Crosstex Energy Services Supplemental Incident / Near Miss Investigation Form (See Forms section of this CD) should be used to report near misses. 2. Management is strongly encouraged to review all Near Miss and Potentially Serious Incidents and Investigations. Recommendations to prevent recurrence must be included in the report. 3. Crosstex Energy Services Supplemental Incident / Near Miss Investigation Report should be forwarded to the Safety Department for review and distribution. A generic summary of all Near Miss/PSI Reports and corrective actions will be compiled and distributed to all facilities for review on a quarterly basis by the Safety Department.

Page 1 of 1

MERCURY HANDLING PROCEDURE Mercury Types and Potential Exposure 1. In some operations, the potential exists for isolated exposures to mercury. The type of mercury most likely to be encountered is elemental mercury, also known as quicksilver or instrument grade mercury. 2. Elevated mercury concentrations may be encountered in, but are not limited to, the following equipment and/or operations: a. Work within enclosed areas where manometers using mercury are/have been used. This may involve witnessing meter provings or changing gas charts within meter houses. b. Work using portable mercury manometers, such as when balancing carburetors on gas engines. c. Rebuilding dump valves that contain mercury. d. In laboratories, when conducting some routine types of tests with core samples, within valves of some sample cylinders, broken thermometers, etc. e. In electrical work when encountering broken or damaged mercury switches. f. In facilities where mercury is a by-product of the reservoir and collects in processing equipment. Mercury Handling Procedures 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Mercury should be stored in plastic containers to reduce the likelihood of breakage and spillage. All containers of mercury should be kept tightly closed except when in use. Mercury should be handled in closed systems whenever possible. Work with mercury shall be conducted in an impervious tray with raised edges sufficient to contain any spills. Local exhaust ventilation or a ventilated hood must be provided where substantial quantities of mercury are handled. Heating mercury increases its vaporization significantly; therefore, heating must be in systems which will not release vapors to a confined space. Systems confining mercury under heat and/or pressure must be of adequate design to assure against leaks or rupture. Bench tops, table tops, and floor surfaces in rooms where mercury is used should afford good resistance to penetration and absorption. Bench and floor surfaces should curve up at the walls to eliminate as many cracks as possible.

10. A floor drain with a trap in the lowest area is desirable in any room in which mercury is used. Any spilled mercury can then be flushed to the drain and collected in the trap.

Page 1 of 5

MERCURY HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) 11. All mercury spills must be cleaned up immediately by trained personnel. a. A mercury spill cleanup kit containing specifically treated sponges and/or aspirator device is very effective in controlling toxic vapors. b. Contact your Safety Compliance Specialist for assistance. Routes of Exposure and Exposure Limits 1. Typical routes of mercury exposure are by ingestion, skin absorption, or inhalation. The most common and hazardous exposure usually occurs from breathing mercury vapors. 2. The allowable exposure concentration for mercury vapor is 0.05 milligrams of mercury per cubic meter of air (mg/m3 ) as averaged over an eight (8) hour workday. a. This is the same as 0.006 parts per million (ppm). b. These levels are not to be exceeded for any period of time without wearing respiratory protective equipment. 3. Mercury vapor levels should be measured with a Jerome Model 411 Mercury Vapor Analyzer or equivalent. 4. Mercury vapor levels shall be determined for any job that has the potential for employee exposures. Exposure monitoring shall be coordinated through the Safety Compliance Specialist. Personal Protective Equipment 1. Full face piece supplied-air or self- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) operated in the positive pressure mode shall be used whenever mercury vapor concentrations in the breathing zone exceed 0.05mg/m3 . If an area can be ventilated so the mercury vapor concentration is below 0.05mg/m3 , then respiratory protective equipment is not necessary. 2. As a safe work practice, mercury shall be handled only in well ventilated areas. 3. If the potential exists for skin contact with liquid mercury, employees shall use impervious clothing, gloves, face shields (eight-inch minimum) and any other equipment necessary to prevent skin contact. Jewelry contaminated with mercury can form an amalgam resulting in damage to the item. 4. Clothing contaminated with liquid mercury shall be removed and placed in closed containers prior to leaving work. Consult the Environmental Specialist for proper containment and disposal. 5. Clothing contaminated with mercury shall not be re-worn until the mercury is properly removed. 6. Employees sha ll avoid entering areas known or suspected of having high, above 0.05mg/m3 , mercury vapor concentrations without respiratory protection. This may be the case in gas metering houses where poor mercury handling practices have occurred.

Page 2 of 5

MERCURY HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) 7. The mercury vapor levels shall be measured if there is any doubt as to concentrations in these areas. Personal Hygiene Practices When Handling Mercury 1. Employees subject to skin contact with liquid mercury shall promptly wash, with soap and water, all areas of the body which may have contacted mercury. 2. Eating, tobacco use, or any other ingestion type activities shall not be permitted in areas where mercury is handled, processed, or stored. 3. Employees who handle mercury shall thoroughly wash their hands with soap and water before eating, smoking, or using toilet facilities. 4. Refer to the MSDS for mercury for additional details. Signs and Symptoms of Mercury Intoxication 1. Intoxication may occur in workers excessively exposed to mercury or its compounds. 2. Exposure may be due to mercury vapor, mist, dust, or fumes, by inhalation, ingestion, or through skin contact. 3. Two general types of mercury intoxication exist: chronic and acute. a. Chronic mercury intoxication is caused by exposure to a low concentration of mercury over an extended period of time. b. Acute mercury intoxication is due to a greater exposure and is unrelated to time factors. 4. Definite symptoms of chronic mercurialism may not appear until after six months of exposure, or longer. The symptoms are primarily of the nervous and digestive systems. 5. The symptoms of overexposure to mercury may include such personality manifestations as irritability, excitability, or excessive timidness. Other symptoms include: a. Headaches b. Drowsiness c. Insomnia d. Weakness e. Sore mouth f. Excessive salivation g. Perspiration h. Rashes with severe exposure 6. In mercury intoxication, a common symptom is a tremor which is aggravated by emotion or excitement. Also included in the literature as symptoms of mercury intoxication are: a. Loss of appetite

Page 3 of 5

MERCURY HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) b. Weakness c. Digestive disorders d. Kidney damage e. Bleeding gums Spill Control Measures 1. Clean up as much as possible with a water aspirator or dust pan and brush, or mercury vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter. 2. Wash the fine particles with water into a drain with a trap, if possible, or to an area where the material can be collected. 3. If there is any possibility of mercury remaining from the spill, use a mercury spill cleanup kit and/or special mercury vacuum. 4. After any spill and cleanup activity, the area should be checked for contamination with detector tubes or vapor testing equipment. If contamination remains above allowable concentrations, then the cleaning process must be repeated. Medical Surveillance 1. Medical surveillance shall be provided for all employees who are or will be exposed to airborne concentrations of mercury vapor or the dust of its organic compounds above the permissible exposure limit. 2. The program shall provide each employee with an opportunity for biological monitoring and medical examination performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician and provided during the employees normal working hours without cost to the employee. Disposal Review the Crosstex Energy Services Waste Management Plan and/or contact your Environmental Compliance Specialist to determine proper disposal methods. Training A training program for all new employees prior to work assignment and for all affected employees should be provided at least annually. Training should include employees who work at locations where mercury metal, its vapors, fumes, mists, or solutions, or inorganic mercury compound dusts, mists, solutions or vapors are routinely produced, reacted, used, stored, or handled in the work environment, and where the possibility exists for exceeding the permissible exposure limit. The elements of the mercury training program should include: 1. Signs and symptoms of overexposure to mercury. 2. Procedures for notifying supervisor of possible overexposure.

Page 4 of 5

MERCURY HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Operations within Crosstex which could result in exposure to mercury above the permissible exposure limit. 4. Safe work practices for the handling, use, release, storage, or disposal of mercury or its compounds in norma l operations. 5. Proper housekeeping practices, decontamination procedures in the event of a mercury compound spill and fire emergency procedures. 6. Emphasis on the potential for ingesting mercury by hand-to-mouth contact when good personal hygiene is not practiced. 7. Control measures necessary to protect employees from exposures in excess of the permissible exposure limit. The wearing and turning- in of protective clothing should be stressed. 8. Purpose, proper use and limitations of respirators. 9. Description of and purposes for the medical surveillance program. 10. Written procedures and hazard information availability. Definitions HEPA High efficiency particulate air filter. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.252(c)(10) Welding, Cutting, Brazing Mercury Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1000 Air Contaminants National Institute for Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH) Occupational Health Guide (OHG) for Inorganic Mercury.

Page 5 of 5

MACHINE GUARDING PROCEDURE General Considerations 1. One or more methods of machine guarding shall be provided to protect the operator and other employees in the machine area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are. a. Point of operation guards b. Barrier guards c. Two- hand tripping devices d. Electronic safety devices 2. All guards shall be affixed to the machine where possible and secured elsewhere if for any reason attachment to the machine is not possible. 3. The guard shall be such that it does not offer an accident hazard in itself. 4. All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts, and moving parts shall be guarded. Point of Operation 1. 2. The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an employee to injury shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in conformity with any appropriate standards or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his or her body in the danger zone during the operating cycle. Special hand tools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools, however, shall not be in lieu of other guarding required, but can only be used to supplement protection provided.

3.

Abrasive Mounted Wheel Machinery NOTE: A sign shall be posted near all fixed abrasive wheel machinery noting that goggles/face shields are required. 1. Mounting a. All abrasive wheels shall be checked upon installation to assure that the machine or spindle RPM speed is not greater than the safe RPM recommended for that particular wheel being installed. b. Wheels shall fit freely on the spindle. c. Spindle bus hing, if used, must be narrower than the wheel.

Page 1 of 3

MACHINE GUARDING PROCEDURE (continued) d. Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded (ring test) by the user to assure the wheels integrity. If they sound cracked (dead), they shall not be used. e. Fixed machines shall be securely anchored to prevent movement or tipping. 2. Guards a. Guards must be in place for each abrasive wheel and brush. b. The safety guard for fixed grinders shall cover the spindle end, nut, and flange projections and shall be mounted to maintain proper alignment with the wheel and limit the wheel exposure to 90 degrees. c. Visors or other accessory equipment shall not be included as a part of the guard when measuring the guard opening, unless such equipment has strength equal to that of the guard. d. Wheel exposure shall not begin more than 65 degrees above the horizontal plane of the spindle. e. All bench pedestal grinders must have an adjustable tongue guard with the guard being set to clear the abrasive wheel by not more than inch. 3. Workrests a. Work rests shall be used to support the work. b. They shall be of rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. c. Work rests shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of ? inch to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest, which may cause wheel breakage. d. The work rest shall be securely clamped after each adjustment. The adjustment shall not be made with the wheel in motion. 4. Personal Protective Equipment. Appropriate eye and face protection (goggles/face shield) shall be worn while using all permanent abrasive wheel machines as well as portable grinders. Definitions 1. Mounted wheels - Mounted wheels, usually 2- inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain or threaded steel mandrels. 2. Point of Operation - The area on a machine where work is actually performed upon the material being processed.

Page 2 of 3

MACHINE GUARDING PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Portable grinding - A grinding operation where the grinding machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location to another. 4. Ring Test Tapping the wheel gently with a light nonmetallic implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a wooden mallet for heavier wheels. 5. Safety guard - A safety guard is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart O Machinery and Machine Guarding Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910, Subpart P Hand and Portable Powered Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B7.1-2000 Use, Care, & Protection of Abrasive Wheels

Page 3 of 3

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE Lockout Procedure 1. ALL energy isolating devices, which are capable of being locked out, will be locked out using a key-type lock. Tags will NOT be used in lieu of a lock ANYWHERE that a lock could be used. 2. Whenever a major replacement, repair, renovation or modification of machines or equipment is performed and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, the energy isolating devices for the equipment or machines shall be designed to accept a lockout device. 3. Only authorized employees shall perform lockouts. 4. The Person-In-Charge of a facility shall determine the employees, who by virtue of their training or experience are authorized employees. The PIC shall determine which equipment/systems each authorized employee is qualified to isolate and lockout and designate a Task Supervisor for each project. 5. All locks used for lockout purposes (ie; equipment locks, personal locks and job locks) must be standardized within a facility in at least one of the following criteria: color, shape or size. All personal locks must have a unique key, which remains in the possession of the individual at all times. 6. All locks used for lockout purposes (ie; equipment locks, personal locks and job locks) must be singularly identified (i.e., have a serial number, name, etc., to distinguish it from all other locks), and MUST NOT be used for any other purpose. 7. All locks must be accompanied by a tag identifying the employee who applied it, the date the lock was applied, and the purpose for the lockout. Tags shall be standardized by print and format and clearly identified as part of the lockout/tagout program. 8. The key to each lock may be unique to that lock or may be common to a group of locks (keyed alike locks). In either case, ALL key(s) to each unique lock or ALL common (master) keys to a group of keyed alike locks MUST be under the sole control of the authorized employee who applied the lock or in a lockbox, while the lock is in place. (See Application of Group Lockout/Tagout Procedure.) 9. All personnel in the workgroup will apply a personal lock and tag to each lockout device (i.e., multi- lock hasp) of the equipment being locked out or to the lockbox being utilized. Tagout Procedure 1. A tagout system may be used ONLY when an energy- isolating device is not capable of being locked out. a. Tags will NOT be used in lieu of a lock ANYWHERE that a lock can be used. b. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices and do not provide the physical restraint on devices that can be provided by a lock.

Page 1 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Additional safety measures should be considered when a tag is used without a lock. Examples include: Removal of an isolating circuit element. Blocking of a controlling switch. Opening of an extra disconnecting device. Removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.

3. The tag must be placed directly on the energy- isolating device. If this is not possible, the tag must be located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device. 4. Only authorized employees shall perform tagouts. 5. The Person-In-Charge of a facility shall determine the employees who, by virtue of their training or experience, are authorized employees. The Person-In-Charge shall determine which equipment/systems each authorized employee is qualified to isolate and tagout. 6. All tags used for tagout purposes must be standardized within each facility in at least one of the following criteria: a. Color b. Shape c. Size 7. All tags used for tagout purposes must be standardized in print and format. 8. All tags used for tagout purposes must be singularly identified and MUST NOT be used for any other purposes. 9. All tags must be capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected. Tagout devices must be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message on the tag to become illegible. 10. Tagout devices, including their means of attachment must be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device attachment means must be of a nonreusable type, attachable by hand, self- locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds. 11. Tagout devices must warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and must include a clearly written legend such as the following: Do Not Start; Do Not Open; Do Not Close; Do Not Energize; Do Not Operate, etc.

Page 2 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) Energy Control Procedure 1. Preparation for Shutdown: Prior to turning off any equipment for the purpose of lockout/tagout, the Task Supervisor and appropriate maintenance personnel should: a. Determine the types and amounts of energy powering the equipment. More than one energy source (electrical, mechanical, etc.) may be involved. b. Locate and identify all isolating devices and the steps needed to control them. 2. Equipment Shutdown: a. Notify all affected employees in the immediate area, by personal contact, radio, or phone. b. Use the normal shutdown procedures to stop the machine or equipment. c. Locate all devices that control the flow of energy to the equipment and use them to isolate the equipment from its energy sources. This could mean closing a valve, installing a blind, shutting off the main power at the panel circuit breaker, etc. WARNING: Avoid shutting off the panel circuit breaker while a piece of equipment is under load; this could cause an electrical arc or an explosion. 3. Application of Individual Lockout/Tagout Devices: a. A Task Supervisor will be designated and shall be responsible for ensuring all affected personnel adhere to this procedure. b. The Task Supervisor or designee will attach a multiple lockout hasp, a lock and tag to each energy-isolating device. Each additional employee who is required to work on the piece of equipment will also attach a personal lock and tag with the date the tag was applied and the purpose of the lockout/tagout. c. Some energy sources may not have built-in lockout devices (e.g., some types of valves). Chain can be used to hold the valves in the correct position and the lock can be applied to the chain. There are also special types of devices available that fit over some types of valves and other energy isolating devices that can be locked out. A tag must be filled out and attached to each lock. d. If after careful evaluation a lock cannot be applied, then ALL members of the work party must attach a tag to the energy isolating device at the same point that a lock would be applied, or as close to it as possible or implement group lockout procedures (see Application of Group Lockout/Tagout Procedure). Extra safety precautions are required if only a tag will be used (see Tagout Procedure).

Page 3 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) e. If bolted blank flanges (i.e., blind flanges) or slip blinds (i.e., skillet blinds) are used for energy isolation, the Task Supervisor and ALL members of the work party must attach a tag to the flange, the same as for other energy-isolating devices or implement group lockout procedures (see Application of Group Lockout/Tagout Procedure). Blind flanges and skillet blinds must be designed to withstand the maximum pressure of the pipe, line or duct with no leakage beyond the plate when isolating other than atmospheric pressure (See Attachment A.7.1 API Standard 590 Steel Line Blanks). f. Employees involved in the servicing and/or maintenance of equipment or machinery should attach personal locks and tags prior to beginning work and remove them when their portion of the work is complete or whenever they leave the jobsite. If the job is incomplete, arrangements will be made to keep the equipment secured to prevent unauthorized startup. g. Proceed to Section 5 Control of Stored Energy. 4. Application of Group Lockout/Tagout Procedure: a. A Task Supervisor will be designated and shall be responsible for ensuring all affected personnel adhere to this procedure. b. The Task Supervisor may make the determination that the implementation of a group lock box or comparable mechanism will provide a level of protection equivalent to that of the individual lockout/tagout device procedure. c. The following steps are an example of a group lockout procedure:

Equipment is locked out by the Task Supervisor or designee with equipment locks and tags. The key to each lock may be unique to that lock or may be common to a group of locks. ALL keys to ALL of the equipment locks are placed inside a lockbox. Multi- lock hasp is attached to the lockbox. Task Supervisor attaches a Job Lock if applicable, and a personal lock and tag to the hasp. All other authorized employees attach their personal lock and tag to the hasp on the lockbox and maintain sole possession of their key. Additional hasps are added as necessary to accommodate all personal locks. An additional hasp can be added by attaching to the last remaining hole of the preceding hasp or attaching it to the lockbox. NOTE: For energy- isolation devices that are not secured with a lock (i.e., blind flanges, spectacle or slip blinds etc.), either a tear-off two part tag with matching numbers or a equipment lock and tag will be attached to the isolation device. The key to the lock or the tear-off portion of the tag will be placed in the lockbox.

Page 4 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Control of Stored Energy a. Verify that all parts in the system have stopped moving. b. Check the system for any potentially hazardous energy, which may still be stored. c. Bleed off any trapped pressure that could release a hazardous material or operate a moving part. d. A qualified person shall install ground wires, where necessary, to discharge electrically stored capacitors and prevent static electricity build-up. e. Release the tension on all springs and other sources of potential energy using approved methods. If it is not possible to release the energy, then block and secure the source. f. Block or support any elevated equipment or moving parts that could fall because of gravity (i.e., counter-weights). g. Block and secure any parts in a hydraulic or pneumatic system, which could move from a loss of pressure. Drain the lines and leave vent valves open. h. Drain piping on process systems and close valves to prevent the flow of hazardous materials. i. When piping systems and process vessels must be blocked where there are no valves, the lines may be blanked and blinded at the pipe flanges. Before separating the pipe flanges to insert a blind, ensure that the line or vessel to be worked on is completely depressurized and the liquid level inside the vessel is below the level of the piping. Record installation and removal of flanges on the Lockout/Tagout Isolation Log See Forms section of this CD.

j. If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level (i.e., leaking valves, etc.), verification of isolation must be continued until the servicing or maintenance is complete, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists. 6. Verification of Equipment Isolation a. Ensure that the equipment or machine is completely isolated. Review all previous steps to make sure they are complete. It is recommended the Lockout/Tagout Isolation Log form (See Forms section of this CD) be utilized. b. Ensure that all personnel are clear of equipment or machine. c. Push all start buttons and other operating controls to ensure that the equipment is isolated and will not start. d. Return all operating controls and switches to the off position and secure locks/tags. e. Open additional bleed valves to check for trapped pressure.

Page 5 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 7. Isolation Log Form a. A Lockout/Tagout Isolation Log (See Forms section of this CD) form shall be kept for work involving non-routine isolations, work involving more than one person using multiple locks, the use of a lockbox or work involving multiple shifts. This log form will assist in keeping track of equipment that is locked out, its location and the authorized employee responsible for the isolation. b. Isolation log form should be kept at the job site and always up-to-date. If the work activity requires the use of a Hot Work or Confined Space Permit, then the log form shall be kept with the permit. 8. Removal of Lockout/Tagout a. After the servicing and/or maintenance on the machine or equipment has been completed, an inspection of the work area must be performed to ensure that all tools and nonessential items have been removed and that all machinery or equipment components are operationally intact. b. The work area shall be checked to ensure that all affected employees in the area have been notified and cleared to a safe distance from the equip ment before the locks and/or tags are removed. c. Each lockout/tagout device must be removed from each energy- isolating device by the employee who applied the device. The exception would be during emergency situations. (See Emergency Lockout/Tagout Removal.) d. For group lockout/tagout, each energy isolation device not secured by a lock (i.e., blind flanges, spectacle or slip blinds etc.) will ONLY be removed when the work is complete and the appropriate key or numbered tear-off portion of the tag is removed from the lockbox and appropriately matched to lock or two part tag on the isolation device. (See Note under Application of Group Lockout/Tagout Procedure.) e. The Task Supervisors personal lock and/or tag (and the Job Lock if applicable) will be the last to be removed. f. Review the isolation log to ensure that locks and tags have been removed and the equipment is in the correct position prior to startup. Special Circumstances 1. Shift Change Requirements: a. The Person-In-Charge or Task Supervisor is responsible for briefing the Person-InCharge or Task Supervisor on the next shift. The arriving Task Supervisor is responsible for briefing all of the other arriving personnel on the status of the job. b. Both Task Supervisors, when possible, should tour the job site together and the arriving Task Supervisor should place a personal lock and/or tag on each energy- isolating device or lockbox prior to the removal of the departing Task Supervisors lock(s).

Page 6 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) c. If group lockout/tagout (lockbox) is utilized, then the departing Task Supervisor will provide the arriving Task Supervisor with the key to the Job Lock unless each Task Supervisor possesses a key to the Job Lock. d. Other authorized employees shall replace/remove their locks and/or tags as they arrive or depart. Arriving employees should be briefed by the arriving Task Supervisor concerning the status and details of the work. 2. Testing or Positioning of Machines: In situations where the lockout/tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating device to energize the machine or equipment for testing or repositioning, the following sequence of actions shall be followed: a. Clear the machine or equipment area of tools and materials and notify the Task Supervisor of intent to remove LO/TO devices. b. Clear all personnel from the machine or equipment areas. c. Have authorized employees remove personal locks and tags. d. Remove the lockout and/or tagout devices. e. Energize and proceed with testing or repositioning. f. If job is complete, refer to Removal of Lockout/Tagout. g. If job is not complete, de-energize all systems and re-apply energy control measures prior to continuing with the servicing and/or maintenance of the equipment. 3. Emergency Lock/Tag Removal: Lockout and/or tagout devices must be removed from the energy- isolating device by the individual who applied them except under emergency conditions. When the authorized person who applied the device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction of the Person-In-Charge or designee provided that the following provisions are met: a. Verification that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility and will not be able to return to remove the lock/tag prior to the equipment being returned to service. b. A reasonable effort must be made to contact the authorized employee to inform the employee that the lockout and/or tagout device needs to be removed before the employee returns to work at the facility. c. The Person-In-Charge will inspect the area and determine if any conditions exist which would not allow removal of the lockout and/or tagout device before it is removed.

Page 7 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Isolation for Confined Space Entry a. Isolation requirements for entry into a confined space are detailed in Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program. b. In general, all piping and tubing leading into or out of the space must be properly isolated from the space by at least one or a combination of the following: physically disconnecting, installation of blinds, and/or have double block and bleeds. Blinding or disconnection of each line is the safest and preferred method. c. If the double-block and bleed is used, the block valves must be locked and/or tagged closed and the bleed valves must be locked and/or tagged open, with the provision made for indication that depressurization between the block valves has been achieved. The bleed valve shall remain open and vented to a safe location. NOTE: A single closed valve is not an acceptable isolation device for potentially hazardous systems in the vicinity of or for confined space entry, except when the facility is shut-in and all pressures have been bled to atmospheric pressure. For specific cases, consult with the Person-In-Charge. 5. Isolation for Hot Work a. Hot work procedures are detailed in Crosstex Energy Services Hot Work Program. b. In general, where equipment or production system isolation is necessary to conduct hot work, the isolation will cons ist of one or a combination of the following: physical disconnect, installation of blinds and/or double block and bleed valves. c. If the double-block and bleed is used, the block valves must be locked and/or tagged closed and the bleed valves must be locked and/or tagged open, with the provision made for indication that depressurization between the block valves has been achieved. The bleed valve shall remain open and vented to a safe location. NOTE: A single closed valve is not an acceptable isolation device for potentially hazardous systems in the vicinity of or for confined space entry, except when the facility is shut-in and all pressures have been bled to atmospheric pressure. For specific cases, consult with the Person-In-Charge. 6. Isolation for Cold Work a. The degree of isolation for cold work often may be a single isolation device (i.e., valves, switches, etc.). However, the integrity of the isolation device must be confirmed before it can be used for isolation. b. Before cold work is performed downstream of a single isolation device, consideration should be given to surrounding operations and the environment (e.g.,vibration, temperature, hazardous operations, work duration, etc.) and the effects they may have on the single isolation device. These conditions may require a greater degree of isolation and additional precautions should be taken.

Page 8 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 7. Electrical Isolations a. The extent of electrical isolation required to ensure that the equipment is safe to work on, will depend on the circumstances of each job. b. Electrical switches and controls may be isolated by an authorized employee to allow work on mechanical equipment or machinery. Work on electrical systems will be conducted by a qualified person in accordance with Crosstex Energy Services Electrical Safety Program. c. Following isolation, all electrical circuits must be checked to determine that they have been properly de-energized by using appropriate testing equipment and/or operating pushbuttons, switches, etc. (See section on Verification of Equipment Isolation.) d. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Requirements for Employee Workplaces will take precedence when electrical work is being performed. 8. Isolation of Fire Protection Systems a. The Person-In-Charge shall be notified prior to the isolation of any fire protection detection system or firewater piping. b. Smoke and fire detection devices should be disabled and tagged in the immediate area where hot work will be performed if it is probable that the work will activate the devices. All personnel should be made aware of how to manually operate the fire suppression system if it becomes necessary to activate it while the detectors are out of service. The detection devices should be returned to service immediately upon completion of the hot work. c. If hot work must be performed in an area where a fire suppression system is out of service (fire water, halon system, etc.), extra precautions must be taken. Such precautions include extra fire extinguishers and/or additional standby personnel. Precautions will vary depending on the size and duration of the job. Performing hot work while fire suppression systems are out of service should be avoided if at all possible. 9. Long-Term Isolation a. Equipment that has been isolated or secured for purposes other than undergoing maintenance or repair should be locked out with an Operations Lock. Operations Locks can be any size, shape or color, but must be different from lockout/tagout locks and NOT used for lockout/tagout purposes. b. Operations locks should be accompanied by a tag that clearly indicates the status of the equipment and the danger of removing the device (i.e., Do Not Open, Downstream Equipment Not In Use). Tags should be signed and dated and should be reviewed periodically to ensure they are still legible and in good condition.

Page 9 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) c. Operations locks should not be removed without obtaining permission from the PersonIn-Charge. Lockout/tagout devices and procedures shall be used if maintenance activities are performed on the equipment or machinery. Pre-Job Planning 1. Pre-job planning is essential for ensuring the safe performance of all work activities. The attachments to this Program include some tools to assist in pre-job planning. 2. A Lockout/Tagout Isolation Verification Form is included in the Forms section on this CD. This form is a tool, which can be utilized for non-routine work, or work with increased risk to ensure the adequacy of the lockout/tagout procedures being implemented. The procedure allows for review and approval of the energy isolation procedures by an authorized employee and/or Task Supervisor and Person-In-Charge. 3. A Lockout/Tagout Master Isolation List and instructions forms are inc luded in the Forms section on this CD. The form serves as a log of isolation points and identifies the types of energy sources to be isolated and the means of isolation. This log form may be utilized as a tool for pre-job planning and as an isolation log during the performance of the work activity. Instructions for the log are included in the attachment Engineering Controls. Inspections Periodic/Annual Inspections 1. At least annually, the Person-In-Charge will designate an authorized employee to conduct an inspection of each facility to ensure that the requirements of this procedure are being followed. (See Lockout/Tagout Periodic/Annual Inspection Form in the Forms section of this CD). 2. The periodic inspection must be conducted by a trained and knowledgeable authorized employee other than the one(s) utilizing the energy control procedure being inspected. Periodic inspection frequency shall be determined by the Safety Department. 3. The periodic inspection shall be designed to identify and correct any deviations or inadequacies observed. 4. The inspection shall include a review between the authorized employee and each authorized and affected employee observed during the inspection of each employees responsibilities under the Lockout/Tagout Procedure. 5. The authorized employee shall document the inspection. This documentation must identify the machine(s) or equipment on which the Lockout/Tagout Procedure was utilized, the date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the person performing the inspection. The report shall be provided to the Supervisor or Person-In-Charge.

Page 10 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 6. The Supervisor or Person-In-Charge will review the inspections reports and ensure corrective action is taken to address any deficiencies noted. Annual inspection reports will be forwarded to the Safety Department for review and record keeping. 7. The Safety Department will review all documentation of periodic inspections and file the inspection reports. Training 1. Initial and annual training must be provided for all employees who may work in areas where energy control procedures may be utilized. 2. Retraining shall be provided for all employees whenever there is a change in job assignments that affect their duties, a change in machines or processes that present a new hazard, or a change in the energy control procedures. 3. Retraining shall be provided whenever an inspection reveals that there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures. 4. The Safety Department shall maintain records that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up-to-date. The records shall contain each employee's name and the date(s) of training. 5. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that all employees ha ve had the proper training prior to any assignment requiring their participation in lockout/tagout procedures. Definitions 1. Affected Employee - An employee whose job involves the operation or use of a machine or equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout/tagout or whose job requires work in an area where such servicing or maintenance is being performed. 2. Authorized Employee - A person who isolates machines or equipment and implements a lockout/tagout procedure to perform servicing or maintenance. An authorized employee must understand the necessary precautions to be taken and possess the necessary expertise to properly isolate the equipment or system. An authorized employee and an affected employee may be the same person whe n the affected employee's duties also include maintenance or service work on a machine or equipment that must be locked and/or tagged out. 3. Blanking or Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a blind flange, spectacle or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and is designed to withstand the maximum pressure of the pipe, line or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. 4. Double Block and Bleed - The closure of a line, duct or pipe by closing and locking and/or tagging two in- line valves and by opening and locking and/or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves.

Page 11 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Energy Isolation Device - A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or release of energy, including but not limited to the following: a manually-operated electrical circuit breaker, a disconnect switch, a slide gate, a blind, a line valve, a block, and any similar device used to block or isolate energy. The term does not include a pushbutton, selector switch or other control circuit type devices. 6. Energy Source - Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal or other energy. Common types of energy include: a. Mechanical Energy can be linear translation or rotation or it can produce work, which in turn, produces changes in temperature and pressure. This type of energy can be controlled by switching it on or off. b. Potential Energy can be due to pressure (above or below atmospheric) as in hydraulic, pneumatic or vacuum systems, or it can be due to springs or gravity. Potential energy can be dissipated, controlled or blocked; it cannot be turned on or off. c. Electrical Energy refers to generated electrical power or static electricity. In the case of generated electricity, the electrical power can be turned off or the path from the source to the destination can be interrupted and capacitor charges dissipated. Static electricity can only be dissipated or controlled. d. Thermal Energy is manifested by high or low temperature. This type of energy is the result of mechanical work, radiation, chemical reaction or electrical resistance. It is controlled by isolating the source of the temperature differential. 7. Equipment Lock A lock used to secure an individual energy isolation or lockout device. 8. Job Lock A lock used to ensure the continuity of energy isolation during multi-shift operation. A job- lock is typically placed on a lockbox. The key to the job- lock is controlled by the Task Supervisor from each shift. A job- lock is an additional (optional) lock and is not a substitute for applying personal locks. The job- lock is not a substitute for the Task Supervisors personal lock. 9. Keyed Alike Locks A group of locks consisting of two or more locks that are keyed alike and have a common key (master key). Keyed alike locks may be equipment locks or personal locks. In either case, ONLY one key is available for keyed alike locks and must be under the exclusive control of the individual or located inside a lockbox during group lockout/tagout procedures. 10. Line Breaking - Act of separating piping, lines or ducts that would allow the contents or residual contents of the pipe, line or duct to be exposed to the atmosphere. 11. Lockbox A device used to secure the keys to the locks on isolation devices during a group lockout to which each authorized employee affixes his/her personal lock. 12. Lockout Device - A key lock or hasp/key lock combination to hold an energy- isolating device in the safe position and prevent the energizing of a machine or equipment.

Page 12 of 13

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY PROCEDURE (continued) 13. Operations Lock A lock used in a facility for security or operational control and is not to be used as an energy isolation lock for lockout/tagout purposes. Operations locks can be any size, shape or color and MUST be different than locks used for lockout/tagout purposes. 14. Personal Lock An employees uniquely keyed lock placed on a lockbox or isolation device(s) by the individual for personal protection from hazardous energy. 15. Person-In-Charge (PIC) The lead Crosstex Energy Services Representative on-site who has the overall responsibility for a facility, project, work crew or work area. 16. Qualified Person A person who, by training and/or experience, is knowledgeable with the construction and operation of the equipment and hazards involved, and is knowledgeable with the requirements of this standard. 17. Tagout Device - A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, (e.g., nylon cable tie) which can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with the established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed. Tagout devices shall be designed to withstand the environment to which they are exposed, and the attachment means (e.g., nylon cable tie) shall be self- locking, nonreleasable with a minimum unlocking strength no less than 50 pounds to prevent removal without the use of excessive force. (See Standardized Lockout /Tagout Tag in Exhibits). 18. Task Supervisor - A person designated by the Supervisor or Person-In-Charge (PIC) to lead or coordinate the work to be perfo rmed. For the purpose of this standard, the Task Supervisor must be an authorized employee. References Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1910.147. The Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) American Petroleum Institute (API) API Standard 590 Steel Line Blanks National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA Vol. # 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces

Page 13 of 13

LIGHTING GAS FIRED VESSELS PROCEDURE Safety Procedures for Lighting Gas Fired Vessels Follow the original or upgraded equipment manufacturers recommended procedures and instructions for lighting equipment, or use an approved written procedure. References American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 12N Operations, Maintenance and Testing of Firebox Flame Arrestors National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

Page 1 of 1

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE General 1. Crosstex Energy Services will use 0.06% lead by dry weight in any paint as the cut-off point between lead-contaminated and lead- free paint. All paint to be removed, disturbed, or applied must be tested or otherwise documented to contain less than 0.06% lead before it is considered lead free. 2. When using a contractor for lead abatement, the requirements of the lead standard apply. Crosstex Energy Services must communicate the possible existence of a lead hazard and use only contractors that are qualified to perform lead abatement. Initial Monitoring 1. Employees shall be monitored to determine if any employee exposures exist. Monitoring may be limited to a representative sample of exposed employees who are believed to be exposed to the greatest airborne concentrations of lead in the workplace. 2. If a determination is made showing the possibility of any employee exposure at or above the action level, individual exposure monitoring must then be conducted for each employee who is exposed to lead. 3. If a determination is made that no employee is exposed to airborne concentrations of lead at or above the action level, a written record of such determination shall be made. The record shall include any information, observations, or calc ulations made to make this determination along with the date of the determination, location within the worksite, and the name and social security number of each employee monitored. 4. If initial determination or subsequent monitoring reveals employee exposures to be at or above the action level, but below the permissible exposure limit, monitoring shall be repeated at least every 6 months until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level. 5. If initial monitoring reveals that employee exposures are above the permissible exposure limit, monitoring shall be repeated quarterly and continued until at least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the PEL but at or above the action level at which time monitoring can then be accomplished at least every 6 months. Additional Monitoring 1. Whenever there has been a production, process, control or personnel change which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, or whenever Crosstex Energy Services has any other reason to suspect a change which may result in new or additional exposures to lead, additional monitoring shall be conducted. 2. Where lead levels in paint or other materials exceed 0.06% by dry weight and exposure monitoring has not shown employee exposure levels to be below the action level, it must be assumed the job/project is subject to the provisions of the applicable lead standard.

Page 1 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE (continued) Mechanical Ventilation 1. When ventilation is used to control exposure, measurements which demonstrate the effectiveness of the system in controlling exposure, such as capture velocity, duct velocity, or static pressure shall be made at least every 3 months. 2. Measurements of the systems effectiveness in controlling exposure shall be made within 5 days of any change in production, process, or control which might result in a change in employee exposure to lead. 3. If air from exhaust ventilation is re-circulated into the workplace: a. The system must have a high efficiency filter with reliable back-up filter. b. Controls must be installed, operating, and maintained to monitor the concentration of lead in the return air and to bypass the recirculation system automatically if it fails. Administrative Controls If administrative controls are used as a means of reducing employees TWA exposure to lead, a job rotation schedule shall be established and implemented which includes: 1. Name or identification number of each affected employee. 2. Duration and exposure levels at each job or work station where each affected employee is located. 3. Any other information which may be useful in assessing the reliability of administrative controls to reduce exposure to lead. Respiratory Protection Respirators must be used during: 1. Periods necessary to install or implement engineering or work-practice controls. 2. Work operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limit. 3. Periods when an employee requests a respirator. Respirators must be selected from Table II in the 29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead Standard. A powered air-purifying respirator must be provided instead of the respirator specified in Table II when an employee chooses to use this type of respirator and such a respirator provides adequate protection to the employee. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment Protective work clothing and equipment shall be provided by Crosstex Energy Services and assurances will be made that the employee uses appropriate protective work clothing and equipment such as, but not limited to: 1. Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing.

Page 2 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets. 3. Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment which complies with 29 CFR 1910.133 Eye and Face Protection. 4. Crosstex Energy Services shall provide protective clothing in a clean and dry condition at least weekly, and daily to employees whose exposure levels without regard to a respirator are over 200 ug/m(3) of lead as an 8-hour TWA. 5. Crosstex Energy Services shall provide for the cleaning, laundering, or disposal of protective clothing and equipment used to protect against lead exposure and shall repair or replace required protective clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness. 6. All protective clothing shall be removed at the completion of a work shift only in change rooms provided for that purpose. 7. Contaminated protective clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, shall be placed in a closed container in the change-room which prevents dispersion of lead outside the container. 8. Any person who cleans or launders protective clothing or equipment shall be informed in writing of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to lead. 9. Containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment shall be labeled as follows: CAUTION: CLOTHING CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD-CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS. Housekeeping 1. All surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of lead. 2. Floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates may not be cleaned by the use of compressed air. 3. Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and found not to be effective. 4. When vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums shall be used and emptied in a manner which minimizes the re-entry of lead into the workplace. Hygiene Facilities and Practices 1. In areas where lead exposure above the PEL occurs, food and beverages are not to be present or consumed or used and cosmetics are not to be applied, except in clean change rooms, lunch rooms, and showers. 2. Clean change rooms shall be supplied for employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators.

Page 3 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Change rooms shall be equipped with separate storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment and for street clothes in order to prevent cross-contamination. 4. Showers shall be provided for employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators. 5. Employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL are required to shower at the end of the work shift. 6. Employees shall not leave the workplace with any clothing or equipment that was worn or used during the work shift. 7. Lunchroom facilities with a temperature-controlled, positive pressure, filtered air supply shall be provided for employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators. 8. Employees are required to wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, smoking or applying cosmetics. 9. Employees are not allowed to enter lunchroom facilities with protective work clothing or equipment unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming, down-draft booth, or other cleaning methods. 10. An ample number of lavatories shall be provided for employees who work in areas where their airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL. Medical Surveillance 1. All employees who are or may be exposed above the action level for more than 30 days per year shall be in a medical surveillance program. The program shall include: a. Name, social security number and description of the duties of the employee. b. Copy of the physicians written opinions. c. Results of any airborne exposure monitoring performed for that employee. d. Representative exposure levels supplied to the physician. e. Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead. 2. All medical examinations and procedures shall be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. 3. Crosstex Energy Services shall provide the required medical surveillance, including multiple physician review, without cost to the employees and at a reasonable time and place. 4. Accurate records shall be established and maintained for each employee subject to medical surveillance. The records shall include: a. Name, social security number and description of the duties of the employee. b. A copy of the physicians written opinions.

Page 4 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE (continued) c. Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done for that employee and the representative exposure levels supplies to the physician. d. Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead. Medical Removals Accurate records shall be established and maintained for each employee removed from current exposure to lead. Each record shall include: 1. Name and social security number of the employee. 2. Date on each occasion that the employee was removed from current exposure to lead. 3. Corresponding date on which the employee was returned to former job status. 4. Brief explanation of how each removal is being accomplished. 5. Statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. Biological Monitoring 1. Crosstex Energy Services will make biological monitoring available in the form of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels to each employee included in the medical surveillance program. The biological monitoring shall be offered at the following intervals: a. At least every six (6) months for employees included in the medical surveillance program. b. At least every two (2) months for employees whose last blood sampling and analysis indicated a blood lead level at or above 40 ug/100 g of whole blood. c. At least monthly during the removal period of each employee removed from exposure to lead due to an elevated blood lead level. 2. Employees whose blood lead level exceeds 40 ug/100 g shall be notified within five (5) working days after Crosstex Energy Services is in receipt of biological monitoring results. Medical Examinations and Consultations Medical examinations and consultations will be made available to employees included in the medical surveillance program: 1. At least annually for each employee with a blood lead level at or above 40 ug/100 g at any time during the preceding 12 months. 2. Prior to assignment for each employee being assigned for the first time to an area in which airborne concentrations of lead area at or above the action level.

Page 5 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE (continued) Warning Signs Warning signs shall be posted in each work area where the PEL for lead is exceeded. The signs shall be illuminated and say the following: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING OR EATING Exposure Monitoring 1. Accurate monitoring records shall be kept on all full shift personal sampling. 2. The records shall include: a. Date of monitoring. b. Number of samples taken. c. Duration of monitoring. d. Results of each sample taken. e. Description of the sampling procedure used. f. Description of sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their accuracy. g. Type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any. h. Name, social security number, and job classification of the employees monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent. i. Training Employees who are subject to exposure to lead at or above the action level or for whom the possibility of skin or eye irritation exists, shall be trained prior to the time of initial job assignment and annually thereafter in the following: 1. The OSHA Lead Standard and Appendices. 2. Specific nature of operations which could result in exposure to lead above the action level. 3. Purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of respirators. 4. Purpose and description of the medical surveillance program and medical removal protection program including information concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproductive effects on both males and females). 5. Engineering controls and work practices associated with the employees job assignment. 6. Contents of any compliance plan in effect. Environmental variables that could affect the measurement of employee exposure.

Page 6 of 7

LEAD MANAGEMENT PROCED URE (continued) 7. Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except under the direction of a licensed physician. 8. Access to information and training materials. Definitions 1. Action Level - Employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 ug/m3 ) averaged over an 8-hour period. The action level initiates several requirements of the standard, such as exposure monitoring, medical surveillance, and training and education. 2. Competent Person A person who is capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards in the surroundings or working conditions and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 3. Construction Work - Work for construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating. It includes but is not limited to the following: a. Demolition or salvage of structures where lead or materials containing lead are present. b. Removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead. c. New construction, alteration, repair, or renovation of structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain lead, or materials containing lead. d. Installation of products containing lead. e. Lead contamination/emergency cleanup. f. Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of lead or materials containing lead on the site or location at which construction activities are performed. g. Maintenance operations associated with the construction activities described in this paragraph. 4. Employee Exposure Exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a respirator. 5. Lead - Metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are all other organic lead compounds. 6. Permissible Exposure The Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 ug/m3 ), averaged over an 8- hour workday. References Code of Federal Regula tions, Title 29, Part 1910.1025 Lead Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1926.62 Lead

Page 7 of 7

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE Hydrogen Sulfide Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) In all work areas where employee exposure to H2 S is reasonably foreseeable, appropriate measures shall be taken to evaluate and control exposures. 1. The following permissible exposure limits, as sampled in the breathing zone of the employee, shall apply to this program. a. An 8-hour Permissible Exposure Limit - Time-Weighted Average (PEL-TWA) of 10 ppm (12 hour PEL-TWA of 10 ppm). b. A 15-minute Short-term Exposure Limit (STEL) and acceptable ceiling (C) concentration of 15 ppm. This maximum concentration can occur only 4 times per day and there must be at least one hour between each STEL exposure. 2. In addition to the above limits, an Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) concentration for hydrogen sulfide is observed by Crosstex Energy Services at 300 ppm based upon the original NIOSH determination. Initial Facility Surveys 1. All facilities shall be surveyed initially to determine if H2 S is present, to identify what exposures may exist, and to quantify the exposure potential. Surveys can include area measurements with direct reading instruments, source measurements, or other objective data providing similar information [e.g., laboratory analysis of the production stream(s)] and a review of incident and injury records to determine problem sources of H2 S. Measurements to evaluate the potential for the development of an IDLH atmosphere shall be conducted as a part of the initial survey.

2.

Periodic Facility Surveys 1. Periodic facility surveys shall be made to determine the ongoing effectiveness of exposure controls and revalidate H2 S levels associated with work areas and H2 S sources. Additional surveys shall be made as soon as practical when there has been a change in the process, work practice, or other reason that may result in increased levels of hydrogen sulfide in the facility. 2. Facilities that have operations with H2 S levels lower than 10 ppm shall be reevaluated at least once every 3 years to confirm the H2 S concentration of the product stream. Personal Exposure Monitoring Unless a blanket employee protection standard that requires the use of a respirator at a predetermined level is implemented: 1. Personal monitoring shall be performed to quantify the full-shift and short-term exposure potential for job assignments which may result in exposures to hydrogen sulfide. Representative full shift time-weighted average (TWA) samples, 15- minute STEL samples, and peak concentration monitoring shall be conducted.

Page 1 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 2. When initial personal monitoring results indicate employee exposure at or in excess of the PEL, additional monitoring shall be conducted to confirm the exposure. The monitoring shall cover similar job activities as those performed during the monitoring which resulted in the exceedance(s). 3. Employees whose hydrogen sulfide exposures exceed the PEL shall be monitored annually. 4. Non-routine exposures shall be monitored whenever practical. 5. When monitoring results indicate employee exposure is less than the PEL, no further monitoring is required, unless workplace conditions or job assignments change. 6. Additional monitoring shall be performed whenever there are changes in the method or type of production or process, control equipment, or work practices which may result in new or additional employee exposures to H2 S. 7. Employees shall be notified in writing as soon as practical after obtaining the monitoring results. 8. Monitoring data shall be documented and retained in accordance with the Documentation Section of this Program. Medical Surveillance Covered Employees - All employees who work in H2 S areas and utilize respiratory protection equipment will be covered by the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program and shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of that Program. Engineering Controls Engineering control measures shall be used, whenever feasible, to reduce and maintain employee exposures below the PELs. Examples of engineering controls include, but are not limited to: Remote gauging systems or sealed sight glasses on vessels and storage tanks; Fixed Stationary Alarm Monitors where there are hazardous concentrations of H2 S. (These may also be required for certain operations and structures/enclosures depending on regulatory requirements.) Vapor recovery units, flares or remote vents; Lease automatic custody transfer units (LACT) for transferring product automatically; Fencing of facilities to secure against unauthorized access; Air blowers for ventilating equipment; Chemicals used in processes to suppress H2 S generation or enhance removal; Local exhaust hoods for laboratory or similar installations.

Page 2 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Work Practices API Recommended Practices. The American Petroleum Institute (API) has developed specific H2 S work practice documents. The use of these guidelines is recommended where applicable and when not in conflict with established company guidelines. 1. Examples of general work practices include, but are not limited to: a. Use of wind direction indicators to determine safe areas for refuge. b. Signage, labels, and other warnings as appropriate to communicate the presence of hydrogen sulfide. c. Controlling access to hazardous areas and allowing entry only to authorized, trained personnel. These general work practices may need to be supplemented with special work practices and respiratory protection. 2. Where appropriate or when required by regulation, the fencing of facilities and the use of caution signs and labels shall be used to alert employees and the general public to operations where there is a potential exposure to H2 S. Wording for caution signs shall be:

CAUTION
Hazardous Area
Hydrogen Sulfide (Poisonous Gas) Authorized Personnel Only

3. Labeling schemes for containers and vessels containing H2 S shall meet the requirements of the Hazard Communication (HAZCOM) Program. Where HAZCOM labels are utilized, the following target organ wording shall be used: DANGER! Extremely Flammable Gas - Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Can Cause Eye and Respiratory Irritation and Asphyxiation

Page 3 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Where engineering controls are not feasible, the following special work practices shall be utilized depending on the type of process or job task and the potential for exposure to hydrogen sulfide. Refer to the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program for additional information regarding respiratory protection. a. For tasks involving entry into IDLH, unknown H2 S atmospheric concentrations or atmospheres which have the potential to become IDLH, entry shall be made with positive-pressure atmosphere-supplying respiratory protection. Methods shall be employed to determine the hydrogen sulfide concentration prior to work being performed. Work conducted in an IDLH atmosphere shall be authorized and documented with a Hot Work or Confined Space Entry Permit. One or more standby persons with respiratory protection (with a separate air source) shall be present and in visual or voice contact with the respirator wearer working in the hazardous area. Appropriate provisions for rescue shall be made prior to commencing work in the hazardous area. b. For tasks not covered above involving exposure to H2 S concentrations exceeding the PEL, such as areas around tanks and certain process vessels (e.g., sampling/gauging sour storage tanks, etc.), the use of positive-pressure atmosphere-supplying respiratory protection should be required. A standby person (with a separate air source) shall be present and in visual or voice contact with the respirator wearer working in the hazardous area. When appropriate, additional provisions for rescue shall be made. c. For tasks involving confined space entry (e.g., vessel entry) where H2 S may be present, work shall be authorized and documented with a Confined Space Permit in accordance wit h the Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program. Respiratory Protection Monitoring 1. Respiratory protection shall be used if engineering controls are not feasible or are not sufficient to reduce exposures within the established limits. 2. All employees who, as a part of their regular duties, are required to wear respirators to minimize their exposure to H2 S shall be covered by the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program. 3. Acceptable types of respirators include: a. Positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (Scott, MSA or equivalent) are acceptable for all hydrogen sulfide environments. b. Positive-pressure supplied-air (air- line) respirators with a full- face piece with escape bottle. c. Emergency escape units (e.g., egress bottle with five- minute air supply) shall be used only for emergency egress in areas where high concentrations of hydrogen sulfide may develop or in conjunction with an air- line respirator. d. Closed-circuit self-contained breathing apparatus (CCSCBA) is permitted only for emergency escape from developing hazardous atmospheres.

Page 4 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) e. Single use, mouth-piece type, escape-only cartridge respirators - for use during emergency egress from an area where the concentration of hydrogen sulfide gas is expected to be below 10 ppm during regular work activities, but where an accidental release of hydrogen sulfide might occur, but does not exceed the maximum concentration the respirator is approved for (usually 100 150 ppm). f. No other types of respiratory protection shall be provided or used in atmospheres which contain or have the potential to contain hydrogen sulfide without appropriate approvals from NIOSH/MSHA and the Safety Department. Respiratory Protection 1. Fixed monitoring systems, personal monitors and portable gas detection equipment shall be utilized as required by this program. The equipment shall be listed or approved for use and shall be calibrated (with documentation) and maintained in proper condition in accordance with the manufacturers established calibration procedures. Portable instruments shall also be examined for proper operation by the user prior to each use. Detection equipment shall be set to initially alarm at no higher than 10 ppm. If a detector, monitor or instrument is found to be defective, it shall be removed from service and tagged with a note for repair. 2. Fixed Monitoring Systems a. Fixed monitoring systems should be considered for enclosed areas that have a potential for hydrogen sulfide gas concentrations to exceed 10 ppm. b. Fixed monitoring systems are recommended for process or other areas where a release would result in a concentration of hydrogen sulfide above the IDLH level which may result in a radius of exposure that includes dwellings, public and private occupancies, and places of assembly. c. Standalone temporary detection stations that transmit signals electronically or by hardwire may be utilized when fixed equipment is out of service or when deemed prudent for other temporary activities. 3. Persona l Alarm Monitors a. Personal alarm monitors or similar H2 S detection devices shall be used to supplement well-established work practices and respiratory protection. Personal monitors shall be worn by all personnel assigned to work in areas where hydrogen sulfide is or may be present and shall be worn such that the device or at least the sensing media is outside the outermost layer of clothing worn by the employee. b. Personal monitors shall not be used in lieu of other more reliable exposure control measures (e.g. tri- gas monitors) for confined space entry, emergency rescue, or for tasks involving H2 S-containing sources which have the potential for rapid increase of H2 S in excess of the IDLH. c. The routine use of Personal Monitors requires daily operational checks of the monitor, regular calibration checks of alarm settings (if required), and procedures to follow when alarm(s) sound(s).

Page 5 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) d. Personal alarm monitors for use in high noise environments shall include provisions for a vibrating alarm or shall be mounted on the hard hat or shirt collar to assure detection of alarm activation. e. When personal monitors are used for tasks involving H2 S levels potentially in excess of the exposure limits, the work procedure sha ll include:

Instructions to exit the area when the alarm(s) sound(s). Re-entry only with appropriate respiratory protection and backup personnel or by conducting air monitoring to confirm that exposure levels are acceptable.

Eye and Skin Protection Persona l protective equipment shall be worn where appropriate to prevent eye and skin contact with liquids containing hydrogen sulfide and eye irritation from exposure to airborne concentrations of H2 S (below the PEL). 1. Gloves - Gloves made of nitrile rubber or neoprene or other suitable materials approved to be used for protection of the hands against absorption of hydrocarbons. 2. Goggles - Non-vented goggles should be worn if the concentration of hydrogen sulfide is not sufficient to warrant the use of a respirator but eye irritation exists. Goggles should also be used when handling hydrocarbons containing dissolved hydrogen sulfide if there is any possibility of splashing the material into the eyes. 3. Chemical Protective Clothing - Where atmospheres with high concentrations of hydrogen sulfide exist, chemical protective clothing may be necessary to prevent irritation to damp exposed skin. This would normally only be a concern during emergency operations since entry into this type of atmosphere would not be undertaken under normal circumstances. First Aid Where exposure to H S in excess of the IDLH is foreseeable, emergency response personnel 2 shall be trained in first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). When facilities are located remotely from emergency medical services, consideration should be given to the feasibility of maintaining oxygen on hand and providing it to personnel if overcome by hydrogen sulfide. Rescue Personnel Rescue personnel, when required by this program, shall be provided with appropriate respiratory protection and other equipment as deemed necessary for the task involved. This may include retrieval lines, wrist cuffs, or other retrieval and emergency equipment. Non-entry rescue methods shall be used whenever feasible.

Page 6 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Emergency Evacuation Plan 1. Each work location where exposure to hydrogen sulfide is possible shall have an emergency evacuation plan, an emergency response plan, or where required, an emergency contingency plan outlining the procedures to follow in the event of a sudden release of hydrogen sulfide. 2. Crosstex Energy Services personnel shall be familiar with the provisions contained in the plan and it shall be reviewed with personnel prior to initial assignment to the job and whenever changes are made to the plan(s). The plan should address the identification of emergency evacuation routes and areas of safe refuge, methods or signals to alert personnel of an emergency condition, reporting procedures and any other emergency procedures specific to the location. Fire Protection Adequate measures shall be taken to eliminate the risk of fire and explosion on any site where hydrogen sulfide may be present. If hot work is to be undertaken, a Hot Work Permit shall be issued in accordance with the hot work requirements and the Crosstex Energy Services Hot Work Permit Program prior to performing the task. Requirements by Area or Situation 1. H2 S Area - An area, well, or other facility capable of having ambient breathing zone H2 S concentrations reaching or exceeding 10 ppm. For an H2 S area, the breathing zone following requirements shall apply: a. The use of a Personal Alarm Monitor for hydrogen sulfide gas is required for all workers at all times while on location. When working under supplied air, personal alarm monitors for H2 S are not required; however, area monitoring must be conducted to confirm that the IDLH is not exceeded. b. Casual visitors to H S areas are required to have a briefing on the H2 S alarms and 2 emergency exiting and must be closely accompanied by an employee carrying a Personal Alarm Monitor. Casual visitors are not allowed in areas where the work or situation may cause the ambient breathing zone H2 S concentrations to reach or exceed 10 ppm. c. Hydrogen sulfide training is required for all employees and contractor personnel working in these areas. d. Respiratory protection for emergency escape shall be readily available where egress is limited or restricted. e. If the hydrogen sulfide concentration reaches or exceeds 10 ppm at any time while personnel are on the location, all personnel shall evacuate to a safe area and shall not re-enter the area without an approved positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or supplied-air (air- line) respirator with a full- face piece and emergency egress bottle (minimum 5 minute air supply), unless the concentration is reduced to below 10 ppm.

Page 7 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) f. One or more standby personnel are required while working under air. g. No beards or similar facial hair (except approved moustaches, see Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program) is permitted in these areas. h. One or more wind indicators shall be visible at the location. i. No ignition sources permitted except by permit. j. A Confined Space Permit shall be provided if required by the Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Permit Program. k. Personnel shall be familiar with emergency evacuation or contingency plans, including safe areas of refuge. l. Fixed monitoring equipment shall be provided and maintained at continuously manned facilities. Fixed monitoring equipment should be considered for unmanned facilities.

2. High H2 S Situation - A temporary situation where the ambient breathing zone concentration of hydrogen sulfide is 100 ppm or greater. a. If the ambient breathing zone concentration of hydrogen sulfide is 100 ppm or greater, only specially approved tasks and emergency operations shall be permitted; all of the previously mentioned H2 S area requirements apply and regular work activities will not be permitted unless the concentration is reduced below 100 ppm by ventilation or other engineering controls. b. A Confined Space Permit shall be completed and reviewed prior to undertaking work in a high H2 S situation. c. All personnel working in a high H2 S Situation shall be supervised by a Crosstex Energy Services Representative who is competent by virtue of training and experience. Any safety deficiencies noted shall be immediately communicated to the Crosstex Energy Services Representative for immediate correction and/or temporary interruption of the work. d. Continuous monitoring for explosive atmospheres with an approved instrument which alarms at 10% of the lower explosive limit is required. e. Approved respiratory protection shall be utilized. f. Rescue provisions and equipment are required onsite, including communication systems with the person(s) performing the work. Personnel who will be expected to perform a rescue shall be adequately equipped, trained, and physically able to perform a rescue operation if needed. Rescue personnel may also perform the standby duties. Where applicable, the provisions of the Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program and the Emergency Response Plan shall be referenced for additional requirements. g. Contractor personnel shall not be utilized in high H2 S situations unless specifically trained for the hazardous work. h. Wind indicators shall be clearly visible at all times.
Page 8 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) i. No ignition sources permitted.

j. Personnel shall be familiar with emergency evacuation/contingency plans, including areas of safe refuge. Training 1. Prior to working in an environment which might expose personnel to hazardous concentrations of hydrogen sulfide, training shall be provided for each affected person and a card (or other certification), signed by the instructor, shall be furnished certifying that he/she has completed the training program. Training is not required when specifically exempted by other sections of this program. 2. Training shall be conducted annually and shall include: a. Hazard communication regarding exposure to hydrogen sulfide, including the occupational exposure limits. b. Physical and chemical characteristics of H2 S. c. Physiological effects of exposure and their relationship to the concentratio n of H2 S in air. d. Human reactions including the effect on smell and the results of inhalation. e. Sources of hydrogen sulfide. f. Identification and use of personal protective equipment, including use, care, inspection and servicing of equipment (respiratory protection training is an integral portion of this training). g. Importance and use of ventilation equipment and wind indicators. h. Use, care and calibration of monitoring equipment. i. Emergency procedures and first aid for exposures to hydrogen sulfide. j. Use of the Buddy System and the requirement for standby personnel under certain conditions. k. Existence of sulfur dioxide and the hazards it presents. l. Importance of material compatibility and selection. m. Existence of hydrogen sulfide contingency plans and emergency responses to accidental releases. n. Spontaneous combustion associated with iron sulfide. o. Other relevant information specific to the site or area where work is performed. 3. In accordance with the HAZCOM Program, an MSDS for hydrogen sulfide shall be available at field offices where hydrogen sulfide may be encountered. Fit-testing and respiratory protection training shall be conducted in accordance with the RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM.

Page 9 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions 1. Air-line Respirator - An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the atmosphere is supplied to the respirator through a hose from a source not carried by the wearer. An emergency egress bottle with a minimum 5 minute emergency air supply must be integral with the respirator. Air-lines for respirators shall not exceed 100 feet in length unless approved by NIOSH in accordance with the manufacturers certification for the respirator. 2. Atmosphere -supplying Respirator - A respirator that supplies the user with breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere. 3. Casual Visitor - Any visitor (Crosstex Energy Services employee or outside personnel) who is unfamiliar with the area or facility and is there for purposes other than performing work (e.g. tour group s, executive management, etc.). Facility supervisors should approve field visits by casual visitors. Casual visitors should receive a general site specific safety briefing. Personnel such as salespersons, delivery persons and similar persons are typically not covered as casual visitors. 4. Covered Employee - An employee who is covered under a criteria defined in an EH&S Program which requires the employee to have medical surveillance. Typical criteria may include exposures that exceed the occupational exposure limit, the Action Level, or some other criteria. 5. Emergency - An unintentional incident that results in the disruption of normal activities and may include an actual or potential uncontrolled release of an airborne contaminant, fire, explosion, injuries and/or property damage. 6. Emergency-use Respirator - A respirator placed in or near the work area for use in an emergency. 7. Employee Exposure - The level of exposure to an airborne contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection. 8. Engineering Controls - Control measures utilized to prevent or reduce atmospheric contamination at the source by confinement, enclosure, local ventilation, dilution ventilation and substitution of less toxic materials (or other acceptable methods). 9. Escape -only Respirator - A respirator which is acceptable for use only for emergency escape from a developing hazardous atmosphere. 10. Exclusive-use Respirator - A respirator assigned to and used by only one employee. 11. Fit Test - The use of an approved protocol to evaluate the effectiveness of the seal of a respirator to the face of an individual. 12. H2 S Area - An area or other facility capable of having ambient H2 S concentrations reaching or exceeding 10 ppm. 13. High H2 S Area - A situation where the ambient concentration of hydrogen sulfide is known or anticipated to reach or exceed 300 ppm during the performance of work or during an emergency.

Page 10 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 14. Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) - An atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects or would impair an individuals ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere (e.g. a concentration of H2 S at 300 ppm or above (OSHA) or 100 ppm (NIOSH) or a concentration of oxygen at less than 19.5%). 15. LHCP Licensed health care professional. 16. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) The permissible exposure concentration allowed by OSHA for an 8- hour TWA. 17. Positive-Pressure Respirator - A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator. 18. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) - A pass/fail test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the individuals response to the test agent. 19. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) - An assessment of the adequacy of the respirator fit by numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator. 20. Rescue Personnel - Personnel that are designated and trained in the rescue of personnel who are unable to exit unaided from a hazardous environment. 21. Respirator Use Area - A designated work area where respiratory protection is required to protect employees from a hazardous atmosphere. 22. Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) - An atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the source of breathing air is designed to be carried by the wearer. 23. Stand-by Personnel - A person(s) outside of the respirator use area who has been trained and is responsible for monitoring the activity of personnel inside the respirator use area and the status of the air supply for air line respirators. 24. Supplied-air Respirator (SAR) - A self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or air- line respirator. 25. User Seal Check - An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated to the face and to verify proper valve operation. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1000 Toxic and Hazardous Substances American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices (2000) ANSI Z88.2 1992 American National Standard for Respiratory Protection ANSI Z390.1 1995 American National Standard Accepted Practice for Hydrogen Sulfide Safety Training Programs

Page 11 of 12

HYDROGEN SULFIDE EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) References (continued) Texas Administrative Code Title 16, Part 1 Chapter 3: Rule 3.36 Alabama State Oil & Gas Board, Rule 400-1-9-02 Mississippi State Oil & Gas Board, Rule 66 New Mexico Environmental, Health & Safety Regulations, Title 19, Chapter 15, Part 3.118 Oklahoma Corporate Commission, Rule 165:10-3-16, Part 3

Page 12 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE General Procedures 1. All hot work shall be conducted in accordance with this procedure and when practical, it shall be done in a designated safe welding and burning area. 2. A Hot Work Permit shall be obtained prior to conducting hot work in areas and/or involving equipment that has previously contained or has a potential to contain hazardous materials such as explosive vapors and/or flammable or combustible liquids, gases or other hazardous materials. 3. Additional precautions will be required to conduct hot work in Class I, Div. I areas. 4. All welding and burning equipment (including welding leads and grounds) shall be visually inspected daily prior to commencement of any hot work activity to ensure it is in good working condition (e.g., hoses, cables, gauges, regulators, etc.). All repairs shall be done properly and inspected by the welding supervisor. 5. All welding machines shall be equipped with spark arresters, diesel engine overspeed devices (where applicable) and located in well ventilated areas outside classified areas. In addition to the above requirements, pollution prevention equipment (e.g., drip pans) shall be used to prevent spills and/or release of fluids to the environment where necessary. NOTE: Where necessary and with adequate precautions, welding machines may be temporarily located by hot work permit in a Class I, Div. II area to complete a short duration project. 6. Walkways, stairways, ladders, tank manways, and other approaches to the work area must be accessible and free from obstacles which may obstruct the access/egress of personnel in the event of an emergency. 7. Adequate natural or mechanical ventilation shall be provided to ensure personnel are protected from exposure to welding fumes or approved respiratory protection in compliance with the Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program shall be provided. 8. Personal Protective Equipment and/or protective clothing (e.g., welder leathers, etc) which complies with the Crosstex Energy Services Personal Protective Equipment Program shall be worn by personnel conducting hot work operations. 9. A welder or helper working on any scaffold, walkway, or any other temporary elevated platform higher than six (6) feet shall work in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services Fall Protection Program. 10. If hot work is to be performed inside a confined space, refer to the Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program for additional requirements. Hot Work Permitting Procedures 1. The following are general hot work permitting procedures. Every hot work job is unique and may have unique hazards. All steps necessary to ensure a safe work environment shall be addressed prior to commencing work.

Page 1 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) 2. The Task Supervisor shall determine the type(s) of hot work that will be performed and shall prepare the work site. The site preparation shall comply with other applicable Crosstex Energy Services Programs (e.g. hot work permitting, lockout/tagout, etc) and may include, but is not limited to, the following: a. De-energizing, locking, and tagging out all energy sources. b. Disconnecting, blinding, depressurizing, plugging, purging, ventilating, flushing or otherwise cleaning, as needed, to ensure that no hazardous atmosphere will be introduced or created by subsequent work. c. Ensuring that heat conduction and/or heat radiation cannot occur through walls, roofs, pipes, etc. and ignite nearby flammable or combustible materials. d. Ensuring that all flammables and/or combustibles are removed to a distance of at least 50 feet away or are suitably covered or wetted. e. Covering drains, expanded metal flooring, and holes or cracks in flooring or ground with fire resistant coverings when falling sparks or slag may be present. f. Barricading and posting warning signs in areas directly below hot work where sparks and/or slag may fall. g. Obtaining and positioning appropriate fire fighting equipment and protective gear. h. Contacting the Permit Issuer and requesting a hot work permit. 3. The Permit Issuer shall discuss the scope and duration of the planned job with the Task Supervisor to become familiar with the project and shall survey the immediate and surrounding work areas. The Permit Issuer shall: a. Survey the immediate and surrounding work areas and use the STOP observation techniques listed in APPENDIX 2. b. Verify isolation and cleaning. c. Ensure that atmospheric monitoring is conducted as per the guidelines listed in the Crosstex Energy Services Hot Work Permit Procedure and that the following conditions are met: Oxygen concentrations of 19.5 - 23.5%. (For hot work operations that are conducted in open, well ventilated areas monitoring for oxygen concentration may not be required.) Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) is 10% (some operations may require a lower LEL). Hydrogen Sulfide (H2 S) below 10 ppm (otherwise, appropriate respirators are required). Any other contaminants are below established limits.

NOTE: When monitoring reveals the presence of NORM, work shall be conducted in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services NORM Exposure Control Program.

Page 2 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) d. Designate fire watch personnel (if required), whose sole duty will be the fire watch responsibilities. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least 30 minutes after completion of the hot work unless otherwise specified by the Permit Issuer. e. Ensure that fixed fire suppression systems have not been impaired. If one or more of these systems must be taken out of service to accomplish the hot work, additional portable or fixed fire protection equipment shall be available at the site. f. Complete all appropriate sections of the Hot Work Permit form and ensure that all necessary actions and precautions have been taken. g. Ensure that all personnel have received the worker briefing as per the Hot Work Permit. h. Certify that the appropriate actions and precautions have been taken by signing the permit. i. Ensure that the Task Supervisor certifies (by signature) that all measures identified have been completed and that all work will be completed in accordance with the permit conditions.

j. Leave the permit with the Task Supervisor onsite for the duration of the job or a period not to exceed one full work shift. k. The Hot Work Permit shall be cancelled by the Task Supervisor or the Permit Issuer: When the job is completed in full, When the validation period expires, or If there is an occurrence of a non-authorized condition (e.g. hazardous atmosphere develops).

Hot Tapping 1. Hot tapping is exceptionally hazardous and requires special experience, skills, and equipment. All hot taps must be engineered by a qualified person (e.g., engineer, consultant, etc) and must follow all company engineering guidelines. 2. Prior to planning a hot tap, review the Crosstex Operation, Maintenance & Construction Manual Section 2.19 Hot Tapping Procedure to determine the appropriate method for conducting the hot tap. 3. A pre-job planning meeting must be held prior to conducting a hot tap operation. Personal Protective Equipment requirements shall also be addressed. At a minimum, the following personnel must be present at the meeting: a. Task supervisor b. Certified welding inspector c. Permit issuer. 4. Other applicable personnel (e.g., Safety Specialist, Area Supervisor) should also be considered for participation.

Page 3 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Both a Hot Tap and a Hot Work Permit must be completed prior to starting the work. 6. Upon completion of the hot tap, the project shall be reviewed by the project engineer to ensure that the procedure was completed successfully (e.g., coupon recovered, weld inspections, etc.) and that the system is safely returned to service. Designated Safe Welding and Burning Areas Some Crosstex Energy Services facilities have designated safe welding and burning areas. Where these have been established, documentation should be on file at the facility. When approvals are necessary, they will be included in the files substantiating that approval. Considerations for these locations should take into account wind conditions, terrain, and other pertinent factors. Permanent areas should be well marked and any structures no n-combustible. 1. The designated safe welding and burning area shall be located in an unclassified area and shall be visually checked for flammables and/or combustibles prior to work starting and when conditions change. 2. Designated safe welding and burning areas should never be established near any classified area or within 50 feet of any active line or vessel in hydrocarbon service. 3. Prior to conducting hot work all requirements in APPENDIX 1 - Fire Prevention and Protection Procedures, shall be met. 4. A Hot Work Permit is required when flammable/combustible hazards are introduced into the area. Training 1. Training must be provided initially and periodically for all employees whose assignment may involve hot work. The training should instruct employees in the procedures to be followed to minimize potential hazards. This level of training does not qualify personnel as a Permit Issuer, Task Supervisor or Fire Watch. 2. Additional training, initial and periodic, will be required for each Permit Issuer, Task Supervisor or Fire Watch. (See APPENDIX 3) 3. At a minimum, refresher training shall be provided every two years or whenever a periodic inspection reveals that there are deviations from these procedures or inadequacies in the employees knowledge or use of these procedures. Definitions 1. Atmospheric Monitoring - See definition for Monitoring (testing) below. 2. Blanking or Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and that is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. 3. Bonding - Joining of metallic parts to form an electrically- conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.

Page 4 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (Continued) 4. Burning - The use of oxygen- fuel gas flame to weld, cut, burn, braze, solder and or heat equipment. 5. Electrical Area Classifications - Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I locations shall include those specified below. a. Class I, Division I - A location in which: Ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors can exist under normal operating conditions; or Ignitable concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or Breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors and might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment. In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal operation of equipment. In which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment. That is adjacent to a Class I, Division I location, and to which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.

b. Class I, Division II - A location:

6. Hazardous Atmosphere - An atmosphere which exposes employees to a risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from a confined space), injury or acute illness from one or more of the following causes, but for the purposes of this procedure it specifically includes: a. Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10% of its lower explosive limit (LEL) (some operations may require a lower LEL). b. Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that exceeds 10% of its LEL. c. An atmospheric contaminant that exceeds the occupational exposure limits.

Page 5 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 7. Hot Tapping - The technique of attaching a mechanical or welded branch fitting to piping or equipment in service, and creating an opening in that piping or equipment by drilling or cutting a portion of the piping or equipment within the attached fitting. 8. Hot Work Any work activity which causes or can cause a source of ignition for a combustible gas, liquid, or material. This shall include but is not limited to welding, burning, hot tapping, cutting, grinding, brazing, soldering, heating, riveting, all open flames, drilling, abrasive blasting, threading, or space heating, This may also include the use of any AC- or DC- powered tool or piece of equipment (light plants, generators, etc.) that is not intrinsically safe or explosion proof. 9. Hot Work Permit Crosstex Energy Services standard documentation to serve as written authorization to perform work including hot work, hot tapping operations, vehicle access into classified areas and other hazardous work as determined by the Task Supervisor or Person-In-Charge. Its purpose is to ensure that appropriate safety precautions and protective measures are undertaken prior to and during potentially hazardous work. 10. Hot Work Permit Area Areas that are within 50 feet of any potential hydrocarbon or flammable vapor source (e.g. wellheads, drains, pressure relief devices, vents, sample points, process vessels, storage bullets/tanks, etc.) or combustible materials and Class I, Div I and II areas. NOTE: When conditions warrant (potential for accumulation of flammable vapors), a distance greater than 50 feet from the source should be considered. A permit is not typically required for hot work in designated welding and burning areas or areas such as workshops or shop yards, unless there are hazardous materials present as described above. 11. Inerting - The displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space or other equipment by a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere will not support combustion. 12. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) - The minimum concentration of a combustible gas or vapor in air which will ignite if an ignition source is present. (This is equivalent to the 100% reading on a portable gas detector). 13. Monitoring (Testing) - Atmospheric testing for hazardous substances to determine whether conditions are acceptable for permitted work (e.g., entry, hot work, etc). 14. Permit Issuer - The person responsible for authorizing the Hot Work Permit. This may be the PIC, a supervisor, superintendent or other designated Crosstex Energy Services representative. 15. Person in Charge (PIC) - The lead Crosstex Energy Services Representative on-site who has the overall responsibility for a facility, project, work crew or work area. 16. Task Supervisor - The individual responsible for supervising the activities of the work party for a specific job or task. This individual may be a contractor or Crosstex Energy Services employee.

Page 6 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) References Crosstex Energy Services Operations, Maintenance & Construction Manual Sec. 2.19 Hot Tapping Procedures Crosstex Energy Services Personal Protective Equipment Program Crosstex Energy Services Lockout/Tagout Program Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Program OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.252-254 Subpart Q, Welding, Cutting and Brazing OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.119, Paragraph (k) (PSM Hot Work). API Publication 2009, Safe Welding, Cutting and Other Hot Work Practices in Refineries, Gas Plant, and Petrochemical Plants API Publication 2201, Procedures for Welding or Hot Tapping on Equipment Containing Flammables NFPA 51B Standard for Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding Processes, latest edition. ANSI/ASC Z49.1 Safety in Welding and Cutting, latest edition.

Page 7 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Fire Prevention And Protection Requirements Basic Precautions - The basic precautions for fire prevention in hot work operations are: 1. Fire Hazards - If the object of the hot work cannot readily be moved, all movable fire hazards in the vicinity shall be taken to a safe place. 2. Barrier Guards - If the object of the hot work cannot be moved and if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, then guards shall be used to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire hazards. 3. Restriction - If the requirements stated in numbers A.1 and A.2 of this section cannot be followed then hot work operations shall not be performed. Special Precautions - When the nature of the work to be performed falls within the scope of number A.2 of the above section certain additional precautions may be necessary: 1. Combustible Material - Wherever there are floor openings or cracks in the flooring that cannot be closed, precautions shall be taken so that no readily combustible materials on the floor below will be exposed to sparks which might drop through the floor. The same precautions shall be observed with regard to cracks or holes in walls, open doorways and open or broken windows. 2. Fire Extinguishers - Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be maintained in a state of readiness for instant use. Such equipment may consist of pails of water, buckets of sand, hose or portable extinguishers depending upon the nature and quantity of the combustible material exposed. 3. Fire Watch - Fire watch personnel shall be required whenever welding, cutting, or heating is performed in locations where a fire might develop or where any of the following conditions exist: Flammable or combustible materials within 50 feet of any hot work. Wall or floor openings (e.g., grating, stair openings) within a 50 foot radius of hot work which exposes flammable or combustible material in adjacent areas including concealed spaces in walls or floors. Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of metal partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited by conduction or radiation.

a. Fire watch personnel shall: Have fire extinguishing equipment readily available and shall be trained in its use. Be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire. Watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm.

Page 8 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Fire Prevention And Protection Requirements (continued) b. A fire watch shall be maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding, cutting, or heating operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires. 4. Floors - Where combustible materials such as paper clippings, wood shavings, or textile fibers are on the floor, the floor shall be swept clean for a radius of 50 feet. Combustible floors shall be kept wet, covered with damp sand, or protected by fire-resistant shields. Where floors have been wet down, personnel operating arc welding or cutting equipment shall be protected from possible shock. 5. Prohibited Areas - Hot work shall not be permitted in the following situations: a. In areas not authorized by management. b. In the presence of explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gases, vapors, liquids, or dusts with air), or explosive atmospheres that may develop inside uncleaned or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which have previously contained such materials, or that may develop in areas with an accumulation of combustible dusts. Hot work is prohibited in atmospheres with a greater than 10% LEL. (Some operations may require a lower LEL.) c. In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed, readily ignitable materials such as bulk sulfur, baled paper, or cotton. 6. Relocation of Combustibles - Where practicable, all combustibles shall be relocated at least 50 feet from the work site. Where relocation is impracticable, combustibles shall be protected with flameproof covers or otherwise shielded with metal or noncombustible guards or curtains. 7. Ducts - Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks to distant combustibles shall be suitably protected or shut down. 8. Combustible Walls - Where hot work is done near walls, partitions, ceiling or roof of combustible construction, fire-resistant shields or guards shall be provided to prevent ignition. 9. Noncombus tible Walls - If welding is to be done on a metal wall, partition, ceiling or roof, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of combustibles on the other side, due to conduction or radiation, preferably by relocating combustibles. Where combustibles are not relocated, a fire watch on the opposite side from the work shall be provided. 10. Combustible Cover - Welding shall not be attempted on a metal partition, wall, ceiling or roof having a combustible covering nor on walls or partitions of combustible sandwichtype panel construction. 11. Pipes - Cutting or welding on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible walls, partitions, ceilings or roofs shall not be undertaken if the work is close enough to cause ignition by conduction.

Page 9 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Fire Prevention And Protection Requirements (continued) 12. Fire Prevention Precautions - Hot work shall be permitted only in areas that are or have been made fire safe. When work cannot be moved practically, as in most construction work, the area shall be made safe by removing combustibles or protecting combustibles from ignition sources. Welding or Cutting Containers 1. Used Containers - No welding, cutting, or other hot work shall be performed on used drums, barrels, tanks or other containers until they have been cleaned so thoroughly as to make absolutely certain that there are no flammable materials present or any substances such as greases, tars, acids, or other materials which when subjected to heat, might produce flammable or toxic vapors. Any pipelines or connections to the drum or vessel shall be disconnected or blanked. 2. Venting and Purging - All hollow spaces, cavities or containers shall be vented to permit the escape of air or gasses before preheating, cutting or welding. Purging with inert gas is recommended. Confined Spaces - In addition to the restrictions and requirements noted elsewhere in this procedure the following guidance should be followed: 1. Accidental Contact - When arc welding is to be suspended for any substantia l period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, all electrodes shall be removed from the holders and the holders carefully located so that accidental contact cannot occur and the machine be disconnected from the power source. Where practical, the holders and grounds shall also be removed from the confined space. 2. Torch Valve - In order to eliminate the possibility of gas escaping through leaks or improperly closed valves, when gas welding or cutting, the torch valves shall be closed and the gas supply to the torch positively shut off at some point outside the confined area whenever the torch is not to be used for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch hour or overnight. Where practicable, the torch and hose shall also be removed from the confined space.

Page 10 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 2 - STOP Observation Techniques 1. LOOK for hazardous or other relevant conditions such as: Flammable or combustible materials or liquids Corrosives or other hazardous chemicals Other applicable hazards depending on job location (i.e., pressure relief devices in the vicinity) Wind direction and velocity Traffic patterns Access and escape routes General terrain around the work site Physical hazards (exposed sharp objects, trip hazards, tool/equipment condition, etc.). Leaks in piping, vessels, or other equipment Unusual and/or high noise levels/sources and/or vibrations Other sounds that may be relevant to the job or conditions of the hot work permit, depending on the job location (e.g., drilling/workover rigs, gas plants, production stations)

2. LISTEN for conditions such as:

3. SMELL for unusual odors such as: Hydrogen sulfide (H2 S) Warning: Because the sense of smell is deadened in the presence of high concentrations of H2 S, it can only be used as a indicator. Gas detection monitors shall be used to determine true levels of H2 S. Sulfur dioxide (SO2 ) Petrochemicals, solvents, etc. Other odors that may be relevant to that particular job

4. FEEL for hazardous conditions such as: Sharp edges or pointed objects Temperature extremes Slick/slippery surfaces Unusual vibrations or movement in all related equipment

5. LOOK ABOVE, BELOW, BEHIND, AND INSIDE the work area for all possible hazards and pertinent conditions that will indicate all needed precautions and protective equipment/apparel.

Page 11 of 12

HOT WORK PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - Training Outline For Specific Duties General Requirements. Personnel responsible for supervising, planning, or conducting hot work operations shall be adequately trained in their functional duties prior to initiating any hot work. Training shall include: 1. An explanation of the general hazards associated with hot work. 2. A discussion of specific hot work hazards associated with the facility, location or operation. 3. The reason for, proper use, and limitations of personal protective equipment and other safety equipment required for hot work operations. 4. An explanation of the hot work permit system and other procedural requirements for conducting hot work. 5. How to respond to emergencies. 6. Duties and responsibilities as a member of the hot work operation. Training for Fire Watch. Training shall include the following: 1. Means of sounding the alarm in case of fire. 2. Summoning rescue or other emergency services. 3. Duties and responsibilities of a Fire Watch. 4. Use of the particular type of fire extinguishing equipment they will be using. 5. Use of appropriate personal protective equipment. Training for Atmospheric Monitoring Personnel (Tester). Training shall include training in the proper use of atmospheric monitoring instruments. This shall include: 1. Field calibration. 2. Basic knowledge of the work being performed. 3. Anticipated hazardous contaminants. 4. Any process which could significantly alter original testing conditions. 5. Duties and responsibilities of an Atmospheric Monitoring person (Tester). Training for Hot Work Task Supervisor and/or Permit Issuer. Training shall include: 1. A detailed explanation of the hot work permit system and other procedural requirements for conducting hot work operations. 2. Identification of hot work hazards. 3. An explanation of atmospheric monitoring procedures. 4. Selection of proper personal protective equipment. 5. Duties and responsibilities. 6. Post hot work job evaluations to ensure that any deficiencies in the Hot Work Program are noted and addressed.

Page 12 of 12

HOT OILING PROCEDURE General 1. Hot oil units must be located 75 feet from any flammable/combustible vapor source. 2. When this distance is not possible to maintain, the unit may be positioned closer; however, a Hot Work Permit must be obtained before work may begin. 3. When the hot oil unit is within 35 feet of the vapor source, a fire watch must be assigned to the job. (Refer to the Hot Work Program for information.) 4. The hot oil unit must be positioned so that there is a crosswind and the unit operator will be on the upwind side: a. If this is not possible, the unit should be placed upwind from the vapor source. b. Be sure the fuel vapors cannot get to the firebox air intake. 5. The service company should position the hot oil unit so that drainage from the unit will not be toward any equipment or test tank(s) on location, insofar as practical. Hot Oiling Procedure 1. 2. Follow appropriate Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (Refer to the Lockout/Tagout section of this handbook). The hot oil unit shall not be parked over any pipelines. If the operator is not sure of the location of the pipeline, they must contact the Crosstex Energy Services supervisor in charge of the lease. High pressure pipe and connections must be used. A high pressure check valve must be used in the line near the equipment being hot oiled. The valves must be closed on the line or equipment prior to hooking up lines to the hot oil unit. The service unit operator must pressure test the lines from the hot oil unit to 150 percent of pressures anticipated during treatment before lighting burner. Pressure ratings of connections must not be exceeded while pumping. All chiksan joints and all connections must be tight and leak-proof. If a leak develops, the system (including lines and the hot oil unit) must be depressurized and repairs made. Cold oil should be circulated through the heater coils before lighting the burner. a. This is to ensure that oil is in the heat transfer tubes prior to heating. b. Cold oil should be pumped down the line before pumping hot oil. 10. Light the burners and visually check to see if they are burning properly. 11. When lighting the burners, a calibrated gas detector (if the device requires calibration) should be used to detect explosive gas mixtures in the fire box.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Page 1 of 3

HOT OILING PROCEDURE (continued) 12. An electronic ignition system should be used to place the service unit operator as far away from the fire box as possible when lighting. Cigarette lighters shall not be used to light the burners. 13. The heater coils must be pressure-tested to 750 psi annually with test results furnished upon request. 14. Propane tanks must be properly filled to eliminate the probability of safety relief valve discharge. 15. Adjust packing glands onto oil unit pump to eliminate excessive oil leaks which could allow vapors to migrate into the burner box. 16. NO SMOKING signs must be installed on oil units and no smoking rules observed. 17. A portable 30# dry chemical fire extinguisher must be set off the truck and upwind approximately 20 to 25 feet from the truck. 18. Hot oil operations must not commence until the operator is satisfied that safe conditions exist. 19. Leaks around and under the truck and along the line shall be prevented. 20. An inspection for leaks shall be made after the first few minutes of operations and periodically thereafter. 21. In the event of a fire, alert all personnel in the area of explosion hazards and warn them to stay a safe distance from the fire. 22. The burner must be shut off 7 to 10 barrels before finishing. This will extinguish the fire box and cool the coils. 23. Shut off the valve on the line or equipment being hot oiled, reverse the pump, and open the chicksan valve to evacuate the hot oil line. 24. Disconnect and replace the flowlines onto the truck. 25. All plugs must be replaced and any lock-out devices removed. (Refer to the Lockout/Tagout Program for further information concerning lockout/tagout.) 26. The unit should be started if it was shut down by the hot oil truck operator. Otherwise, notify Crosstex Energy Services or other affected personnel that equipment is ready to be restarted. 27. Any oil spills must be reported immediately via established Crosstex Energy Services reporting procedures (refer to the Accident/Incident Reporting Program) and cleaned up according to Crosstex Energy Services procedures. 28. A copy of these safety precautions shall be furnished to contractors performing this type of service.

Page 2 of 3

HOT OILING PROCEDURE (continued) 29. A copy of the Crosstex Energy Services Hazard Communication Program must be available at each facility. 30. Contractors shall be fully aware of its contents and appropriate precautions should be taken while handling hazardous materials. Training Personnel who work with hot oiling shall receive initial training and refresher training as needed. Definitions 1. Combustible Liquid - A liquid having a flashpoint below 100o F (37.8o C) and having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia at 100o F (37.8o C). Liquids meeting this definition are known as Class 1 liquids and are subdivided as follows: a. Class 1A liquids have a flashpoint below 73o F (22.8o C) and a boiling point below 100o F (37.8o C); for example, gasoline. b. Class 1B liquids have a flashpoint below 73o F (22.8o C) and a boiling point at or above 100o F (37.8o C); for example, methanol. c. Class 1C liquids having a flashpoint at or above 73o F (22.8o C) and below 100o F (37.8o C); for example, xylene. 2. Flammable Liquid - A liquid having a flashpoint at or above 100o F (37.8o C). Combustible liquids are subdivided as: a. Class II liquids have flashpoints at or above 100o F (37.8o C) and below 140o F (60o C); for example, diesel fuel oil. b. Class IIIA liquids have flashpoints at or above 140o F (60o C) and below 200o F (93o C); for example, phenol. c. Class IIIB liquids have flashpoints at or above 200o F (93o C); for example, ethylene glycol. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.106 Flammable and Combustible Liquids. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.

Page 3 of 3

HEARING CONSERVATION PROCEDURE Facility Noise Surveys 1. Facility noise surveys are conducted to identify company locations where noise levels are sufficiently high that employees may be exposed at or above the Action Level. 2. Facility noise surveys are conduc ted at those locations that have been identified through consultation with supervisory personnel as having elevated noise levels using the procedures outlined in Appendices A and B. 3. Facilities, or specific areas within a facility, with noise levels exceeding 85 dBA will be posted with a noise warning sign such as:

4. Follow- up surveys shall be conducted as soon as practical following any change in equipment or operations that could result in significant increases in noise levels. (Where noise levels may increase over time, consideration should be given to conducting periodic noise surveys to identify any changes in noise levels.) Noise Exposure Monitoring 1. The objective of noise monitoring is to characterize the noise exposures for similar exposure groups of each job category (title) that work at facilities identified by facility noise surveys as having a potential for noise levels at or above the Action Level (85 TWA). 2. Monitoring will be repeated whene ver a change in process, equipment, or controls increases noise levels in a manner that additional employees may be exposed at or above the action level or covered employee exposures may need to be re-evaluated. Exposure Notification Process 1. When possible, the employee will be given a verbal notice of their monitoring results following the sampling period. 2. The Local Program Administrator will ensure that a report generated from the exposure monitoring results will be posted at the appropriate worksite as soon as practicable. 3. When an employees exposure is greater than or equal to the Action Level, the Local Program Administrator will make two copies of a personalized notification. The notification will be forwarded to the employee with a request to sign one copy of the notification and return it to the Local Program Administrator and keep the second copy for his/her records. The signed form will be maintained in the Safety Department files.

Page 1 of 5

HEARING CONSERVATION PROCEDURE (continued) Covered Employees 1. Employees are included as covered under this program when personal exposure monitoring or exposure monitoring for their job category at their facility indicates exposures equal to or above the Action Level. 2. Annually, the Local Program Administrator will review the employees identified as covered employees and updates will be made to the list. 3. Annually, all covered employees will receive an audiometric test and training on hearing conservation. 4. Employees who visit high noise facilities for an undetermined duration are not formally considered covered employees; however, they must wear hearing protection in areas identified as high noise areas. 5. Employees are to be removed from being categorized as covered employees when: a. They are transferred to a job assignment whe re there is no noise exposure at or above the Action Level. b. Modifications to equipment or operating procedures result in employee exposures below the Action Level and exposure sampling has confirmed the lower exposure, and/or c. Employment is terminated. Audiometric Testing 1. Annual audiometric testing is required for all covered employees and made available at the Companys expense. 2. Covered employees shall receive an audiometric test within six months of being included in the program to establish a valid baseline against which subsequent audiograms can be compared. An audiometric test taken prior to an employee's inclusion in the program may be used as the baseline audiogram at the discretion of the Safety Department. 3. The Local Program Administrator will arrange for additional evaluations if deemed necessary by the audiometric testing results. 4. All employee audiometric testing information and correspondence are treated as confidential information. Hearing Protection 1. A variety of approved hearing protection including earmuffs and earplugs will be provided to employees at facilities with noise exposure levels equal to or exceeding the Action Level. 2. All employees are required to wear hearing protection in work areas where noise levels are 85 dBA or above. Covered employees who have not yet had a baseline audiogram and those who have experienced a Standard Threshold Shift (STS) are required to wear hearing protection in work areas where an exposure at or above the Action Level is likely to occur.

Page 2 of 5

HEARING CONSERVATION PROCEDURE (continued) 3. To the extent feasible, warning signs that require the use of hearing protection in a particular area shall be posted at entrances to, or on the periphery of, well defined work areas where noise levels regularly equal or exceed the PEL. 4. Instructions on the selection, proper fitting, use and care of hearing protectors will be covered during annual training on hearing protection. Training 1. Covered employees are provided training when they are initially included in the program and annually thereafter. This training is conducted under the guidance of the Local Program Administrator and records are maintained to document attendance. 2. Training shall follow the following topics: a. Effects of noise on hearing. b. Purpose of hearing protectors. c. Advantages, disadvantages and attenuation of various types of hearing protectors. d. Selection, fitting use, care of hearing protectors. e. Purpose of audiometric testing, and test procedures. 3. A copy of the OSHA Hearing Conservation Amendment to the Noise Standard will be posted at each facility with covered employees. Definitions 1. Action Level (AL) (Noise) An eight- hour time weighted average (TWA) noise exposure of 85 dBA or for a twelve- hour work shift, a TWA of 82 dBA. The Action Level is based on a 50% dose of the Permissible Exposure Limit. 2. Audiometric Testing Testing conducted to measure a persons ability to hear. 3. Covered Employee - An employee whose time-weighted average (TWA) exposure to noise exceeds the 50% noise dose of the permissible exposure limit (Action Level) and, therefore, requires annual audiometric testing and training. 4. Facility Noise Survey Measurements collected using a sound level meter to characterize the noise levels at a facility or area. 5. Noise Exposure Monitoring - A measurement obtained, typically using an audiodosimeter, to evaluate an employees noise dose received during a work period. 6. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 7. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) An eight-hour TWA noise exposure of 90 dBA or a twelve-hour TWA of 87 dBA. 8. Standard Threshold Shift (STS) A loss of hearing, either temporary or permanent, of an average of ten decibels or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 hertz. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.95.

Page 3 of 5

HEARING CONSERVATION PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix A Facility Noise Exposure Survey Procedure Surveys are performed under the direction of the Local Program Administrator. The following guidelines are observed while facility noise surveys are conducted: 1. The calibration of the sound level meter (SLM) is checked before and after each day of use. 2. The SLM microphone is held in front of and away from the body and pointed at a 45 degree angle toward the noise source, keeping the body out of the noise path. (Check the orientation instructions for the requirements of different microphones.) 3. The SLM is set on the A weighted scale and slow response. 4. Measurements are made to the nearest decibel. If the needle fluctuates no more than five decibels, an average of the excursion is made by eye. 5. Where both continuous and impulse noises are present, the SLM is set to fast response to identify only the continuous noise levels and determine if they exceed continuous permissible limits. 6. Measurements are to be taken with compressors and generators in operation at normal service speed, and with all auxiliary mechanical and/or electrical equipment that is normally in operation. 7. Measurements are taken in areas where emergency diesel engine-driven generators, fire pumps, and other emergency equipment are located with the equipment running and not running. Adjoining areas are not measured with such equipment operating unless the equipment will be operated for periods other than emergencies or periodic testing. 8. Measurements are taken at the principal working and control stations of the facility. Special attention is paid to control panels, meters, and positions where voice communications and audible signals are important. 9. Measurements are taken in offices, control rooms, warehouses, etc. 10. Area Noise Survey shall be completed for each facility surveyed and shall be maintained in the Safety Department files.

Page 4 of 5

HEARING CONSERVATION PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix B Noise Exposure Monitoring Procedure Monitoring is performed under the direction of the Local Program Administrator. The following guidelines are observed while noise exposure monitoring is conducted: 1. A Noise Sample Data Form is completed for each sample (provided by Dosimeter). 2. The audiodosimeter is calibrated before and after each sampling period. 3. The purpose of the monitoring is explained to the subject employee and any questions are answered. The employee is informed that the audiodosimeter is not a recording device. 4. The audiodosimeter is securely fastened to the employee's shirt pocket or belt and the microphone is clipped on the employee's collar at the top of the shoulder directly below the ear. 5. Minimum sampling time for a valid exposure measurement is seven hours for an eight-hour work period and ten hours for a twelve- hour work period. The audiodosimeter remains on the employee during lunch unless the employee leaves the facility. Sampling time less than a full shift is extrapolated to a full shift exposure (480 or 720 minutes) using the equation on the back of the Form. 6. The original of the Noise Sample Data Form is maintained in the Safety Department files.

Page 5 of 5

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE Hazardous Materials Table The table and instructions for its use are in CFR 49 Section 172.101. The columns are as follows: 1. Column 1 Symbols which indicate that the user must give special consideration to the chosen material. 2. Column 2 Hazardous Material Descriptions and Proper Shipping Names. 3. Column 3 Hazard Classes and Divisions. 4. Column 4 Identification Numbers. 5. Column 5 Packing Group. 6. Column 6 Hazard Class Label (s). 7. Column 7 Special Provisions. 8. Column 8 Packaging Authorizations. 9. Column 9 Maximum Single-Package Quantities which can be transported by passenger aircraft or rail car, or cargo aircraft. 10. Column 10- (Water) Vessel Stowage Requirements. Hazardous Material Classification There are nine (9) hazard classes used by the Department of Transportation to identify hazardous materials. 1. Class 1 Explosive substances - materials which can detonate or are subject to very rapid combustion. Class 1 is divided into six (6) Divisions: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6. Some of the products included in Class 1 are dynamite, fireworks and ammunition. 2. Class 2 Compressed and liquefied gases. There are three Divisions of Class 2 materials: a. Division 2.1 Flammable Gases b. Division 2.2 Non-flammable Compressed Gases c. Division 2.3 Poisonous Gases 3. Class 3 Flammable and combustible liquids. 4. Class 4 Comprised of four (4) divisions: a. Division 4.1 - Flammable Solids b. Division 4.2 - Spontaneously Combustibles c. Division 4.3 Dangerous When Wet 5. Class 5 Materials which cause or enhance the combustion of other materials. There are two (2) Divisions within Class 5. a. Division 5.1 Oxidizer b. Division 5.2 Organic Peroxide

Page 1 of 6

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Class 6 Comprised of two (2) Divisions a. Poisonous Materials b. Infectious Substances 7. Class 7 Radioactive materials which can cause burns and other injuries (e.g., cobalt and uranium). 8. Class 8 Corrosive liquids and solids which cause visible destruction or irreversible alterations in human skin tissue at the site of contact, and liquids that have a severe corrosion rate on steel or aluminum (e.g., sulfuric acid and sodium hydroxide). 9. Class 9 Materials which have an anesthetic, noxious, or other similar property which could cause extreme annoyance or discomfort to a flight crew member so as to prevent the correct performance of assigned duties, certain hazardous substances or hazardous wastes, certain marine pollutants, and certain elevated temperature materials. Shipping Papers Hazardous materials offered for shipment and/or transported by the company must be accompanied by shipping papers. (See Forms Section of CD.) Every hazardous material shipping paper must contain the following information legibly printed and in English: 1. Proper shipping name. 2. Hazard class or division number. 3. UN or NA identification (ID) number. 4. Packing Group (PG) number (in Roman Numerals). 5. A 24-hour emergency response phone number. 6. A Shippers Certification is required for most shipments, except those in which the carrier supplies a tank truck or when the shipper moves the shipment as a private carrier. Product Description - Product descriptions are found in the HMR at Section 172.101. Descriptions found in this table must be used verbatim. The product description typically consists of the following elements: 1. Proper Shipping Name. 2. Hazard Class Number. 3. Identification Number. 4. Packing Group. G Designation - Products with the designation G in Column 1 must be further described by adding the technical name(s) of the major component(s). Quantity Information - Quantity information must precede and/or follow the product description. The preferred method is to designate type and number of containers before the description and to follow it with a net weight or volume.

Page 2 of 6

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) Special Provisions The special provisions/packaging authorizations (Columns 7-8) of HMR Section 172.101 should be checked before the shipping papers are completed. Limited Quantity and Consumer Commodity shipments should be made according to the appropriate packaging authorizations. Hazardous Substances When a hazardous substance is present in a container, in an amount which exceeds the EPA Reportable Quantity (RQ), the shipping papers must show RQ before or after the product description. (This does not apply to petroleum fuels and lubricants.) Air Shipments If any portion of a shipment moves by air, the documentation and packaging for the entire shipment should be in accordance with the Internationa l Civil Aviation Organization or International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Regulations. Marking Each person who offers a hazardous material for transportation must mark each package, freight container, and transport vehicle containing the hazardous material as required by the Hazardous Materials Regulations. A marking must be durable, in English and printed on or affixed to the surface of a package or on a label, tag, or sign. 1. Some examples of non-bulk container markings that may be required are: a. Proper shipping name. b. Identification number (UN or NA). c. Package specifications markings. d. Marine Pollutant mark. e. Shipper or consignee name and address. f. Orientation arrows. g. RQ notation: Technical name(s) in parenthesis The words: Inhalation Hazard

2. Some examples of bulk container markings that may be required are: a. Orange panel with ID numbers. b. Test and inspection stencils. c. The words Inhalation Hazard. d. Proper shipping name.

Page 3 of 6

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) Labeling Labeling requirements are found in Column 6 of the Hazardous Materials Table. Labels must appear near the marked DOT proper shipping name, if the package dimensions are adequate. Unless cleaned and purged of the hazardous material or filled with a non-hazardous material, emptied non-bulk packaging containing the residue of a hazardous material must remain marked, labeled, and must be offered for transportation in the same manner as when they were filled. Labels may be on a tag and attached by a wire or other means to: 1. A cylinder. 2. A package that contains no radioactive material and which has dimensions less than those of the required label. 3. A package which has such an irregular surface that the label cannot be satisfactorily affixed. Placarding Hazard material placards alert the public to the potential dangers of the product being transported and guide emergency response personnel in the event of an incident. Placards are similar to but larger than labels. Shippers are responsible for ensuring placards are correct and in the proper place. Placarding requirements include: 1. All four (4) sides of a motor vehicle, rail car, or freight container. 2. Proper name of the material and the United Nations (UN) number, or North America (NA) number. 3. Proper color (e.g., red on a Flammable or Combustible placard). 4. Proper symbols (e.g., skull and crossbones on a Poison placard). 5. Proper wording (e.g., the word explosives on an Explosive placard). 6. Proper identification number (e.g. 1830 on a corrosive placard for sulfuric acid). 7. Proper hazard class number (e.g. 3 on a Flammable placard). NOTE: No placarding is required on a motor vehicle or freight container transported by highway, only if it contains less than or equal to 119 gallons or 1,000 pounds (aggregate gross weight) of a hazardous material. 8. Motor vehicles transporting a properly marked portable (not secured to vehicle) tank containing less than or equal to 119 gallons or 1,000 pounds of hazardous material do not have to be placarded. However, the portable tank must be marked with the proper shipping name of the contents on two (2) opposing sides along with the hazardous materials identification number specified for that material in the Hazardous Materials Table. 9. If a cargo tank (a tank secured to the inside of the pickups bed) containing over 119 gallons or 1,000 pounds of hazardous materials, other than fuel for the vehicle, is being transported, the vehicle must be placarded. 10. Voluntary placarding shall be avoided due to the fact that placarding a vehicle will subject the vehicle and driver to regulations from which they would otherwise be exempt. Contact the EH&S Department for further information.

Page 4 of 6

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) Driver Qualifications : 1. State and federal driver qualification requirements must be met by employees who transport hazardous materials. However, these requirements do not apply to drivers of vehicles under 10,000 pounds gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or vehicles that are not required to be placarded. 2. Commercial Drivers License Requirements - State requirements may vary - check your local requirements: a. A single vehicle with a GVWR of more than 26,000 pounds. b. A trailer with a GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds if the gross combination weight rating is more than 26,000. c. A vehicle designed to transport more than 16 persons (including the driver). d. Any size vehicle which requires hazardous material placards. Any vehicle that transports greater than 119 gallons of hazardous material. e. A simple vehicle weighing less than 26,001 pounds (GVWR) but more than 10,000 pounds (GVWR) if used commercially or to transport persons for hire. f. Drivers hauling hazardous material are subject to drug testing according to 49 CFR 100-179 and 391-397. Definitions 1. Commerce - Anytime a company vehicle is traveling on a road not owned and/or operated by the Company to which the vehicle belongs. 2. Hazardous Material A substance or material, including a hazardous substance, which has been determined by the Secretary of Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and property when transported in commerce, and which has been so designated. 3. Hazardous Material Employee A person who is employed and who in the course of employment directly affects hazardous materials safety. Anyone who during the course of employment: a. Loads, unloads or handles hazardous material. b. Prepares hazardous materials for transportation. c. Is responsible for safety in transporting hazardous material. d. Operates a vehicle used to transport hazardous materials. 4. Hazardous Material Employer A company/person who uses one or more of its employees in connection with transporting hazardous materials in commerce or causing hazardous materials to be transported or shipped in commerce.

Page 5 of 6

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Hazardous Material Table Department of Transportation (DOT) - Prescribes descriptive information, labeling, marking, container and shipping requirements for hazardous materials. 6. Shippers Certification A certification statement signed by the shipper that states: This is to certify that the above-named materials are properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation. 7. Shipping Papers A shipping order, bill of lading, manifest, or other shipping document servicing a similar purpose and containing the required information. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49 Parts 171-180 Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR) International Civil Aviation Organization/International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Regulations

Page 6 of 6

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE Chemical Substance List Each Crosstex facility shall maintain a listing of all chemical substances present at the location which have been determined to be hazardous pursuant to applicable Federal or State regulations. 1. The list shall be updated by the Facility/Area PIC or designated alternate when any chemical not on the list is received. 2. When an update is made, a review of the potential health and safety effects and waste disposal requirements of the new chemical(s) shall be conducted. The EH&S review should be conducted prior to the chemical being ordered. The EH&S Department maybe consulted as needed. 3. Contractors shall maintain a list of all chemicals which they provide at the work site. Material Safety Data Sheets Copies of MSDSs which meet the requirements of the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard shall be maintained for each hazardous substance. 1. A paper copy of the MSDSs shall be maintained at the facility or area field office and all employees and contractors shall be aware of the location. 2. MSDSs for newly ordered chemicals will be requested by those making the order and it must be supplied by the vendor before or with the receipt of the shipment. When feasible, MSDSs should be requested prior to chemical(s) being ordered. 3. Employees receiving any chemical shipment will ensure that an MSDS for each chemical is on file or accompanies a chemical before accepting the shipment. If no MSDS is received or on file, one must be obtained immediately (fax, electronic, e- mail, etc.). 4. The PIC or designated alternate will ensure that as new or revised MSDSs are received, copies are kept at the facility/field office. Labels and Hazard Warnings All containers of hazardous substances shall be labeled to identify the substance and provide an appropriate hazard warning (including any applicable target organ warning) to employees. The labels shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment in which they are placed. 1. Portable Containers All portable containers of ha zardous substances shall be labeled, tagged or marked to identify the substance and provide an appropriate hazard warning to employees. Labels and hazard warnings, which are affixed to containers by the manufacturer and which meet the requirements of the Hazard Communication Standard, shall be maintained to apprise employees of the protective measures for working safely with these chemical substances. Unlabeled containers or containers with illegible labels shall be promptly labeled with an acceptable manufacturers label or in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 704), Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response, with the addition of applicable target organ hazard warning(s). a. All purchased chemicals should be received from the supplier with proper labeling securely affixed. Should proper labels not be apparent, immediate arrangements should be made to properly label each container.

Page 1 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) b. Labeling is not required when chemicals are transferred from labeled containers into portable containers which are intended only for immediate use of the employee who performs the transfer. If the container of chemical is not used immediately or will be left unattended, then a label or tag must be attached to identify the chemical and the hazard warning. 2. Stationary Containers Labels shall be affixed to individual stationary containers in accordance with NFPA 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response, with the addition of applicable target organ hazard warning(s). (For stationary containers that contain purchased chemicals, proper labels provided by the manufacturer/supplier may be used.) Labels should be located so that they are readily visible. 3. Contractors and Multi-employer sites - Contract personnel entering Crosstex work locations shall be made aware of the contents and requirements of this Hazard Communication Plan and of the location/availability of the facilitys MSDSs during job briefings. The contractor must provide MSDSs for materials that they plan to use in the facility/area/worksite. Training 1. Training must be provided initially and periodically for all employees whose work assignment may cause them to encounter chemical substances or hazardous physical agents at company locations. The training should instruct employees in the procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards. Training shall cover the following: a. Availability and location of the Hazard Communication Plan, including the chemical inventory list and corresponding MSDSs. b. Use of MSDSs and the protective measures for working safely with chemical substances. At a minimum, employees are required to wear protective gloves and goggles when contact with chemicals is possible. See Crosstex Energy Services PPE PROGRAM. 2. Retraining shall be provided for all personnel whenever there is a change in potential hazards from chemicals found in the workplace or whenever a periodic inspection reveals that there are inadequacies in the employees knowledge or use of these procedures. The Safety Department shall maintain records of each employees name and number and the date(s) of training. Definitions 1. Container Any bag, barrel, bottle, box, can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, storage tank, or the like that contains a hazardous chemical. For purposes of this program, pipes or piping systems, engines, fuel tanks, or other operating systems in a vehicle, are not considered to be containers.

Page 2 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Hazard Warning Any words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof appearing on a label or other appropriate form of warning which convey the hazard(s) of the chemical(s) in the container(s). 3. Label Any written, printed, or graphic material, displayed on or affixed to containers of hazardous chemicals. 4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) Written or printed material concerning a hazardous chemical which is prepared in accordance with the Hazardous Communication Standard. 5. Substances with Target Organ Effects A substance which adversely affects one or more body organs. These will typically include the examples in the table in Appendix 2. Note: These examples are not all inclusive. References Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.1200 Hazard Communication National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 704 - Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response

Page 3 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Exhibit 1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)/Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS) classifications are provided in this section along with any additional product information.

HEALTH

FLAMMABLE
4 Materials that will rapidly or completely vaporize at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperature or that are readily dispersed in air and which will burn readily.

REACTIVE
4 Materials that in themselves are readily capable of detonation or explosive decomposition or explosive reaction at normal temperatures and pressures. 3 - Materials that in themselves are capable of detonation or explosive decomposition or explosive reaction, but that require a strong initiating source or that must be heated under confinement before initiation. 2 - Materials that readily undergo violent chemical change at elevated temperatures and pressures. 1 - Materials that in themselves are normally stable, but that can become unstable at elevated temperatures and pressures.

SPECIFIC HAZARD

4 - Materials that, under emergency conditions, can be lethal.

OXY - Oxidizer

3 - Materials that, under emergency conditions, can cause serious or permanent injury.

3 - Liquids and solids that can be ignited under almost all ambient temperature conditions.

ACID Acid

2 - Materials that, under emergency conditions, can cause temporary incapacitation or residual injury. 1 - Materials that, under emergency conditions, can cause significant irritation. 0 - Materials that, under emergency conditions, would offer no hazard beyond that of ordinary combustible materials.

2 - Materials that must be moderately heated or exposed to relatively high ambient temperatures before ignition can occur. 1 - Materials that must be preheated before ignition can occur.

ALK Alkali

COR Corrosive

0 - Materials that in 0 - Materials that will not themselves are normally burn. stable, even under fire conditions.

W Use NO WATER

- Radiation Hazards For more information consult the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 704, Standard System for the Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response. P - Polymerizes

Page 4 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Exhibit 2 Typical NFPA Container Label with Target Organ Hazard Warning

NATURAL GAS
HEALTH HAZARDS:
4 Deadly 3 Extremely Hazardous 2 Hazardous 1 Slightly Hazardous 0 Normal Material

FIRE HAZARDS:
Flash Points 4 Below 73o F * 3 Below 100o F * 2 Below 200o F * 1 Above 200o F * 0 Will Not Burn

4 1 0

REACTIVITY:
4 May Detonate 3 Shock & Heat may Detonate 2 Violent Chemical Reaction 1 Unstable if Heated 0 - Stable

DANGER - FLAMMABLE GAS TARGET ORGAN: LUNGS LARGE CONCENTRATIONS MAY CAUSE ASPHYXIATION DUE TO OXYGEN DISPLACEMENT. REMOVE VICTIM TO FRESH AIR. QUICKLY RESTORE AND/OR SUPPORT BREATHING AS REQUIRED. HAVE TRAINED PERSON ADMINISTER OXYGEN IF AVAILABLE. ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION SHOULD BE USED IMMEDIATELY IF BREATHING STOPPED. GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION.

Page 5 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Description of Hazards Physical Hazards A chemical is determined to possess a physical hazard if it is combustible, flammable, an oxidizer, explosive, a compressed gas, an organic peroxide, pyrophoric, unstable, reactive, or water-reactive. The determination is based upon the definitions included in the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard for each of these characteristics. Health Hazards The following information is used in conducting health hazard determinations: 1. Carcinogenicity-Conclusive evidence including listing by NTP, IARC or OSHA as described below and critical review of available scientific data from other sources. 2. Human data- Review of available epidemiology studies and case reports. 3. Animal data- Review of available toxicological test data in animal populations. 4. The results of any study, which is designed and conducted according to, established scientific protocols and which reports statistically significant results. Chemicals are evaluated for both acute (short term) and chronic (long term) toxicity. Chemicals which meet any of the following criteria are considered to be health hazards as recognized in Appendix A of the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard. 1. Carcinogen - a substance capable or suspected of causing cancer in humans or animals. A chemical is considered to be a carcinogen if: a. Its found to be carcinogenic or potentially carcinogenic by the International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC). b. Its listed as a carcinogen or potential carcinogen in the Annual Report on Carcinogens published by the National Toxicology Program (NTP). c. Its regulated by OSHA as a carcinogen. d. Professional judgment concludes that another scientifically valid study or group of studies merits classification as a carcinogen. 2. Corrosive a. A chemical that causes visible destruction of, or irreversible damage to, living tissue. b. As defined by the Department of Transportation 49 CFR. c. As defined by the Consumer Product Safety Commission.

Page 6 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Description of Hazards (continued) 3. Highly Toxic-a chemical falling within any of the following categories: a. Has an LD50 < 50 mg/kg (oral rat) b. Has an LD50 < 200 mg/kg (skin rabbit) c. Has an LC 50 < 200 ppm or < 2 mg/1 (1 hr. rat inhalation) 4. Toxic - a chemical falling within any of the following categories: a. Has an LD50 of 50 - 500 mg/kg (oral rat) b. Has an LD50 of 200 - 1000 mg/kg (skin rabbit) c. Has an LC 50 of 200 - 2000 ppm or 2-20 mg/1 (1 hr. rat inhalation) 5. Irritant a. Is not corrosive b. Causes a reversible inflammatory effect on living tissues c. If, when tested by methods of 16 CFR 1500.41, results in empirical score of 3 - 5 d. Is an eye irritant if positive results when tested under the procedure listed in 16 CFR 1500.42 6. Sensitizer - Causes a substantial portion of exposed people or animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after repeated exposure to the chemical 7. Substances with Target Organ Effects - a substance which adversely affects one or more body organs. This will typically include the examples in the following table. NOTE: These examples are not all inclusive.

Page 7 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 2 Target Organ Effects a. Hepatotoxins: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: b. Nephrotoxins: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: c. Neurotoxins: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: Agents which act on the blood or hematopoietic system: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: Agents which damage the lung: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: Reproductive toxins:

d.

e.

f.

g.

h.

Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: Cutaneous hazards: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals: Eye hazards: Signs and Symptoms: Chemicals:

Chemicals which produce liver damage. Jaundice, liver enlargement. Carbon tetrachloride, nitrosamines Chemicals which produce kidney damage. Edema, proteinuria. Halogenated hydrocarbons, uranium. Chemicals which produce their primary toxic effects on the nervous system. Necrosis, behavioral changes, decrease in motor functions. Mercury, carbon disulfide. Decrease hemoglobin function, deprive the body tissues of oxygen. Cyanosis, loss of consciousness. Carbon monoxide, cyanides. Chemicals which irritate or damage the pulmonary tissue. Cough, tightness in chest, shortness of breath. Silica, asbestos. Chemicals which affect the reproductive capabilities including chromosomal damage (mutations) and effects on fetuses (teratogenesis). Birth defects, sterility. Lead, DBCP. Chemicals which affect the dermal layer of the body. Defatting of the skin, rashes, irritation. Ketones, chlorinated compounds. Chemicals which affect the eye or visual capacity. Conjunctivitis, corneal damage. Organic solvents, acids.

Page 8 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - List of Commonly Used Labels Fire Reactivity Other

Chemical

Health

Target Organ Warning

PETROLEUM CRUDE OIL

n o 0 n e

PETROLEUM CRUDE OIL (SOUR)

n o 0 n e

PRODUCED WATER

n o 1 n e

PRODUCED WATER (SOUR)

n o 1 n e n 1 o n e n o 0 n e

DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF LIQUID INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID MAY VENT HA RMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOODFORMING ORGANS. ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF LIQUID INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. WARNING! FLAMMABLE LIQUID PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED CONTACT. LONG-TERM EXPOSURE TO COMPONENTS OF THIS MATERIAL HAS CAUSED SYSTEMIC TOXICITY AND CANCER IN LABORATORY ANIMALS. DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED CONTACT. LONG-TERM SKIN EXPOSURE TO COMPONENTS OF THIS MATERIAL HAS CAUSED SYSTEMIC TOXICITY AND CANCER IN LABORATORY ANIMALS. MAY VENT HARMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION. WARNING! GAS UNDER PRESSURE. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS.

CO2 ACID GAS

ISOBUTANE/BUTANE MIX (C3 -C4 )

Page 9 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - List of Commonly Used Labels (continued) Fire Reactivity Other

Chemical

Health

Target Organ Warning

ETHANE

n 0 o n e n o 1 n e n 0 o n e n o 0 n e n o 0 n e n o 1 n e

DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. CONTAINS HARMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. MAY VENT HARMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF THE LIQUID PORTION OF THIS PRODUCT INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH.

HYDROGEN SULFIDE

ISO-BUTANE

METHANE

NATURAL GAS

NATURAL GAS (SOUR)

NATURAL GAS CONDENSATE (C2 -C8 )

n o 1 n e

Page 10 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - List of Commonly Used Labels (continued) Fire Reactivity Other

Chemical

Health

Target Organ Warning

NATURAL GAS CONDENSATE (SOUR)

n o 1 n e

DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF LIQUID INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH CAN CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. MAY VENT HARMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION.

NATURAL GAS - DRY

NATURAL GAS, RAW LIQUID MIX

n 0 o n e n o 1 n e n o 1 n e

DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE GAS UNDER PRESSURE. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF LIQUID IN THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED SKIN CONTACT. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH CAN CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. DANGER! FLAMMABLE LIQUID ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF LIQUID IN THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED SKIN CONTACT. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH CAN CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS.

NATURAL GASOLINE (C4 -C8 )

NATURAL GASOLINE (C5 -C8 )

n o 1 n e n o 0 n e

BUTANE, NORMAL

Page 11 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - List of Commonly Used Labels (continued) Fire Reactivity Other

Chemical

Health

Target Organ Warning

PROPANE

n 0 o n e

DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LI QUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS. DANGER! EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS UNDER PRESSURE. LIQUID CAN CAUSE FROST BURNS. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. ASPIRATION (INADVERTENT SUCTION) OF THE LIQUID PORTION OF THIS PRODUCT INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED CONTACT. DANGER! FLAMMABLE GAS AND LIQUID CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE AND MAY VENT HARMFUL CONCENTRATIONS OF HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2 S) GAS WHICH CAN CAUSE RESPIRATORY IRRITATION AND ASPHYXIATION. ASPIRATION OF LIQUID INTO THE LUNGS CAN PRODUCE CHEMICAL PNEUMONIA OR EVEN DEATH. CONTAINS BENZENE WHICH CAN CAUSE CANCER OR BE TOXIC TO BLOOD-FORMING ORGANS. PRODUCES SKIN IRRITATION UPON PROLONGED OR REPEATED CONTACT.

MIXED STREAM: (NATURAL GAS, NATURAL GAS CONDENSATE OR PETROLEUM CRUDE OIL, AND PRODUCED WATER) MIXED STREAM (SOUR): (HYDROGEN SULFIDE, NATURAL GAS, NATURAL GAS CONDENSATE OR PETROLEUM CRUDE OIL, AND PRODUCED WATER) METHANOL

n o 1 n e

n o 1 n e

ETHYLENE GLYCOL

TRIETHYLENE GLYCOL

n o 0 n e n o 0 n e n 0 o n e

DANGER! POISON
FLAMMABLE. VAPOR HARMFUL. MAY BE FATAL OR CAUSE BLINDNESS IF SWALLOW ED.

WARNING
CAUSES IRRITATION. HARMFUL OR FATAL IF SWALLOWED. HARMFUL IF INHALED OR ABSORBED THROUGH SKIN. AVOID CONTACT WITH EYES, SKIN, CLOTHING. AVOID BREATHING VAPOR.

WARNING
CAUSES IRRITATION IF INHALED OR ABSORBED THROUGH SKIN. AVOID CONTACT WITH EYES, SKIN, CLOTHING. AVOID BREATHING VAPOR.

Page 12 of 13

HAZARD COMMUNICATION PLAN PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - List of Commonly Used Labels (continued) Fire Reactivity Other

Chemical

Health

Target Organ Warning

DIGLYCOLAMINE (DGA) NORM (Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material)

n 1 o n e

DANGER! CORROSIVE
MATERIAL MAY CAUSE BURNS TO EYES AND SKIN. MAY CAUSE RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION AND CAN CAUSE DAMAGE. SEE NORM EHS PROGRAM FOR LABELING REQUIREMENTS

Page 13 of 13

FORKLIFTS AND INDUSTRIAL TRUCK SAFETY PROCEDURE 1. Only authorized employees shall operate forklifts. 2. All new forklifts shall meet design and construction requirements as established in the American National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.1-1969. 3. Modifications which affect capacity or safe operations shall not be performed without the manufacturers prior written approval. 4. All nameplates and markings shall be in place and maintained in a legible condition. 5. Only trucks authorized for the area of operation shall be used. 6. Only approved power-operated industrial trucks designated as EX shall be used in Class I, Division I areas. 7. Industrial trucks designated as DY, EE, or EX may be used in Class I, Division II areas. 8. No industrial trucks shall be operated in atmospheres containing hazardous concentrations of acetylene, butadiene, hydrogen, ethylene, or diethyl ether. 9. No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of a forklift, whether loaded or not. 10. The forks shall be fully lowered, controls neutralized, power shut off, and brakes set when the truck is left unattended. (See definition of unattended.) 11. Forklifts shall be fitted with an overhead guard for operator protection against falling objects. 12. When ascending or descending grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded trucks shall be driven with the load upgrade. 13. Trucks shall not be refueled while the engine is running. 14. Maintenance and safety inspections shall be conducted monthly and shall be documented. 15. Pre-use safety checks shall be conducted on a daily basis by the operator(s) of the forklift. Definitions Unattended A forklift/industrial truck is considered unattended when the operator is twentyfive (25) feet or more away or when the truck is out of his/her view. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.178 Powered Industrial Trucks. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B56.1 1969, American National Standard for Industrial Trucks, Part II.

Page 1 of 1

FIRE PROTECTION PROCEDURE Each facility shall prepare fire response plans for facilities and operations and communicate the actions required by these plans and the requirements of this policy to all affected personnel. Each facility shall identify persons who are expected to respond to fires and provide appropriate fire fighting training. 1. Provide adequate fire fighting training and equipment to enable authorized personnel to initiate rapid manual response actions against incipient stage fires. Only those persons who have been trained on the use of fire extinguishers and/or Class II standpipes or small hose systems are authorized to fight incipient stage fires. Personnel shall not attempt to extinguish any fire that has progressed beyond the incipient stage. 2. For fires that progress beyond the incipient stage, the Company will ensure that the shutdown systems, fire protection measures, and/or external emergency response resources arrangements are adequate and minimize the need for manual fire fighting. 3. Should the need be identified for Crosstex employees to conduct advanced fire fighting tactics for a specific facility, this policy shall be revised and a fire fighting Safety Policy developed to ensure comprehensive employee safety and training requirements are established. Definitions 1. Incipient Stage Fire A fire which is in the initial or beginning stage and which can be controlled or extinguished by portable fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe systems or small hose systems without the need for protective clothing or breathing apparatus. 2. Small Hose System A system of hoes ranging in diameter from 5/8 (1.6 cm) to 1 (3.8 cm) which is for the use of employees and which provides a means for the control and extinguishment of incipient stage fires. 3. Standpipe Systems a. Class I Standpipe System A 2 (6.3cm) hose connection for use by fire departments and those trained in handling heavy fire streams. b. Class II Standpipe System A 1 (3.8 cm) hose system which provides a means for the control or extinguishment of incipient stage fires. c. Class III Standpipe System A combined system of hose which is for use of employees trained in the use of hose operations and which is capable of furnishing effective water discharge during the more advanced stages of fire (beyond incipient stage) in the interior of workplaces. Hose outlets are available for both 1 (3.8 cm) and 2 (6.3 cm) hose. 4. Training The process of becoming proficient through instruction and hands-on practice in the safe operation of fire extinguishing equipment. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910 Subpart L Fire Protection Part 1910.155 Scope, Application and Definitions Part 1910.157 Fire Extinguishers

Page 1 of 1

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW PROCEDURE Crosstex Field Safety Review 1. Field Safety Review will be conducted by using an appropriate Field Safety Review questionnaire. An example questionnaire can be found in the Excel file called FEHSR in the Forms section of the CD. 2. Review Team members should record their findings on the questionnaire. The Review Team leader will compile the findings and issue a final draft report. 3. The final draft review action item list should be distributed to the applicable field / area Operations Supervisors/Management and associated Divisional Management for timely response to all findings. The Review Team will conduct a closing conference with the area Supervisor and applicable personnel to go over draft review findings and jointly develop a final action item list. 4. Once all findings have been closed, the original report should be filed at the field/area office with a copy forwarded to the corporate Legal Department and all other copies discarded. The review should be retained in compliance with Crosstex Energy Services Records Retention policy. Independent Contractor Safety Review 1. The Contractor Safety Review will be conducted by using an appropriate Contractor Safety Review questionnaire. An example questionnaire can be found in the Excel file called CEHSR in the Forms section of the CD. 2. Review Team members should record their findings on the questionnaire. The Review Team leader will compile the findings and issue a draft review report. 3. The Review Team will conduct a closing conference with the contractors management to go over draft review findings and jointly develop a final action item list. 4. The final review report and action item list will be submitted to the area Operations Superintendent / Manager and the Safety Department. 5. The review report will remain active in the applicable field/area office and in the Safety Department files until all findings and recommendations on the action item list are closed. 6. Once all findings have been closed, the original report should be filed in corporate Legal Department and all other copies discarded. The review should be retained in compliance with Crosstex Energy Services Retention policy. Review Types 1. Field Safety Reviews are periodic reviews conducted in each area by the Safety Department and Operations (field) personnel, Supervisors/Managers to self- monitor their safety performance. 2. Contractor Safety Review(s) conducted on an area as a single unit. These reviews are typically conducted by the Safety Department and area Operations (field) Supervisors/ Managers to provide an assessment of the contractors overall Safety compliance status.

Page 1 of 4

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW PROCEDURE (continued) Frequency and Planning 1. Frequency and planning of Field Safety Reviews shall be as follows: a. On a Company-wide basis one or more facilities shall be reviewed quarterly. b. The Field Safety Review schedule will be determined by the Supervisors/Manager in each area. 2. Frequency and planning of Contractor Safety Reviews shall be as follows: a. On a Company-wide basis, one or more Contractor Safety Review(s) shall be conducted quarterly, A Contractor Safety Review may be performed during work activity at a gas plant, treatment facility, pipeline facility, compressor station or other work site High risk or frequently used contractors of other sites in the area will be prioritized for review.

b. The Contractor Safety Review schedule will be determined by the Safety Department, in conjunction with Crosstex Divisional Management, Operations Managers/ Superintendents, Safety group in advance. Review Team Selection 1. The Supervisor/Manager (e.g. field Supervisor/Manager, plant supervisor/manager, etc.) will select the Field Safety Review Team members. 2. Manager/Supervisor will assign employees to be members of the Contractor Safety Review Team. Generally the review team members will be from the Divisional areas being reviewed and should include at least one member of the Safety Department. The Operations Supervisor/Manager will select one operations team member to act as the review team leader. Review Criteria 1. Review criteria or standards shall include, but are not limited to, applicable federal and state laws and regulations, accepted industry consensus standards, and Crosstex Energy Services Safety Program. 2. Due to regulatory differences, each area will be responsible for coordinating the review criteria and questions for its questionnaire. [See Forms FEHSR (Field) and CEHSR (Contractor) in the Forms Section of the CD.]

Page 2 of 4

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW PROCEDURE (continued) Review Process 1. Field Safety Review a. The area Supervisor/Manager will meet with the employee(s) selected to conduct the review to discuss the sites to be covered and the objectives of the review. b. The reviewer(s) will evaluate all relevant items on the Field EH&S questionnaire for the site being reviewed. (See Interview tab on FEHSR file in Forms Section of CD.) c. The Review Team members will utilize the questionnaire to conduct a review of field personnel and related written documentation, records, and standards as compared to observed field practices. d. Each team member will provide their review findings and recommendations to the review team leader who will compile the draft final review report. e. The Review Team will conduct a closing conference with the area Operations Supervisor/Manager and applicable personnel to go over draft review findings and jointly develop a final action item list. f. The review will be considered closed when all findings have either been corrected or justification for inaction has been documented. Findings requiring a facility shut- in may be deferred based on a determination made by the areas Operations Supervisor/ Management (e.g. area superintendent). However, such justification of such deferral will be provided in writing and the review will remain open until all outstanding items have been resolved. 2. Contractor Safety Review a. A brief opening conference of the review team and area Operations Supervisor/ Managers will be held prior to the review to discuss the objectives of the review. b. The Review Team members will utilize a questionnaire to conduct a review of contractor field personnel and contractors written documentation, records, and standards as compared to observed field practices. c. Each team member will provide their review findings and recommendations to the Review Team leader who will compile the draft review report. d. The Review Team will conduct a closing conference with the Contractors management to go over draft review findings and jointly develop a final action item list. e. The final review report and action item list will be submitted to the area Operations Superintendent/Manager and the Safety Department. f. The review will be considered closed when all findings (Action Items) have either been addressed or justification for inaction has been documented. Findings requiring the contractor to implement specific changes may be deferred based on a determination made by the areas management (e.g. area superintendent/manager). However, such justification of such deferral will be provided in writing and the review will remain open until all outstanding items have been resolved.

Page 3 of 4

FIELD AND CONTRACTOR SAFETY REVIEW PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions 1. Area Typically a grouping of sites which have been designated by management as an individual operating component (e.g. Pandale, Jonesville, etc.). 2. Review The evaluation of compliance with Company policies and Government Regulations and associated management systems. 3. Review Team Leader The person selected to organize the review, compile the results, and issue a final report. 4. Review Team Member A person who has been selected by Crosstex Management to participate in a Field or Contractor Safety Review. 5. Closure Occurs when all issues identified in the review report have been resolved. 6. Site A break-down within an operating area to an individual tank battery, compressor station, gas plant, warehouse, garage, etc. 7. Field Safety Review Periodic review(s) conducted in each area by Safety Department and area operating (field) supervisors/managers to self- monitor their safety performance. 8. Contractor Safety Review Contractor Safety Review(s) conducted on an area as a single unit. These reviews are typically conducted by the Safety Department and area operating (field) supervisors/managers to provide an assessment of the contractors overall Safety compliance status. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Section 1910.119 Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals

Page 4 of 4

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE Fall Protection for Unprotected Sides, Edges, and Wall Openings 1. Personnel working 6 feet or more above a lower level shall be protected from falling by the use of a guardrail system, personal fall arrest system, or safety net system. 2. Stairways, ramps, runways, or other walkways 4 feet or more above a lower level shall be protected by a guardrail system on all open sides. 3. Each employee working on, at, above, or near wall openings (including those with chutes attached) where the outside bottom edge is 4 feet or more above lower levels and the inside bottom edge is less than 39 inches above the walking/working surface shall be protected from falling by the use of a guardrail system, safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system. Personal Fall Arrest Systems 1. Components and Design a. Personal fall arrest systems include, but are not limited to, anchorage points, lifelines, lanyards, rope grab systems, deceleration devices, connecting devices, buckles, and body harnesses. b. Anchorage points used for attachment of fall protection components shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds per employee attached to it. (For anchorage points and attachment guidelines, see APPENDIX 1.) c. Dee-rings and snap hooks shall have a minimum tensile strength of at least 5,000 pounds. They shall be proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds without cracking, breaking, or taking permane nt deformation. d. All fall protection equipment including lanyards, vertical lifelines, and body harnesses shall meet ANSI Standard Z359.1-1992. This number shall be imprinted or otherwise permanently attached to the equipment to certify that it meets the minimum requirements of the standard. e. Snap-hooks shall be a locking type to prevent unintentional disengagement due to rollout of the snap-hook. Non- locking type snap-hooks are prohibited. f. Connectors shall meet ANSI Standard Z359.1-1992. They shall have a corrosionresistant finish and all surfaces and edges should be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system. g. When it is impractical to use a lanyard, a rope grab system can be used on a vertical lifeline. h. When vertical lifelines are used, each worker shall be attached to a separate lifeline. i. Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used under the supervision of a Qualified Person as part of a complete fall arrest system. Before designing a horizontal or vertical lifeline, contact the Safety Department.

Page 1 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) j. Ropes and straps used in lanyards, lifelines, and strength components of body harnesses shall be made from synthetic fibers or wire rope. k. When using a personal fall arrest system, it shall be rigged so that the following distance requirements are met:

l.

Free Fall Distance shall NOT exceed 6 ft. Deceleration Distance shall NOT exceed 3.5 ft. Total Fall Distance shall NOT allow contact with any lower level. (See APPENDIX 2)

Fall protection equipment shall be used only for personnel protection and shall not be used for the movement of materials.

m. Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to a significant fall or full load shall be immediately removed from service and not used again until the equipment has been inspected and determined by a Competent Person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse. Exception: Lanyards and body harnesses subjected to a fall or load shall be immediately discarded and not used again. n. Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached to a guardrail system (e.g., handrails) or to a hoist not acceptable as a suitable anchor point. o. Personnel shall be provided with a prompt rescue or the means to rescue themselves in the event of a fall. This may be accomplished by the use of ladders, scaffolds, work stands, cranes, overhead hoist or other acceptable means. p. Positioning devices, including ladder-climbing devices, shall be rigged so as not to permit a free-fall of more than 2 feet. 2. Safe Usage a. Anytime a worker is working in an area where there is a potential to fall 6 feet or more (except when scaling ladders less than 20 feet), approved types of fall protection equipment shall be used. This includes, but is not limited to, a body harness and a lifeline, lanyard, rope grab, self-retracting lifeline, deceleration device. NOTE: Positioning devices (e.g. body belts) shall not be used for fall protection. NOTE: When working outside of railings and over water, both fall arrest equipment and a personal floatation device must be worn.

Page 2 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) b. The maximum free fall distance of 6 feet shall never be exceeded, as this could exceed the equipment specifications and cause a greater than acceptable arresting force on the worker. Therefore, for a six foot lanyard, the tie-off point shall be located above the lanyards connection point to the body harness and determined in accordance with APPENDIX 2. If it is necessary to tie-off to a lower point, an adjustable or shorter lanyard shall be used with the competent persons approval. (Lanyards shall not be modified.) c. Personnel using a personal fall arrest system shall practice 100% tie-off (e.g., being protected from falls at all times). This can be achieved by use of a double strap lanyard, a self-retracting lifeline or other approved means. d. Only shock absorbing lanyards should be used. (Exception: shock absorbing lanyards shall not be used with a self-retracting lifeline.) e. Special consideration should be given to the strength of anchorage points. Questions as to the stability of an anchorage point shall be directed to a Competent Person. (See Guidelines for Suitable Anchorage Points APPENDIX 1.) f. Knots in lifelines or lanyards can reduce its strength up to 50% and shall not be permitted. g. Tie-offs where the line passes over or around sharp or rough edges can damage or reduce the strength of a lanyard or lifeline and therefore, shall be avoided. A lanyard shall never be tied back into itself, unless it is specifically designed to do so. A tie-off adapter strap should be utilized as an anchorage point when anchoring to structural members or piping. 3. Inspections a. Personal fall arrest systems, i.e., full body harnesses, lanyards and connectors shall be inspected by the person using it prior to each use. Any defective components shall be immediately removed from service, tagged and discarded. Replacement components should be ordered through the employees supervisor in consultation with the Safety Department. b. Personal fall arrest systems, i.e., full body harnesses, lanyards and connectors shall be inspected by a competent person using the Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist (See CD for Form). These inspections shall be conducted every 6 months or after any event that could affect their safe use and the inspection shall be documented on the checklist. If defects are found in the equipment, it shall be immediately taken out of service, tagged and discarded or repaired by the manufacturer. The manufacturers life expectancy of each piece of equipment shall not be exceeded.

Page 3 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Guardrails, Nets, and Floor Openings and Covers 1. Guardrails This section is intended to assist field personnel with recognizing the approximate design and appropriate use of guardrails. If field personnel identify a need to have guardrails designed, they shall contact their Facilities Engineering Representative for assistance. a. A standard railing shall consist of top rail, mid-rail, and posts, and shall have a vertical height of approximately 42 inches from the upper surface of the top rail to the walking/working surface. The mid-rail shall be positioned approximately halfway between the top rail and the walking/working surface. b. Guardrails shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds in any direction on any point of the top rail. c. Toeboards shall also be installed when there is a possibility that falling materials may cause a hazard to personnel or equipment at a lower level. Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4 inches high with a maximum clearance from the floor of 1/4 of an inch. d. When vertical members are used in place of mid-rails, they cannot be spaced more than 19 inches apart. e. Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced to prevent injury to an employee from punctures or lacerations and to prevent snagging of clothing. f. Steel banding or plastic banding shall not be used as top rails or mid-rails. g. In the event that a guardrail has been temporarily removed, chains or ropes (wire, synthetic or fiber) capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds in any direction shall be extended across the opening to protect workers from a fall hazard. The chain or rope should be taut and flagged off at not more than 6- foot intervals with highvisibility material. h. When guardrails are used at a hoisting area or any other area that would require the periodical removal of the guardrail to allow for work to be completed, a removable guardrail shall be placed across the opening when work is not taking place. 2. Nets Safety nets require preplanning. Consult with the Safety Department prior to using safety nets. 3. Floor Openings and Covers - This section is intended to assist field personnel with recognizing the approximate design and appropriate use of floor opening covers. If field personnel identify a need to have a cover designed, they shall contact their supervisor for assistance. a. When a perma nent floor opening is not in use, it shall be closed with a cover, or a guardrail shall be provided along all unprotected edges. b. Temporary floor openings shall be guarded with a cover, guardrail, or a continuous attendant.

Page 4 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) c. When guardrails are used around floor openings for the passage of materials, the opening shall be guarded on two sides by permanent guardrails. Two sides may have removable guardrails to allow for the passage of materials. d. When guardrails are used around floor openings which are used as points of access (such as ladder ways), they shall be provided with a gate or be offset in such a way that a person could not walk directly into the opening. e. Floor opening covers should be capable of supporting, without failure, at least twice the weight of the workers, materials, and equipment that may be imposed on the cover at any one time. f. Floor covers shall be obviously marked with the words HOLE or COVER. g. All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent accidental displacement by the wind, equipment, or workers. Fixed Industrial Stairs - This section is intended to assist field personnel with recognizing the approximate design and appropriate use of fixed industrial stairs. If field personnel identify a need to have fixed industrial stairs designed, they shall contact their supervisor for assistance. 1. Fixed stairs shall be provided for access from one structure level to another when operations require regular travel between the two levels, or if the carrying of tools or equipment by hand is normally required. 2. Riser height and tread width shall be reasonably uniform throughout any flight of stairs including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs. 3. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosing shall be of a non-slip finish. 4. Stairways shall have an angle of 30 - 50 degrees to the horizontal. 5. If any component of a stairway (i.e., a step, guardrail, tread, nosing, etc.) is damaged and will prevent safe usage, the top and bottom of the stairway should be blocked off and/or flagged. The stairway should not be used until the problem is fixed. 6. When ascending or descending a stairway, the following safety precautions should be used: a. Always place at least one hand on the guardrail/handrail at all times. b. Never carry anything up or down the stairs that obstructs vision or requires both hands. c. Never run up or down a stairway.

Page 5 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Ladders This section is intended to acquaint field personnel with hazards associated with portable ladders. 1. Design and Use - This section is intended to assist personnel with recognizing the appropriate design and proper use of ladders. a. All single and extension ladders and stepladders shall be made of a nonconductive material such as fiberglass. Wood and metal ladders are prohibited except when approved by the PIC for limited use when not in proximity to electrical equipment. b. Ladders should not be painted nor have additional stickers placed on them that may hide defects. c. Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be clear of splinters, sharp edges, burrs, or projections that may be a hazard. d. When ladders are placed by doors, the door should be locked or blocked off. The area around ladders placed in high traffic areas should be blocked off. e. Ladders with defects, including but not limited to, broken rungs or steps, cracked or split side-rails, and faulty or defective construction shall not be used. f. Never exceed the manufacturers load capacity rating for the ladder. Refer to the manufacturers instructions and information provided on each ladder. g. Tools or other equipment should never be carried by hand, up or down a ladder, but raised or lowered by a rope or carried on a tool belt. h. Always keep both hands on the side rails of the ladder when ascending or descending. i. Keep three points of contact with the ladder at all times, either one foot and two hands or two feet and one hand.

j. Ladders should be equipped with non-slip bases, feet or cleats when there is a hazard for slipping. k. Ladder rungs or steps should be kept clean and free from oil or grease. l. Single ladders longer than 30 feet and extension ladders longer than 60 feet shall not be used.

m. When feasible, all single or extension ladders shall be tied-off to prevent movement anytime they are standing upright and shall have secure footing. NOTE: A second person should secure the ladder during the initial climbing and tying-off of the ladder.

Page 6 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) n. The horizontal distance from the feet of the ladder to the equipment or supporting structure shall be the vertical distance from the floor to the ladders point of contact with the equipment or supporting structure (see diagram below). The One -Quarter Rule or 4-to-1 Ratio: The bottom of the ladder must be one foot away from the resting point for every four feet of the structures height to the point where the ladder rests against it. The further distance the ladder is from the base of the building, the longer the ladder must be to reach the same height.

o. Extension ladders should extend 3 feet above the point of contact with the equipment or supporting structure when personnel are to climb onto the equipment or structure. p. Extension ladders shall have an overlap between its two sections. This overlap length shall be 1 foot of overlap distance for every 12 feet of working ladder length. q. Stepladders shall be no longer than 20 feet and shall have metal spreading devices. r. Never progress past the second rung from the top of a stepladder or the third rung from the top of an extension ladder. s. Always make sure that ladders are steady and placed on a level surface.

Page 7 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Inspections a. Personnel using a ladder shall conduct a visual inspection before each use. They should make sure that the ladder is sturdy, free from cracks, and all hardware is in good condition. Fiberglass ladders should be stored out of the sunlight or covered to protect them from deterioration from ultraviolet light. Report any problems found with ladders to the facility PIC. b. A Competent Person shall inspect portable ladders using the Ladder Inspection Checklist (See CD for Form) at least every 6 months or after any event that could affect their safe use. If defects are found in the ladder, the ladder will be taken out of service and tagged as unusable until the ladder has been repaired. If the ladder is not capable of being repaired, it shall be discarded or destroyed. c. Each portable ladder shall have an inspection tag attached and shall be punched every 6 months to verify visual inspections have been made. Fixed Ladders 1. Cages shall be provided on all fixed ladders longer than 20 feet unless: a. The ladder is equipped with a ladder climbing device, b. The ladder is equipped with a self- retracting lifeline, or c. Each section of the ladder does not exceed 20 feet and has offset landing platforms with self-closing gates at each ladder transition. 2. Fall protection is required if working from a ladder over six feet above a lower level. 3. For the details related to design, fabrication and installation of fixed ladders, refer to OSHA 1910.27, Fixed Ladders, or consult with the Safety Department for more information. 4. Inspections (Same as for portable ladders see Section 5.b). Scaffolding This section is intended to assist field personnel with recognizing the approximate design and appropriate use of scaffolding. If field personnel identify a need to have a scaffold erected or repaired, they shall contact their Supervisor for assistance. Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the supervision and direction of a competent person qualified in scaffold erection, moving, dismantling or alteration. Only experienced and trained employees selected for such work by the competent person shall perform such activities. 1. Scaffold working surfaces 6 feet or more above the ground shall have standard guardrails with toeboards on all open sides. 2. Scaffold working surfaces 4 feet or more above the ground that are less than 45 inches wide shall also have standard guardrails. NOTE: When it is not feasible to use standard guardrails on scaffolding, personal fall arrest systems may be used in lieu of gua rdrails.

Page 8 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 3. The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose bricks, or concrete blocks shall not be used to support scaffolds or planks. 4. Scaffolds should be secured against unintended movement. 5. The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement. 6. An access ladder or equivalent safe access shall be provided to scaffold working surface. 7. Scaffolds shall be capable of carrying without failure at least 4 times their intended load. 8. All planking shall be Scaffold Grades or equivalent as recognized by approved grading rules for the species of wood used. 9. All planking shall extend over their end supports not less than 6 inches or more than 12 inches. 10. Slippery conditions on scaffolds shall be eliminated as soon as possible after they have been identified. 11. No welding, burning, riveting, or open flame work shall be performed on any staging suspended by a fiber or synthetic rope. Only treated or protected fiber or synthetic ropes shall be used for or near any work involving the use of corrosive substances or chemicals. 12. Chains, wire, synthetic, or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension shall be capable of supporting at least 6 times the rated load. 13. Any scaffolding damaged or weakened from any cause shall be removed from service and immediately repaired or replaced. Lifting of Personnel This section includes the fall protection requirements for aerial lifts. (This includes bucket trucks, extendable boom platforms, articulating boom platforms, scissor lifts and manbaskets.) Additional information on aerial lift safety is provided in APPENDIX 3. 1. A body harness shall be worn with a lanyard attached to the boom, basket, tub or platform when working from an aerial lift. The lanyard shall be attached in a manner that prevents a free- fall of more than 4 feet. Attachment to adjacent structures, poles and/or equipment is prohibited. Any fall protection equipment, including body harnesses, lanyards, and lifelines used to arrest an actual employee fall, shall be destroyed and replaced immediately following an incident. 2. Employees shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket. Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket. Planks, ladders, or other devices shall NOT be placed in, or on top of the platform or guardrail to gain greater height.

Page 9 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Workers shall NOT work from aerial work platforms when: a. Exposed to extreme weather conditions (thunderstorms, heavy rain, extreme heat or cold) unless provisions have been made to ensure protection and safety of the workers. b. Winds exceed 25 miles per hour. 4. Climbers (pole climbing equipment) shall NOT be worn while performing work from an aerial device. The risk of falling while climbing in or out of the basket is too great. 5. Employees shall no t be permitted to transfer from bucket to any other structure. Training 1. Training must be provided initially and periodically for all employees whose work operations may involve working on an elevated working surface. 2. A training program shall be provided for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. The program should enable them to recognize when fall hazards exist and will instruct them in the procedures to minimize these hazards. 3. Competent Person training should be provided to supervisory or other personnel as deemed appropriate to assist with the selection and safe use of personal fall arrest systems. 4. Retraining shall be provided for all personnel whenever there is a change in assignments that may introduce employees to a new fall hazard or to a significant change in equipment. 5. Retraining shall be provided whenever a periodic review reveals that there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures. 6. The Safety Department shall maintain records of each employee's name and number and the date(s) of training. Definitions 1. Anchor Point Refers to a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or deceleration devices. 2. Body Harness Straps that will secure about the worker in a manner that will distribute the force of a fall over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders, with the means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system. 3. Connector A device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together.

Page 10 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Competent Person A person who has been trained as a Competent Person in accordance with this Safety Program and who is capable of identifying existing and predictable workplace hazards or working conditions which may be hazardous or dangerous to employees. A competent person has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate these hazards and conditions. NOTE: Different qualifications are required for Competent Persons in the areas of ladders, scaffolds and fall protection systems. 5. Deceleration Distance The additional vertical distance, which a falling person travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall distance before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employees harness attachment point at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of deceleration device during a fall and the location of that point of attachment after the employee comes to a complete stop. 6. Deceleration Device Any mechanism, such as a rope grab, ripstitch lanyard, speciallywoven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard, automatic retracting lanyard/lifeline, etc., which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on a worker during a fall arrest. 7. Extension Ladder A non-self-supporting portable ladder consisting of two or more sections traveling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length adjustment. Its size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the two sections. 8. Floor Hole An opening, gap, or void measuring less than 12 inches but more than 2 inches in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface through which materials but not persons may fall. 9. Floor Opening An opening, gap or void measuring 12 inches or more in its least dimension, in any floor, roof, or other walking/working surface through which persons may fall. 10. Free Fall The act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. 11. Free Fall Distance The vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employees harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur. 12. Guardrail A barrier capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds in any direction, erected to prevent workers from falling to a lower level. 13. Handrail A single bar or pipe supported by brackets from a wall or partition, as on a stairway or ramp, to furnish persons with a handhold in case of tripping. 14. Lanyard A flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end for attaching to the body harness and the deceleration device, or anchor point. Page 11 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 15. Lifeline A component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage point at one end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline) or for connection to anchorage points at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage. 16. Locking Type Snap-Hook A connector consisting of a hook-shaped member with a selfclosing, self- locking keeper which remains closed and locked until it is unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection. This is sometimes referred to as a double locking snap- hook. 17. Opening A gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which personnel can fall to a lower level. 18. Personal Fall Arrest System A system used to arrest a worker in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage point, connectors, body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combination of these. 19. Positioning Device A body belt or body harness rigged to allow a worker to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, with both hands free while leaning. 20. Qualified Person A person who, by training and/or experience, is knowledgeable with the construction and operation of the equipment and hazards involved, and is knowledgeable with the requirements of this standard. 21. Rail The side members of a ladder joined at intervals by either rungs or steps. 22. Rise The vertical distance from the top of a tread to the next higher tread. 23. Rope Grab Deceleration device that travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam level locking, or both. 24. Scaffold Any temporary elevated platform and its supporting structure used for supporting workmen, materials, or both. 25. Self-Retracting Lifeline or Lanyard A deceleration device containing a drum-wound line that can be slowly extracted from, or retracted on to, the drum under slight tension during normal worker movement, and whic h, after the onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall. 26. Single Ladder A non-self-supporting, portable ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of one section. The length of its side rail determines its length. 27. Toeboard A low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide personnel protection from falling objects. 28. Tread Width The horizontal distance from the front to the back of a tread, including nosing, when used.

Page 12 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) 29. Walking/Working Surface Includes any surface, whether horizontal or vertical, on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, form-work and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which workers must be located in order to perform their job duties. 30. Work Area - The portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed. Refere nces Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.21 - .28 Subpart D Walking/Working Surfaces. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.66 Powered Platforms for Building Maintenance, Appendix C - Fall Arrest Systems. Code of Federal Regulatio ns, Title 29 Part 1910.67 Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Platforms. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1926.451 Subpart L Scaffolding. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1926.500 - .503 Subpart M Fall Protection. ANSI Standard Z359.1-1992 Safety Belts, harnesses, Lanyards, Lifelines & Drop Lines for Construction and Industry.

Page 13 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Guidelines for Suitable Anchorage Points Anchor points used in conjunction with personal fall arrest systems (safety harness and lanyard) are very critical to the overall protection provided. Workers should use good judgment when attaching their lanyard to an anchorage point. The following guidelines should assist the worker with their choice of anchorage points: Handrails and guardrails are not proper anchorage points and shall not be used as such. Facility support beams, e.g., H-beams and I-beams, can be used for anchorage points. Lanyards should not be wrapped around beams. The use of ANSI approved webbing tie-off straps with approved D-rings is the preferred method. Care should be taken to protect lanyards and straps from sharp edges. Sound facility piping with appropriate wall thickness and properly supported is acceptable for use as an anchorage point. The following table shows the maximum length between supports allowed for the corresponding size pipe to support 5,000 pounds. The lengths between supports listed in this table were calculated for one person and shall not be used to support more than one person at a time. The information in the table below is to be used only as a guide to help determine the strength and suitability of piping used as anchor points. Always tie-off to the strongest anchor point possible. The maximum length between supports, stated in the chart below, should never be exceeded. Always tie-off as close as possible to the pipe support bracket. Nominal Pipe Size (Inch) 1 2 3 4 6 8 Outside Diameter (Inch) 1.315 2.375 3.5 4.5 6.625 8.625 SCH40 Wall Thickness (Inch) 0.133 0.154 0.216 0.237 0.28 0.322 Length Between Supports (Feet) Do not use! 1 3 6 15 31

This table assumes the pipe is simply supported, made of low carbon steel and operating at its rated pressure, and that the allowable stress in the pipe is 26 ksi based on an allowable ? increase for temporary loading per ANSI B31.3.

Page 14 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 2 - Fall Clearance Requirements

1 2 3

6 ft

6 ft 10 ft

3.5 + .5 ft

15 ft

5 ft

6 ft. Free Fall + 3.5 ft. Deceleration Distance + .5 Harness Effect + 5 ft. D-Ring to Heel Distance = 15 Total Clearance Required

Page 15 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - Use of Aerial Lifts, Bucket Trucks, and Manbaskets Equipment 1. All vehicle-mounted platforms, including extendible boom platforms, vertical towers and combinations thereof, shall be in compliance with ANSI A92.2-1969. Aerial lifts may not be field- modified except by manufacturer. Any repairs must be made using original equipment, manufacturer parts. 2. All operating instructions issued by the manufacturer shall be followed at all times. A copy of the operating instructions shall be attached to the bucket of the lift. 3. Manufacturer specified load ratings shall not be exceeded. 4. Boom- mounted telescoping and rotating aerial platforms shall NOT be used as a crane (objects slung below the basket). General Rules 1. Only authorized personnel, properly trained according to operating instructions, shall be allowed to use an aerial lift. Documentation of such training shall be maintained. 2. Lift controls shall be clearly marked and tested each day prior to use to verify proper and safe working conditions. This inspection is to determine that the equipment is in satisfactory condition or identify any damage or defects. This shall include all operational controls, which shall be in proper functioning condition. Operators shall report all discrepancies to their supervisors. 3. Articulating boom and extendible boom platforms shall have dual controls, one control located in the operator basket, the other being located for use at ground level. Controls shall be readily marked with the lower control unit serving as the override. 4. Operate all controls slowly to ensure smooth platform movement. 5. When the lift is occupied, ground level controls shall not be used without the operator's permission except in emergency circumstances. 6. Operators shall consider the job to be performed and shall evaluate the jobsite location for potential hazards. This equipment shall not be operated within 10 feet of an energized, high voltage source. The operation of aerial devices/work platforms OVER energized, highvoltage sources of any sort is prohibited at all times. Equipment may not be operated within ten feet of overhead high-voltage lines. 7. The work site for the bucket truck shall be half the length of the boom and shall be clearly identified by the use of signs, pylons, warning tape, etc.

Page 16 of 17

FALL PROTECTION AND ELEVATED WORKING SURFACES PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - Use of Aerial Lifts, Bucket Trucks, and Manbaskets (continued) 8. When in use, brakes shall be set and outriggers, if equipped, must be positioned fully extended and on level solid footing, with the wheels chocked. NOTE: For moving platforms, appropriate measures should be taken to ensure that the jobsites surface is stable and will support the equipment and that there are no hazardous irregularities or accumulation of debris that might cause a moving platform to overturn. Survey the route to be traveled, checking for overhead obstructions, traffic, holes in the pavement, ground, or shoulder, ditches, slope of road, etc. Operation of these devices on inclined surfaces shall NOT exceed manufacturers ratings. Wheel chocks shall be used on inclined surfaces. 9. Do NOT attempt to raise platform/basket beyond its rated maximum height or reach. 10. Aerial baskets, tubs or platforms shall NOT be supported by, or attached to, any adjacent structures. 11. Never leave this equipment unattended if you have stopped it on a ramp, grade or incline until you have chocked at least one tire. 12. Do NOT use an aerial device as a welding ground. Do NOT weld on an aerial device without first disconnecting both positive and negative battery terminals. Refer to manufacturer's equipment manual. Moving 1. Aerial lifts shall not be moved when the boom is elevated or the basket is occupied unless the lift has been specifically designed for such operation. When moving scissors lift-type platforms, operators shall first position themselves on-board the platform, then conduct all moving operations from that position. 2. Prior to moving aerial lift vehicles, the ladder bucket and outriggers shall be stowed in place, with lifting device in a zero energy state. 3. Where moving vehicles or pedestrian traffic is present, flags, signs, traffic cones or other means of traffic control shall mark the work area around the aerial equipment. 4. When moving this equipment forward, do not engage the REVERSE switch until the vehicle has come to a complete stop. Use the REVERSE only as an emergency measure should the equipment continue to crawl after releasing the stop switch. Use the FORWARD only as an emergency measure should the equipment continue to crawl after releasing the stop switch. Caution: Do not use either of these emergency measures if doing so will endanger anyone in the vicinity. 5. A valid Commercial Driver's License (CDL) shall be required to drive the Bucket Truck, if the GVWR is over 26,000 pounds.

Page 17 of 17

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM General 1. Underground Installation a. The estimated location of all utility installations (including Crosstex Energy Services operated installations), such as sewer, telephone, fuel, electric, water lines or any other underground installations that reasonably may be expected to be encountered during excavation work, must be determined and located prior to opening an excavation. The cooperation of the utility company or owners of underground installations shall be sought in order to establish the location of utility underground installations. b. Where available, a one-call system shall be utilized at least 48 hours prior to the anticipated start of work. c. In open excavations, underground installations must be protected, supported or removed as necessary to safeguard employees. The Lockout/Tagout Program must be followed were applicable. d. Cathodic protection lines should be located and protected when excavating, to protect the integrity of the cathodic protection system. When it is necessary to remove cathodic protection lines, the responsible party should be notified. 2. Ingress and Egress a. The ingress and egress of equipment from excavations must be accomplished via earthen ramps unless structural ramps are used which comply with one of the following requirements: The structural ramp is designed by a registered professional engineer qualified in structural design. A pre- manufactured ramp is used which is installed according to the manufacturers specifications.

b. A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress must be located in trench excavations that are four (4) feet or more in depth so that adequate egress is located at least every twenty- five (25) feet. The means of personnel access and egress shall be determined by a Competent Person. If a ladder is used, it must extend three (3) feet above the excavation surface and be properly secured.

c. The slope of the access/egress shall be determined by the Competent Person 3. Exposure to Vehicular Traffic a. Personnel exposed to public vehicular traffic must wear warning vests or other suitable garments marked with or made of reflecting or high visibility material, (e.g. vests worn by highway road crews).

Page 1 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) b. The Competent Person or task supervisor should determine whe n warning vests are required. c. Crosstex Energy Services will supply employees with warning vests when required. 4. Warning System for Mobile Equipment - When mobile equipment is operated adjacent to an excavation, or when such equipment is required to approach the edge of an excavation, and the operator does not have a clear and direct view of the excavation, a warning system such as barricades, hand or mechanical signals, or stop logs must be utilized. If possible, the grade should be away from the excavation (e.g. the operator of a backhoe would have to travel uphill to the edge of the excavation). 5. Exposure to Falling Loads - Personnel are not permitted underneath loads handled by lifting or digging equipment. 6. Hazardous Atmospheres a. Where an oxygen-deficient or other hazardous atmosphere exists or could reasonably be expected to exist, atmospheric monitoring must be conducted before employees enter excavations that are four (4) or more feet in depth. b. Employees shall not be exposed to hazardous atmospheres in excavations, are defined as: Oxygen content less than 19.5% or greater than 23.5%. Concentration of flammable gas of 10% or greater of the lower explosive limit (LEL). Airborne combustible dust at concentration that meets or exceeds 10% of its LEL. Atmospheres in which personnel could be exposed at or above the permissible exposure limit (PEL) and/or the short-term exposure limit (STEL) of any toxic air contaminant.

c. Engineering controls, such as ventilation, shall be utilized to prevent employee exposure to the hazardous atmospheres where required. Where engineering controls are not feasible or do not eliminate oxygen-deficient or toxic air contaminant levels, respirators may be utilized in accordance with Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Standard and Confined Space Entry Standard. 7. Emergency Rescue Equipment/Personnel a. Rescue provisions shall be required for excavations 5 feet or deeper that are sloped steeper than 1 vertical to 1 horizontal (1v:1.5h) unless they are supported and shielded with a trench box. b. Personnel must wear a full-body harness, with a lifeline securely attached, when entering excavations that are permit-required confined spaces, or when otherwise determined by the Competent Person. Lifelines must be separate from any line used to handle materials.

Page 2 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Each entrants lifeline shall be attended by personnel physically capable of removing entrants from the excavation or attached to an approved mechanical retrieval device. A fire extinguisher must be available in excavations where the possibility of a flammable vapor or gas release exists.

c. If conditions warrant, as determined by the completion of the Competent Person Excavation Inspection Safety Checklist form, a Confined Space Permit shall be completed and all requirements of the Confined Space Permit shall be followed. 8. Water Accumulation Hazard a. Precautions must be taken to protect employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation in excavations. Precautions could include water removal and/or use of a safety harness and lifeline. If water equipment is used, the equipment must be continuously monitored by a Competent Person. b. If excavation work interrupts the natural drainage of surface water, diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means must be used to prevent surface water from entering the excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area adjacent to the excavation. 9. Stability of Adjacent Structures - Where the stability of adjoining buildings, walls or other structures is endangered by excavation operations, support systems such as bracing or underpinning must be utilized to ensure the stability of such structures for the protection of employees. Excavations underneath the level or footing of any foundation or retaining wall that could pose a hazard to employees must have a support system such as underpinning. 10. Protection From Loose Rock and Soil a. Adequate protection shall be provided to protect employees from loose rock or soil that could pose a hazard by falling or rolling from an excavation face. Such protection could consist of removing loose material or installation of barricades at intervals as necessary on the face to stop and contain falling material. b. All equipment and excavated material spoils must be kept at least two (2) feet from the edge of excavations when personnel entry is required. 11. Inspection a. A daily inspection of excavations, adjacent areas, and protective systems must be made by a Competent Person when personnel entry is required. The inspection must determine the classification of the soil (See Appendix 1) and investigation for evidence of a situation that could result in possible cave- ins, indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions. The inspection must be conducted prior to the start of work and as needed throughout the shift. Inspections shall also be made after every rainstorm or other hazard- increasing occurrence. Inspections are to be conducted using the Competent Person Excavation Safety Checklist.

Page 3 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) b. For excavations in which personnel entry is not required, the first section of Competent Person Excavation Safety Checklist may be reviewed prior to digging. c. If in the judgment of the Competent Person, a hazardous cond ition exists, such as possible cave- ins or hazardous atmospheres, then the exposed employees must leave the hazardous area until precautions are taken to ensure their safety. 12. Fall Protection a. If personnel or equipment are to cross over excavations, then walkways or bridges with standard guardrails must be installed. b. Accessible points (e.g. road crossings) along an unattended excavation must be barricaded or backfilled in order to protect personnel. Protective Systems 1. Sloping and Benching a. Sloping and/or benching shall be the preferred protective system for protecting personnel in excavations. b. Soil classification in accordance with APPENDIX 1 is required for all excavations prior to personnel entry. c. Sloping and benching systems must be determined in accordance with Appendix 2 unless one of the following conditions is met: There is no personnel entry into the excavation. Excavations are made entirely in stable rock. Excavations are less than five (5) feet in depth and examination by a Competent Person provides no indication of a potential cave-in. Excavations are sloped at an angle not steeper than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical (1 H:1V) (34 degrees measured from the horizontal).

2. Trench Box - Where sloping and benching are not feasible protective systems (as in the case of restricted right-of-ways or weak soil conditions), a metal pre-engineered trench box may be used. The trench box must be installed according to the manufacturers specifications and when installed have at least 18 inches extended above the top of the vertical side of an excavation (see APPENDIX 2). 3. Shoring - Approved shoring may be used when sloping/benching or trench boxes are not feasible. For specific shoring specifications, refer to the following OSHA guidelines: a. Timber Shoring for Trenches. b. Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches. c. Alternatives to Timber Shoring.

Page 4 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) 4. Professional Engineer Design - Protective systems for excavations must be designed by a registered professional engineer qualified in soil engineering in the following two cases: a. Excavation is greater than 20 feet in depth. b. Requirements of Sloping and Benching or Trench Box above cannot be met. Training 1. Training must be provided initially and periodically for all employees whose work operations may involve entering an excavation. 2. Initial training will be required for each Competent Person. 3. At a minimum, refresher training shall be provided whenever a periodic inspection reveals that there are deviations from these procedures or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of these procedures. Definitions 1. Bell-Bottom Pier Holes (Bell Hole) - A type of shaft or footing excavation in which the bottom is made larger than the cross section above to form a bell shape. 2. Benching - A method of protecting employees from cave- ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal levels or steps, usually with vertical or near vertical surfaces between levels. 3. Company Controlled Excavation An excavation under the direct control of an onsite Crosstex Energy Services Person- in-Charge (PIC). 4. Competent Person - A person who has been trained as a Competent Person in accordance with this Safety Program and who is capable of identifying existing and predictable workplace hazards or working conditions which may be hazardous or dangerous to employees. A Competent Person has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate these hazards and conditions. For the purpose of this standard, the Competent Person must have specific training in, and be knowledgeable about: a. Soils analysis b. Use of protective systems c. Requirements of OSHAs Excavation Standard and Crosstex Energy Services Safety Programs. 5. Excavation - Any man- made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by earth removal. Most excavations four (4) feet or deeper are typically considered as Confined Spaces. See Crosstex Energy Services Confined Space Entry Standard for additional guidance. 6. Faces or Sides - The vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of excavation work.

Page 5 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Definitions (continued) 7. Hazardous Atmosphere - An atmosphere which exposes employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self rescue (that is, escape unaided from a confined space), injury or acute illness from one or more of the following causes: a. Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10% of its lower explosive limit (LEL) b. Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds 10% of its LEL c. Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5% (oxygen deficient) or above 23.5% (oxygen enriched) d. Atmospheric concentration of any hazardous substance in excess of established occupational exposure limits. 8. Person-In-Charge (PIC) The lead Crosstex Energy Services Representative on-site who has the overall responsibility for a facility, project, work crew or work area. 9. Public Vehicular Traffic - Includes all traffic not associated with Crosstex Energy Services normal operations. Contractors and others, who normally work at a location, are not considered public vehicular traffic. 10. Sloping - A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by tapering the sides of an excavation to prevent cave- ins. The angle of incline required to prevent a cave- in varies with differences in such factors as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and application of surcharge loads (e.g. weight of equipment, materials, etc. on excavation bank). 11. Stop Logs - A method used to alert equipment operators to the proximity of an excavation. The system usually consists of barriers (e.g. timbers or other similar materials) which are placed on the ground surface to prevent vehicles or other equipment from approaching the edge of an excavation. 12. Structural Ramp - A ramp built of steel or wood; ramps made of soil or rock are not considered structural ramps. 13. Trench - A narrow excavation (in relation to its length) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1926.650 & Part 1926.652, Excavations

Page 6 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Soil Classification 1. Cemented Soil - Soil in which the particles are held together by a chemical agent, such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand-size sample cannot be crushed into powder or individual soil particles by finger pressure. 2. Cohesive Soil - Clay (fine grained soil) or soil with a high clay content, which has cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can be excavated with vertical side-slopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil is hard to break up when dry, and exhibits significant Cohesion When Submerged. Cohesive soils include clay silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. 3. Dry Soil - Soil that does not exhibit visible signs of moisture content. 4. Fissured - Soil material that has a tendency to break along definite planes of fracture with little resistance or a material that exhibits open cracks, such as tension cracks, in an exposed surface. 5. Granular Soil - Gravel, sand, or silt (coarse grained soil) with little or no clay content. Granular soil has no cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. 6. Layered System - Two or more distinctly different soil or rock types arranged in layers. Micaceous (readily separable) seams or weakened planes in rock or shale are considered layered. 7. Moist Soil - A condition in which a soil looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into small diameter threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that contains some cohesive material will exhibit signs of cohesion between particles. 8. Plastic (Plasticity) - A property of a soil which allows the soil to be deformed or molded without cracking or appreciable volume change. 9. Saturated Soil - A soil in which the voids are filled with water. Saturation does not require flow. Saturation, or near saturation, is necessary for the proper use of instruments such as a pocket penetrometer or sheer vane. 10. Soil Classification System - A method of categorizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, in decreasing order of stability. The categories are determined based on an analysis of the properties and performance characteristics of the deposits and the characteristics of the deposits and the environmental conditions of exposure. 11. Stable Rock - Natural solid mineral material that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while exposed. 12. Submerged Soil - Soil which is underwater or is free seeping.

Page 7 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Soil Classification (continued) 13. Unconfined Compressive Strength - The load per unit area at which a soil will fail in compression. It can be determined by laboratory testing or estimated in the field, using a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetration tests, and other methods. 14. Wet Soil - Soil that contains significantly more moisture than moist soil, but in such a range of values that cohesive material will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Granular material that would exhibit cohesive properties when moist will lose those cohesive properties when wet. 15. Type A Soil: a. Cohesive soils with an unconfined, compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square foot (tsf) or greater. b. Cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. c. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. However, no soil is Type A if: The soil is fissured. The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects. The soil has been previously disturbed. The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or greater. The material is sub ject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less stable material.

16. Type B Soil: a. Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf but less than 1.5 tsf. b. Granular cohesionless soils including: angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. c. Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be classed as Type C soil. d. Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation requirements for Type A, but is fissured or subject to vibration. e. Dry rock that is not stable. f. Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B.

Page 8 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 1 - Soil Classification (continued) 17. Type C Soil: a. Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf or less. b. Granular soils including gravel, sand, and loamy sand. c. Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping. d. Submerged rock that is not stable. e. Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation or a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or steeper. For additional information on soil classification requirements and soil classification methods, visit the OSHA web-site at: http://www.osha.gov/

Page 9 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 2 - Sloping and Benching All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio. Excavations made in Type A soil. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) :1.

20 Max. 3/4

Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) :1

12 Max. 1 1/2

All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

20 Max.
5 Max. 4 Max.

1 3/4

All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum vertical side of 3 feet.

1 8 Max. 3/4 3.5 Max.

Page 10 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 2 - Sloping and Benching (continued) All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth with unsupported vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1 and a maximum vertical side of 3 feet.

1 12 Max. 3.5 Max. 1

Support or shield system

All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) :1. The support or shield system must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.

1 20 Max. 3/4
18 Min. Total height of vertical side

Excavations made in Type B soil. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1.

20 Max. 1

All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:

This bench allowed in cohesive soils only

20 Max.
4 Max. 4 Max.

1 1

Page 11 of 12

EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM (continued) Appendix 2 - Sloping and Benching (continued)

Support or shield system

All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1.

20 Max.
18 Min.

1 1

Total height of vertical side

Excavations made in Type C soil. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1.

20 Max. 1 1/2

All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of (no steeper than) 1:1.

20 Max.
18 Min.

1 1 1/2

Total height of vertical side

For information on sloping and benching requirements for multi- layered soils visit the OSHA web-site at: http://www.osha.gov/

Page 12 of 12

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE Emergency Response Plan 1. A written emergency response plan must be developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies 2. The plan must be available for inspection and copying by employees, their representatives, and OSHA personnel. 3. The emergency response plan must include the following elements: a. Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties; b. Personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and communication; c. Emergency recognition and prevention; d. Safe distances and places of refuge; e. Safety, security, and control; f. Evacuation routes and procedures; g. Decontamination; h. Emergency medical treatment and first aid; i. Emergency alerting and response procedures; j. Critique of response and follow-up; k. PPE and emergency equipment. 4. Those locations that will evacuate their employees from the workplace when an emergency occurs and not permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency are exempt from this safety regulation if an emergency action plan in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.39(a) (Fire Prevention Plans) is provided. Procedures for Handling Emergency Responses 1. The senior emergency response official responding to an emergency shall become the individual in charge of a site-specific Incident Command System (ICS). All emergency responders and their communications shall be coordinated and controlled through the individual in charge of the ICS assisted by the senior official present for each employer. 2. The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use of any new technologies. 3. Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate emergency operations and assure that the personal protective equipment worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered.

Page 1 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus while engaged in emergency response, until such time that the individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees. 5. The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of two or more. 6. Back-up personnel shall be standing by with equipment ready to provide assistance or rescue. Qualified basic life support personnel, as a minimum, shall also be standing by with medical equipment and transportation capability. 7. The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety officer, who is knowledgeable in the operations being implemented at the emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of operations for the emergency at hand. 8. When activities are judged by the safety officer to be an IDLH and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the safety officer shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities. The safety officer shall immediately inform the individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to correct these hazards at the emergency scene. 9. After emergency operations have terminated, the ind ividual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination procedures. Post Emergency Response Upon completion of the emergency response, if it is determined that it is necessary to remove hazardous substances, health hazards and materials contaminated with them (such as contaminated soil or other elements of the natural environment) from the site of the incident, the employer conducting the cleanup shall comply with one of the following sections of 29 CFR 1910.120: 1. Safety & Health Program 2. Site Characterization and Analysis 3. Site Control 4. Training 5. Medical Surveillance 6. Engineering Controls, Work Practices, and PPE 7. Monitoring

Page 2 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) 8. Informational Programs 9. Handling Drums and Containers 10. Decontamination 11. Emergency Response 12. Illumination 13. Sanitation at Temporary Work Sites 14. New Technology Programs Where the clean-up is done on plant property using plant or workplace employees, such employees shall have completed the training requirements of the following: 29 CFR 1910.38 (Emergency Action Plans), 1910.134 (Respiratory Protection), 1910.1200 (Hazard Communication), and other appropriate safety and health training made necessary by the tasks they are expected to perform such as personal protective equipment and decontamination procedures. Training Training shall be based on the duties and function to be performed by each responder of an emergency response. The skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders shall be conveyed to them through training before they are permitted to take part in actual emergency operations on an incident. 1. Initial Training a. General site workers (such as equipment operators, general laborers and supervisory personnel) engaged in hazardous substance removal or other activities whic h expose or potentially expose workers to hazardous substances and health hazards shall receive a minimum of 40 hours of instruction off the site and a minimum of three days actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained experienced supervisor. b. Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task (such as, but not limited to, ground water monitoring, land surveying, or geophysical surveying) and who are unlikely to be exposed over permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. c. Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been monitored and fully characterized, indicating that exposures are under permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits where respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.

Page 3 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) d. Management and supervisor training. On-site management and supervisors directly responsible for or who supervise employees engaged in hazardous waste operations shall receive 40 hours initial and three days of supervised field experience (the training may be reduced to 24 hours and one day if the only area of their responsibility is employees covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii) of 29 CRF 1910.120 and at least eight additional hours of specialized training at the time of job assignment on such topics as, but not limited to, the employer's safety and health program, personal protective equipment program, spill containment program, and health hazard monitoring procedure and techniques. e. Emergency response training. Employees who are engaged in responding to hazardous emergency situations at hazardous waste clean-up sites that may expose them to hazardous substances shall be trained in how to respond to such expected emergencies according to the following: First Responder Awareness Level minimum of 8 hours training, being competent in the following areas: Understand what hazardous substances are and the risks involved. Understand the potential outcomes associated with hazardous substances emergencies. Have the ability to recognize the presence of hazardous substances in an emergency. Have the ability to identify the hazardous substances. Have an understanding of their role in an emergency response, including site security and control and the use of the DOT Emergency Response Guidebook. Have the ability to realize the need for additional resources and make the appropriate notifications. First Responder Operations Level minimum of 8 hours training equal to the First Responder Awareness Level and in addition have competency in the following areas: Knowledge of basic hazard and risk assessment techniques. Know how to select and use proper PPE. Understand basic hazardous materials terms. Know how to perform basic control, containment and/or confinement. Know how to implement basic decontaminatio n procedures. Understand the relevant standard operation procedures and termination procedures.

Page 4 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) Hazardous Materials Technician minimum of 24 hours training equal to the First Responder Operations Leve l and in addition have competency in the following areas: Emergency response plan. Classification, identification and verification of materials using field survey instruments. Ability to function within ICS. Know how to select and use proper PPE. Understand hazard and risk assessment techniques. Be able to perform advance control, containment, and/or confinement. Understand and implement decontamination procedures. Understand basic chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior. Hazardous Materials Specialist minimum of 24 hours training equal to the hazardous materials technician and in addition have competency in the following areas: Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. Know the state emergency response plan. Be able to select and use proper PPE. Understand in-depth hazard and risk techniques. Be able to perform specialized control, containment, and/or confinement. Be able to determine and implement decontamination procedures. Have the ability to develop a site safety and control plan. Understand chemical, radiological and toxicological terminology and behavior. On Scene Incident Commander - minimum of 24 hours training equal to the First Responder Operations Level and in addition have competency in the following areas: Know and be able to implement the employers incident command system. Know how to implement the employers emergency response plan. Know and understand the hazards and risks associated with employees working in chemical protective clothing. Know how to implement the local emergency response plan. Know of the state emergency response plan and of the Federal Regional Response Team. Know and understand the importance of decontamination procedures.
Page 5 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Refresher Training a. Employees, managers and supervisors shall receive eight hours of refresher training annually. b. Any critique of incidents that have occurred in the past year can serve as training examples of related work and other relevant topics. Employees who participate, or are expected to participate, in emergency response, shall be given training in accordance with the following: 1. Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health. 2. Safety, health and other hazards present on the site. 3. Use of personal protective equipment. 4. Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards. 5. Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site. 6. Medical surveillance requirements including recognition of symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards. 7. Elements of the site Emergency Action Plan, including: a. Decontamination. b. Emergency medical treatment and first aid. c. Emergency alerting and response procedures. d. Critique of response and follow-up. e. PPE and emergency equip ment. Only those employees who have met the training requirements above are permitted to engage in hazardous waste operations that could expose them to hazardous substances, safety or health hazards. Definitions 1. Buddy System - A system of organizing employees into work groups in such a manner that each employee of the work group is designated to be observed by at least one other employee in the work group. The purpose of the buddy system is to provide rapid assistance to employees in the event of an emergency. 2. Competent Person An individual possessing the skills, knowledge, experience, and judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as determined by the employer. 3. Controlled Release - Releases that are contained by in-place facilities or safeguards, do not go off property, can be stopped by closing valve(s), or absorbed/neutralized and promptly contained at the time of release.

Page 6 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 4. Decontamination - The removal of hazardous substances from employees and their equipment to the extent necessary to preclude the occurrence of foreseeable adverse health effects. 5. Emergency Response - A response effort by employees from outside the immediate release area or by other designated responders (i.e., local fire departments, mutual aid groups, designated HAZMAT teams, etc.) to an occurrence which results in or is likely to result in, an uncontrolled release of a hazardous substance, regardless of the location of the release. NOTE: Responses to hazardous releases which are controlled at the time of the release by employees in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel, are not considered to be emergency responses within the scope of the standard. 6. Emergency Response Plan A plan developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies prior to the commencement of emergency response operations. 7. First Responder Awareness Level Individuals who are likely to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who have been trained to initiate an emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the release. These individuals would take no further action beyond notification and have sufficient training to objectively demonstrate the ability to recognize emergencies involving hazardous substances and the risks and potential outcomes involved and understand their limited role in an emergency and recognize when help is needed and who to notify. 8. First Responder Operations Level Individuals who are trained to respond to releases or potential releases of hazardous substances in a defensive fashion, without actually trying to stop the release, as part of the initial response to the site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the environment from the effects of the release. Their function is to secure, control, and contain the release from a safe distance. They may operate valves or other controls to stop the release if they are trained to do so under normal operating conditions. These ind ividuals require a minimum of 8 eight hours training. 9. Hazardous Materials Specialist - Those who respond with and provide support to hazardous material technicians. These individuals have more direct knowledge of the materials that may be handled. They also act as a technical liaison with various agencies. They require a minimum of 24 hours training equivalent to Technician Level plus more indepth training in same areas as well as knowledge of the local/state emergency response plans and site health and safety plan. 10. Hazardous Materials Technician - Those who respond to the incident for the purpose of stopping the release, e.g., plug or patch. They are more highly trained and experienced than First Responder Operations Level personnel. They require a minimum of 24 hours training plus additional training on implementation of emergency response plan, use of field survey instruments, specialized PPE, incident command system, hazard/risk assessment techniques, advance control/containment operations, decontamination, and chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior.

Page 7 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 11. Hazardous Substance - Any substance, naturally-occurring or man-made which, due to its physical and chemical properties, can cause the deterioration of other materials or can be injurious to living things. 12. HAZWOPER Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response - Operations involving hazardous waste at certain treatment, storage, and disposal facilities and/or emergency response operations for releases, or substantial threats of releases, of hazardous substances. 13. Immediate Release Area - The assigned work area of the responding employee. In most cases, this will include gas plants, platforms, and field offices. 14. On-Scene Incident Commander - The person(s) who organizes and controls the complete spill response. Requires a minimum of 40 hours training equivalent to First Responder Operations Level, plus additional training in decision- making process required of the position. 15. Post-emergency Response - Those who remove and cleanup hazardous materials from the site. Minimum of 40 hours equivalent to General Site Workers at hazardous waste sites or if the clean-up is conducted on Crosstex Energy Services property by Crosstex Energy Services personnel, the employees are required to have training on emergency response and fire prevention plans, hazard communication, respiratory protection and other appropriate safety and health training as required for the task they are expected to perform, such as use of PPE, decontamination procedures, etc. 16. Senior Official - The most senior official on the site who has the responsibility for controlling the operations at the site. Initially, it is the senior officer on the first-due piece of responding emergency apparatus to arrive on the incident scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement official, site coordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the line of authority which has been previously established. 17. Skilled Support Employees - Personnel, not necessarily an employer's own employees, who are skilled in the operation of certain equipment, such as mechanized earth moving or digging equipment or crane and hoisting equipment, and who are needed temporarily to perform immediate emergency support work that cannot reasonably be performed in a timely fashion by an employer's own employees, and who will be or may be exposed to the hazards at an emergency response scene, are not required to meet the training required in this paragraph for the employer's regular employees. However, these personnel shall be given an initial briefing at the site prior to their participation in any emergency response. The initial briefing shall include instruction in the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment, what chemical hazards are involved, and what duties are to be performed. All other appropriate safety and health precautions provided to the employer's own employees shall be used to assure the safety and health of these personnel.

Page 8 of 9

EMERGENCY RESPONSE (HAZWOPER) PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 18. Specialist Employees - Employees who, in the course of their regular job duties, work with and are trained in the hazards of specific hazardous substances, and who will be called upon to provide technical advice or assistance at a hazardous substance release incident to the individual in charge, shall receive training or demonstrate competency in the area of their specialization annually. 19. Work Area - Area to which the employee has been assigned. This assignment includes training in hazards of the area. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.120, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response.

Page 9 of 9

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE Personal and Other Protective Equipment 1. All personnel shall be safeguarded from injury by suitable personal protective equipment while working in situations where potential electrical hazards exists. Personal protective equipme nt shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition and be designed for the specific part(s) of the body to be protected and for the immediate work to be performed. 2. Head, Face and Eye Protection a. Non-conductive head face, and eye protection shall be worn where there is danger of injury from electrical shock, flashes, arcs, burns, or flying or falling objects from electrical explosions. 3. Hand and Body Protection a. Insulating rubber gloves, rubber boots, sleeves, line hoses, blankets, hoods, and mats shall be used where necessary to protect the hands and other parts of the body where there is danger of injury from contacting energized parts. Note: Glove protectors (e.g., leather) shall be worn over rubber gloves to protect the insulation from damage, and shall be used for electrical work only. 4. Marking, Storage, Inspecting and Testing of Protective Equipment a. Marking i. Insulated, rubber protective equipment shall be clearly marked as Class 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 corresponding to the maximum voltage at which it is rated. A-C Proof-Test Requirements Class 0 5,000 rms V Class 1 10,000 rms V Class 2 20,000 rms V Class 3 30,000 rms V Class 4 40,000 rms V D-C Proof-Test Requirements Class 0 20,000 V Class 1 40,000 V Class 2 50,000 V Class 3 60,000 V Class 4 70,000 V ii. These markings shall be nonconductive and applied in such a manner as not to impair the insulating qualities of the equipment.

Page 1 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) b. Storage i. Insulating equipment shall be cleaned of foreign substances and stored in a manner to protect it from light, temperature extremes, excessive humidity, ozone, and other injurious substances and conditions. Protective equipment shall be visually inspected for damage and defects before every use and immediately following any incident that is suspected of having caused damage.

c. Visual Inspection i.

ii. Rubber gloves must be given an air test along with each visual inspection. iii. Insulating equipment with defects such as a hole, tear, puncture, cut, embedded foreign object, or with texture changes such as swelling, softening, hardening, or becoming sticky or inelastic, shall not be used. iv. Verify that tools and equipment are within periodic testing frequency specifications (e.g. stamps, tags, etc). d. Testing i. Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to periodic electrical tests to verify that the insulation can withstand the maximum voltage involved. (Refer to 29 CFR 1910.137 for test specifications.)

ii. Protective equipment which has been repaired or modified shall be tested to ascertain that its insulating capability has been retained before being returned to service. Any equipment that fails the test shall not be put into use. iii. Testing frequency for dielectric gloves shall not exceed 6 months and shall be conducted by a qualified testing facility. iv. Equipment must be stamped, tagged or otherwise identified with the date of the last test conducted on it. v. Equipment Log vi. A dated log shall be maintained identifying the electrical protective equipment which successfully passed the periodic test and is suitable for use. Selection of Safe Work Practices 1. Safe work practices must be utilized to safeguard personnel from injury while repairing, modifying, or performing maintenance on or near equipment or circuits that may or may not be de-energized.

Page 2 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Working On or Near De-energized Parts a. Before beginning work, all live parts to which personnel may be exposed shall be deenergized and locked and tagged out, unless it can be demonstrated that de-energizing introduces additional or increased hazards or is infeasible due to equipment design or operational limitations. Some examples of these instances are: i. Deactivation of emergency alarms or fire protection systems; ii. Shutdown of hazardous location ventilation equipment; iii. Removal of illumination from an area: and iv. Testing of electric circuits that can only be performed with the circuit energized. 3. Only Qualified Persons are permitted to de-energize and lockout/tagout electrical equipment and circuits for the purpose of electrical repair or maintenance. After deenergization, the Qualified Person must verify that the equipment cannot be restarted by attempting to operate the equipment controls and by using testing equipment to measure circuit properties. NOTE: This applies to circuits or equipment that have been de-energized for the purpose of repair or maintenance to exposed electrical circuits. 4. Only qualified persons are permitted to remove lockout/tagout devices and re-energize electrical circuits. 5. Conductors and parts of equipment that have been de-energized but have not been locked/tagged out shall be treated as energized parts. 6. Safe work practices shall be used when working on or near electrical equipment or circuits that are or can become energized and capable of causing electric shock. The following safe work practices shall be used to prevent contact of energized parts directly with any part of the body or indirectly with conductive tools or materials. a. Use required PPE. b. Only Qualified Persons may work on or near energized electrical equipment. Such persons shall be capable of working safely on energized circuits and shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and insulated tools. c. Alertness - All employees shall be alert when working near exposed energized equipment. No employee shall be permitted to perform electrical work if their alertness is impaired due to illness, fatigue, or other reasons that affect their judgment or awareness. d. Illumination - No employee shall be allowed to enter spaces containing exposed energized parts unless adequate illumination is provided. Employees must not reach blindly into any areas where they could contact energized equipment.

Page 3 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) e. Confined Space - When work is to be performed in a confined or enclosed space that contains exposed energized parts, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used, as necessary, to avoid accidental contact with the exposed energized parts. Doors, hinged panels, and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into someone and causing them to contact exposed energized parts. f. Conductive Apparel such as metal eye glasses, rings, bracelets, watch bands, necklaces, and key chains shall not be worn while working if they might contact exposed energized parts. g. Conductive Materials and Equipment such as ladders, pipes, ducts, or chains that are in contact with any part of the body must be handled in a safe manner so as to prevent contact with exposed energized parts. If it is necessary to handle long objects, they shall be protected by insulation or guarding or handled in a manner which will minimize the hazard. h. Portable Ladders must have noncond uctive side rails, such as fiberglass. Ladders used in service for electrical related work shall not be used for general maintenance or repair activities. Ladders shall be visually inspected prior to each use in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services Fall Protection Program. i. Housekeeping and janitorial duties are not to be performed adjacent to live parts where such parts present an electrical contact hazard unless adequate safeguards such as barriers or insulating equipment are provided. Conductive cleaning materials such as water, steam, fluids, steel wool, etc., shall not be used unless procedures are followed which will prevent an inadvertent electrical contact.

j. Insulated tools and handling equipment are required to be used while working on or near exposed energized parts if the tools/equipment can come into contact with the exposed parts. i. Fuse handling equipment that is insulated for the circuit voltage shall be used to remove or replace fuses where the fuse terminals are energized.

ii. Ropes, handlines, taglines, and lanyards that are used near exposed energized parts shall be nonconductive. iii. Insulated tools such as, hot sticks, shotguns, etc. shall be inspected before each use, and dielectrically tested at least every two years, or as per manufacturers recommendations if less than two years. iv. Test records shall be maintained for the life of the tools by the responsible qualified individual. k. Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used for protection from electrical ha zards while working on or near exposed energized parts and shall be dielectrically tested at least every two years.

Page 4 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) l. Alerting techniques shall be used to warn and protect personnel from hazards that could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of electric equipment parts. i. Safety signs, safety symbols, or other tags shall be used where necessary to warn personnel about electrical hazards which may endanger them.

ii. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit access to work areas with exposed energized conductor or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be used where they might cause an electrical contact hazard. iii. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient warning and protection from electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect other personnel. m. Working on Electrical Equipment i. 600 volts nominal or less (Only qualified Level II or Level III personnel may work on any electrical equipment below 600 volts nominal.) Utilize dielectric gloves rated for the highest exposed voltage; Inspect gloves for defects prior to each use; Familiarize yourself with the equipment, if unsure do not proceed; Inspect tools and electrical testing equipment prior to each use; Follow Crosstex Energy Services Lockout/Tagout Program.

ii. Greater than 600 volts (Only Level III personnel may work on > 600 volts.) Requires 2 or more personnel at all times. Utilize dielectric gloves rated for the highest exposed voltage; Inspect gloves for defects prior to each use; Familiarize yourself with the equipment; if unsure do not proceed; Inspect tools and electrical testing equipment prior to each use; Follow Crosstex Energy Services Lockout/Tagout Program; Utilize flame resistant clothing (FRC) in accordance with Crosstex Energy Services Personal Protective Equipment Program.

Page 5 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) n. Job Briefing/Tailgate Safety Meetings i. A job briefing/tailgate safety meeting shall be conducted by all personnel involved in each electrical job before it is started. The briefing shall cover at least the following safe work procedures: Hazards associated with the job; Work procedures involved; Special precautions; Energy source controls; and Personal protective equipment.

o. If the work or operations to be performed during the work day or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one job briefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of each day or shift. Additional briefings shall be held if significant changes, which may affect the safety of the employees, occur during the course of the work. Use of Equipment 1. This section applies to the use of portable testing and sampling equipment, cord and plugconnected equipment, extension cords, portable saws, drills, and similar equipment. 2. Working with Test Instruments and Equipment a. Only Qualified Persons that are trained to work with test instruments and equipment shall be permitted to perform testing work on electrical circuits or equip ment. With the use of personal protective equipment, qualified persons are allowed to test energized circuits without locks or tags being placed on the disconnecting devices. b. Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectors are required to be visually inspected for defects before each use. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose someone to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service. No one may use defective test instruments or equipment until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been completed. NOTE: Equipment removed from service shall be clearly marked, tagged or otherwise identified to prevent use by other personnel. c. Test instruments and their accessories shall be rated for the circuit to which they are connected for testing and they shall be suitable for the environment in which they will be used.

Page 6 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Portable Electric Equipment and Flexible Cord Sets a. Portable cord & plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (e.g., power tools and extensions cords) shall be visually inspected before each use for external defects such as loose parts, deformed and missing parts, and damage to outer jacket or insulation. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose someone to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service and shall not be used until necessary repairs and tests indicate that the equipment is safe. NOTE: Equipment removed from service shall be clearly marked, tagged or otherwise identified to prevent use by other personnel. b. Verify portable electrical equipment, cords and connectors are rated for the voltage to which they are connected and shall be suitable for the environment (i.e. area electrical classification, explosion proof, etc) in which they will be used. c. Work practices that can damage and impair the safety of portable electric equipment and flexible cord sets are not allowed. i. The use of electric cords for raising or lowering portable equipment or tools is not permitted.

ii. Flexible cords are not to be fastened to surfaces with staples or otherwise hung in a fashion to damage the insulation or outer jacket. iii. All extension cords shall contain a grounding conductor. Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner that would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor. (e.g. The grounding pole of a three pole, male attachment plug shall not be removed.) iv. All portable electrical equipment shall be used in conjunction with a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). The GFCI can be a permanent fixture at the breaker or receptacle or it can be an in- line portable device to use in conjunction with extension cords at remote locations. This requirement does not necessarily apply to typical office settings (e.g. personal radios, computers, etc). v. Hands and working surfaces must be dry when plugging and unplugging extension cords on equipment which will be energized. vi. All receptacle outlets shall have a cover plate installed which completely isolates the internal energized parts. Facility Design Requirements 1. Facility Area Electrical Classifications a. All Crosstex Energy Services facilities will be classified and wired in accordance with applicable Crosstex, industry and regulatory electrical standards/specifications. b. Because of the high cost of hazardous locations wiring and materials, every effort should be made to install as much electrical equipment as possible outside of classified areas.
Page 7 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) c. Only equipment that is suitable for use in a hazardous (classified) area and is plainly marked by the manufacturer for that area shall be used. This could include explosion proof apparati, purged and pressurized equipment, intrinsically safe systems, oil immersed equipment, and hermetically-sealed equipment. d. Care must be taken to not modify, drill, attach to, or change any equipment approved for hazardous locations. All bolted covers must have all bolts in place, all screwed covers must be firmly secured, and all cords, conduits or other attachments must meet code and be firmly connected. e. Any loose connection or modification voids the hazard class approval. Working Space and Clearance Distances 1. All energized electrical equipment shall be provided with sufficient working space to allow safe access for servicing the equipment without exposing workers to electrical hazards. See APPENDIX 1 Clearance and Working Clearance Distances. 2. Circuits 600 Volts or Less a. Exposed energized equipment operating at 50 volts or more but less than 600 volts shall be guarded against accidental contact by approved enclosures or by any of the following means: i. ii. iii. By location in a room or enclosure that is accessible only to qualified persons; By location on an elevated balcony or platform arranged as to exclude unqualified persons; or By elevation of 86 inches (8 feet) or more above the floor or other working surfaces.

3. Circuits Over 600 Volts a. Electrical installations having exposed live parts operating at over 600 volts, nominal, shall be accessible to Level III Qualified Personnel only. The entrance to all buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing these live parts shall be kept locked or be under the observation of a Level III Qualified Person at all times. 4. Clear Spaces a. Working space shall not be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, the work space, if in a passage way or general open area, shall be suitably guarded. 5. Access and Entrance to Working Space a. At least one entrance of sufficient area shall be provided to give access to the working space around the electric equipment.

Page 8 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Front Working Space a. In all cases where there are live parts normally exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control centers, the working space in front of such equipment shall not be less than 3 feet. 7. Illumination a. Shall be provided for all working spaces around service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers installed indoors. 8. Headroom a. The minimum headroom of working spaces around service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor control centers shall be 6.25 feet. Equipment Markings 1. Electrical Equipment and Circuit Identification/Labeling a. Certification i. All electrical equipment must have third-party certification by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) or a Qualified Testing Laboratory (QTL) for the essential safety of the equipment and components used to assemble electrical installations. Such NRTLs or QTLs include, but are not limited to, Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) and Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Electrical equipment assembled by Crosstex or Contractor personnel shall meet the applicable industry and regulatory codes and receive inspection/approval by a qualified Level III person prior to being placed in service. Assembled equipment must meet all marking and labeling requirements as detailed below.

b. Assembled Electrical Equipment i.

2. Marking, Labels and Signs a. Electrical equipment shall be clearly marked to identify its properties and electrical characteristics. Relevant characteristics include the manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, current, wattage, and other ratings as necessary. b. Markings shall be legible, permanent, and durable enough to withstand the environment in which the equipment is exposed. c. Electrical equipment shall be installed so that nameplates can be examined without removing the equipment from a hard wired (permanent) position. d. Care shall be given to ensure that equipment labels are neither removed nor covered by paint or other materials.

Page 9 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Identification of Disconnecting Means a. Electrical circuits shall be identified in panel boards and circuit breaker boxes. This will allow for a circuit to be de-energized quickly and safely when there is a threat of injury to personnel working, repairing, or performing maintenance on the supplied equipment. b. Panelboard and circuit breaker circuits must be fully and clearly labeled on the panel directory to indicate the load served and its location. An appropriately labeled circuit is one which is assigned a number followed by a description of the equipment receiving the electrical energy. c. Circuit markings shall be legible, durable, and permanent. Painted/ink markings, embossed plates, or adhesive decals fixed to the equipment are considered permanent whereas pencil and chalk are not. 4. Warning Signs a. All enclosures under 600 volts nominal shall be marked with the maximum voltage contained within the enclosure, such as: DANGER 480 Volts. b. All enclosures in service over 600 volts shall be marked as: DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT. Bonding and Grounding 1. Crosstex facilities shall be bonded and grounded in accordance with applicable Crosstex, industry and regulatory electrical standards/specifications (i.e. API RP 500, National Electric Code, NFPA 70, API RP14F, etc). 2. Bonding and grounding will mitigate potential for injury to personnel from contact with conducting surfaces at different electrical potential and enhance the safe operation of equipment by providing low impedance path-to-ground for fault current caused by equipment failures, lighting strikes, or equipment surges. Use of Temporary Wiring 1. Temporary wiring methods should only be used in special circumstances and then may only be used for a period not to exceed 90 consecutive days. Temporary wiring must comply with all safety requirements including the use of a GFCI, appropriate feeder size, circuit protection and other aspects of the National Electric Code. Temporary wiring must be provided protection against physical damage. Periodic Maintenance Requirements 1. The maintenance of electrical circuits, wiring and equipment shall be performed by a qualified person(s) in accordance with applicable codes, regulations and industry practices.

Page 10 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) Training Training must be provided initially and periodically for all employees whose work operations may involve working on or near energized electrical equipment. Personnel shall be trained in, and familiar with, safety-related, electrical work practices that concern their respective jobs. They will also be classified into one of three levels depending on job requirements, previous training, and electrical related experience. 1. Level I Personnel (least qualified) a. Unqualified person(s) with some exposure to potential electrical hazards in the workplace but with little or no training or experience in avoiding the hazards of working on, or near, exposed energized parts. These individuals do not perform electrical repair or maintenance work. b. Training Requirements: Awareness Training Only 2. Level II Personnel (more qualified) a. Person(s) who, by job description, are required to perform certain tasks involving exposure to live energized parts. These individuals will have additional experience and training revolving around the tasks that they are qualified to perform. An operator trained to change electrical fuses is an example of a Level II person, as could be instrument repair technicians, mechanics, cathodic technicians etc. b. Level II personnel will be selected by supervision, in consultation with the Safety Department. Level II personnel shall be kept to a minimum with the number being based on current electrical repair and maintenance demands. c. Level II personnel will only perform electrical tasks for which they have received specified and documented training. d. Training Requirements: In addition to the task specific training requirements noted above, all Level II personnel at a minimum must be able to distinguish exposed live parts and their nominal voltages, as well as the clearance distances and the corresponding voltages to which they will be exposed. 3. Level III Personnel (most qualified) This level is typically reserved for individuals that are employed as full time electricians, and whose experience and training ensure that they are familiar with all aspects of electrical safety including safe electrical work practices. Level III qualified persons shall be trained in and familiar with the following skills and techniques: a. Be able to distinguish exposed live parts and their nominal voltages and the clearance distances and corresponding voltages to which they will be exposed. b. Installation of electric conductors (wiring) and equipment within or on buildings or other structures, facilities, or process areas. c. Installation of conductors that connect the supply of electricity. d. Installation of other outside conductors on the premises. e. Understand and be familiar with the NEC and applicable API Recommended Practices.

Page 11 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 4. General Training Requirements a. Employees shall be trained in the safe work practices and procedures and other personnel safety requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments. b. Employees shall not be permitted to work in an area where they are likely to encounter electrical hazards unless they have been trained to recognize and avoid the electrical hazards to which they will be exposed. c. Training, conducted by an experienced Qualified Person, may be on-the-job or in the classroom (preferably a combination of both) and shall establish employee proficiency in the work practice. The degree of training will be based on the classification (Level I, II, or III) and risk to the individual (e.g., greater risk/higher classification requires more detailed training and additional experience). d. It shall be determined, through regular supervision and periodic inspections, that each Qualified Person is complying with the safe work practices and procedures required by this section. e. Additional training or retraining is required under any of the following conditions: Supervision or periodic inspections reveal non-compliance with this program. New technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures modify normal work practices. Changes in job assignments require new or different safe work practices. As required to maintain license certification.

Training records shall be kept in accordance with the documentation section of this program. Definitions 1. Bonding - The joining of metallic parts with an adequately-sized conductor to form an electrically- conductive path which will ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to safely conduct any current likely to be imposed. 2. Conductor A material capable of transmitting electricity. 3. De-energized Absent of electrical energy. 4. Electrical Equipment That part of any equipment utilizing electric energy (i.e. controllers, motors, etc.) 5. Electrical Hazard - For the purpose of this program, an electrical hazard is a dangerous electrical condition. Electrical conditions such as exposed energized parts and unguarded electrical equipment which may become energized are examples of electrical hazards. 6. Energized Containing electrical energy. 7. Exposed - Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. Applies to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated.

Page 12 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) 8. Ground - A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth. 9. GFCI - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter A device whose function is to interrupt the electrical circuit to the load when the fault current-to-ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit. 10. High Voltage Over 600 volts, nominal. 11. Insulated - A conductor encased within a material of composition and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation. Insulating materials are designed to keep electricity on its intended path. 12. Level I Personnel - Person(s) with some exposure to potential electrical hazards in the workplace but with little or no training or experience in avoiding the hazards of working on, or near, exposed energized parts. These individuals do not perform electrical repair or maintenance work. 13. Level II Personnel - Person(s) who, by job description, are required to perform certain tasks involving exposure to live energized parts. These individuals will have additional experience and training revolving around the tasks that they are qualified to perform. An operator trained to change electrical fuses is an example of a Level II employee, as could be instrument repair technicians, mechanics, cathodic technicians etc. 14. Level III Personnel - Person(s) who typically, are employed as full time electricians, and whose experience and training ensure that they are familiar with all aspects of electrical safety including safe electrical work practices. 15. Qualified Person - An experienced person properly trained and familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. Qualified persons must be at least able to distinguish exposed live parts and their nominal voltages, as well as the clearance distances and the corresponding voltages to which they will be exposed. Whether an employee is considered to be a qualified person will depend upon various circumstances in the workplace. It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be considered qualified with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but unqualified as to other equipment. 16. Unqualified Person - Level I or other personnel with some exposure to potential electrical hazards in the workplace but with little or no training or experience in avoiding the hazards of working on, or near exposed energized parts.

Page 13 of 15

ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Section 1910.331-335 Subpart S Electrical American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2-1997 National Electrical Safety Code Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Section 1910.269 Electrical Power Generation, Transmission, and Distribution National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National Electric Code (NEC) NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces

Page 14 of 15

Appendix 1 - Clearance and Working Clearance Distances Table 1 MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES FOR UNQUALIFIED PERSONS Voltage Distance <300 Volts Avoid Contact 50kV or less 10 feet Each 10kV over 50kV Add 4 inches Table 2 MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES FOR QUALIFIED PERSONS Voltage Distance 300-750 Volts 1 ft. 0 in. 750-2kV 1 ft. 6 in. 2kV-15kV 2 ft. 0 in. 15kV-37kV 3 ft. 0 in 37kV-87.5kV 3 ft. 6 in. 87.5kV-121kV 4 ft. 0 in. Table 3 WORKING CLEARANCES MINIMUM CLEAR WORKING DISTANCES FOR CONDITIONS Voltage Condition 11 Condition 22 Condition 33 0 - 150 3 ft. 3 ft. 3 ft. 151 - 600 3 ft. 3.5 ft. 4 ft. 601 - 2500 3 ft. 4 ft. 5 ft. 2501 - 9000 4 ft. 5 ft. 6 ft. 9001 - 25000 5 ft. 6 ft. 9 ft. 25001 - 75kV 6 ft. 8 ft. 10 ft. Above 75kV 8 ft. 10 ft. 12 ft.
1

= Condition #1 Exposed live parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded by suitable wood or other insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated buss bars operating at not over 300 volts shall not be considered live parts. = Condition #2 Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. = Condition #3 Exposed live parts on both sides of the workplace (not guarded as provided in condition 1) with the operator in between.

Page 15 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE General Safety Rules Operators shall comply with the following rules while operating the cranes and/or hoists: 1. Do not engage in any practice or activity that will divert your attention while operating the crane. 2. Respond to signals only from the person who is directing the lift or any appointed signal person. 3. Obey a stop signal at all times. 4. Do not move a load over people. Also, do not allow personnel to work under a suspended load unless blocks, jacks, or a solid footing that will safely hold the entire weight supports the load. 5. Have a crane or hoist operator remain at the controls or lock open and tag the main electrical disconnect switch. 6. Ensure that the rated load capacity of a cranes bridge, individual hoist, and any sling or fitting is not exceeded. 7. Know the weight of the object being lifted or use a dynamometer or load cell to determine the weight. 8. Ensure all controls are in the OFF position before closing the main line disconnect switch. 9. If spring- loaded reels are provided to lift pendant lines clear of the work area, gently ease the pendant into the STOP position to prevent damaging the control wires. 10. Avoid side pulls. These can cause the hoist rope to slip out of the drum groove, damaging the rope or destabilizing the crane or hoist. 11. To prevent shock loading, avoid sudden stops or starts. Shock loading can occur when a suspended load is accelerated or decelerated and can overload the crane or hoist. When completing an upward or downward motion, ease the load slowly to a stop. Operational Rules Operators shall perform the following pre-operational steps before making lifts with any crane or hoist: 1. Visually inspect the hook, load lines, trolley, and bridge as much as possible from the operators station. 2. Verify weight to be lifted and compare with capacity of hoisting assembly. 3. Test the hoist brake, if provided, to verify there is no drift without a load. 4. If provided, test the bridge movement alarm. 5. Lock out and tag for repair any crane or hoist that fails any of the above tests.

Page 1 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) Moving a Load 1. Center the hook over the load to keep the cables from slipping out of the drum grooves and overlapping, and to prevent the load from swinging when it is lifted. 2. Inspect the drum to verify that the cable is in the grooves. 3. Use tag lines when loads must traverse long distances or be otherwise controlled. Manila rope may be used for tag lines. 4. Plan and check the travel path to avoid personnel and obstructions. 5. Lift the load only high enough to clear the tallest obstruction in the travel path. 6. Start and stop slowly. 7. Land the load when the move is finished. Choose a safe landing. 8. Never leave suspended loads unattended. In an emergency where the crane or hoist has become inoperative, if a load must be left suspended, barricade and post signs in the surrounding area, under the load, and on all four sides. Lock open and tag the crane or hoist's main electrical disconnect switch. Parking a Crane or Hoist 1. Remove all slings and accessories from the hook. 2. Return the rigging device to the designated storage racks. 3. Raise the hook at least 7 feet above the floor. 4. Store the pendant away from aisles and work areas, or raise it at least 7 feet above the floor. 5. Place the emergency stop switch (or pushbutton) in the OFF position. Crane and Hoist Safety Design Requirements 1. All crane and hoist hooks shall be equipped with safety latches. 2. Hooks shall not be painted (or re-painted) if the paint previously applied by the manufacturer is worn. 3. Crane pendants shall have an electrical disconnect switch or button to open the main- line control circuit. 4. Cranes and/or hoists shall have a main electrical disconnect switch. This switch shall be clearly labeled with lockout capability. 5. Crane bridges and hoist monorails shall be labeled on both sides with the maximum load capacity. 6. Each hoist-hook block shall be labeled with the maximum hook load capacity.

Page 2 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) 7. All new cranes and/or hoists shall be load tested at 125% capacity, by the manufacturer, prior to being placed into service. Documentation of the load must be kept at the nearest facility office. 8. Repaired or modified cranes and/or hoist shall be load-tested to not less than 100% of the rated load or more than 125% of the rated load. 9. If an overload device is installed, a load test to the adjusted setting is required. General Rigging Safety Requirements 1. Only rigging equipment (i.e. chains, slings, etc) that is in good condition shall be used. 2. All rigging equipment shall be inspected annually and defective equipment shall be removed from service and destroyed to prevent inadvertent reuse. 3. Load capacity limits shall be stamped or affixed to all rigging components. 4. Slings exhibiting the following defects shall be rejected or destroyed: a. Nylon slings with:

Abnormal wear. Torn stitching. Broken or cut fibers. Deterioration.

b. Wire-rope slings with: Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other distortions. Evidence of heat damage. Cracks, deformation, or worn end attachments. Six randomly broken wires in a single rope lay. Three broken wires in one strand of rope. Hooks opened more than 15% at the throat. Hooks twisted sideways more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.

Page 3 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) c. Alloy steel chain slings with:

Cracked, bent, or elongated links or components. Cracked hooks. Shackles, eyebolts, turnbuckles, or other components that are damaged or deformed.

Rigging a Load When rigging a load, the following steps shall be accomplished: 1. Determine the weight of the load. Do not guess. 2. Determine the proper size for slings and rigging components. 3. Do not use manila rope for rigging. 4. Make sure that shackle pins and shouldered eyebolts are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Make sure that ordinary (shoulderless) eyebolts are threaded in at least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. 6. Use safety hoist rings (swivel eyes) as a preferred substitute for eye bolts wherever possible. 7. Pad sharp edges to protect slings. a. Remember that machinery foundations or angle- iron edges may not feel sharp to the touch but could cut into rigging when under several tons of load. b. Wood, tire rubber, or other pliable materials may be suitable for padding. 8. Do not use slings, eyebolts, shackles, or hooks that have been cut, welded, or brazed. 9. Install wire-rope clips with the base only on the live end and the U-bolt only on the dead end. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the spacing for each specific wire size. 10. Determine the center of gravity and balance the load before moving it. 11. Initially lift the load only a few inches to test the rigging and balance. 12. Hand signals to communicate with a remote operator shall be predetermined and used. The most commonly used hand signals can be found in the appendices. Overloading 1. Cranes or hoists shall not be loaded beyond their rated capacity for normal operations. 2. Any crane or hoist suspected of having been overloaded shall be removed from service. 3. Additionally, overloaded cranes shall be inspected, repaired, load tested, and approved for use before being returned to service.

Page 4 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) Inspection, Maintenance, and Testing 1. All tests and inspections shall be cond ucted in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Monthly Tests and Inspections 1. All in-service cranes and/or hoists shall be inspected monthly and the results documented on the Crane Inspection Form (See Forms section). 2. Defective cranes and/or hoists shall be locked and tagged out of service until all defects are corrected. The inspector shall initiate corrective action by notifying the facility supervisor and/or maintenance supervisor. Annual Inspections 1. The local maintenance supervisor shall schedule and supervise (or perform) annual preventive maintenance (PM) and annual inspections of all cranes and/or hoists, using the Crane Inspection Form. 2. The annual PM and inspection shall cover as a minimum: b. Hoisting and lowering mechanisms. c. Trolley travel or monorail travel. d. Limit switches and locking and safety devices. e. Structural members. f. Bolts or rivets. g. Sheaves and drums. h. Parts: pins, bearings, shafts, gears, rollers, locking devices, & clamping devices. i. Brake system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. j. Load and other indicators over there full range. k. Chain-drive sprockets. l. Crane and hoist hooks. m. Electrical apparatus such as controller contractors, limit switches, and pushbutton stations. n. Wire rope. o. Hoist chains.

Page 5 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) Load Testing 1. Newly installed cranes and/or hoists shall be load-tested at 125% of the rated capacity by designated personnel. 2. Slings shall have appropriate test data when purchased. It is the responsibility of the purchaser to ensure that the appropriate test data are obtained and maintained. 3. Re-rated cranes and/or hoists shall be load-tested to 125% of the new capacity if the new rating is greater than the previous rated capacity. 4. Fixed cranes or hoists that had major modifications or repair shall be load-tested not less than 100% of the rated load capacity or more than 125% of the rated load capacity after repairs and prior to being returned to service. 5. Cranes and/or hoists that have been overloaded shall be load-test inspected prior to being returned to service. 6. All load tests shall be documented. The appropriate field office shall be the custodian of the load test record. Winch Truck Derrick Cranes 1. All derrick cranes shall be visually inspected before each use, checking the following (no documentation required): a. All control mechanisms for adjustment, wear, and lubrication. b. All chords and lacing. c. Tension in guys. d. Plumb of the mast. e. Deterioration of leakage in the air or hydraulic system. f. Derrick hooks for damage, deformation, cracks, or excessive wear. g. Wire rope system for proper wrapping on the drum and alignment with sheaves. h. Proper functioning of hoist brake, clutches and operating levers. i. Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.

2. Monthly inspections shall be made and documented (See Forms section), checking the following items. Other forms that convey the same type of information are acceptable. a. Structural members for deformation, cracks, and corrosion. b. Bolts or rivets for tightness. c. Parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, sheaves, drums, rollers, locking and clamping devices, for wear, cracks and distortion.

Page 6 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) d. Wire ropes for any deterioration which may result in an appreciable loss of original strength. Some conditions that could result in an appreciable loss of strength are:

Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameters due to loss of core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of out side wires. A number of broken outside wires such that there are six (6) broken wires in one (1) rope lay, or three (3) broken wires in one (1) rope strand, in one (1) rope lay. Worn outside wires. Corroded or broken wires at end connections. Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. Severe kinking, crushing, cutting, bird-caging, or unstranding. Limited travel ropes. Particular care shall be taken to inspect ropes where heavy wear and/or broken wires may occur in sections in contact with sheaves where rope travel is limited.

e. All truck cranes and winch trucks shall have an accurate load rating chart affixed to the unit in plain view of the operator when the crane is being used. Wire Rope, Chain, and Nylon Slings 1. The use of rope, chains, slings and associated fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommended guidelines. 2. Prior to initial use of any new, repaired or reconditioned chain sling, ensure that the chain sling assembly was proof-tested by the manufacturer and applicable certification kept on file. 3. Do not use chains for loads above the load rating of the chain. 4. All lifting equipment shall be visually inspected for damage before use. No documentation of this before use inspection is necessary, but it is a good practice. 5. Monthly inspections shall be performed and documented for chain hoists and slings using the Chain Hoist and Sling Inspection Form, found in the Forms section of this CD. These inspections shall include but are not limited to: a. Kinking, crushing, cutting, bird-caging, unstranding or broken wires of sling ropes. b. Cracks, deterioration, or flat strands at the eye of each sling. c. Ensure rope clips and fittings are properly applied and in good condition. d. Ensure slings are free of tears, raveled edges, and, if metal, corrosion free and lubricated as needed. e. Knots and cable clamps are prohibited.

Page 7 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts. Knots are never to be used with any sling, chain, or wire rope. 7. Slings shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling. 8. Employees shall not place hands or fingers between the sling and the load. 9. Safe rigging practices shall be followed at all times. Consult the sling manufacturer or the Safety Department for safe rigging practices. 10. Any sling found defective shall be removed from service immediately and destroyed or repaired by an authorized repair center only when any of the following conditions exist: a. In running ropes, six (6) randomly distributed broken wires in one (1) lay or three (3) broken wires in one (1) strand in one (1) lay; b. Wear of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure; c. Evidence of any heat damage from any cause; d. Reductions from nominal diameter of more than one-sixty- fourth (1/64) inch for diameters up to and including five-sixteenths (5/16) inch, one-thirty-second (1/32) inch for diameters three-eighths (3/8) inch to and including one- half (1/2) inch, three-sixtyfourths (3/64) inch for diameters nine-sixteenths (9/16) inch to and including threefourths (3/4) inch, one-sixteenth (1/16) inch for diameters seven-eighths (7/8) inch to one (1) and one-eighth (1/8) inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds (3/32) inch for diameters one (1) and one- fourth (1/4) to one (1) and one- half (1/2) inches inclusive; e. In standing ropes, more than two (2) broken wires in one (1) lay in sections beyond end connections or more than one (1) broken wire at an end connection; f. Wire rope safety factors shall be in accordance with ANSI B 30.5-1968. 11. Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating, or other moving parts or equipment shall be guarded if such parts are exposed to contact by employees, or otherwise create a hazard. Guarding shall meet the requirements of ANSI B 15.1-1958 Rev., Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus. (See the Machine Guarding Program for further information.) 12. Accessible areas within the swing radius of the rear of the rotating superstructure of the crane, either permanently or temporarily mounted, shall be barricaded in such a manner as to prevent an employee from being struck or crushed by the crane. 13. All exhaust pipes shall be guarded or insulated in areas where contact by employees is possible in the performance of normal duties. 14. Whenever internal combustion engine-powered equipment exhausts in enclosed spaces, tests shall be made and recorded to ensure employees are not exposed to unsafe concentrations of toxic gases or oxygen-deficient atmospheres.

Page 8 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) 15. All windows in cabs shall be of safety glass, or equivalent, that introduces no visible distortion that will interfere with the safe operation of the machine. Cranes and Derricks 1. Critical Lifts a. A Critical Lift Plan (See Forms section) shall be utilized before making any critical lift. b. The person who is responsible for operation of the crane is responsible for completing the Critical Lift Plan. 2. Operational Criteria a. Hoisting a personnel platform shall be performed in a slow, controlled, cautious manner with no sudden movements of the crane, derrick, or platform. b. Hoisting of personnel while the crane is traveling is prohibited. c. Load lines shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least seven (7) times the maximum intended load, except that where rotation resistant rope is used, the lines shall be capable of supporting without failure, at least ten (10) times the maximum intended load. d. Load and boom hoist drum brakes, swing brakes, and locking devices such as pawls or dogs, shall be engaged when the occupied personnel platform is in a stationary working position. e. The crane shall be uniformly level within one (1) percent of level grade and located on firm footing. When hoisting employees, cranes equipped with outriggers shall be fully deployed following the manufacturers specifications. f. The total weight of the loading personnel platform and related rigging shall not exceed fifty (50) percent of the rated capacity for the radius and configuration of the crane or derrick. g. The use of machines having live booms (booms in which lowering is controlled by a brake without aid from other devices which slow the lowering speeds) is prohibited. 3. Instruments and Components a. Cranes and derricks with variable angle booms shall be equipped with a boom angle indicator, readily visible to the operator. b. Cranes with telescoping booms shall be equipped with a device to indicate clearly to the operator, at all times, the booms extended length, or an accurate determination of the load radius to be used during the lift. c. A positive-acting device shall be used which prevents contact between the load block or overhaul ball and the boom tip (anti-two-blocking device). Alternatively, a system may be used, which deactivates the hoisting action before damage occurs in the event of a two-blocking situation (two-block damage prevention feature).

Page 9 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) d. The load line hoist drum shall have a system or device on the power trial, other than the load hoist brake, which regulates the lowering rate of speed of the hoist mechanism (controlled load lowering). Free fall is prohibited. Personnel Platforms 1. Critical Lift Plan a. A Critical Lift Plan (See Forms Section) shall be utilized before making any critical lift. b. The person who is responsible for operation of the crane is responsible for completing the Critical Lift Plan. 2. Design Criteria a. The platform and suspension system shall be designed by a qualified engineer or a qualified person competent in structural design. b. The suspension system shall be designed to minimize tipping of the platform due to movement of employees occupying the platform. c. The personnel platform itself, except the guardrail system and body harness anchorages, shall be capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least five (5) times the maximum intended load. 3. Platform Specifications a. Each personnel platform shall be equipped with a guardrail system which meets the OSHA standard railing specifications and shall be enclosed at least from the toe board to midrail with either solid construction or expanded metal having openings no greater than inch (1.27 cm). b. As a minimum, a standard railing shall consist of a top rail, intermediate rail, toe board, and posts, and have a vertical height of approximately 42 inches (from upper surface of top rail to floor). c. The intermediate rail shall be halfway between the top rail and the floor. d. The completed structure shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 2,000 pounds, applied in any direction, at any point on the top rail, with a minimum of deflection. e. A grab rail sha ll be installed inside the entire perimeter of the personnel platform. f. Access gates, if installed, shall not swing outward. g. Access gates, including sliding or folding gates, shall be equipped with a restraining device to prevent accidental opening. h. There shall be enough head room to allow employees to stand upright in the platform.

Page 10 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) i. In addition to the use of hard hats, overhead protection on the personnel platform shall be provided when employees are exposed to falling objects.

j. All rough edges to which employees may be exposed shall be surfaced or smoothed to prevent injury. k. All welding of personnel platforms and components shall be performed by a qualified welder, familiar with weld grades, types, and material specified in the platform design. l. The personnel platforms shall be conspicuously posted with a plate or other permanent marking which indicates the weight of the platform and its rated load capacity or maximum intended load.

4. Loading a. The personne l platform shall not be loaded in excess of its rated load capacity. b. The number of employees occupying the personnel platform shall not exceed the number required for the work being performed and the weight shall not exceed the rated load capacity of the personnel platform. c. Personnel platforms shall be used only for employees, their tools, and the material necessary to do their work. They shall not be used to hoist only material or tools when not hoisting personnel. d. Materials and tools for use during a personnel lift shall be secured to prevent displacement. e. Materials and tools for use during a personnel lift shall be evenly distributed within the confines of the platform while the platform is suspended. 5. Rigging a. When a wire rope bridle is used to connect the personnel platform to the load line, each bridle leg shall be connected to a master link or shackle in such a manner to ensure that the load is evenly divided among the bridle legs. b. Hooks on overhaul ball assemblies, lower load blocks, or other attachment assemblies shall be of a type that can be closed and locked, eliminating the hook throat opening. Alternatively, an alloy anchor type shackle with a bolt, nut, and retaining pin may be used. c. Wire rope, shackles, rings, master links, and other rigging hardware must be capable of supporting, without failure, at least five (5) times the maximum intended load applied or transmitted to that component. Where rotation resistant rope is used, the slings shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least ten (10) times the maximum intended load. d. All eyes in wire rope slings shall be fabricated with thimbles.

Page 11 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) e. Bridles and associated rigging for attaching the personnel platform to the hoist line shall be used only for the platform and employees, their tools and the materials necessary to do their work, and shall not be used for any other purpose when not hoisting personnel. 6. Suspended Personnel Platforms (Manbaskets) a. The use of a crane or derrick to hoist employees on a personnel platform is prohibited. Exception: When the erection, use, dismantling, or conventional means of reaching the worksite (personnel hoist, ladder, stairways, etc.) would be more hazardous or is not possible because of structural design or worksite conditions. Trial Lift, Inspection, and Proof Testing 1. A trial lift with the unoccupied personnel platform loaded at least to the anticipated liftweight shall be made from the ground level, or any other location where employees will enter the platform, to each location at which the personnel platform is to be hoisted and positioned. 2. This trial lift shall be performed immediately prior to placing personnel on the platform. 3. The operator shall determine that all systems, controls, and safety devices are activated and functioning properly, that no interferences exist, and that all configurations necessary to reach those work locations will allow the operator to remain under the 50 percent limit of the hoists rated capacity. 4. Materials and tools to be used during the actual lift can be loaded in the platform for the trial lift. 5. A single trial lift may be performed at one time for all locations that are to be reached from a single setup position. 6. The trial lift shall be repeated prior to hoisting employees whenever the crane or derrick is moved and set up in a new location or returned to a previously used location. Additionally, the trial lift shall be repeated when the lift route is changed unless the operator determines that the route change is not significant (i.e., the route change would not affect the safety of hoisted employees). 7. After the trial lift, and just prior to hoisting personnel, the platform shall be hoisted a few inches and inspected to ensure that it is secure and properly balanced. Employees shall not be hoisted unless the following conditions are determined to exist: a. Hoist ropes shall be free of kinks; b. Multiple part lines shall be centered over the platform; c. Primary attachment shall be centered over the platform; and d. Hoisting systems shall be inspected if the load rope is slack to ensure all ropes are properly stationed on drums and in sheaves.

Page 12 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) 8. A visual inspection of the crane or derrick, rigging, personnel platform and the crane or derrick base support or ground shall be conducted by a competent person immediately after the trial lift to determine whether the testing has exposed any defect or produced any adverse effect upon any component or structure. 9. Any defects found during inspections shall be corrected before hoisting personnel. 10. At each job site, prior to hoisting employees on the personnel platform, and after any repair or modification, the platform and rigging shall be proof-tested to 125 percent of the platforms rated capacity by holding it in a suspended position for five (5) minutes with the test load evenly distributed on the platform. (This may be done concurrently with the trial lift.) 11. After proof-testing, a competent person shall inspect the platform and rigging. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected and another proof test conducted. 12. Personnel hoisting shall not be conducted until the proof testing requirements are satisfied. Work Practices 1. Employees shall keep all parts of the body inside the platform during raising, lowering, and positioning. This provision does not apply to an occupant of the platform with the duties of a signal person. 2. Before employees enter or exit a hoisted personnel platform that is not landed, the platform shall be secured to the structure where the work is to be performed, unless securing to the structure creates an unsafe situation. 3. Tag lines shall be used unless their use creates an unsafe condition. 4. The crane or derrick operator shall remain at the controls at all times when the platform is occupied. 5. Hoisting of employees shall be promptly discontinued upon indication of any dangerous weather conditions or other impending danger. 6. Employees being hoisted shall remain in continuous sight of and in direct communication with the operator or signal person. In those situations where direct visual contact with the operator is not possible and the use of a signal person would create a hazard for that person, direct communication alone, such as by radio, may be used. 7. Except over water, employees occupying the personnel platform shall use a body harness system with a lanyard appropriately attached to the lower load block or overhaul ball, or to a structural member within the personnel platform capable of supporting a fall impact for employees using the anchorage. 8. When working over water, the following requirements of 29 CFR 1926.106 shall apply: a. Employees working over or near water, where the danger of drowning exists, shall be provided with U.S. Coast Guard-approved life jacket or buoyant work vests.

Page 13 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) b. Prior to and after each use, the buoyant work vests or life preservers shall be inspected for defects which alter their strength or buoyancy. Defective units shall not be used. c. Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and readily available for emergency rescue operations. Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed 200 feet. d. At least one lifesaving skiff shall be immediately available at locations where emplo yees are working over or adjacent to water. 9. No lifts shall be made on another of the cranes or derricks load lines while personnel are suspended on a platform. Definitions 1. Bridge That part of a crane consisting of one or more girders, trucks, end ties, footwalks, and drive mechanism, which carries the trolley or trolleys. 2. Critical Lift A lift which involves one or more of the following: 1) lifts exceeding a safety factor of 75%; 2) lifts overpressurized vessels and/or piping; 3) lifts over buildings with energized electrical equipment; 4) personnel lifts; or 5) lifts designated as critical by the Crosstex representative. 3. Limit Switch - A device that is actuated by the motion of a part of a power-driven machine or equipment to alter or disconnect the electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic circuit associated with the machine or equipment. 4. Load Total superimposed weight on the load block or hook. 5. Overload - Any load greater than the rated load. 6. Overhead Hoists a. Manually-operated hoists actuated by a hand chain and utilizing chain as the lifting medium; and b. Electric and air-powered hoists using either chain or wire rope as the lifting medium. c. Ratchet-operated hoists, such as come-alongs, are not included in this program. 7. Side Pull The portion of the hoist pull acting horizontally. 8. Trolley - The unit that travels on the bridge rails and supports the load block. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.179 Overhead & Gantry Cranes. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.184 Slings. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1926.550 Cranes and Derricks. ASME/ANSI B30.2 Overhead & Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist. ASME/ANSI B30.9 - Slings.

Page 14 of 15

CRANES, CHAIN HOIST, AND SLING ROPE PROCEDURE (continued) References (continued) ASME/ANSI B30.10 - Hooks. ASME/ANSI B30.11 - Monorails and Underhung Cranes. ASME/ANSI B30.16 Overhead Hoists (Underhung). ASME/ANSI B30.17 Overhead and Gantry Crantes (Top Running Bridge, Single Girder, Underhung Hoist). ASME/ANSI B30.20 Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices. ASME/ANSI B30.21 Manually Lever Operated Hoists. Mechanical Engineering Department Design Safety Standards, Chapter 2.2 Lifting Equipment. CMAA Specification No. 70 Specifications for Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes. CMAA Specification No. 74 Specifications for Top-Running and Under-Running SingleGirder Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist. NFPA 70, Article 610 Overhead Cranes and/or Hoists.

Page 15 of 15

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE Space Preparation and Entry Procedures 1. Unauthorized Entries - Measures will be taken to prevent unauthorized entries into permitrequired confined spaces. Acceptable means will be accomplished, at a minimum, through one or more of the following: a. Posting of danger signs, labels, and/or physical barriers. b. Restricting access such that the only means of entry requires the use of tools or keys. c. Training and orientation programs (General Awareness). 2. Pre-Entry Meeting - A pre-entry meeting shall be conducted with all persons involved in the proposed work. This meeting shall cover the basic steps for the confined space entry, a review of the specific conditions and precautions to be listed on the entry permit, a review of expected and potential hazards, and when applicable, Material Safety Data sheets (MSDS) for any products to which the entrant(s) may be exposed. This information is to be recorded on the Confined Space Entry Permit. 3. Isolate and Lockout a. Before entry is allowed into a permit-required confined space, the space must be properly isolated to eliminate or control hazards. All pipes and tubing leading into or out of the space must be skillet-blinded, have a double-block and bleed or be physically disconnected as close to the confined space as possible or have sections removed. When lines are disconnected, they must be either blind-flanged, capped, or plugged. b. An alternative to this procedure is to shut-in the facility, bleed all pressures to atmospheric pressure, and have a valve closed (locked and tagged) on each line connected to the space, as near to the space as possible. Continuous atmospheric monitoring may be necessary during this procedure. Isolation procedures will include work practices requiring the physical verification that the bleed or vent valve is functioning properly and not plugged. c. ALL ENERGY ISOLATIONS (lockout/tagout) must be performed in accordance with established Crosstex Energy Services procedures (See Lockout/Tagout - Control of Hazardous Energy). 4. Cleaning a. Depending upon the nature of the contents, the confined space will be emptied and made as clean and free as possible of residue. This will be done by hot or cold water washing, steaming, chemical neutralization, or by purging with air or nitrogen, with vapors being safety vented away from the space. b. After the material in the confined space has been evacuated, the remaining sludge will be removed to the greatest extent possible, working from the outside of the confined space. c. Materials removed from the space should not be allowed to flow onto, contaminate or pollute nearby areas. Disposal of these materials will be in accordance with Crosstex Energy Services practices, which have been pre-approved for use.
Page 1 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) 5. Ventilation a. The confined space will be ventilated to remove toxic and/or explosive vapors. The space will be continuously ventilated if the work in progress tends to create fumes (i.e., welding, cutting, coating, removal of sludge) or if necessary to maintain an acceptable atmosphere. Ventilation may also be required to control temperature conditions within the space. b. Oxygen or inert gases shall not be used to ventilate a confined space. When mechanical ventilation is necessary, the equipment should be suitable for use in hazardous locations and shall be bonded, when applicable, to avoid a static charge buildup. Precautions are to be taken to ensure that only fresh uncontaminated air is being forced into the space. In some instances, it may be necessary to use a flexible duct to carry expelled gases away from the work area. 6. Atmospheric Monitoring (Testing) - A person competent in the use of monitoring instruments will be designated to test for hazards within the confined space prior to entry. The tests will be performed in the following sequence using a calibrated detection instrument(s): a. Oxygen concentration b. Flammable concentration c. Toxic substance concentration (H2 S, SO2 , Benzene, etc.) d. NORM (if applicable) e. Any other hazards condition which might be suspected 7. Acceptable Entry Conditions a. Oxygen Concentration Less than 16% - Entry shall NOT be made into an atmosphere containing less than 16% oxygen by volume except under emergency circumstances to perform rescue operations utilizing specialized equipment as necessary to ensure the safety of personnel. 16% - 19.4% - Entrant(s) must wear supplied air respirator(s). 19.5% - 23.5% - Entry without supplied air respirator is acceptable provided that all other exposure limits are met (LEL, toxicity, etc.). Greater than 23.5% - Entry shall NOT be made into an oxygen-enriched atmosphere except under emergency circumstances to perform rescue operations utilizing specialized equipment as necessary to ensure the safety of personnel.

Page 2 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) b. Flammable Concentration 0 - 10% LEL Entry without supplied air respirator is acceptable provided that all other occupational exposure limits are not exceeded (oxygen, toxicity, etc.). Hot work is not permitted above 0% LEL. Greater than 10% LEL Entry shall NOT be made into an atmosphere in excess of 10% of the LEL except under emergency circumstances to perform rescue operations utilizing specialized equipment as necessary to ensure the safety of personnel.

8. Toxic Substance Concentration - Entry without a supplied air respirator is acceptable, provided that the concentration is within established occupational exposure limits for all contaminants and there is no oxygen deficiency. For concentrations in excess of established limits, entry is authorized when appropriate respiratory protection equipment is worn. See Crosstex Energy Services Respiratory Protection Program for detailed requirements and appropriate equipment selection. 9. NORM Where exposure to NORM is reasonably foreseeable, appropriate measures will be taken to restrict or limit employee exposure. Entry into a confined space will not be allowed without the use of appropriate personal protective equipment if the dose rate inside the vessel/confined space exceeds 50 uR/hr or until steps have been taken to reduce the NORM level to below the allowable limit. See Crosstex Energy Services NORM Program for additional information on evaluation and control of personal exposures to NORM. 10. Other Considerations - Other conditions that may require additional precautions to ensure safe entry include: a. Temperature extremes b. Vapor or fume generation by job task c. Chemical irritants d. Noise levels e. Falling objects f. Slipping and tripping hazards g. Moving parts h. Poisonous snakes i. Insects and spiders

Page 3 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Equipment Required For Entry 1. Personal Protective Equipment - Personal protective equipment appropriate to the hazards must be worn when working in a confined space. Appropriate equipment may include safety head protection, footwear, approved eye and face protection, protective clothing, respiratory equipment, hearing protection, personal monitors, and a safety harness (chest or full body) attached to a lifeline. NOTE: Refer to other Crosstex Energy Services Programs (i.e., Respiratory Protection, Personal Protective Equipment, Hydrogen Sulfide, etc.) for more detailed information regarding specific requirements, necessary training, and limitations for use of personal protective equipment. 2. Communications Equipment - Communications equipment must be provided in those instances where direct visual contact or other effective means of communication cannot be maintained between the attendant and all entrants. The communications equipment used shall meet minimum electrical classification standards for the area. 3. Lighting - Adequate lighting must be provided where necessary to enable entrants to safely enter and complete the assigned task. The lighting equipment used shall meet minimum electrical classification standards for the area. NOTE: All portable electrical lighting and equipment shall be protected with ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection. Where portable generators are used for lighting power supply, low voltage lighting (24 volts or less) shall be used. 4. Barriers Sufficient barriers will be provided around the permit-required confined space opening to: a. Prevent unauthorized and accidental entry (falls) into the confined space; and b. Protect the entrants inside of the confined space from objects and persons outside of the confined space. 5. Other Equipment a. Equipment necessary to ensure safe ingress and egress to and from the permit space shall be provided (ladders, mechanical lifting devices, scaffolding, powered platforms, etc.). b. Powered tools and equipment used in the permit space must meet minimum electrical classification standards and plugged into a circuit protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to protect personnel from electrical shock. c. Battery-powered electrical devices shall be approved for use in accordance with the area classification.

Page 4 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Rescue 1. Non-Entry Rescue a. Non-entry rescue is the preferred method for use throughout Crosstex Energy Services. Non-entry rescue is performed from outside the confined space utilizing an acceptable retrieval system when an entrant cannot perform self-removal. Determining the appropriate means for rescuing entrants safely shall be part of the planning process for every permit space entry. b. Factors that may make non-entry rescue impractical include: Internal configuration of the space is such that an entrant may become trapped or entangled. Use of non-entry rescue equipment (body harness or wristlets and lifeline) is impractical. Entrance into the space is ele vated or positioned such that non-entry rescue would be inhibited. Permit space is entered vertically and a mechanical retrieval device cannot be utilized or may be ineffective. Personnel attending the entrant(s) lifelines are not physically capable of removing entrant(s) from the confined space.

c. When non-entry rescue is not practical, a trained and qualified rescue service must be provided onsite while the entry is taking place. 2. Retrieval Systems a. Whenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, a retrieval system or method(s) will be used, unless the retrieval equipment increases the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to the rescue. b. The use of a retrieval system enables the rescue of the entrant(s) from outside of the space in the event self-removal is not possible. c. Retrieval systems used will meet the following requirements: Each authorized entrant will use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level or above the entrant's head. Wristlets may be used if it is impractical to use a chest or full body harness; and The other end of the retrieval line will be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point outside of the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet deep (such as a storage tank or vessel with no side entrance). Mechanical retrieval devices must be approved for rescue use.
Page 5 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) 3. Rescue Services a. When the use of a retrieval system is not possible or would not be effective and other non-entry rescue methods are not available or are ineffective, then a qualified rescue service (two or more persons properly trained & equipped) will be present and able to enter the space immediately. b. The attendant is responsible for summoning the rescue service. The rescue service is responsible for entering the permit space in order to retrieve the entrant(s). The rescue service may or may not be Crosstex Energy Services personnel. c. During the rescue, at least one person must be designated to remain outside of the confined space and at least one person participating in the rescue will have a valid (current) first aid/CPR certification. The attendant can perform entry rescue ONLY when trained as a rescuer and relieved by another attendant. d. Material Safety Data Sheets will be made available to the medical facility providing treatment to entrants injured and/or exposed to a substance for which Crosstex Energy Services is required to maintain a material safety data sheet (MSDS). e. If non-Crosstex employees provide rescue services, they will be informed of the hazards present where rescue may be required, and they will be afforded access to all permit spaces from which rescue may be necessary for the purpose of training and preplanning rescue procedures. Entry Permit 1. Permit Issuance a. Whenever a permit-required confined space is to be entered, an entry permit (Confined Space Entry Permit) will be completed and signed by the Entry Supervisor and Permit Issuer prior to entry. In some cases, the same individual may serve both roles. b. The form is both an authorization for and a record of the confined space entry. The permit will be posted at the confined space entrance (entry point) until the job is completed. All cancelled permits for confined space entries shall be maintained on file by the facility. NOTE: Where local business unit practices require, a copy shall be maintained at the facility and the original shall be forwarded to the Safety Department. c. When hot work is to be performed inside of a permit space, the hot work must be addressed on a Hot Work Permit. Refer to the Hot Work Permit procedure for specific permit issuance requirements. d. When an excavation is equal to or exceeds four feet in depth, the Competent Person Excavation Safety Checklist shall be completed.

Page 6 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Permit Content a. Each section of the Confined Space Entry Permit shall be properly completed with ALL required information and necessary approvals obtained prior to starting the job. b. Each section of the permit must be fully completed. A list of minimum informatio n required for a confined space entry can be found in APPENDIX B, Information for a Permit-Required Confined Space Entry. c. Proper consideration shall be given to identifying all hazards associated with the confined space entry. Information entered on the Confined Space Entry Permit shall address what preparation measures, PPE or controls will be utilized to eliminate or control all hazards associated with the confined space entry to ensure a safe operation is performed. 3. Permit Cancellation a. The Entry Permit will be cancelled under the following conditions: Upon completion of the job At the expiration of the authorized time period Upon the occurrence of any condition that may present a hazard or unsafe condition not addressed by the permit

b. Entry Permits are only valid for one shift. The Entry Permit will be cancelled at shift change and a new Entry Permit will be issued. c. It shall be the responsibility of the Permit Issuer to cancel the entry permit. Upon cancellation of a permit, the permit space will not be reentered until it has been retested and a new permit is issued. Any occurrence of a non-authorized condition (unsafe condition or hazard) shall be noted on the permit at the time of cancellation. This information shall be used to facilitate review of entry procedures established under this program. d. Post entry communications between the employees involved in the confined space entry task and the person(s) responsible for the planning of the confined space entry will occur to ensure that any deficiencies or hazards confronted during the entry are noted and addressed. Program Review 1. A review of this Confined Space Entry Program and entry operations will be performed as follows: a. By a qualified person when there is reason to believe that the measures taken under this program may not protect employees and the procedures must be revised to correct deficiencies found before subsequent entries are authorized. b. On an annual basis or more frequently if necessary, by Safety personnel using cancelled permits, alternate entry procedure certifications and other associated documentation, to ensure that entrants are protected from permit space hazards.
Page 7 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) c. Periodically, by affected Supervisors, to evaluate confined space entry procedures and review cancelled entry permits and associated documentation to ensure that correct entry procedures are being followed and personnel are protected from permit space hazards. 2. Periodic supervisory reviews and annual Safety reviews shall be documented for a permitrequired confined space entry or Alternate Entry Procedure Certification. 3. Inadequacies in confined space entry procedures shall be brought to the attention of the appropriate Supervisor and corrective actions shall be taken to correct program deficiencies and ensure the safety of personnel entering confined spaces. Alternate (Non-Permit Required) Entry Procedures 1. Application - In rare instances, there may be permit-required confined spaces where the ONLY hazard is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere. In these instances, Alternate Entry Procedures may be appropriate and can be utilized in lieu of the standard permitrequired confined space entry procedures previously discussed. NOTE: Alternate procedures may ONLY be used in rare cases where ALL the requirements discussed below are met. Consult with the Safety Department prior to utilizing Alternate Entry Procedures. 2. Requirements - Alternate Entry Procedures may be utilized entering a permit-required confined space where: a. The ONLY hazard posed by the confined space is an actual or potential hazardous atmosphere. b. The work to be performed will not create any hazards to entrants inside or outside the space while the entry is in progress. c. By the use of continuous forced air ventilation, the hazardous atmosphere can be eliminated and maintained at levels safe for entry without the use of respiratory protection. NOTE: Initial atmospheric monitoring of the space shall be conducted with the ventilation supply turned off. 3. Alternate Entry Procedures The following requirements will be observed when entry into a permit-required confined space is undertaken using alternate entry procedures. a. All hazardous energy sources must be properly isolated and lockout/tagout is applied in accordance with the Crosstex Energy Services Lockout/Tagout Program. b. Conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover must be eliminated prior to the cover being removed.

Page 8 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) c. When entrance covers are removed, the openings must be promptly guarded to prevent accidental falls, the entry of unauthorized personnel, and/or foreign objects through the opening. d. The internal atmosphere must be tested with a calibrated direct reading instrument for the following conditions and in the order as listed: Oxygen content Combustible gases and vapors Toxic air contaminants (See Acceptable Entry Conditions)

NOTE: If it is necessary to enter the space to take these measurements or evaluate hazards, then procedures established for permit-required confined space entry will be adhered to. There must NEVER be a hazardous atmosphere or a hazardous condition (which can cause death or physical harm) within the space whenever any person is to enter the confined space under alternate procedures. 4. Ventilation - Continuous forced air ventilation shall be used as follows: a. Employees may not enter the space until the forced air ventilation has eliminated any hazardous atmosphere. b. The forced air ventilation will be so directed as to ventilate the immediate areas where the employee(s) is or will be present within the space and will continue until all employees have left the space. c. The air supply will be from a clean source and may not increase the hazards in the space. 5. Atmospheric Monitoring a. Prior to entry, forced air ventilation shall be suspended for a minimum of 15 minutes prior to conducting atmospheric monitoring of the space. Acceptable entry conditions must be observed or entry under alternate procedures is not permitted. b. Prior to entry, verification that the space is safe for entry and that all the measures required above have been taken will be certified through a written and approved Alternate Entry Procedure Certification Form (See Forms section of this CD) that contains: Date and time Location of the space Name of the space to be entered Description of the work to be performed Verification that the space meets ALL required conditions for entry

Page 9 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Documentation that atmospheric testing has been performed and that continuous forced air ventilation alone is sufficient to maintain an acceptable atmosphere Documentation that no other hazards exist within the space Signature of the Entry Supervisor making the certification NOTE: The certification will be made before entry and will be available to each person entering the space. c. The atmosphere within the space will be periodically or continuously monitored to ensure that continuous forced air ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere. d. Conditions inside and around the space will be continually evaluated for any hazardous condition. e. If a hazardous atmosphere or hazardous condition is detected during entry: Training 1. Training will be provided for each person affected by this program. Training will be to a level of proficiency that will allow assigned duties or responsibilities involving entries into permit spaces to be conducted in accordance with all requirements of this program. (See Appendix A.) Additional training will be provided to the Competent Person. 2. Training will be provided before an employee is assigned confined space entry duties, when there is a change in assigned duties or a change in confined space operations that present a hazard for which training has not been previously conducted and whenever deficiencies are noted in any permit space entry operation. 3. Periodic refresher training shall be provided for all personnel who are assigned confined space entry responsibilities. Each employee will leave the space immediately. The space will be evaluated to determine how the hazardous atmosphere or hazardous condition developed. Measures will be taken to protect the entrants from the hazards and to prevent recurrence before any subsequent entry takes place.

Page 10 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions 1. Alternate Entry Procedures - In rare cases, alternate entry procedures may be utilized to enter a permit-required confined space where the ONLY hazard within the space is an actual or potential atmospheric hazard. Evaluation of the space and certification that it qualifies for Alternate Entry Procedures must be documented on the Alternate Entry Procedures Certification Form. 2. Atmosphere - Refers to the gases, vapors, mists, fumes, and dusts within or outside a confined space. 3. Attendant (Standby Person) - An individual stationed outside of the permit-required confined space who is trained to perform the defined duties listed in the Responsibilities section of this program and who monitors the authorized entrant(s) inside of the permitrequired confined space. 4. Authorized Entrant - A trained person authorized by Crosstex Energy Services to enter a permit space and who performs the defined duties listed in the Responsibilities section of this program. 5. Blanking or Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a blind flange, spectacle or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and is designed to withstand the maximum pressure of the pipe, line or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. 6. Bonding - The joining of metallic parts with an adequately-sized conductor to form an electrically- conductive path which will ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to safely conduct any current likely to be imposed. 7. Confined Space - Refers to a space that: a. Is large enough and so configured that a person can bodily enter and perform assigned work; b. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, columns and separators, piping, storage bins, vaults, excavations deeper than four feet, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry); and c. Is not designed for continuous human occupancy. 8. Double Block and Bleed The closure of a line, duct or pipe by closing and locking and/or tagging two in- line valves and by opening and locking and/or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves. 9. Emergency - Any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring equipment) or event internal or external to the confined space that could endanger entrants. 10. Engulfment - The surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation, constriction, or crushing.

Page 11 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 11. Entry - The action by which a person passes through an opening into a confined space. Entry is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space. NOTE: To come under the provisions of this program, the space and opening must be large enough for a person to bodily enter the space. Utilizing openings on vessels where only parts of body extremities (hands/arms) can be exposed are NOT considered confined space entries. 12. Entry Permit Crosstex Energy Services written authorization to allow and control entry into a confined space. This permit is known as the Confined Space Entry Permit and is completed by the Entry Supervisor and authorized by the Permit Issuer to allow and control entry into a confined space. 13. Entry Supervisor - The on-scene person responsible for determining if conditions are acceptable for entry, for authorizing entry and overseeing the entry operations and for terminating the entry if necessary, and who is trained to perform the defined duties listed in the "Responsibilities" section of this program. 14. Grounding The bonding of an electrical circuit to a conducting body used as a common return for the electrical circuit that dissipates any electrical charge. 15. Hazardous Atmosphere - An atmosphere which exposes employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self rescue (that is, escape unaided from a confined space), injury or acute illness from one or more of the following causes: a. Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10% of its lower explosive limit (LEL); b. Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds 10% of its LEL; c. Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5% (oxygen deficient) or above 23.5% (oxygen enriched); and/or d. Atmospheric concentration of any hazardous substance in excess of established occupational exposure limits. NOTE: Although exposure to NORM does not produce acute symptoms that impair the ability of a person to escape unaided from a confined space, precautions will be taken to protect the worker(s) from the exposures of a NORM-contaminated atmosphere. Refer to Crosstex Energy Services NORM Exposure Control Procedure for detailed information and applicable parameters concerning personnel exposure to NORM. 16. Hot Work Permit Crosstex Energy Services written authorization to perform any work capable of providing a source of ignition (welding, cutting, grinding, burning, riveting and heating, or similar spark producing operations), as well as work which produces a source of ignition, such as abrasive blasting or space heating. 17. Inerting - The displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space, or other equipment, by a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere will not support combustion.
Page 12 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 18. Isolation - The process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely protected against the release of energy and material(s) into the space by such means as: blanking or blinding, misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts, a double block and bleed system, lockout and/or tagout of all sources of energy, or blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages. 19. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) - The minimum concentration of a combustible gas or vapor in air that will ignite if an ignition source is present. (This is equivalent to the 100% reading on a portable gas detector.) 20. Monitoring (Testing) Atmospheric testing for hazardous substances to determine whether conditions are acceptable for permitted work (e.g., entry, hotwork, etc). 21. Non-Entry Rescue Ability to safely retrieve entrant(s) who are incapacitated or unable to exit unaided from inside a confined space without entering the space. Non-entry rescue is performed from outside the space utilizing an acceptable retrieval system when entrant(s) cannot perform self-remova l. 22. Non-Permit-Required Confined Space (Non-Permit Space) A confined space that does not contain, or with respect to atmospheric hazards, does not have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm. 23. Permit Issuer - The person responsible for authorizing the Confined Space Entry Permit. This may be the PIC, a supervisor, superintendent or other designated Crosstex Energy Services Representative. 24. Permit-Required Confined Space (Permit Space) - A confined space which has one or more of the following characteristics: a. Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere. b. Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant. c. Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes in downward and tapers to a smaller cross section. d. Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. NOTE: Any confined space not possessing one or more of the characteristics above, is not a permit-required confined space subject to the provisions of this program. 25. Person-In-Charge (PIC) The lead Crosstex Energy Services Representative on-site who has the overall responsibility for a facility, project, work crew or work area. 26. Purging - The removal of gases, vapors, or other airborne impurities from a confined space.

Page 13 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions (continued) 27. Rescue Service - Two or more person(s) designated and trained in the retrieval of entrant(s) who are unable to exit unaided from a confined space. Rescue service may be provided within Crosstex, contracted, or provided by local agencies and is utilized when non-entry rescue is not feasible. 28. Retrieval System - The equipment (including a retrieval line, full body harness, wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of entrant(s). References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.146, Permit-Required Confined Spaces API Publication 2217, Guidelines for Confined Space Work in the Petroleum Industry, 6/84 ANSI Z117.1 1988, Safety Requirements for Working in Tanks and Other Confined Spaces

Page 14 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix A - Training Outline For Specific Duties 1. General Requirements - Personnel responsible for supervising, planning, entering or participating in confined space entry and rescue shall be adequately trained in their functional duties prior to any confined space entry. Training shall include: a. An explanation of the general hazards associated with confined spaces b. A discussion of specific confined space hazards associated with the facility, location or operation c. A review of terminology and definitions d. Review program requirements for standard entry procedures and alternate entry procedures e. The reason for, proper use, and limitations of personal protective equipment and other safety equipment required for entry into confined spaces f. Criteria and requirements for non-entry and entry rescue g. Review of methods to prepare a space including necessary equipment, proper isolation and methods for eliminating or controlling hazards h. An explanation of the Confined Space Entry Permit system and other procedural requirements for conducting a confined space entry i. How to respond to emergencies j. Duties and responsibilities as a member of the confined space entry team k. A description of how to recognize probable air contaminant overexposure symptoms to themselves and co-workers, and method(s) for alerting attendants l. When physical barriers are needed to protect entrants.

2. Training for Attendants - Training shall include the following: a. Summoning rescue or other emergency services b. Performing non-entry rescue operations c. Proper use of equipment used for communicating with entry and emergency/rescue personnel d. Duties and responsibilities of a Standby Attendant e. Means to maintain an accurate count of entrants within the confined space f. Conditions for ordering immediate evacuation of entrants g. Hazard recognition h. Dealing with unauthorized personnel i. Warning not to enter a confined space to rescue an entrant without someone replacing him/her as the Attendant.

Page 15 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix A - Training Outline For Specific Duties (continued) 3. Training for Atmospheric Monitoring Personnel (Tester) - Training shall include training in the proper use of atmospheric monitoring instruments. This shall include: a. Field calibration b. Basic knowledge of the work being performed c. Anticipated hazardous contaminants d. Any process which could significantly alter original conditions inside or outside the confined space e. Duties and responsibilities of an Atmospheric Monitoring Person (Tester) 4. Training for Emergency Response Personnel - Annual training shall include: a. The rescue plan and procedures developed for each type of confined space they are anticipated to encounter b. Use of emergency rescue equipment c. Basic first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) techniques d. Use of appropriate personal protective equipment e. Duties and responsibilities of Emergency Response Personnel f. Participation in mock confined space rescues 5. Training for Entry Supervisor and/or Permit Issuer - Training shall include: a. A detailed explanation of the permit system and other procedural requirements for conducting a confined space entry b. Identification of confined space hazards c. Pre-entry considerations d. An explanation of atmospheric monitoring procedures e. Selection of proper personal protective equipment f. Duties and responsibilities g. Post entry evaluations to ensure that any deficiencies in the Confined Space Program are noted and addressed.

Page 16 of 17

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix B - Information For A Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Below are the minimum information requirements for a Confined Space Entry Permit: Identity and location of the space Purpose of the entry Authorized dates Name(s) of authorized entrant(s) Name(s) of attendant(s) utilized Signature of the permit issuer and signature(s) of any subsequent entry supervisor(s) Hazards of the confined space Measures used to isolate and to eliminate or control the hazards before entry Acceptable entry conditions Results of all required monitoring, the initials of the tester(s) and the time(s), which the test(s) were taken Information necessary for summoning rescue and emergency services (name, telephone number, etc.) Means of communication to be used between entrant(s) and attendant(s) List of required equipment for the entry All other relevant information Any additional permits issued relative to the entry

Page 17 of 17

COMPRESSED GAS AND SAMPLE CYLINDER SAFETY, STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE Using Compressed Air 1. All compressed air outlets used for parts cleaning will be regulated to less than 30 psi. Either a posted sign so designating or a cleaning tip that is self regulating to 30 psi must be utilized. 2. Compressed air should only be used for cleaning parts when no other means are acceptable. 3. Before using compressed air for parts cleaning, make sure that debris will not be blown onto someone else. To prevent debris from flying, cover equipment with a canvas. 4. Never use compressed air for cleaning clothes or body parts. 5. Wear eye and face protection to prevent injury from flying particles. 6. Before operating an air hose, examine all connections to make sure they are tight and will not come loose under pressure; hold nozzle when turning air on or off. 7. Do not kink hose to stop the air flow; always turn off air at the control valve. 8. Use properly sized and rated hoses and fittings. 9. Check hoses regularly to ensure that they are in good condition. 10. Never use hoses to raise or lower tools. 11. Do not leave hoses lying around where they can become a tripping hazard. 12. Never point a compressed air nozzle at another person or use compressed air for practical jokes. 13. Crows feet connections should be pinned or wired together whenever they are used. This applies not only to compressed air, but in all situations regardless of the substance in transport. Transporting, Moving, and Storing Compressed Gas Cylinders 1. Always store compressed gas cylinders in a vertical valve-end- up position with the valve closed and a protective valve cover screwed on, hand tight. 2. Do not store oxygen cylinders near highly combustible materials, especially oil or grease, or near reserve stocks of carbide or acetylene. 3. Separate oxygen cylinders in storage from fuel gas cylinders, such as acetylene, or combustible materials, by a minimum distance of twenty (20) feet or by a non-combustible barrier at least five (5) feet high having a fire resistance rating of at least one- half hour. 4. Legibly mark compressed gas cylinders with either the trade name or chemical name of their contents. Whenever practical, mark on the shoulder of the cylinder. 5. Mark empty compressed gas cylinders EMPTY. Store empty cylinders with their valves closed, valve caps securely in place, and separated from full cylinders.

Page 1 of 3

COMPRESSED GAS AND SAMPLE CYLINDER SAFETY, STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) 6. Store compressed gas cylinders chained to a stationary object or secured in a specially constructed storage rack, in the upright position, to prevent them from falling over. 7. Store compressed gas cylinders away from heat sources, in well ventilated and dry spaces. 8. Close cylinder valves before moving cylinders. 9. Before hoisting cylinders, secure them on a cradle, slingboard, or pallet. Do not hoist or transport by means of magnets or choker slings. 10. Move cylinders by tilting and rolling them on their bottom edges. Do not allow them to be dropped, struck, or permitted to strike each other violently. 11. When cylinders are transported by powered vehicles, (such as from location to location, within a plant or shop, by forklift, truck, etc.) secure them in a vertical position. 12. Do not use valve protection caps for lifting or moving cylinders. Do not use bars under valves or valve protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen. Use warm, not boiling, water to thaw cylinders loose. 13. Unless cylinders are firmly secured on a special carrier intended for this purpose, remove regulators and put valve protection caps in place before cylinders are moved. 14. Use a suitable cylinder truck, chain, or steadying device to keep cylinders from being knocked over while in use or during storage. 15. Secure acetylene cylinders in an upright position at all times except, if necessary, for short periods of time while cylinders are actually being hoisted or carried. 16. Close the cylinder valve when work is finished, when cylinders are empty, or prior to moving cylinders. 17. Assigned storage places shall be located where cylinders will not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in unventilated enclosures such as lockers. 18. The in-plant handling, storage, and utilization of all compressed gases in cylinders, portable tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks shall be in accordance with Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1-1965. 19. Do not place cylinders where they might become part of an electric circuit. 20. Do not transport sample cylinders in the back of a pickup truck. 21. Compressed gas cylinders must be hydrostatically tested in accordance with legal requirements. a. Breathing air cylinders that have a star or asterisk stamped next to the last hydrostatic test date must be tested every ten (10) years as long as the cylinder is less than 35 years old. b. The refill air must have a dewpoint of -52F at 14.7 psi and prior to each refill, the cylinder must be subjected to a hammer test.

Page 2 of 3

COMPRESSED GAS AND SAMPLE CYLINDER SAFETY, STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE (continued) c. Lightweight wrapped aluminum cylinders must be hydrostatically-tested every three (3) years and steel cylinders every five (5) years. The dates should be stamped on the cylinder itself. 22. Utility stations and other gas cylinders that may be connected must be equipped with unique couplings to avoid inadvertent connection of the wrong cylinders. 23. Never use any flammable gas (i.e., butane, propane, etc.) to air up tires or for painting. References Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1910.101 Compressed Gases (general requirements) Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Subpart M Compressed Gases & Compressed Air Equipment Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Subpart N Material Handling & Storage Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1910.242 Hand & Portable Powered Tools and Equipment Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1910.268 Telecommunications Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1915.55 Gas Welding & Cutting Code of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1926.350 Gas Welding & Cutting for Construction Code of Federal Regulations Title 49, Part 173.34 Transportation of Compressed Gases

Page 3 of 3

COMBUSTIBLE AND FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE AND HANDLING PROCEDURE Storage Requirements 1. All flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in approved containers unless the product being stored will cause a reaction with the vessels. The contents of these tanks or containers must be identified, along with the appropriate hazard warnings. Refer to the Hazard Communication Program or contact the Safety Department for proper labels. 2. Do not store sampling cylinders inside vehicles. 3. The total quantity of liquid, including flammable aerosols, that may be located outside a storage cabinet within a building or an inside storage room shall not exceed any one of the following: a. 25 gallons of liquids, in containers, having a flashpoint below 73F. b. 120 gallons of liquids, in containers, having a flashpoint above 73F. c. 660 gallons of liquid in a single portable tank having a flashpoint above 73F. 4. Except as stated above, all flammable and combustible liquids must be stored within storage cabinets or inside storage rooms. 5. Storage cabinets shall meet the following criteria: a. Not more than 60 gallons of liquid having a flashpoint below 140F nor more than 120 gallons of liquids having a flashpoint above 140F may be stored in a storage cabinet. b. The bottom, top, door, and sides of the cabinet shall be at least No. 18 gauge sheet iron and double walled with 1 inches air space. c. Joints shall be riveted, welded, or made tight by some equally effective means. d. The door shall be provided with a three point lock (top, center, and bottom catches) and the door sill shall be raised at least 2 inches above the bottom of the cabinet. e. The cabinet is not required to be vented; but if it is, the following shall apply: The cabinet shall be vented to a safe area outdoors in a manner which will not compromise performance. If the cabinet is not vented but has vent openings, they shall be sealed with a properly fitted flash arrestor.

f. Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering: FLAMMABLE - KEEP FIRE AWAY. 6. Inside storage rooms must meet rigorous design specifications. Refer to NFPA 30 for information or contact the Safety Department for assistance.

Page 1 of 3

COMBUSTIBLE AND FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE AND HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) Handling Requirements 1. Flammable liquids shall be kept in approved closed containers when not actually in use. 2. Flammable liquids may be used only where there are no open flames or other sources of ignition within the possible path of vapor travel. 3. Flammable or combustible liquids must be drawn from or transferred into vessels, containers, or portable tanks within a building only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a top drawing device/pump, or from a container or portable tank by gravity through a self closing valve. 4. Transferring flammable or combustible liquids by means of gas or air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited unless the vessel is specifically designed for that purpose. 5. Flammable liquids shall not be dispensed into containers unless the nozzle and container are electrically interconnected (bonded). (Refer to the ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROGRAM section for further information.) This can be satisfied by: a. Having a metallic floor-plate on which the container stands while fill pipe or nozzle is electrically connected (bonded) to the container or plate; b. Bonding the container to the fill stem by means of a bond wire. Definitions 1. Combustible Liquid - A liquid having a flashpoint below 100o F (37.8o C) and having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia at 100o F (37.8o C). Liquids meeting this definition are known as Class 1 liquids and are subdivided as follows: a. Class 1A liquids have a flashpoint below 73o F (22.8o C) and a boiling point below 100o F (37.8o C); for example, gasoline. b. Class 1B liquids have a flashpoint below 73o F (22.8o C) and a boiling point at or above 100o F (37.8o C); for example, methanol. c. Class 1C liquids having a flashpoint at or above 73o F (22.8o C) and below 100o F (37.8o C); for example, xylene. 2. Flammable Liquid - A liquid having a flashpoint at or above 100o F (37.8o C). Combustible liquids are subdivided as: a. Class II liquids have flashpoints at or above 100o F (37.8o C) and below 140o F (60o C); for example, diesel fuel oil. b. Class IIIA liquids have flashpoints at or above 140o F (60o C) and below 200o F (93o C); for example, phenol.

Page 2 of 3

COMBUSTIBLE AND FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE AND HANDLING PROCEDURE (continued) c. Class IIIB liquids have flashpoints at or above 200o F (93o C); for example, ethylene glycol. 3. Flash Point - The lowest temperature at which a liquid will give off sufficient flammable vapor for an ignition to occur. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29 Part 1910.106 Flammable and Combustible Liquids National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code Code of Federal Regulatio ns, Title 49 Parts 171-180 Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR)

Page 3 of 3

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE Written Exposure Plan 1. The written control plan for occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens will be maintained in the facilities safety records. 2. The plan will be reviewed at least annually by the EHS Department for updating and changes. Exposure Determination 1. The exposure determination is based on identifying employees who may reasonably have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials when performing their duties. Occupational exposure means any reasonably anticipated skin, eye, mucous membrane, or parenteral contact (piercing, such as needle sticks, cuts, abrasions) with blood or other potentially infectious materials (OPIM) that may result from the performance of an employe es duties. The primary factors to be considered are: a. Probability of exposure; b. Potential Routes of Exposure 2. The standard requires an analysis of job tasks and procedures so that job duties are classified into exposure categories without regard to the use of personal protective equipment (PPE). The employees in categories 1 and 2 (see APPENDIX 1 of this section) comprise groups who will come under the Bloodborne Pathogens Standard. 3. Crosstex Energy Services employees are not required to render first aid or CPR, unless the performance of first aid is a part of an employees designated job duty or the employee is participating in a special emergency medical response organization. 4. Crosstex Energy Services trains many employees in first aid and CPR as part of the Companys ongoing safety program. It is felt that understanding the seriousness of injuries and illnesses and the associated first aid procedures instills a positive attitude toward working safely. When emergency situations occur, the Company wants employees to have all the skills necessary to handle the situation, but under no circumstances will any employee be forced to perform first aid or CPR against their personal judgment. 5. If employees have questions regarding the performance of first aid or CPR, they should contact their supervisor, their safety compliance specialist, or the EHS Department. Methods of Compliance 1. In general, the best method of ensuring the health and safety for workers at risk is to understand and follow the concept of Universal Precautions as it applies to an employees duties and work practices. 2. This concept refers to the assumption that all blood and bodily fluids are contaminated with pathogens. 3. Instruction in Universal Precautions shall take place during initial and recurrent training as well as other times deemed necessary.

Page 1 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Engineering and Work Practice Controls 1. Hand washing is a primary work practice control. 2. Crosstex Energy Services will provide hand washing facilities to ensure that employees use them following exposure to blood. 3. If this is not available or feasible, then alternative methods, such as antiseptic towelettes or waterless hand gel, will be provided. 4. When these alternative methods are used, employees shall wash their hands (or other affected areas) with soap and running water as soon as feasible thereafter. 5. Cleaning, disinfecting, and sterilization of non-disposable equipment are defined in APPENDIX 2 of this section. Personal Protective Equipme nt 1. Latex or vinyl gloves shall be worn when first aid or medical treatment begins and until treatment stops. One should assume all patients may be infectious. Always wear a new pair of gloves before handling another person. 2. Gloves, mouth shields, surgical masks, eye wear, and protective body clothing (impervious to fluids) such as gowns, aprons, or coated Tyvek coveralls shall be present in or a part of all Company first aid kits. This equipment shall be worn whenever there is a reasonable probability for blood splashes or contaminated body fluids. Surgical masks shall be used when protection is needed for the mouth and nose. 3. Recommendations for wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) are outlined in APPENDIX 3 of this section. Housekeeping 1. Exposed surfaces at first aid sites, reusable emergency equipment, etc., shall be cleaned of gross material and fluids and then wiped with an appropriate disinfectant/germicide. (See APPENDIX 2 of this section.) 2. Contaminated clothing shall be handled with care and placed in a leak-proof, labeled and/or color-coded bag at the worksite. 3. Gloves shall be worn by employees who work with contaminated laundry. 4. If laundry services are provided by independent contractors, documentation shall be reviewed by Company management to ensure that the contractors employees have had the required training mandated by the Bloodborne Pathogen Standard. Waste Handling 1. All medical wastes, blood specimens, and other body fluids shall be placed in the biohazard disposal container provided in the bloodborne pathogen kits. a. Medical wastes include, but are not limited to: needles, disposable equipment, items such as soiled dressings, sponges, and used gloves.

Page 2 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 2. Filled biohazard containers shall be stored and locked in a designated area until sent to the disposal facility. Documentation of all waste disposal shipments shall be maintained indefinitely by the facility. 3. Masks in combination with eye protection devices, such as goggles or glasses with solid sideshields, or chin length face shields, shall be worn when appropriate. Hepatitis B Vaccination 1. Hepatitis B vaccination (HBV) will be made available to all designated Company medical personnel after the employee has received the required training and within 10 working days of assignment at no cost, at a reasonable time and place, and under the supervision of a licensed physician/licensed healthcare provider. Documentation shall be on file of the dates of the workers immunization. 2. The employee who chooses not to be vaccinated must sign a declination form (see Forms section on CD). This form shall remain on file. a. The employee may later opt to receive the vaccine, again, at no cost. b. If at a later date, booster doses are recommended by the United States Public Health Service (USPHS), they will be offered to the employee. c. HBV shall also be offered to any employee, irrespective of designated category or classification, who has been involved in an occupational exposure incident. d. An investigation and a written report of the incident shall be on file. 3. Hepatitis B vaccination series shall also be made available as soon as possible, but in no event, later than 24 hours, to any employee, irrespective of designated category or classificatio n to all unvaccinated first aid providers who have rendered assistance in any situation involving the presence of blood or OPIM regardless of whether or not an actual exposure incident, as defined by the standard, may have occurred. An investigation and a written report of the incident shall be on file. Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-up 1. The Company will provide a confidential medical evaluation and follow-up subsequent to the exposure incident. An exposure incident means a specific eye, mouth, or other mucous membrane, non-intact skin, or parenteral contact (piercing, such as needle sticks, cuts, abrasions) with blood or OPIM that results from the performance of an employees duties. 2. In addition, ALL first aid rendered accidents/incidents involving the presence of blood or OPIM must be reported to the supervisor before the end of the work shift during which the first aid care accident/incident occurred. The report will have the following elements: a. Names of all first aid providers who rendered assistance, regardless of whether personal protective equipment was used. b. Description of the accident/incident, including time and date.

Page 3 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) c. Determination of whether or not, in addition to the presence of blood or other potentially infectious materials, an exposure incident, as defined by the standard, occurred. d. Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and the circumstances under which the exposure occurred. e. Identification and documentation of the source individual, unless this is not feasible or prohibited by state or local law. f. The report shall be recorded on a list of such first aid care incidents. This report shall be readily available to all employees. 3. Collection and testing of blood for HBV and HIV serological status as well as other tests as deemed necessary will be provided to the exposed employee at no cost. 4. Crosstex Energy Services will provide the healthcare professional a copy of the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogen Regulations, a description of the employees duties as they relate to the exposure, and the circumstances under which the exposure occurred. 5. Following any medical evaluation, the attending healthcare professional must provide the employee with a written opinion within 15 days. a. This written opinion must summarize the results of the medical evaluation, indicate any limitations on the employees ability to receive HBV, if the employee has received HBV, and that the employee has been informed of the results of the evaluation. b. All findings and diagnosis unrelated to the exposure shall remain confidential with the healthcare professional and the patient and shall not be included in the written report. c. The report shall be included in the employees medical records. If medical evaluation determines a positive exposure, then Crosstexs Occupational Injury and/or Illness Report must be filed. First Aid Care Accidents/Incidents Reports 1. The reporting requirements are very specific regarding incidents where employees render first aid assistance in any situation involving the presence of blood or OPIM, regardless of whether or not an exposure occurred. (See Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-up.) 2. The facility or plant must assure that: a. Provisions for a reporting procedure are implemented; b. A list of incidents where first aid assistance is rendered is established; and c. All reports of first aid care incidents are recorded on the list. Medical Records 1. All employee medical records shall be kept confidential and secure during the workers employment plus 30 years.

Page 4 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 2. A copy of the employees records may be released by the employees written consent to any person within or outside the workplace. 3. These records shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for OSHA, to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or to their designated representatives. Labels and Signs 1. Warning labels shall be affixed to containers of regulated waste. The label shall include the biohazard logo depicted in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1030(g) communication of hazards to employees. 2. The labels shall be fluorescent orange or orange-red or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. 3. Individual containers of blood or OPIM placed in a labeled container during storage, transport, shipment or disposal do not need to be labeled. Availability of Records 1. Employees may review their medical and training records during normal business hours and copies of their records will be provided to them or their authorized representative upon written request. Training 1. Crosstex will provide training to all affected employees at initial assignment and annually thereafter: 2. A training program entitled Avoiding Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens has been developed by Crosstex to facilitate training requirements and is used in conjunction with the Medic First Aid/CPR instruction. 3. Training shall include the following elements: a. General explana tion of the epidemiology and symptoms of bloodborne infectious diseases b. Transmissio n routes of bloodborne diseases c. Explanation of the Exposure Control Plan d. Recognition of exposure situations e. Selection and use of PPE f. Information regarding Hepatitis B vaccine g. Procedures in the event of an exposure h. Post-exposure evaluation and follow- up program i. Explanation of signs, labels, and color-coding

Page 5 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Students in all training modules should wear gloves when hand ling or in contact with body fluids and to use body fluid barriers when performing first aid/CPR, and should wash thoroughly afterward. 5. Training for all designated first-aiders shall include: a. The role of rendering first aid by employees b. The availability of the full Hepatitis B vaccination series c. Specific reporting procedure to ensure that all first aid incidents involving the presence of blood or Other Potentially Infectious Materials are reported to the employees immediate supervisor and the locations safety representative or Safety Department before the end of the work shift during which the incident occurred. 6. Contents of Training Records shall include: a. Date of training session b. Description or summary of training session c. Names and qualifications of instructors d. Names and job titles of all attendees Definitions 1. Blood - Human blood, human blood components, and products made from human blood. 2. Bloodborne Pathogens - Pathogenic microorganisms that are present in human blood and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but are not limited to, hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). 3. Clinical Laboratory - A workplace where diagnostic or other screening procedures are performed on blood or other potentially infectious materials. 4. Contaminated - The presence or the reasonably anticipated presence of blood or other potentially infectious materials on an item or surface. 5. Decontamination - The use of physical or chemical means to remove, inactivate, or destroy bloodborne pathogens on a surface or item to the point where they are no longer capable of transmitting infectious particles and the surface or item is rendered safe for handling, use, or disposal. 6. Engineering Controls - Controls (e.g., sharps disposal containers, self-sheathing needles, safer medical devices, such as sharps with engineered sharps injury protections and needleless systems) that isolate or remove the bloodborne pathogens hazard from the workplace. 7. Exposure Incident - A specific eye, mouth, other mucous membrane, non- intact skin, or parenteral contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials that results from the performance of an employee's duties.

Page 6 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 8. Licensed Healthcare Professional - A person whose legally permitted scope of practice allows him or her to independently perform the activities required by paragraph (f) Hepatitis B Vaccination and Post-exposure Evaluation and Follow- up. 9. Handwashing Facilities - A facility providing an adequate supply of running potable water, soap and single use towels or hot air drying machines. 10. HBV - Hepatitis B virus. 11. HIV - Human immunodeficiency virus. 12. Other Potentially Infectious Materials (OPIM) - (1) The following human body fluids: semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, amniotic fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids; (2) Any unfixed tissue or organ (other than intact skin) from a human (living or dead); and (3) HIV-containing cell or tissue cultures, organ cultures, and HIV- or HBV-containing culture medium or other solutions; and blood, organs, or other tissues from experimental animals infected with HIV or HBV. 13. Occupational Exposure - Reasonably anticipated skin, eye, mucous membrane, or parenteral contact with blood or other potentially infectious materials that may result from the performance of an employee's duties. 14. Parenteral - Piercing mucous membranes or the skin barrier through such events as needlesticks, human bites, cuts, and abrasions. 15. Personal Protective Equipment - Specialized clothing or equipment worn by an employee for protection against a hazard. General work clothes (e.g., uniforms, pants, shirts or blouses) not intended to function as protection against a hazard are not considered to be personal protective equipment. 16. Regulated Waste - Liquid or semi- liquid blood or other potentially infectious materials; contaminated items that would release blood or other potentially infectious materials in a liquid or semi- liquid state if compressed; items that are caked with dried blood or other potentially infectious materials and are capable of releasing these materials during handling; contaminated sharps; and pathological and microbiological wastes containing blood or other potentially infectious materials. 17. Source Individual - Any individual, living or dead, whose blood or other potentially infectious materials may be a source of occupational exposure to the employee. Examples include, but are not limited to, hospital and clinic patients; clients in institutions for the developmentally disabled; trauma victims; clients of drug and alcohol treatment facilities; residents of hospices and nursing homes; human remains; and individuals who donate or sell blood or blood components. 18. Sterilize - The use of a physical or chemical procedure to destroy all microbial life including highly resistant bacterial endospores.

Page 7 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) 19. Universal Precautions - An approach to infection control. According to the concept of Universal Precautions, all human blood and certain human body fluids are treated as if known to be infectious for HIV, HBV, and other bloodborne pathogens. 20. Work Practice Controls - Controls that reduce the likelihood of exposure by altering the manner in which a task is performed (e.g., prohibiting recapping of needles by a twohanded technique). References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1030 Bloodborne Pathogens

Page 8 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 1 - Categories and Job Duties

Category Category 1 Category 2

Description of Exposure Level Job duties routinely involve exposure to blood or bodily fluids. Job duties normally do not involve exposure to blood or bodily fluids, but employment may require performing unplanned tasks consistent with Category 1.

Typical Job Classification Medical Department physicians & nurses First aid trained employees who are required by the Company to render first aid at a specific job site or location. Emergency React or Response Team members or other similar organizations (not individuals) which render emergency first aid and rescue. Custodians who may handle regulated wastes in Company medical departments.

Category 3

Employees in this category are not exposed to blood or bodily fluids because of their job duties, but are trained in first aid procedures to enhance the overall safety program of the Company and provide the employee with valuable information/skills to use at home and/or off the job. Any first aid rendered by these employees is rendered only as a collateral duty responding solely to injuries resulting from workplace incidents. Good Samaritan acts, such as assisting a co-worker with a nosebleed or controlling bleeding as the result of a fall, are not considered occupational exposures by OSHA. Employees who are first aid trained but are not required as part of their job duties to render first aid shall be informed of the fact; and they need to report any exposure incident as a result of a Good Samaritan Act immediately to their supervisor.

Administrative Staff Operations Management Computer Analysts Gas Control Technicians. Electrician/Control Technician Engineers/Other Professionals

Page 9 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 2 - Cleaning, Disinfecting, and Sterilization Cleaning, disinfecting, and sterilization of non disposable equipment will be accomplished by the following methods: Sterilization This process destroys all forms of microbial life. It is used for instruments or devices such as scalpels or needles that penetrate the skin or contact normally sterile parts of the body. The following are methods of sterilization: 1. Steam under pressure (autoclave) 2. Gas (ethylene oxide) 3. Dry Heat 4. Immersion in an EPA-approved chemical sterilizer (6-10 hours) or according to manufacturers instructions. This sho uld be used only if the heat process is not available. High-Level Disinfection This process destroys all forms of microbial life except high numbers of bacterial spores. It is used on reusable instruments that come into contact with mucous membranes (laryngoscope blades and endotracheal tubes). The following are methods of disinfection: 1. Hot water pasteurization (176-212Fahrenheit for 30 minutes). 2. Exposure to an EPA-registered chemical sterilant for 10 - 45 minutes or as directed by the manufacturer. Intermediate Level Disinfection This process destroys mycobacterium, tuberculosis, most viruses, vegetative bacteria, and most fungi, but not bacterial spores. This is used on surfaces (stethoscopes, blood pressure cuffs, splints) that come into contact with intact skin and have been visibly contaminated with blood or body fluids. Surfaces must be precleaned of visible material before disinfection. The following are intermediate levels of disinfection: 1. Use of EPA registered hospital disinfectant chemical germicides that claim to be tuberculocidal on the label; 2. Hard-surface germicides as indicated above or solutions containing at least 500 ppm free available chlorine (l:1000 dilution of common household bleach-about 1/4 cup bleach per gallon of water). Low Level Disinfection EPA-registered hospital disinfectants (no claim on label for tuberculocidal activity) are used to destroy some viruses, most bacteria, some fungi, but not mycobacterium tuberculosis or bacterial spores. This is used for routine housekeeping or removal of soiling when there is no visible blood.

Page 10 of 11

BLOODBORNE PATHOGEN EXPOSURE CONTROL PROCEDURE (continued) Appendix 3 - Recommendations for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) The following are some typical activities with recommended guidelines for wearing personal protective equipment by employees who may be exposed to blood or OPIM: Disposable Gloves Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Protective Eyewear No Yes No No Yes No No No No Mouth Shield Yes No No No No No No No No

Task/Activity Mouth-to-Mouth breathing/CPR Spurting blood Minimal bleeding Blood drawing Intubation Handling/cleaning contaminated equipment Measuring blood pressure Measuring temperature Giving injections

Gown No Yes No No No Yes No No No

Mask No Yes No No Yes No No No No

Protective gloves should be made of either latex or vinyl material. Gowns (aprons, surgeons gowns, lab coats, etc.) should be constructed of material such as Tyvek or plastic that do not allow fluids to penetrate and soak clothing. Masks should have a NIOSH approval for dusts and mists. Respirators like the 3M #8710 and U.S. Safety Service, Inc. #AD-10B are appropriate for this use. However, these types of respirators are not approved for other types of occupational exposures suc h as asbestos. Employees provided with respirators for protection against bloodborne pathogens will be included in Crosstexs Respiratory Protection Program. Goggles and/or face shields should be approved by ANSI.

Page 11 of 11

BLINDING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION PROCEDURE General Requirements 1. Blinding or double-block and bleed shall be used to effectively isolate equipment, vessels, and piping from other parts of operating areas so repairs, maintenance, or cleaning can be conducted in a safe confined space. 2. Exceptions to blinding must be approved in writing by the supervisor in charge at that location. Before Opening Any Flanged Joint To Install A Blind 1. Verify the exact location where the blind is necessary. 2. Determine from the designated operator that the equipment or piping is prepared and properly released for blinding. 3. Verify that correctly sized blinds are to be installed. 4. Verify that lines and equipment have been depressured and drained. 5. Ensure that drain valves are open by using proper rod-out equipment. 6. Determine what product or material has been contained in the equipment or piping. If this material is hazardous, secure and wear the appropriate protective clothing and equipment. 7. If the equipment to be blinded is above atmospheric pressure, make sure that the supervisor in charge has granted approval to break the flange. 8. When readily available, nitrogen can be used to purge all hydrocarbon vapor from a vessel or line. 9. Refer to the LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES section of this handbook for applicability when performing blinding or equipment isolation. 10. If installation of a blind is to be permanent and will affect a process covered by OSHA 1910.119 (Process Safety Management), then provisions for Management of Change under OSHA 1910.119 must be followed. Opening Any Flanged Joint To Install A Blind 1. Wear protective clothing and use proper equipment as dictated by the circumstances. Always wear appropriate eye protection. 2. Remove flange bolting, leaving a minimum of two, then loosen these bolts and without completely removing the nuts, spread the flanges to install the blind. 3. Always remove the bolts and spread the flange on the side away from the employee first so any sudden release will be directed away from personnel. 4. Flanges should be open a minimum length of time consistent with the safe installation of the blind.

Page 1 of 3

BLINDING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION PROCEDURE (continued) 5. When opening flanges suspected of containing toxic gases above permissible exposure limits (PEL), a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or a supplied air respirator with an egress bottle shall be worn unless or until it has been definitely established through testing that no toxic gases are present. (Refer to the RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM PROCEDURES.) Installing Blinds 1. Blinds shall be installed at the flange closest to the vessel, tank or equipment under consideration. 2. Blinds shall be installed on the side of the block valve that is most consistent with pressure testing requirements. 3. When vessels or process equipment is interconnected in such a way that blinding of each is not possible or practical, the combination is to be considered as one vessel. The combination will be appropriately blinded and prepared as a unit. 4. A blind may have a gasket installed on both sides but a minimum of one gasket installed on the pressure side of the blind is required. 5. A supervisors approval is required before going on top of a tank. When it is necessary for personnel to climb onto the tops of fixed-roof storage tanks to install blinds, the integrity of the tank shall be carefully checked and proper fall protection shall be in place before going on top of the tank. 6. Blinds should be tagged and logged, in accordance with the Lockout/Tagout Program, with the location of the blind, the person installing the blind, and the date installed recorded in the blind record. (Refer to the LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES section for further information.) All Blinds Shall Be Installed With the Following Considerations In Mind 1. Will the blind effectively accomplish its purpose in the selected location? 2. Can the blind be removed safely when required? The precautions taken during the installations of the blind shall be followed when removing the blind. 3. Is the selected location accessible to personnel and equipment? 4. Is the blind located at the flange closest to the equipment, tank or vessel? 5. Is the blind the correct size and pressure rating? Consult the facility engineer responsible for the location if you are unsure. 6. Has the line, vessel or equipment contained toxic or corrosive material? 7. Have provisions been made to eliminate or reduce spills or prevent pollution and for cleanup of any spills?

Page 2 of 3

BLINDING AND EQUIPMENT ISOLATION PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions Blinding - The absolute closure of a pipe, line or duct by the fastening of a solid plate (such as a blind flange, spectacle or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and is designed to withstand the maximum pressure of the pipe, line or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.147 The Control of Hazardous Energy Lockout/Tagout

Page 3 of 3

BENZENE COMPLIANCE PROCEDURE Program Requirements 1. All locations will comply with OSHA 1910.1028 and Crosstex Energy Services policy regarding the protection of employees from exposure to benzene. 2. The OSHA regulation and Crosstex Energy Services policy have established a permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 1.0 part per million time-weighted average (TWA) that must not be exceeded during any 8- hour work shift of a 40-hour work week. 3. A fifteen (15) minute short-term exposure limit (STEL) of 5.0 ppm has also been established and should not be exceeded at any time during the workday. 4. An action level of 0.5 ppm 8-hour TWA will trigger requirements for additional monitoring, medical surveillance, and annual employee training. 5. In addition, when employee exposure(s) (measured by personal and/or area monitors) exceed either the TWA or STEL, a written compliance program is required using engineering and work practice controls, where feasible, to reduce employee exposures, supplemented by an effective respiratory protection program. 6. Containers and pipelines carrying mixtures with less than 0.1 percent benzene and natural gas processing plants processing gas with less than 0.1 percent benzene are exempted from this program. 7. Also exempted are work operations where the only exposure to benzene is from liquid mixtures containing less than 0.1 percent benzene and oil and gas drilling, production and servicing operations. 8. These exempted operations still fall under the OSHA 1910.1000 permissible exposure limits of 10 ppm TWA or 25 ppm ceiling. Exposure Monitoring 1. Employee exposure determinations will be made from personal breathing zone air samples that are representative of the employees normal work day. 2. Breathing zone air samples are taken with collection media such as charcoal tubes, organic vapor monitor (OVM) badges, etc., these sampling devices are usually attached to the collar or shoulder area of the employees outer garment, either shirt or coat, and not more than two (2) feet from the nose and mouth. 3. As a minimum, representative 8-hour TWA exposures shall be determined on the basis of at least one sample representing the full-shift exposure for each job classification in each work area where gas or liquids containing 0.1 percent or more benzene by volume are present.

Page 1 of 5

BENZENE COMPLIANCE PROCEDURE (continued) 4. Determination of compliance with the STEL shall be made from 15- minute employee breathing zone samples measured at operations where there is reason to believe exposures are high. a. This may occur when tanks are opened, filled, unloaded, or gauged during sample collections, and/or during some maintenance operations. b. Short term direct reading measurements can be used to determine where STEL monitoring is required. c. Fifteen- minute STELs should be collected using low- flow sampling pumps with charcoal tubes as the sampling media and a sampling collection rate of approximately 200 cubic centimeters per minute. 5. If the full-shift sampling described above reveals employee exposures at or above the action level, but at or below the 8- hour TWA, the location shall repeat monitoring for that position at least every year. 6. If sample results reveal exposures above the 8-hour TWA, the monitoring for that group of employees shall be repeated at least every six (6) months. 7. Where initial monitoring shows results below the action level, monitoring for those employees may be discontinued until the location has reason to believe employee exposure levels might have changed due to a change in the production, process, control equipment, personnel or work practices which may result in new or additional exposures to benzene, or when the employer has any reason to suspect a change which may result in new or additional exposures. 8. The monitoring schedule may be altered from annually to every six (6) months or terminated altogether if two (2) consecutive measurements taken at least seven (7) days apart indicate exposure levels have changed respectively to below the TWA or below the action level. 9. Area or personal monitoring shall also be performed after spills, ruptures, leaks, or other breakdowns occur and have been cleaned- up to ensure that exposures have returned to the level that existed prior to the incident. 10. Monitoring for the STEL shall be repeated as necessary to evaluate exposures of emp loyees subject to short term exposures. Employee Notification of Monitoring Results 1. Employees shall be notified of the results of any benzene exposure monitoring performed within fifteen (15) days of their receipt. This notification must be in writing either individually or by posting of results in an appropriate location that is accessible to affected employees. 2. Whenever the PELs are exceeded, written notification shall contain the corrective action being taken to reduce the employee exposure to or below the PEL, or shall refer to a document available to the employee which states the corrective action to be taken.

Page 2 of 5

BENZENE COMPLIANCE PROCEDURE (continued) Regulated Areas 1. When a facility has not been exempted by the OSHA Regulation, the regulated area must be established wherever the airborne concentration of benzene exceeds, or can reasonably be expected to exceed, either the TWA of 10 ppm or the 25 ppm ceiling. 2. The regulated area must be demarcated from the rest of the work site by physical means or signs that limit access to only authorized, properly equipped personnel in order to minimize exposure to benzene. Signs with the following legend shall be posted at all entrances to the regulated work area: DANGER BENZENE CANCER HAZARD FLAMMABLE - NO SMOKING AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATOR REQUIRED Methods of Compliance 1. Where feasible, benzene exposure must be controlled through engineering controls and work practices in preference to respiratory protection. 2. Respirators can and shall be used to control exposures that are intermittent or caused by emergency conditions and while awaiting engineering controls. 3. In cases of exposure levels above the limit, a written plan to reduce that exposure will be prepared. This plan will be explained in the monitoring results letter sent to the exposed employee or the employee will be referred to a written document which describes the efforts to be taken. Medical Surveillance 1. A medical surveillance program must be made available to those employees who are or may be exposed to benzene: a. At or above the action level (.5 ppm 8-hour TWA) for 30 days or more per year; b. At or above the PEL (1.0 ppm) for 10 days or more per year; c. At more than 10 ppm for 30 or more days in a year prior to the effective date of the standard (December 10, 1987) when employed by Crosstex Energy Services. 2. The requirements include an initial exam prior to benzene exposure (a baseline), annual exams to detect potential blood disorders, and additional exams and referrals to hematologists and/or internists if abnormal results are found. 3. Any employees referred to a hematologist or internist shall be removed from assignments with benzene exposure for up to six (6) months, without loss of pay. 4. Employees are to receive a written physicians opinion for any exam required under this standard within fifteen (15) days of that exam.

Page 3 of 5

BENZENE COMPLIANCE PROCEDURE (continued) 5. If an employee is exposed to an unexpected and high concentration of benzene in an emergency condition where respiratory protection was not used, tha t employee will provide a urine sample at the end of the shift for testing within 72 hours. If high test results are found, this test will be repeated monthly for three (3) months. 6. The supervisor of exposed employees shall notify the Safety Department, who in turn will assist in arranging for the samples to be taken at the end of the shift and will arrange for any necessary followup. Hazard Communication 1. Containers (except piping) with benzene contents above 0.1 percent shall be labeled with the following legend: DANGER CONTAINS BENZENE CANCER HAZARD 2. Crosstex Energy Services Hazard Communication Program should be reviewed and sections pertinent to benzene should be implemented at locations where gas or liquids have benzene concentrations exceeding 0.1 percent by volume. Definitions 1. Action level - An airborne concentration of benzene of 0.5 ppm calculated as an 8-hour time-weighted average. 2. Authorized person - Any person specifically authorized by the employer whose duties require the person to enter a regulated area or any person entering such an area as a designated representative of employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe monitoring and measuring procedures. 3. Benzene (C(6)H(6)) (CAS Registry No. 71-43-2) - Liquefied or gaseous benzene. It includes benzene contained in liquid mixtures and the benzene vapors released by these liquids. It does not include trace amounts of unreacted benzene contained in solid materials. 4. Container - Any barrel, bottle, can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel, storage tank, or the like, but does not include piping systems. 5. Day - Any part of a calendar day. 6. Emergency - Any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment which may or does result in an unexpected significant release of benzene. 7. Employee exposure - Exposure to airborne benzene which would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protective equipment. 8. PEL Permissible Exposure Limit - The maximum amount or concentration of a chemical that a worker may be exposed to under OSHA regulations. The PEL for Benzene is 1 ppm.

Page 4 of 5

BENZENE COMPLIANCE PROCEDURE (continued) 9. Regulated area - Any area where airborne concentrations of benzene exceed or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the permissible exposure limits, either the 8-hour time weighted average exposure of 1 ppm or the short-term exposure limit of 5 ppm for 15 minutes. 10. STEL Short-term Exposure Limit The concentration to which workers can be exposed continuously for a short period of time (15 minutes) without suffering from: irritation, chronic or irreversible tissue damage, narcosis of sufficient degree to increase the likelihood of accidental injury, impair self-rescue or materially reduce work efficiency. The STEL for Benzene is 5 ppm. 11. TWA Time-weighted Average - An average value of exposure over the course of an 8 hour work shift. An employee's exposure to any substance listed in Table Z-2 of 29 CFR 1910.1000, in any 8-hour work shift of a 40-hour work week, shall not exceed the 8-hour time weighted average limit given for that substance in Table Z-2. The 8-hour TWA for Benezene is 1 ppm. 12. Vapor control system - Any equipment used for containing the total vapors displaced during the loading of gasoline, motor fuel or other fuel tank trucks and the displacing of these vapors through a vapor processing system or balancing the vapor with the storage tank. This equipment also includes systems containing the vapors displaced from the storage tank during the unloading of the tank truck which balance the vapors back to the tank truck. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1028 Benzene Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1000 Air Contaminants Training 1. Employees covered under the OSHA Benzene Standard must receive training and information on benzene prior to their initial assignment. 2. Training should include employees who work at locations where benzene vapors are routinely produced, reacted, used, stored, or handled in the work environment, and where the possibility exists for exceeding the permissible exposure limit. 3. If exposures are above the action level, training must be repeated annually. (Action level is an airborne concentration of benzene of 0.5 ppm calculated as an 8- hour time-weighted average.)

Page 5 of 5

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURE Automotive Accidents 1. Report all automotive accidents to your supervisor, Safety Department, or manager immediately after handling injuries, first aid, exchange of information with the other party and police investigation. 2. Once Supervisor or Manager is notified, it is the responsibility to immediately call the Safety Department. 3. The First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual) shall be utilized in all Company vehicle accidents and must be completed and forwarded (Faxed) to your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of an accident. Covered Person Injuries 1. All Covered Person injuries occurring on the job must be reported to your direct supervisor or manager. 2. Injuries requiring a visit to a doctor or an emergency clinic, or loss of consciousness must be reported to your supervisor immediately. 3. Injuries resulting in hospitalization or death must be reported to your supervisor, and then to your Safety Compliance Specialist immediately. NOTE: Certain hospitalizations and all fatalities must be reported to OSHA (US Occupational Safety and Health Administration) within 8 hours, so your timely report is critical. 4. First aid injuries, or overexertion/strain must be reported to your supervisor by the end of your shift and to your Safety Compliance Specialist by the next business day. 5. In emergencies, the Initial Emergency Response Report shall be completed and forwarded (e-mail or fax) to the Safety Department. The First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual) (see Forms section on CD) must be completed and forwarded to your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of an injury. Spills or Releases 1. Report all spills, leaks and releases to your supervisor immediately. 2. Spills of hydrocarbons such as oil or condensate, that produce a sheen on water, must be reported to your direct supervisor and, in turn, to your Safety Compliance Specialist immediately if they reach a creek, river, pond, lake, bay, the ocean or a tributary leading to a body of water such as the above. Some chemicals have very low reporting thresholds for spills or leaks, so if in doubt, please call your Safety Compliance Specialist. 3. Spills, leaks and releases resulting in injury requiring medical treatment or fatality, third party property damage, response by fire, law enforcement or medical personnel, or cleanup beyond what an individual Covered Person can handle within their shift must be reported to your direct supervisor and turn in a Initial Emergency Response Report to your Environmental Compliance Specialist immediately.

Page 1 of 4

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURE (continued) 4. If Covered Person injuries have occurred, First Report of Injury Form shall be filled out. 5. Any incident or loss on a DOT jurisdictional facility requires that an Incident/Loss Report as provided in Section 2.11 of the Crosstex Operation, Maintenance and Construction Manual be completed in each case and forwarded to local management and the Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of the incident. If required, the Pipeline Leak Report (Section 2.11) and the Federal DOT Incident Report Gas Transmission and Gathering Systems as found in Section 2.12 of the Crosstex Operation, Maintenance and Construction Manual must be completed (if only tentatively) and forwarded to local management and your Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of the incident. Incident Reporting Incidents other than those listed above would include for example: property damage such as loads lost from cranes while suspended, catastrophic equipment failure not resulting in injury or spills, and security related incidents such as vandalism/theft, workplace harassment/violence, or suspected drug activity. Generally, reporting of these incidents to your Safety Compliance Specialist the next business day is acceptable. If law enforcement, fire protection, public evacuation or other extraordinary assistance is required, these incidents must be reported to your Safety Compliance Specialist immediately. Use the Supplemental Incident/Near Miss Investigation Form for these types of incidents. Drug and Alcohol Testing DOT post-accident testing applies to incidents that involve fatalities or injuries necessitating inpatient hospitalization, estimated property damage or losses (including gas) over $50,000 and other incidents that the operator considers significant. Other conditions require a non-DOT test. Drug and Alcohol testing is required: 1. Following an on-the-job injury requiring professional medical attention (i.e. emergency room, hospital, doctors office). 2. Following a first aid injury if the supervisor thinks the incident was or could have been catastrophic for a PSM facility or significant for a DOT facility. 3. Following a serious or potentially serious accident or incident, including near misses, in which safety precautions were violated. 4. When unsafe instruction or orders were given. 5. When boats, company vehicles, rental vehicles, equipment, or property was damaged, except that drug/alcohol testing is not required for incidents of vehicle damage when the vehicle was unoccupied and legally parked. 6. When unusually careless acts were performed. 7. Where the accident or incident was caused by the failure to wear prescribed personal protective equipment.

Page 2 of 4

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURE (continued) 8. Where supervisor has reasonable suspicion to believe that drugs or alcohol may have been involved. NOTE: If testing was not performed, the supervisor or manager shall provide an explanation for not testing. All persons involved in and within the immediate vicinity of the accident or incident may be subjected to urine testing or evidential breath testing. 1. If a Covered Person is unconscious or seriously injured and will be taken to a medical facility for treatment, a urine specimen for testing will be collected if possible. 2. If urine is collected, it will be analyzed for drugs, alcohol, and other prohibited substances. 3. If a Covered Person is unconscious or otherwise unable to evidence consent to the procedure, the medical facility shall collect the specimen. Drug and alcohol testing shall not be required if an individual sustains an injury due to the deliberate actions of another individual which could constitute criminal conduct, or due to being bitten or attacked by an animal. The following substances (or metabolite) are tested for in urine:

Amphetamine (including methamphetamine) Barbiturate Benzodiazepine Cannabinoid (marijuana, hashish) Cocaine Methadone Opiate (morphine, codeine) Methaqualone Phencyclidine (PCP)

If an initial drug test (immunoassay) shows positive evidence of the presence of a prohibited drug in the tested specimen, that specimen shall automatically be subjected to a confirmation GC/MS test prior to the Company being informed of the test result. A documented chain of custody shall be maintained to ensure the identity and integrity of the urine specimen throughout the collection and testing processes. Refer to the Crosstex O & M Manual, Section 10 Alcohol Misuse Prevention Plan and Section 11 Anti- Drug Plan for further information.

Page 3 of 4

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions 1. Automotive Accident Any occurrence in which a Company vehicle is damaged due to collision with or produces damage to a person or property. 2. Company Vehicle Any vehicle or motorized 4-wheeled device used by a Covered Person in the performance of their job, whether owned by Crosstex, rented or a personal vehicle for which mileage is being paid. 3. Damage Any property or vehicle damage that exceeds $500. 4. Emergency An event that requires emergency responders, may require response from different regulating agencies, results in an actual or potential uncontrolled release, and/or causes danger or potential danger to the public, employees or requiring immediate medical attention. 5. GC/MS - Gas Chromatography Mass Spectrometry. 6. Hazardous Material Incident An event that can be controlled at the time by the employees in the immediate area and not an immediate hazard to the safety of the environment, public or personnel. 7. Immediately (pertaining to Automotive Accidents) The first thing following the handling of injuries, first aid, exchanging information with the other party and on-site police investigation. 8. Immediately (pertaining to injuries) The first thing following the visit to the medical professional and treatment. 9. Immediately (pertaining to spills and releases) The first thing after ensuring your safety, calling for any necessary emergency assistance from fire or law enforcement authorities and providing necessary emergency medical assistance. If the reporting threshold for a particular chemical is unknown, call your supervisor. 10. Immunoassay - A laboratory analysis to determine the presence of a prohibited substance in a body fluid. 11. Properly parked The vehicle is stopped in a designated safe/legal space. References Crosstex Company Policy and Procedures Drugs, Alcohol, and Other Prohibited Items O & M Manual Section 10 Alcohol Misuse Prevention Plan O & M Manual Section 11 Anti- Drug Plan

Page 4 of 4

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE 1. Employees shall promptly report all job-related accidents/incidents to their supervisors. 2. Supervisors shall immediately notify the Safety Department of any accident or incident and follow the required procedures for reporting injuries, vehicle accidents, near misses, and property damage. 3. Supervisors shall immediately notify the Environmental Department of any leaks/spills and follow the required procedures for reporting leaks/spills. (See the ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORTING PROCEDURES section of this manual.) 4. Accident/incident investigations shall be conducted by the Supervisor at that location. 5. The Safety Department is available to assist in any investigation. NOTE: In accidents/incidents involving fatalities, multiple injuries, uncontrolled leaks and spills, PSM investigations, or the likelihood of litigation (especially contractor accidents/incidents), the EH&S shall coordinate the investigation process. 6. Investigations shall be conducted for the following accidents/incidents: a. Employee injuries b. Vehicle accidents in company vehicles c. Leaks, spills, or releases d. Other valid reasons, such as near miss incidents or equipment failures e. Any near miss incidents defined by the Process Safety Management Standard (29 CFR 1910.110(m)) f. Property damage to company facilities g. Property damage to third parties. 7. The accident/incident investigation must be documented using the appropriate form (First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual), Auto Accident Report, Supplemental Incident / Near Miss Investigation Form). 8. Leaks, spills, and releases shall be documented on the Spill/Release Report form. 9. For facilities covered under Process Safety Management (PSM), 29 CFR 1910.119(m), the following procedures shall be utilized to investigate each incident which resulted in, or could reasonably have resulted in, a catastrophic release of highly hazardous chemical in the workplace: a. Local Operations Management shall assemble an investigation team within 48 hours of the time of the incident. b. The team shall include the necessary disciplines to complete a thorough investigation of the circumstances leading to the accident/incident. c. Upon conclusion of the investigation, local management shall communicate the information in a report to the affected Company or contractor employees.

Page 1 of 2

ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION PROCEDURE (continued) d. The accident/incident investigation must be documented using the Process Safety Management (PSM) Incident Investigation Form and any of the following that apply: First Report of Injury Form (Liberty Mutual), Spill/ Release Report, or Supplemental Incident / Near Miss Investigation Form. e. The report shall contain the following: i. Date of the accident/incident ii. Date the investigation began iii. Description of the accident/incident iv. Description of the contributing factors v. Recommended solutions to avoid recurrence. f. The report shall include a time-table which outlines the implementation schedule for initiation of recommended corrective actions. g. The report will be maintained on file for a minimum of five (5) years. References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1904 Recording and Reporting Occupational Injuries and Illnesses.

Page 2 of 2

ACCESS TO EMPLOYEE EXPOSURE AND MEDICAL RECORDS PROCEDURE 1. Upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter, employees will be informed of the following: a. The existence, location and availability of employee records for exposure to toxic substances or harmful physical agents. These records are maintained in the Human Resources Department and the Safety Department. b. The person responsible for maintaining and providing access to the records. Contact your Safety Compliance Specialist or your Human Resources Department to initiate this request. c. The employee right of access to those records. 2. Notification can be accomplished by sending an annual letter to all employees or bulletin board postings that specify points a, b and c above. 3. The entire section pertaining to the Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records is available for employee review by contacting the Safety Department. 4. If you are exposed to a toxic substance or a harmful physical agent in the workplace, you, or your designated representative, are entitled to review and copy: a. Exposure records relevant to your actual or potential exposure. b. Your medical records. c. Analyses using exposure or medical records concerning your working conditions or workplace. d. The Occupational Safety and Health Administrations (OSHA) rule found in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1020 regarding access to employee exposure and medical. 5. Requests for employee exposure and medical records must be made in writing to the Safety Department or the Human Resources Department in Dallas, TX. Training 1. Employees shall be trained upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter. 2. Training will include: a. The existence, location, and availability of any medical and/or exposure records. b. The identification of the person responsible for maintaining and providing access to records. c. Each employees rights of access to these records.

Page 1 of 3

ACCESS TO EMPLOYEE EXPOSURE AND MEDICAL RECORDS (continued) Documentation

Record Employee Medical and/or Exposure Records Employee Training Records Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records Program Custodian EH&S Department EH&S Department Retention 30 yrs after separation 3 yrs after separation 1 yr after revised, superseded, or obsolete

EH&S Department

Definitions 1. Access - The right and opportunity to examine and copy. 2. Analysis Using Exposure or Medical Records - Any compilation of data or any statistical study based at least in part on information collected from individual employee exposure or medical records or information collected from health insurance claims records, provided that either the analysis has been reported to the employer or no further work is currently being done by the person responsible for preparing the analysis. 3. Designated Representative - Any individual or organization to whom an employee gives written authorization to exercise a right of access. For the purposes of access to employee exposure records and analyses using exposure or medical records, a recognized or certified collective bargaining agent shall be treated automatically as a designated representative without regard to written employee authorization. 4. Employee Exposure Record - A record containing any of the following kinds of information: a. Environmental (workplace) monitoring or measuring of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent, including personal, area, grab, wipe, or other form of sampling, as well as related collection and analytical methodologies, calculations, and other background data relevant to interpretation of the results obtained; b. Biological monitoring results which directly assess the absorption of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent by body systems (e.g., the level of a chemical in the blood, urine, breath, hair, fingernails, etc.) but not including results which assess the biological effect of a substance or agent or which assess an employee's use of alcohol or drugs; c. Material safety data sheets indicating that the material may pose a hazard to human health; or d. In the absence of the above, a chemical inventory or any other record which reveals where and when used and the identity (e.g., chemical, common, or trade name) of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent.

Page 2 of 3

ACCESS TO EMPLOYEE EXPOSURE AND MEDICAL RECORDS (continued) Definitions (continued) 5. Employee Medical Record - A record concerning the health status of an employee which is made or maintained by a physician, nurse, or other health care personnel or technician, including: a. Medical and employment questionnaires or histories (including job description and occupational exposures); b. Results of medical examinations (pre-employment, pre-assignment, periodic, or episodic) and laboratory tests (including chest and other X-ray examinations taken for the purpose of establishing a base-line or detecting occupational illnesses and all biological monitoring not defined as an employee exposure record); c. Medical opinions, diagnoses, progress notes, and recommendations; d. First aid records; e. Descriptions of treatments and prescriptions; and f. Employee medical complaints. 6. Record - Any item, collection, or grouping of information regardless of the form or process by which it is maintained (e.g., paper document, microfiche, microfilm, X-ray film, or automated data processing). 7. Specific Chemical Identity - A chemical name, Chemical Abstracts Service (CAS) Registry Number, or any other information that reveals the precise chemical designation of the substance. 8. Specific Written Consent - A written authorization containing the following: a. Name and signature of the employee authorizing the release of medical information; b. Date of the written authorization; c. Name of the individual or organization that is authorized to release the medical information; d. Name of the designated representative (individual or organization) that is authorized to receive the released information; e. General description of the medical information that is authorized to be released; f. General description of the purpose for the release of the medical information; and g. Date or condition upon which the written authorization will expire (if less than one year). References Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910.1020, Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records.

Page 3 of 3

VISITOR SAFETY PROCEDURE General 1. The safety of visitors to field or plant facilities is the responsibility of the supervisor over that location. The individual(s) bringing visitors to these locations must coordinate their activities with the supervisor(s) prior to the trip. 2. Visitors are defined as those that do not normally report to that specific work location. They may include school tours, vendors, or Crosstex Energy Services employees from other locations. 3. All visitors must report to the facility office before entering work locations, whether accompanied by a Company employee or not. 4. All unaccompanied visitors at PSM facilities and facilities requiring evacuation plans must receive a brief safety orientation from the supervisor, covering at a minimum: a. Drug and Alcohol Policy. b. Smoking policy. c. Facility alarms and emergency/evacuation procedures. d. Hazardous locations and substances that may be encountered. e. MSDSs for hazardous substances that may be encountered. f. Personal protective equipment requirements. g. Reporting of accidents/incidents and near misses. 5. Visitors must not tour work locations unescorted unless prior approval has been obtained. Personal Protective Equipment 1. Visitors must wear personal protective equipment such as hard hats, safety glasses, hearing protection, etc., as required by the Hazard Assessment for that facility. Refer to the Personal Protective Equipment section for further information. 2. Proper footwear must be worn at all times. 3. The Company will have hard hats, safety glasses, and hearing protection available for visitor use. 4. Contractors are expected to provide their own personal protective equipment.

Page 1 of 2

VISITOR SAFETY PROCEDURE (continued) Definitions 1. Hazard Assessment A walk-through survey of the work areas with consideration give n to the following hazard types: Impact, Penetration, Compression (roll-over), Chemicals (including spills), Heat, Harmful Dust, Light (Optical) Radiation, Ionizing Radiation, Sources of Motion, High Temperatures (Including Fires), Falling Objects, Sharp Objects, Electrical Hazards, and Workplace Layout/Worker Proximity. 2. MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet. References Occupational Safety & Health Act, Section 5 Duties General Duty Clause

Page 2 of 2

Vehicle Safety Inspection Checklist

(Must be filled out at the vehicle to be valid) Vehicle # Date: Inspected by: Miles: License Tags Due Date: State Inspection Due Date: The purpose of this inspection is to recognize potential defects and hazards associated with motor vehicles before an accident can occur. Any deficiencies shall be addressed. YES 1. Lights Do all lights function properly? 2. Tires (including spare) Do tires have sufficient tread? Are tires properly inflated? 3. Windshield Wipers Do the wipers operate properly? Do the windshield washers work? 4. Interior Are safety belts in good condition? Are sets operable? General housekeeping clean? Does all instrumentation work? Doors and windows operate properly? Does horn work? 5. Exterior Are windows/windshield free of cracks? Exterior in good condition? Rear and side view mirrors functional? Winch & cable satisfactory? 6. General Performance Vibrations? Engine stalls? Transmissions slips? Brakes function properly? Steering functions properly? Emergency brakes function properly? Exhaust system okay? 7. Fluid Levels Oil? Transmission fluid? Radiator reservoir? Windshield washer reservoir? Power steering fluid? 8. Documentation Current insurance papers in vehicle? Accident reports in vehicle? Registration in vehicle? HazMat Shipping Papers available? 9. Safety Equipment First Aid Kit full and in good condition? Fire Extinguisher monthly inspection done? Fire Extinguisher annual inspection current? Use back of page for further remarks if needed. NO TYPE OF PROBLEM

Page 1 of 1

Supplemental Incident Investigation Form

Division: Incident Date: Supervisor: Reported By: Incident Time: Injured Party Name: Weather conditions: Incident Location: Driver of Vehicle:

Select all that apply

Days Away From Work Recordable Injury First aid injury Injury near miss Vehicle near miss Vehicle Incident Vehicle forward movement Parked vehicle Vehicle reverse movement Potential Spill Incident Spill Gas release Property damage Process upset Security incident Health incident Fire/Explosion Surface Waters Impacted Regulatory Concerns XTEX Employee Contract employee Chemical Release Other DOT Incident

Investigating members:

Nature of loss (all actual and potential losses -- injury, manpower, damage, production, environmental):

Description of events (what happened -- contact with, fall to or on, struck against or by, poison):

Possible Immediate Causes (unsafe actions/behavior or conditions):

Contributing Factors: (Fatigue, distractions, schedule demands, work load, etc.)

Drug/Alcohol Testing Required?

Yes

No

Proposal for Corrective Action (To prevent a similar occurrence):

Corrective Action Follow-Up Who

What

Target Date

Follow-Up Completed Date

Form Rev: June 29, 2007

Supplemental Incident Investigation Form

Division: Incident Date: Supervisor: Reported By: Incident Time: Injured Party Name: Weather conditions: Incident Location: Driver of Vehicle:

Select all that apply

Days Away From Work Recordable Injury First aid injury Injury near miss Vehicle near miss Vehicle Incident Vehicle forward movement Parked vehicle Vehicle reverse movement Potential Spill Incident Spill Gas release Property damage Process upset Security incident Health incident Fire/Explosion Surface Waters Impacted Regulatory Concerns XTEX Employee Contract employee Chemical Release Other DOT Incident

Investigating members:

Nature of loss (all actual and potential losses -- injury, manpower, damage, production, environmental):

Description of events (what happened -- contact with, fall to or on, struck against or by, poison):

Possible Immediate Causes (unsafe actions/behavior or conditions):

Contributing Factors: (Fatigue, distractions, schedule demands, work load, etc.)

Drug/Alcohol Testing Required?

Yes

No

Proposal for Corrective Action (To prevent a similar occurrence):

Corrective Action Follow-Up Who

What

Target Date

Follow-Up Completed Date

Form Rev: June 29, 2007

Sign-In Roster

Location: Topic: Print/Type Name 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Date:

Signature

Page 1 of 1

This form is for reference only. Forms are available from the field office.

Page 1 of 1

Safety Meeting Report

Location: Date: Actual Time Start Attending Absent Excused Stop Number working Total Hours/Minutes Total employees Guest attending Meeting Minutes written by:

Old/Pending/New Business 1. 2. 3. Accident / Incident Reviews 1. 2. 3. Hazard Communication Updates 1. 2. Safety Meeting Topics 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Safety Equipment 1. Safety Alerts Discussed 1. 2. 3. 4. New safety policies and bulletins 1. 2. 3. Inspection Reports 1. 2. Safety & Environmental Observations 1. 2. 3. 4. Site Safety Representative Date

Instructor

Instructor

Instructor

Inspector

Instructor

Plant Supervisor

Date

Page 1 of 1

Crosstex Safety Handbook Revision Request Procedure Name: Description of Change:

Reason for Change:

Submitted By:

Date:

For Management Approval and/or use Only: Decision:

Supervisor/Manager: Safety Department: Sr. VP-Technical Services:

Date: Date: Date:

Page 1 of 1

PORTABLE LADDER INSPECTION TAG DATE INSPECTED DATE INSPECTED

NAME

NAME

NOTE: All portable ladders shall be inspected at least every six (6) months by the PIC or a competent person.

Norm Survey Date: Field: Well Longitude: Battery Check Background: Highest Reading: Equipment Yes No uR/HR uR/HR uR/HR Reading
(Back ground included)

Surveyor: Well S/N: Parish/County: Latitude: Source Check: Yes No

In service/ Out of service

Remarks

Land Screen

uR/HR Reading
(Back ground included)

Grid No/Area

Remarks

Comments:

Page 1 of 1

Near Miss Incident Form

Division: Incident Date: Supervisor: Reported By: Incident Time: Injured Party Name: Weather conditions: Incident Location: Driver of Vehicle:

Select all that apply

Days Away From Work Recordable Injury First aid injury Injury near miss Vehicle near miss Vehicle Incident Vehicle forward movement Parked vehicle Vehicle reverse movement Potential Spill Incident Spill Gas release Property damage Process upset Security incident Health incident Fire/Explosion Surface Waters Impacted Regulatory Concerns XTEX Employee Contract employee Chemical Release Other DOT Incident

Investigating members:

Potential losses -- injury, manpower, damage, production, environmental:

Description of Near Miss event-- what happened:

Possible Immediate Causes (unsafe actions/behavior or conditions):

Contributing Factors: (Fatigue, distractions, schedule demands, work load, etc.)

Drug/Alcohol Testing Required?

Yes

No

Proposal for Corrective Action (To prevent a similar occurrence):

Corrective Action Follow-Up Who

What

Target Date

Follow-Up Completed Date

Form Rev: June 29, 2007

MASTER ISOLATION LIST

Facility Equipment List Prepared By
Name/Title

PAGE NO. INSTALL DATE DRAWINGS ATTACHED

Energy to be isolated
(X) All That Apply CIR. BREAKER OFF DE-PRESSURED

OF

Person In Charge CHANGE

FROM TO TO DATE/TIME DATE/TIME

YES

NO

CHANGE
FROM

List isolations in sequential order of installation and removal

Method(s) of Control
(X) All That Apply DISCONNECTED FUSE REMOVED VALVE CLOSED

Blind Information

Lockout/Tagout Status
LOCKED W/ TAG TAGGED ONLY

Installation
(Date Above)

Removal
EMERG. REMOVAL

STATIC ELECT.

VACUUM SYS.

MECHANICAL

TURNED OFF

VALVE OPEN

ELECTRICAL

VENTILATED

THERMAL

BLOCKED

CLEANED

DRAINED

GRAVITY

BLINDED

PURGED

DWG Ref No

Description of isolation point

DISSIPATED

PNEUMATIC

HYDRAULIC

PRESSURE

RADIATION

CLOSED

VENTED

SPRING

SIZE (IN.) OTHER

OTHER

ANSI TYPE FLANGE REQ'D RATINGS OPEN

LOCK INITIALS TIME INITIALS DATE TIME NO.

January 15, 2004

Lockout/Tagout Periodic/Annual Inspection

Facility: Name of Person(s) Performing Inspection: Employee Training Yes Has training been provided to all employees whose work operations are, or may be in the area where energy control procedures may be utilized? Are all authorized employees familiar with all aspects of the Lockout/Tagout procedure? Energy Control Program Yes Are employees, including contractors familiar with the Lockout/Tagout and line breaking procedures and recognize all lockout/tagout devices? Have only authorized employees performed lockouts in the past year? Are all isolation devices that can be locked equipped with an isolation lock and tag? Are keys to locks currently in use under the exclusive control of authorized employee or located in a lockbox? Has every employee and contractor involved in the job placed a personal lock on each isolation device or lockbox? Is an isolation log being utilized and is it updated? Locks and Tags Yes Locks are: Standardized by color, shape, or size?

Date:

No

N/A

No

N/A

No

N/A

Key type (no combination locks)? Only used for lockout/tagout purposes?

Tags are: Standardized by color, shape?

Standardized by print and format? Have wording such as Do Not Start; Do Not Open; Do Not Close; Do Not Energize; Do Not Operate, etc. attached to each isolation device? Identify name of authorized employee, date, purpose of the isolation? Secured with a non-releasable attachment (nylon cable tie)? Tags are durable and designed to withstand the environment to which they are exposed? (i.e., rain, snow etc.)?

Page 1 of 2

Lockout/Tagout Periodic/Annual Inspection (continued)

Blind Flanges & Slip Blinds Yes If blind flanges, slip blind or spectacle blinds are utilized for isolation, then are they: Equipped with a tag place by the authorized employee?

No

N/A

Designed to withstand the maximum anticipated line pressure (i.e., API design)? Has each member of the workgroup also placed a tag on each blind or if using group lockout, is each blind equipped with two-part numbered tag or lock and tag with one part of the tag or key to the lock secured in the lockbox for each blind? Yes No N/A

Group Lockout/Tagout If group LOTO is being utilized, are the following procedures implemented? A lockbox is being utilized to secure all keys to the isolation locks?

All keys to the isolation locks secured inside the lockbox? Each member of the workgroup has placed a personal lock on each isolation device or on the lockbox? Each member of the workgroup controls ALL key(s) to his or her personal locks? Each member of the workgroup has placed a tag on each blind isolation or each blind is equipped with either a two-part numbered tag or a lock and tag? If the job covers more than one shift, is a Job Lock being utilized with the Task Supervisors having exclusive control of the key(s)? Yes No N/A

Confined Space Entry & Hot Work If confined space entry or hot work operations are being performed, are these conditions met: Has all piping into and out of the space been properly isolated by one or more of the following: physically disconnecting, installation of blinds and/or have double block and bleeds? If double block and bleed is utilized, are both block valves locked and tagged closed and the bleed valve locked and tagged open? Has provision been made to ensure depressurization between the two block valves has been achieved? Comments:

Authorized Employee Signature(s): Superintendent/PIC Signature: Comments:

Copy to Facility File Original to EH&S Department (Retention 84 months)

Page 2 of 2

Lockout/Tagout Isolation Verification Facility: Date Installed: Date Removed: Person Completing Form: Equipment to be Isolated: Reason For Isolation: Lockout Procedure Checklist
1. Has the Task Supervisor and/or Authorized Person been assigned and is aware that he is responsible for the personnel adhering to the lockout/tagout procedures? (Note: The Task Supervisor and/or Authorized Person is assigned by the Supervisor or PIC) 2. Are you an authorized employee? (Note: Supervisor or PIC determine the employees, who by virtue of their training and experience, are authorized employees) 3. Has the Task Supervisor or Authorized Person verified the placement of the locks and/or tags? 4. Are all locks singularly identified (color, shape or size)? 5. Are all your tags standardized on your facility? 6. Did you install a tag on each lock or energy isolation device identifying yourself, the date applied and purpose for the isolation? 7. Are all energy-isolation devices which are capable of being locked out, locked and tagged out using a key type lock and LOTO warning tag? 8. Have all the sources of electrical power been isolated, locked and tagged out on this equipment? 9. Have you isolated the entire inlet and outlet piping to the affected equipment? 10. Has a tagout system been used in lieu of a lock due to the incapacity of lock installation? (Note: When tags are used in lieu of a lock, additional safety precautions should be used. [i.e., removal of the isolation circuit, blocking of a controlling switch, opening of an extra disconnect device etc.]) 11. Are all blinds used for isolation either tagged by each affected employee, or if a lockbox is being used, is each blind tagged with a two-part numbered tag or a lock and tag installed? 12. Has the Isolation Log been completed correctly and are ALL isolation points identified on the log?

Yes

No

N/A

Page 1 of 2

Lockout/Tagout Isolation Verification (continued) Lockout Procedure Checklist

13. Are ALL keys to ALL the isolation locks in your possession or secured inside a lockbox? 14. If using a lockbox and the job will extend more than one shift, have you placed a job lock on the lockbox? 15. Have you attached a personal lock and tag to each isolation device or to a lockbox? 16. Is the key for your personal lock(s) in your possession at all times, while the locks are in place? 17. Has each Affected Employee in the workgroup placed a personal lock and tag on each isolation device or on a lockbox? 18. Has a pre-job briefing been conducted and all Affected Employees comfortable with the isolation of all energy sources?

Yes

No

N/A

Must be signed by the Task Supervisor or Authorized Person and PIC Signature of Task Supervisor or Authorized Person: Signature of PIC:

Yes On completion of the work, have all the lockout/tagout devices been removed? Note: (This should be verified by using the Isolation Log as a reference.)

No

N/A

Page 2 of 2

Ladder Inspection Checklist Ladder Identification: Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Is the ladder sturdy? Are all ladder steps firmly attached to the side rails? Are the side rails free from cracks or splits? Is all of the hardware secure and in good working order? Are ladder feet secure and in good working order? Is the ladder free from sharp edges, burrs, etc.? Is the ladder free from dirt, grease, etc.? Are all ropes, pulleys, and locks on extension ladders in good condition? Are the locks and the spreader on stepladders in good condition?

If a NO is answered for any of the above questions, the ladder should be tagged as unusable and removed from service until the defect is corrected. If the defect cannot be corrected, the ladder should be destroyed or discarded. If the ladder passes the inspection, then the existing ladder inspection tag should be filled out. If there is no existing tag, one should be filled out and attached tightly around the side rail of the ladder. The ladder inspection tag should contain the name of the person inspecting the ladder and the date on which the ladder was inspected. (Ladder tags may be obtained from the Field Safety Compliance Specialist.)

Page 1 of 1

This form is for reference only. Forms are available from the field office.

Page 1 of 1

Hepatitis B Vaccine Declination (Mandatory) Date: ___________________

I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials, I may be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection. I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine at no charge to myself. However, I decline the Hepatitis B vaccination at this time. I understand by declining the vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B, a serious disease. If in the future I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials and I want to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination series at no charge to me.

Signature

Printed Name

Page 1 of 1

Crosstex Energy Services Hazardous Material Shipping Paper Street / Address: City: State:

Emergency Contact: 800-424-9300 (CHEMTREC)

Date: Phone Number: Name of Hazardous MaterialDOT -UN Description of Material(United Nations) Hazard Class / Division NumberIdentification # Packing Group Number1001 1002 1203 1049 1971 1066 1072 Acetylene, Dissolved, 2.1 Air, Compressed, 2.2 Gasoline, Liquid, 3, II Helium, Compressed, 2.2 Natural Gas, Compressed, 2.1 Nitrogen, Compressed, 2.2, Oxygen, Compressed, 2.2 Net Volume or Weight

No. of Items

Type container Cylinder Cylinder Can Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder

Shipper Certification: This is to certify that the above-named materials are properly classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department of Transportation. Print Name: Signature:

Page 1 of 1

Hazard Assessment Workplace Location: Source Date: Assessment Of Hazard Personal Protective Equipment Required

I certify by signing this document that a hazard assessment has been performed at the above named workplace.

Print Name

Signature

Page 1 of 1

FEH&SR Date Area Mgr Area Category ID Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Accountability & Empowerment Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Behavioral Safety Injury/Illness prevention program Q. # 1 2 3 4

FEH&SR Form #

Confidential
Area Supervisor Scoring Code/ Symbol (+ or -, 1 or 2, ^ or v,) QuestionScript Who is responsible for making the safety program work at your facility? Is your safety performance part of your yearly job performance evaluation? What would happen if you shut down the facility because you thought an injury was going to occur? Are all employees at this location required to intervene and stop an unsafe act or condition? Where can you find minimum safety standards, which apply to all Crosstex and contract employees? What is your involvement in safety meetings? Is the employee safety handbook useful to you? What does behavioral safety mean to you? What is "at risk" behavior? Do you think it is important to tell someone if they are doing something unsafe? Is your work environment safe? When is the last time supervision brought to your attention a risky behavior of yours? Do you feel comfortable identifying at-risk behavior of your fellow workers? Do you feel comfortable identifying at-risk behavior of your supervisor(s) Have you been trained in how to recognize at-risk behaviors? Have you felt pressured by your peers to take short cuts that could jeopardize safety? Do you have an ongoing safety-training program?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Average na na na na na na na na
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

na na

#DIV/0!

6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

na na na na na na na na na na na na na na na na

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Injury/Illness prevention program Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Maintenance / Ops. Processes Material Handling

2 3 4

Has your hearing been tested in the past 12 months? Are personnel trained in First Aid and CPR immediately available? Are first aid kits easily accessible to each work area? Does your work area have a safety committee or other system for communicating safety and health concerns? Does your facility have good sanitation facilities available, clean restrooms, hand wash, etc.? Do you have a program in place that ensures employees will be recognized for safe and healthful work practices? Does this facility have a designated smoking area? Where is the smoking area? Does every person at this facility adhere to the smoking policy? Are you aware of a formal process for the review/approval of modifications to the facility? Do you have written energy isolation (lockout/tagout) procedures? Are employees required to keep personal control of their key(s) while they have Lockout locks in use? Do you have all the PPE needed? (Hard Hat, Eyewear/ side shields, steel toed shoes, FRC, gloves.) Do all contractors follow your written Lockout Tagout procedures? What information is put on the lockout/tagout tag?

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

8 9 10 1 2 3

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

5 6 7

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

How do you isolate a piece of equipment that cannot be locked out with a lock? Where can you obtain a lock and tag if you need to 8 perform a lockout? What specific operations would require the completion 9 of a hot work permit? What do you do with the Hot Work Permit after the job 10 is completed?
1

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

How often are cranes inspected at this facility?

#DIV/0!

2 Material Handling

3 Material Handling Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Emergency Planning Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication Communication Regulatory Compliance Regulatory Compliance Regulatory Compliance 1 2 3 4

Is each overhead electric hoist equipped with a limit device to stop the hook travel at its highest and lowest points of safe travel? Could you prove that each heavy equipment operator (mechanized equipment) on site is qualified to use the equipment (cranes, backhoe, trackhoe, forklift,CDL vehicles, fork lifts) Have you been adequately trained to respond to an emergency at this work location? How often do you conduct documented emergency drills at this site? What is a Reportable Quantity? Do you have current written emergency procedures for this facility? Have emergency escape procedures and routes been developed and communicated to all employees? What would you do if you had a hazardous substance spill? What would you do if you had a non-hazardous substance spill? Where are emergency numbers posted? Do you have a formal visitor's orientation process with documentation? Do you have a formal new employee orientation process with documentation? Do you receive adequate communication (alerts, warnings, etc) regarding safety issues? Briefly describe your safety meetings and frequency? What is posted on the bulletin board at this location? How are you notified of a condition that threatens the safety of this location? What actions do you take? What resources do you rely on for new information regarding rules and regulations? Have you seen an OSHA 300 Log on your location? What information was posted on the OSHA 300?

na

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

Regulatory Compliance Regulatory Compliance Industrial Hygiene Industrial Hygiene Industrial Hygiene Industrial Hygiene Industrial Hygiene Incident Reporting Incident Reporting Incident Reporting Incident Reporting Training Process Training Process Training Process Training Process Training Process Training Process Contractors / Visitors Contractors / Visitors Contractors / Visitors Contractors / Visitors

5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4

Who would you notify if a person showed you an ID from a government agency and announced an inspection? What will you do if you witness an oil (or other hydrocarbon) spill? What must be done for an employee before an employee can wear a respirator? Are areas with high noise levels posted? Describe the Hazard Communication (Right to Know) regulation? What is an MSDS sheet? Where are MSDS's located? Does this location have a chemical inventory list? How soon are employees required to report an injury or property damage incident? Have all injuries at this location been reported? Are all Near Miss incidents reported? Have all fires at this location been reported? Have you had First Aid and CPR training? Who determines your safety & health training needs? Have you attended HAZCOM training in the past 12 months? Have you attended Energy Isolation (Lockout / Tagout) training in the past 12 months? Do you usually sign in and complete a test when you attend safety training? Do you have electrical safety awareness training? Do the contractors at this location follow the same safety rules that you do and as well as you do? Who monitors contractor's safety performance ? Do you have a formal, documented contractor orientation process covering site rules? Are pre-job meetings conducted with contractors?

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

Land Based Safety Issues Land Based Safety Issues Land Based Safety Issues Land Based Safety Issues Management Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Commitment/ Safety Leadership Open for any subject

What procedures do you have for excavations where personnel entry may be required? Are they written? How do you make an excavation safe for entry? Who notifies the state One-Call prior to excavations? When does an excavation become a confined space? Do you think Crosstex management would approve stopping the job to review or address specific EH&S concerns? Does Crosstex management make safety equal to other priorities here? Are all safety rules supported by management at this location? Is management concerned about your health and safety off the job? Have you felt any pressure to take short cuts to save time? Does your management hold you accountable for your performance as a safe worker? Does your supervision intervene every time that they see an unsafe practice occurring? Open for any questions.

#DIV/0!

2 3 4

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

2 3 4 5

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

6
7 1 2 3

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

5 6 7 8 9 10

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

11 12 13 14 Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

Safety Warning signs at heliport (facility entrance) Primary Bulletin Board OSHA 300 Log and supporting records Safety Meeting records Training records Lockout Tagout procedure Lockout Tagout documentation Hotwork Permit for active work Hotwork Permits kept on record

10 Confined Space Permits 11 Labeling of secondary containers 12 Tags on slings 13 Crane Inspection documentation 14 Storage of flammable liquids 15 First Aid kits 16 MSDS books 17 PPE storage 18 Emergency call list

Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist Facility Inspection Checklist

19 Emergency escape route diagram 20 Agency inspection documentation 21 Fire extinguisher inspection records
#DIV/0!

Fall Protection Equipment and Hardware Checklist Harness Identification: Webbing Cuts Fraying Abrasions Burns Chemical Exposure Buckles Deformed Corrosion Rust Cracks Chemical Exposure Lanyard Identification: Webbing Cuts Fraying Abrasions Burns Chemical Exposure Snaps Gate Works Freely Double Lock Works Correctly Corrosion - Rust Chemical Exposure Shock Absorber: OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective Defective

If defective is answered for any of the above questions, the equipment should be tagged as unusable and removed from service until the defect is corrected. If the defect cannot be corrected, the equipment should be destroyed and discarded. If equipment passes inspection the attached tag should be punched on the appropriate date. Inspection By: Date:

Page 1 of 1

Facility Noise Survey

Survey By: Date: Division/District Location: Area/Unit: Operating Conditions: Routine: Turnaround: Other (Specify): Environmental Conditions: Temp: Wind Vel: mph Baro. Pressure: Equipment: Sound Level Meter: Manufacturer/Model No./Serial No. Calibration Source: Manufacturer/Model No./Serial No. Calibration Check: at pre-test: LOCATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 dB (A) avg. dB (A) range

post-test: COMMENT

Attach Survey Drawing

Page 1 of 1

Excavation Safety Checklist

Date: Work Description: Time: AM PM Location:

This checklist must be completed for all excavations 4 or more feet deep that personnel will enter.
CHECKLIST PRIOR TO EXCAVATING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. State One Call - 1-( 800 ) - __ __ __ - __ __ __ __ Yes No N/A Has the State One Call been notified and have utility companies or owners been contacted? Have precautions been taken to avoid equipment contact with overhead electrical lines? Are all underground and surface utility installations & hydrocarbon lines identified, protected, supported, or removed? Have all energy sources been properly isolated and locked and tagged out in accordance with Crosstex guidelines? If exposure to public vehicular traffic is likely, are personnel wearing warning vests? Are warning systems incorporated? (ie - hand signals, barricades, stop logs, etc.) Will the excavation be back-filled as soon as work is completed, if not, will the excavation be barricaded? Have gas pipeline pressures been reduced to 50 PSIG or less? Have liquid hydrocarbon lines been reduced to no more than 25 PSIG above the vapor pressure of the product? If Any Shaded Area is Checked a Confined Space Entry Permit Must be Completed 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Does the excavation contain, or have a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere, or any other serious safety hazards? Is the excavation 5 feet or deeper with a slope steeper than 1ft vertical to 1.5 ft horizontal or does the competent person require non-entry rescue provisions? (if no, proceed to question 10) If yes, will each entrant wear a full body harness with a properly attached/attended lifeline, and is the excavation configured such that personnel can be safely retrieved without entry of rescue personnel? Is the spoil pile at least two (2) feet from the edge of the excavation? For excavations four (4) feet or more in depth, is a ladder or other safe means of egress (ie - sloped ramp) provided? If ladders are used, do they extend at least three (3) feet above the surface and are they secured? N/A (ladders not used) Yes

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

No

EXCAVATION CHECKLIST PRIOR TO PERSONNEL ENTRY

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering
Drying Test

15. Are exits located so as not to require more than 25 feet of lateral travel by personnel? 16. If water removal equipment is used, is it monitored by the competent person? 17. Is the excavation inspected daily and after every rainstorm or other hazard increasing occurrence? 18. If the excavation is five (5) feet or more deep, is it properly sloped, shored or is a trench box used? 19. If the excavation has potential to cave-in on personnel (regardless of depth), is it properly sloped, shored or is a trench box used? SOIL CLASSIFICATION Minimum of One (1) Manual Test and One (1) Visual Test Required for Soil Classification 20. Manual Test: Plasticity Dry Strength Thumb Penetration Instrument Test

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

Visual Test (observe the ) Soil during excavation. Samples of the soil that are excavated and soil in the sides of the excavation. 21. Side of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation. Adjacent area and excavation for evidence of surface water, location of water table, etc. Opened side of the excavation to identify layered systems. Adjacent area and excavation for evidence of existing utility, etc. to identify previously disturbed soil. Adjacent area and excavation for sources of vibration that may affect the stability of the excavation face. 22. 23. 24. Check any indications of the following:: Potential for Cave-in? Soil Type: Stable Rock Yes No Class A Class B Class C Layered Systems Vibrations Water Slopes Fissures

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

SLOPING & BENCHING OR TRENCH BOX Required for any excavation that has potential to cave-in on personnel and all excavations 5ft. Soil Type A Horizontal to 1 Vertical 25. Soil Type B 1 Horizontal to 1 Vertical Soil Type C 1 Horizontal to 1 Vertical Trench Box (approved for service and unaltered) COMPETENT PERSON Person must be trained as a Competent Person as defined by the Crosstex Excavation Program. 26. Name (printed): Signature: Date: Time: AM PM Deleted: Comments:

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

Attach checklist to the applicable permit/JSA and maintain on file in accordance with records retention.

Page 1 of 1

Critical Lift Plan To be filled out solely and completely by contractor responsible for crane operation. Date: 1. Lift Description:

2. Crane Operator: Contractor Coordinator, Project Engineer, or Maintenance Foreman Coordinating Lift:

Crane Owner (i.e. Department Manager or Designate): NOTE: This section to be completed by contractor personnel if a contractor will be performing this lift. 2A. Contractor Crane Operator: Contractor Supervisor responsible for lift: Contractor Crane Owner responsible for lift: 3. Description of item to be lifted:

4. Hoisting equipment to be used (i.e., crane, carrier, jib, etc.): Item Inspection Tag No. Date

Crane size and manufacturer: (Attach manufacturers load chart to this copy)

Page 1 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) Rated capacity of crane under most severe conditions (from Load Chart): A. B. C. Over rear Over front Over side lbs. lbs. lbs.

Date of last inspection: (Attach current annual crane inspection report) 5. Reason for critical lift: A. B. C. D. Personnel will be hoisted? Lift requires two or more cranes? Yes Yes No Yes No No No

Load is 75,000 lbs or greater? Yes

The Contractor Coordinator, Project Engineer, or Maintenance Foreman and the appropriate department manager define the lift as being critical. Weight empty (load) lbs.

6. Weight A. How was weight of critical lift obtained? (Check two methods including calculation if not scale weight) 1. Certified scale weight? 2. Calculated independently? 3. Name plate 4. Drawings (No. B. C. D. ) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

Allowance for unaccounted material (i.e. sludge, material revisions, etc.) Total Equipment (Load) Weight (add lines 6A and 6B) Rigging Equipment Weight 1. Headache ball 2. Block 3. Lifting bar (i.e. equalizer beam) 4. Slings and shackles 5. Hook 6. Jib (Erect Stored )

Page 2 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) 7. Cable (Load Fall) 8. Other 9. Total Rigging Weight (add 1 through 8) E. F. G. Total Lift Weight (6C + 6D9) Load Weight verified by: Name Rigging Weight verified by: Name 7. Lift Arrangement A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Radius of lift: Boom length: Boom angle at pick-up: Boom angle at set: Height of lift: 1. Front 1. Front 2. Side 2. Side 3. Rear 3. Rear degrees degrees ft Title Title lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

Initial orientation of lift relative to machine (circle one) Swing orientation of lift relative to machine (circle one) Swing direction and degree (Boom Swing): Equipment Surface Area: sq. ft. (Maximum surface area subject to crosswind) Attach Plot Plan showing location and orientation of crane (Figure No. 1). (Drawings from crane provider may be used) Provide detailed description and lift plan scale drawing of how equipment/object will be lifted (Figure No. 2). (Drawings from crane provider may be used)

8. Lift Procedure

9. JIB A. B. C. D. E. Erected Is JIB to be used? Length of JIB: Angle of JIB: Rated capacity of JIB (from Load Chart): lbs. Stored Yes No

Page 3 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) 10. Cable A. Number of Parts of Cable: B. Size of Cable: 11. Rigging Data A. 1. Sling: Diameter 2. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Length (per sling) Number of slings required in lift: Shackle: Pin Diameter inches Shackle attached to load by: Number of shackles required in lift:

Capacity (straight pull from load chart) Capacity tons

C. D. E. F.

Provide description and sketch sling connection at hook up to boom tip. (Show dimensions and sling angles) (Figure No. 3) Attach vendors chart showing capacity of slings and shackles at different angles and sling configurations. Attach current rigging equipment inspection reports and guidelines. Can rigging be safely installed over center of gravity of equipment? If no, explain: Describe surface that crane will be placed on: Any deviation from level grade? Electrical hazards in area? Yes Yes No No If yes, how much? Yes No

12. Crane Placement (Site Preparation) A. B. C. D. E. F. G.

If yes, describe Yes No If yes, describe

Any obstacles or obstructions to lift or swing?

Is a minimum swing clearance of 2 feet maintained between the counterweight of the crane and any obstacles? Yes No Are any underground pipelines present in the lift area? Yes No

Sketch crane outrigger and matting set-up on Figure No. 1.

Page 4 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) 13. Personnel Lifting A. State reasons why the following methods cannot be used to lift personnel: 1. Ladder and/or stairway: 2. Scaffold or elevated work platform: 3. Aerial lifts/JLG or bucket truck: NOTE: If one of the above methods is feasible, that method must be used to perform the work. B. Has equipment been installed on crane that prevents contact between the load block and the boom tip (i.e., anti-two-blocking device, two block damage prevention device)? Yes C. No If no, why not?

Describe how crane regulates the lowering rate of speed of the hoist mechanisms:

D.

Is 2-way radio communication available and operating properly? Yes No If no, why not?

E.

Does personnel basket meet all design criteria required by Federal, State and local regulations? Yes No If no, why not?

14. Critical Lift Plan Prepared by: Name Title

Company

Date

Page 5 of 8

Critical Lift Plan Plot Plan Date: Sketch Prepared By: Name Brief Lift Description: Title

(Figure No. 1)

Page 6 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) Lift Plan Scale Drawing (Pick-up, travel and set of object) Date: Drawing Prepared By: Name Title

(Figure No. 2)

Page 7 of 8

Critical Lift Plan (continued) Rigging Diagram Date: Sketch Prepared By: Name (Sketch sling connection at hook-up to boom tip) (Show dimensions and sling angles) Title

(Figure No. 3)

Page 8 of 8

Crane Inspection Division: Field /Plant Location: Unit Number: Date: Inspector

MONTHLY OK 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hooks Chains and wire ropes Structural members Bolts and fittings Parts such as pins, shafts, sheaves and drums, etc.

COMMENTS

ANNUAL OK 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Hooks Chains and wire ropes Structural members Bolts and fittings Parts such as pins, shafts, sheaves and drums, etc. Excessive wear on brake systems Excessive wear on chain drive sprockets Crane hooks

COMMENTS

CEH&SR Date

CEH&SR Conducted by: Scoring Code/ Symbol (+ or -, 1 or 2, ^ or v,) Area Supervisor

Area Mgr Area CEH&SR Category Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Sub-Category Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Q. # 1 2 3 4 5 6

Confidential
QuestionScript Is safety performance a specific item included in yearly job performance evaluation? Are all employees instructed to intervene and stop an unsafe act or condition by your supervision? Are employees held accountable if they intentionally disregard safety procedures? Are supervisors held accountable for the safety related compliance in their area of control? Is the senior management of your company committed to providing a safe work place? Can you provide a written statement of commitment from senior management? Does each employee have a copy of basic safety rules (or safety handbook) from your co.? English and Spanish? Does the company require employees to report all injuries? Does the company require employees to report all environmental issues spills, releases, etc.? Does your company conduct routine safety meetings with field personnel? (English and Spanish?) Do you provide all necessary safety training for your employees? Do you have a written Hearing Protection Policy? . . . Lockout / Tagout program? . . . Hot Work Procedure? . . . Confined Space Entry Policy? . . . New Employee Orientation program?

CEH&SR Form # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Average

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

7 Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Standards Standards Standards 8 9

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

10 Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards 11 12 13 14 15 16

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review

Sub-Category Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards

Q. # 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

QuestionScript

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

. . . Formal injury recordkeeping program? . . . Formal incident reporting policy? . . . Written Respiratory protection program? . . . Written HAZCOM program? . . . Emergency Response Plan? . . . Formal Incident Investigation procedure? Who is responsible for implementing the safety program at your work sites? Are field supervisors required to attend company sponsored safety training? Are field supervisors required to keep training records for their employees on site? Are field supervisors required to promptly report all injuries, spills, and damage to an Crosstex rep? Do you conduct formal training for Hearing Protection ? . . . Energy Isolation (Lockout / Tagout) program? . . . Hot Work Procedure? Emergency Response? . . . New Employee Orientation program? . . . Respiratory protection program? . . . HAZCOM program? . . DOT/ OQ required training? Can you produce current records for mandatory employee safety training? Do you keep records of DOT/ OQ required training? Can you produce current certifications for welders?

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities

Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Documentation Documentation Documentation

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Corporate Review Corporate Review Corporate Review

Sub-Category Documentation Documentation Documentation

Q. # 38 39 40

QuestionScript Can you product current certifications for crane operators? Do you require that past Hot Work permits be kept for documentation purposes? Do you document hearing tests for your employees?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors

Sub-Category Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards

Q. # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

QuestionScript Is safety performance a specific item included in yearly job performance evaluation? Are all employees instructed to intervene and stop an unsafe act or condition by your supervision? Are employees held accountable if they intentionally disregard safety procedures? Are supervisors held accountable for the safety related compliance in their area of control? Is the senior management of your company committed to providing a safe work place? Can you provide a written statement of commitment from senior management? Does each employee have a copy of basic safety rules (or safety handbook) from your co.? Do you require employees to report all injuries? Do you require employees to report all environmental issues spills, releases, etc.? Do you conduct routine safety meetings with field personnel? What would you do if you had a spill of a nonhazardous substance? What would you do if you had a spill of a hazardous substance? . . . Lockout / Tagout program? . . . Hot Work Procedure? . . . Confined Space Entry Policy? . . . New Employee Orientation program? . . . Formal injury recordkeeping program? . . . Formal incident reporting policy? . . . Written Respiratory protection program? . . . Written HAZCOM program? . . .Emergency Response Plan?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Contractor Supervisors

Sub-Category Standards

Q. # 22

QuestionScript . . . Formal Incident Investigation procedure?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

Comments

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors Contractor Supervisors

Sub-Category

Q. # 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

QuestionScript Who is responsible for implementing the safety program at your work sites? Who is responsible for notifying the state One-Call? Are field supervisors required to keep training records for their employees on site? Are field supervisors required to promptly report all injuries, spills, and damage to an Crosstex rep? Do you conduct formal training for Hearing Protection ? . . . Energy Isolation (Lockout / Tagout) program? . . . Hot Work Procedure? . . . Confined Space Entry? . . . New Employee Orientation program? . . . Respiratory protection program? . . . HAZCOM program? . . . Emergency Response training? Can you produce current records for mandatory employee safety training? Do you keep records of DOT / OQ required training? Can you produce current certifications for welders? Can you product current certifications for crane operators? Do you require that past Hot Work permits be kept for documentation purposes? Do you document hearing tests for your employees?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities

Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel

Sub-Category Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Accountability / Empowerment Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards

Q. # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

QuestionScript Is safety performance a specific item included in yearly job performance evaluation? Are all employees instructed to intervene and stop an unsafe act or condition by your supervision? Are employees held accountable if they intentionally disregard safety procedures? Are supervisors held accountable for the safety related compliance in their area of control? Is the senior management of your company committed to providing a safe work place? Can you provide a written statement of commitment from senior management? Does your supervision make production more important or equal to safety at your job? Does each employee have a copy of basic safety rules (or safety handbook) from your co.? Do you know if this facility has a Spill Control and Countermeasure Plan ? Are all spills, regardless of quantity, reported? Does your company have routine safety meetings? Do you provide all required safety training for your employees? Does the company have a written Hearing Protection Policy? Has your hearing been tested in the past 12 months? Do you know what Reportable Quantity means? Does the company have a Lockout / Tagout program? What kind of locks does the company use for LO/TO? Is it always used when working on energized equipment? Does the company have a written Hot Work Procedure? Can you prove each heavy equipment (mechanized) operator is qualified to use the equipment? (Crane, Forklift, Backhoe, Man Lift, Trackhoe)

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

20 Field Personnel Standards

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel

Sub-Category Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards Standards

Q. # 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

QuestionScript Does the company have a written Confined Space Entry Policy? Is it always followed when doing confined space work? Does the company have a New Employee Orientation program? What topics are covered during the orientation? Does the company have a formal injury recordkeeping program? Have you seen an OSHA 300 form for your work crew? Does the company have a formal incident reporting policy? Are all injuries investigated and a report completed by the co.? If you are injured, will you be part of an investigation? Does the company have a written Respiratory protection program? Is a doctor visit required for all personnel before using a respirator? Does the company have a Written Hazard Communication (HAZCOM) program? Does the company have a Formal Incident Investigation procedure? Who is responsible for implementing the safety program at your work sites? Who provides your PPE? (Hard hat, steel toed shoes, eye protection/ side shields, FRC, etc.) Does each work crew have someone that can speak English? Are field supervisors required to promptly report all injuries, spills, and damage to an Crosstex rep? Do you receive training on Personal Protective Equipment? (Head, foot, hand, eye, respiratory, FRC) Do you usually sign in and complete a test when you attend safety training? What training do your company mechanized equipment operators receive?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities Responsibilities

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

38 Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Training Training Training 39 40

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel

Sub-Category Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Training Documentation

Q. # 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

QuestionScript Have you attended a class (with this company) on Hearing Protection in the past 12 months? Do you receive electrical safety awareness training? Are you trained in First Aid and CPR? Have you attended a class (with this company) on Lockout / Tagout in the past 12 months? What information is on a Lockout Tag? Does the company have a Lockout system on location right now? Have you attended a class (with this company) on Hot Work in the past 12 months? Who signs the Hot Work permit? Where is a hot work permit required? Have you attended a class (with this company) in the past 12 months on Confined Space Entry? What is the least number of people who can work in a confined space at the same time? Is a respirator fit test required for personnel who work in confined spaces? Have you attended a New Employee Orientation program with this company? Do you ever use a respirator at work? Has a doctor certified you to use the respirator? Were you fit tested for the exact respirator that you used? Have you attended a class (with this company) in the past 12 months on Hazard Communication Are there any hazardous chemicals on site? Does the company have a list of MSDS's for each chemical on site? Could you provide a record to show that you attend required safety training?

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

CEH&SR Category

Sub-Category

Q. #

QuestionScript Do you know if the company has records of Operator Qualification training that the company required you to attend? Does the company keep a written list of the chemicals used on this location? Where is it? Do you operate a crane? If so, do you have a record on site for the crane AND rigger training? Does your supervisor have a file with past Hot Work Permits? Are your medical records available to you? Field and Supervisor Interviews

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9

A
#DIV/0!

Comments

61 Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel Field Personnel TOTAL Score Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Average of all interviews 62 63 64 65

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

#DIV/0! #DIV/0!

Contractor Safety Audit Questionnaire

Legal Company Name: Mailing Address: City: State: Zip: Telephone # : Date:

Name of individual to contact regarding issues with questionnaire: Number of Company Employees: General Safety Information 1 2 3 Total Recordable Incidence Rate (TRIR) 2007 YTD: Incidence Rate of Days Away from Work Cases - 2007 YTD: Total number of Fatalities - 2007 YTD: Please provide 300 logs for the past 3 years with return of this audit form. (2004, 2005, 2006) OSHA Log 2006, (or equivalent information) 5 6 8 9 2006 Total number of OSHA Recordable Cases : 2006 Total Recordable Incidence Rate: 2006 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) from your insurance carrier: 2006 Number of Fatalities: OSHA Log 2005, (or equivalent information) 11 12 14 15 2005 Total number of OSHA Recordable Cases: 2005 Total Recordable Incidence Rate: 2005 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) from your insurance carrier: 2005 Number of Fatalities: OSHA Log 2004, (or equivalent information) 17 18 19 20 21 2004 Total number of OSHA Recordable Cases: 2004 Total Recordable Incidence Rate: 2004 Incidence Rate of Days Away from Work (DAFW) Cases: 2004 Experience Modification Rate (EMR) from your insurance carrier: 2004 Number of Fatalities:

Comments

Health, Safety & Environmental Programs 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Does your company have a written Confined Space program? Does your company have a written Electrical Safety, Non-Qualified program? Does your company have a written Fall Protection program? Does your company have a written Fire Protection program? Does your company have a written First Aid/CPR program? Does your company have a written Forklift program? Does your company have a written H2S Specific program? Does your company have a written HAZCOM program? Does your company have a written HAZWOPER/Emerg. Response program? Does your company have a written Lifting/Mobile Equip. program? Does your company have a written Lockout/Tagout program? Does your company have a written PPE Assessment program? Does your company have a written Respiratory program? Does your company maintain certification in HAZWOPER/ Emergency Reponse program? Does your company have a written Trenching/Shoring program? Does your company have a written Welding, Cutting & Hot Work program? Does your company have a written program requiring your employees to have a Job Safety Analysis (JSA) /Job Risk Analysis (JRA) before every task? * Does your company have a written requirement for on-site Emergency Response Plans? Drug and Alcohol Program 40 41 42 43 44 Does your company have a written policy regarding drug screening or testing of your employees? If yes please provide document with return of this audit form. Are your company's employees subject to Pre-Employment drug screening? Are your company's employees subject to Post Accident drug screening? Are your company's employees subject to Probable Cause drug screening? Are your company's employees subject to Random drug screening? Safety Meetings 45 47 48 Does your company have scheduled documented employee safety meetings? Does your company hold onsite (tailgate/toolbox/pre-tour) safety meetings? Is documentation from these onsite (tailgate/toolbox/pretour) safety meetings available?

YES

NO

N/A Explain

Comments

YES

NO

N/A Explain

YES

NO

N/A Explain

Incident Procedures 49 50 51 52 53 54 Does your company conduct accident/incident investigations? Are accident/incident reports reviewed by managers/supervisors? Does the company investigate and discuss near miss accidents? Does your company have a written process in place to share the lessons learned from accidents with the entire workforce? Are root cause investigation techniques/protocols used? Do you have a system in-place to track incident investigation corrective action findings to closure? Health, Safety, & Environmental (HSE) Management 55 56 Does the company have a policy manual with a clearly written HSE policy endorsed by upper management? If Yes please provide with return of this audit form. Does your company perform self-inspections of its HSE programs? Environmental Issues 57 58 59 Is your company required to have any Federal, state, or local environmental licenses or permits to perform their service(s) (example, NORM, asbestos, DOT, lead, explosives, etc.)? Does your company have a written environmental program? Does your company allocate time and resources to train all personnel in environmental and regulatory compliance? Quality Assurance/Quality Control 60 61 Does your company have a preventive maintenance program for company owned equipment? Do you conduct inspections on operating equipment (i.e. cranes, forklifts)? Miscellaneous Information 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 Does your company have a Short Service Employee (SSE) policy that identifies new employees or experienced employees new to your company or new in their position? If YES, does your SSE policy include a means to visually identify a SSE? Does your SSE policy include a mentor being assigned to the SSE? Does your company have quantifiable training requirements (job specific) for new employees or experienced employees new to their position? Does your company have a Behavioral Based Safety program in place? Does your company have a documented inventory of critical Safe Behaviors associated with your work activities? Does your company have a system to confirm compliance to your policies by your subcontactors? Does your company perform formal, documented trend analysis of Behavior Observations?

YES

NO

N/A Explain

Comments

YES

NO

N/A Explain

YES

NO

N/A Explain

YES

NO

N/A Explain

YES

NO

N/A Explain

Your Injury Specific Questions Associated To Injuries On Crosstex Operations 71 72 73 2005 Your Number of Recordable Cases on Crosstex jobsites: 2004 Your Number of Recordable Cases on Crosstex jobsites: 2003 Your Number of Recordable Cases on Crosstex jobsites:

This form is for reference only. Forms are available from the field office.

Page 1 of 1

Cold Work Permit/ Tailgate/ JSA Form (May be used for Pre-Job Tailgate/Safety Meeting/JSA)
Issued To
(Department or Company)

to perform work in

area section Work description *Date *Permit valid from to Revalidation date: Time: to *Permit valid only for the date and time stated. Revalidation good for one shift or maximum of 12 hours. Yes No N/A Initials 1. Is equipment properly isolated or blinded? 2. Is instrumentation tubing disconnected, depressured and capped? 3. Is equipment depressured and drained? 4. Have all valves been properly closed, blinded, locked and tagged? 5. Is proper electrical breaker locked, tagged, and start test tried? 6. Will gas be emitted during course of work? (If so, note in special instructions) 7. 8. 9. 10. Is test required for toxic or hazardous atmospheres? Scaffold required? Is asbestos removal required? Special instructions to be following are:

Other Permits Required Hot Work Confined Space Other In addition to required PPE the following protective equipment is required but not restricted to: Faceshield Goggles Gloves Boots Breathing Apparatus Other Permit Issued to Permit Issued By To be filled out, signed and returned to the Person-In-Charge. Yes No Initials Locks and tags (Deisolation) have been removed. Work area and equipment have been cleaned. Work has been completed. Date: Chemical Suit Ear Plugs Chemical Apron Fall Protection

1. 2. 3.

Signature:

This permit is automatically cancelled when any emergency alarm is sounded.

SAFETY IS A VALUE
PARTICIPANTS

Page 1 of 1

Cold Work Permit (May be used for Pre-Job Tailgate/Safety Meeting/JSA)

Issued To
(Department or Company)

to perform work in

area section Work description *Date *Permit valid from to Revalidation date: Time: to *Permit valid only for the date and time stated. Revalidation good for one shift or maximum of 12 hours. Yes No N/A Initials 1. Is equipment properly isolated or blinded? 2. Is instrumentation tubing disconnected, depressured and capped? 3. Is equipment depressured and drained? 4. Have all valves been properly closed, blinded, locked and tagged? 5. Is proper electrical breaker locked, tagged, and start test tried? 6. Will gas be emitted during course of work? (If so, note in special instructions) 7. 8. 9. 10. Is test required for toxic or hazardous atmospheres? Scaffold required? Is asbestos removal required? Special instructions to be following are:

Other Permits Required Hot Work Confined Space Other In addition to required PPE the following protective equipment is required but not restricted to: Faceshield Goggles Gloves Boots Breathing Apparatus Other Permit Issued to Permit Issued By To be filled out, signed and returned to the Person-In-Charge. Yes No Initials Locks and tags (Deisolation) have been removed. Work area and equipment have been cleaned. Work has been completed. Date: Chemical Suit Ear Plugs Chemical Apron Fall Protection

1. 2. 3.

Signature:

This permit is automatically cancelled when any emergency alarm is sounded.

SAFETY IS A VALUE
PARTICIPANTS

Page 1 of 1

Chain Hoist And Sling Inspection Inspection: Monthly Annual F = Failed Facility Supervisor P = Passed

LOCATION

MANUFACTURER

RATED CAPACITY

OPERATING MECHANISMS

HOOK

CHAIN

SLINGS

INITIALS

DATE

COMMENTS

Page 1 of 1

Boat and Trailer Checklist

Trailer coupler Trailer lights & electrical connector Trailer tires Overall Condition Treads Air pressure Load arrangement License plate current License plate expiration date Winch Personal flotation devices Fire extinguisher First Aid kit complete First Aid kit accessible Flare gun Horn or whistle Running lights Boat registration Rope Paddle Gas cans Gas hoses Company radio COMMENTS:

Page 1 of 1

Auto Accident Report

Insured Company Name: Name of Person Completing Form: Date of Accident: Location:
(Street or Hwy) (City and State)

Address: Phone:
(Area Code + Number)

Description (how did the accident happen?):

Was the driver distracted prior to the accident? (Work load/ Cell phone/ blackberry/ eating/ mental fatique/ etc.) Yes No If yes, explain: Police Report? Report/Incident Number: Yes No Police Department:
(Name of City Police or State Hwy Patrol)

Crosstex Vehicle:
Year: Insured Driver: Is Crosstex Vehicle Damaged: Yes No Where?
(i.e. left front; right rear; front end; rear, etc.)

Make/Model:

VIN:

Other Party Vehicle:

Year: Is Vehicle Damaged: Owners Name: Owners Work or Cell Phone:
(Area Code + Number)

Make/Model: Yes No Where?

License Plate/VIN:
(i.e. left front; right rear; front end; rear, etc.)

Phone:
(Area Code + Number)

Mailing Address:
(P. O. Box or Street Address, City, State and Zip Code)

Drivers Name & Phone if Different: Was anyone injured: Extent of Injury: Yes No Name(s): Transported to Hospital? Yes No

Witnesses:
Name: Work or Cell Phone: (Area Code + Number) Phone:
(Area Code + Number)

Auto Accident Report Fax or e-mail the completed form to the applicable Crosstex Safety Compliance Specialist within two business days of an accident.

Atmospheric Monitoring Form For Confined Space Or Hot Work Permit This form shall be securely attached and filed with the original Permit.
(COMPLETE THIS SECTION FOR ALL PERMITS TO WHICH THIS FORM IS ATTACHED) This information must be the same as on the original Work Permit.

1. Permit Type:

Hot Work Vehicle Access

Confined Space Entry Hot Tap

Excavation Other (specify):

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

2. Facility Name: 3. Work To Be Undertaken: 4. Company(s) Conducting Job: 5. Task/Entry Supervisor:

Location of Work:

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

6. Number in Work Party:

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING
Record Actual Readings Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Recheck Oxygen 19.5% - 23.5 % LEL < 10% H2S <10 ppm Other NORM
(if applicable)

Time

Initials

Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Formatted: Bullets and Numbering

AUTHORIZED ENTRANTS TO THE CONFINED SPACE

Printed Name of Entrant(s) ENTRY INTO CONFINED SPACE
Date Time Initials

(TO BE COMPLETED BY ATTENDANT)

EXIT FROM CONFINED SPACE

Date Time Initial s

ENTRY INTO CONFINED SPACE

Date Time Initials

EXIT FROM CONFINED SPACE

Date Time Initials

Page 1 of 1

Alternate Entry Procedures Certification Form For Non-Permit Required Confined Space Entry
Location: Confined Space To Be Entered: Work Description: Alternate Entry Procedures (Non-Permit Required Entry) may be utilized in rare cases where the ONLY hazard in a permit-required confined space is an existing or potential atmospheric hazard. This Checklist and Certification must be completed and meet required conditions for an entry to take place. All other confined space entries shall be made utilizing the Confined Space Permit and Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Procedures. CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST (If ANY Shaded Area is Checked a Hot Work or Confined Space Entry Permit Must be Completed. Does the space contain any potential hazardous energy sources that have not been properly isolated and 1. LOTO applied in accordance with Crosstex policies? Does the space contain ANY SERIOUS HAZARDS other than an existing or potential atmospheric hazard? (Refer to list of hazards on Confined Space or Hot Work Permit) Does the space contain a material that has the potential for engulfing the entrant? Does the space have an internal configuration such that the entrant could become trapped or asphyxiated? (i.e. inward converging walls, floor that slopes downward tapering floor, piping or obstacles that 2. could cause entrapment etc.) Does the space contain any other recognized serious safety or health hazard? (i.e. hazardous chemicals, moving equipment, NORM contaminated material, fall danger, temperatures extremes, etc.) Will the work being performed create any hazards (inside or outside the space) to which the entrant(s) will be exposed? Are there any conditions that may make it unsafe to open the cover leading into the space that cannot be 3. eliminated? Will entry into be space be necessary to obtain atmospheric monitoring results and inspect the space for 4. additional hazards? Are protective measures in place to protect personnel from falling into the space and protect employees 5. inside the space from foreign objects entering the space? Is atmospheric monitoring equipment available onsite for conducting atmospheric monitoring? (i.e.; oxygen, 6. LEL, H2S, NORM) Can continuous forced air ventilation maintain the space safe for entry? Is ventilation equipment available onsite and ready for use during alternate entry procedures? Will continuous forced air ventilation be utilized during the entry? 7. Can continuous forced air ventilation be directed to ventilate the immediate areas the employee(s) will be present in the space? Will the atmosphere within the space be continuously monitored to ensure that a hazardous atmosphere does not develop? Yes No Date: Time: AM PM

Page 1 of 2

Alternate Entry Procedures Certification Form For Non-Permit Required Confined Space Entry (continued)
INITIAL ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING RESULTS (No Forced Air Ventilation or Ventilation Shut Off For A Minimum Of 15 Minutes) Time Oxygen (19.523.5%) LEL (<10%) H2S (<10ppm) ( ) ( ) Initials Comments

ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING RESULTS (Continuous Monitoring Results With Ventilation Operating) Time Oxygen (19.523.5%) LEL (<10%) H2S (<10ppm) ( ) ( ) Initials Comments

NOTE: If hazards are encountered or the above acceptable atmospheric conditions are not met, then the space MUST be evacuated and a Confined Space Permit and Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Procedures shall be utilized. I certify that I have prepared this work in accordance with Crosstexs Alternate Entry Procedures and certify that the space meets all requirements listed above and that the atmosphere within the space has been monitored and conditions are acceptable for personnel entry. I acknowledge that this certification shall be voided if any unsafe conditions arise and subsequent entry will be performed using a Confined Space Permit and Crosstexs Permit-Required Confined Space Entry procedures. I further agree to post this certification at the entry site for employee review. Signed: Entry Supervisor Time: Date:

Page 2 of 2

REPORT ALL WORKERS COMPENSATION INJURIES TO LIBERTY MUTUAL The 1-800-CLAIMS SERVICE CENTER is open 24 hours a day including Weekends and Holidays. For efficient service, have the following information available for the Customer Service Representative

Call: 1-800-362-0000 Date/Time of Injury: Is this claim work related? Employer Name:

ExPRSCall W C Report Form / National Market

CLAIM INFORMATION
AM PM
After the call, write claim number here:

WC Policy

ID # WC 1641005166015
Yes No

Yes

No

Will the employee miss time from work?

EMPLOYEE INFORMATION
Employees Social Security Number: DOB: Home Address: (Street) Home Phone Number: Hire Date: Occupation: State Hired: Current Weekly Wage: Days Worked per Week: Employer Report No: Was Employee Paid in Full for Date of Injury: Education Level: Any Prior WC Injuries: Supervisor Name & Phone: Hourly Wage: Hours Worked per Day: Employee ID No: Hours Worked per Day: Employment Status: Was Salary Continued: How often is Employee Paid: OSHA Reference No: Employees Name:

(City) Male

(State) Female

(Zip)

Number of Dependents: Department Name:

Dependents under 18:

EMPLOYER INFORMATION
Contact Name, Telephone Number, and Title: Work Location: (Street) Mailing Address: (Street) (City) (City) (State) (State) (Zip) (Zip)

Employer Location Code:

N/A Employer SIC.: 1382 Employer FED ID: 11 3666506 Employer Code: N/A Nature of Business: Natural Gas Processing, Treating, and Transmission
Contract Number: 214-721-9323

ACCIDENT INFORMATION
Did the Accident Occur at the Work Location? Accident Address: (Street) Nature of Accident: Give a Full Description of the Accident: (Be as Complete as Possible) Yes No If No, Where Did the Accident Occur? (State) (Zip) (City)

Are Other WC Claims Involved? Person Reported To:

Yes

No

Date and Time Reported to Employer:

CONTINUED ON REVERSE SIDE ASC-3085 R2

INJURY INFORMATION
Injury Description: Date of Death (if applicable): Lost Time? Yes No Is Employee Hospitalized? Yes No

If Yes, What was First Full Day Out: Date Disability Began: OR Estimated Return to Work Date:

Date Last Day Worked: Date Returned to Work: Time Workday Began: Which Part of the Body was Injured? (e.g. Head, Neck, Arm, Leg)? Part of Body Location: (e.g. Left, Right, Upper, Lower?)

Nature of Injury: (e.g. Laceration, Bruise, Fracture) Source of Injury:

MEDICAL INFORMATION
Safeguards Provided? Yes
(Select One)

No
ER Treated and Released

Safeguards Utilized?
Hospitalized

Yes

No
Minor/Onsite No Medical Treatment

Initial Medical Treatment:

Physician/Clinic

Hospital - Name, Address, Phone:

Clinic/Doctor - Name, Address, Phone:

WITNESS INFORMATION
Were there any Witnesses? Yes No If Yes, List Names and How to Contact Them:

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS & INFORMATION

REPORT PREPARED BY
Name: Signature: Title: Phone: